SAP HR OM, PD and Training

SAP HR
OM, PD and Training

Technical Reference and
Learning Guide
P.K. Agrawal
SAP HR
OM, PD and Training
Technical Reference and Learning Guide
P. K. AGRAWAL
Program Manager
Tata Technologies Limited
Pune
New Delhi110001
2010
SAP HR OM, PD AND TRAINING: Technical Reference and Learning Guide
P. K. Agrawal
© 2010 by PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi. All rights reserved. No part of this book may
be reproduced in any form, by mimeograph or any other means, without permission in writing from
the publisher.
Warning and Disclaimer

While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book, the author and the publisher do not
guarantee the accuracy, adequacy, or completeness of any information contained in this book. Neither is any
liability assumed by the author and the publisher for any damages or loss to your data or your equipment
resulting directly or indirectly from the use of the information or instructions contained herein.
Trademark Acknowledgements
SAP, SAPconnect, SAPNet, SAPoffice, SAPscript, ABAP, Basis, ECC are registered or unregistered trademark
of SAP AG.
All product and service names mentioned in this book are registered or unregistered trademarks or service
marks of their respective companies. Use of any product or service name in this book should not be regarded
as affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark.
ISBN-978-81-203-3984-2
The export rights of this book are vested solely with the publisher.
Published by Asoke K. Ghosh, PHI Learning Private Limited, M-97, Connaught Circus, New Delhi-110001
and Printed by Rajkamal Electric Press, Plot No. 2, Phase IV, HSIDC, Kundli-131028, Sonepat,
Haryana.
This book is dedicated to
SAP consultants and users
who deserve to understand SAP much better
Table of Contents
Each chapter is rated for its importance and relevance for functional consultants (FC), users (US),
business process owners (PO) and senior managers (SM). In MR you can keep your own rating
and in UL, your understanding level. These ratings are repeated at the beginning of each chapter,
so that at the beginning of each chapter you know whether to read it, or skip it, without having
to go back to the Table of Contents.
Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

SAP Menu xv
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide xxv
Preface xxxix
ORGANIZATIONAL MANAGEMENT 1
1 Organizational Plan 3
1.1 Concepts 3 A A A A
1.2 Creating the Root Organizational Unit 5 A A A B
1.3 Creating other Organizational Units 6 A A A B
1.4 Creating Positions 7 A A A B
1.5 Assigning Persons to Positions 7 A A A B
1.6 Assigning other Holders to Positions 7 A A A B
1.7 Organizational Plan in SAP 8 A A A B
1.8 Objects, Relationships, Infotypes 9 A A A B
1.9 Validity Period 9 A A A B
1.10 Partial Assignment 10 A A A B
1.11 Priority 10 A A A B
2 Organizational Management Interfaces 11
2.1 Organization and Staffing 11 A A A B
2.2 General Structures 21 A C X X
2.3 Simple Maintenance 22 A C X X
2.4 Expert Mode 35 A A A B
2.5 Structural Graphics 41 A B C X
2.6 Actions 49 A B C X
2.7 Setting Maintenance Interface 51 A B C X
2.8 Standard Selection Screen for Reports 51 A A B C
v
vi Table of Contents

3 Organizational Unit 55
3.1 Organizational Unit Definition 55 A A A A
3.2 Organizational Unit Creation 55 A A B X
3.3 Organizational Unit Structures 56 A A B C
3.4 Organizational Unit Details 66 A A B C
3.5 Organizational Unit Reports 71 A A A B
4 Position 77
4.1 Position Definition 77 A A A A
4.2 Position Creation 77 A A B X
4.3 Staffing Status of Positions 78 A A B C
4.4 Chief Position 79 A A B B
4.5 Position Structures 79 A A B C
4.6 Position Details 86 A A B C
4.7 Position Reports 91 A A A B
5 Job 101
5.1 Job Definition 101 A A A A
5.2 Job Creation 102 A A B X
5.3 Job Structures 103 A A B C
5.4 Job Details 105 A A B C
5.5 Job Reports 106 A A A C
6 Person 109
6.1 Person Definition 109 A A A A
6.2 Person Creation 109 A A B X
6.3 Person Structures 110 A A B C
6.4 Person Details 113 A A B C
6.5 Person Reports 114 A A A C
7 User 115
7.1 User Definition 115 A A A A
7.2 User Creation 115 A A B X
7.3 User Structures 116 A A B C
7.4 User Details 118 A A B C
7.5 User Reports 119 A A B C
8 Task 120
8.1 Task Definition 120 A A A A
8.2 Task Catalog 120 A A A A
8.3 Task Creation 122 A A B X
8.4 Task Structures 123 A A B C
8.5 Task Details 125 A A B C
8.6 Task Reports 126 A A B C
Table of Contents vii

9 Work Center 129
9.1 Work Center Definition 129 A A A A
9.2 Work Center Creation 129 A A B X
9.3 Work Center Reports 130 A A B C
10 Objects 134
10.1 Objects 134 A A A A
10.2 Number Ranges 138 A A B C
11 Relationships 141
11.1 Relationship Definition 141 A A A A
11.2 Relationship Types 142 A A A A
11.3 Important Relationships 143 A A A A
11.4 Relationships (Infotype 1001) 145 A A A A
11.5 Properties of Relationships 147 A A A A
11.6 Classification of Relationships 148 A X X X
11.7 Allowed Relationships 149 A B C X
12 Structures 150
12.1 Structure Definition 150 A A A A
12.2 Evaluation Path 150 A A A A
12.3 Using Evaluation Paths in SAP Programs 151 A C X X
12.4 Important Structures 152 A A A A
12.5 Structure Reports 160 A A A A
12.6 Matrix Structures 162 A A A A
13 Infotype Features 166
13.1 Infotypes 166 A A A A
13.2 Infotypes Common Structure 167 A A A A
13.3 Infotypes Allowed for an Object Type 169 A A A A
13.4 Infotype Time Constraint 169 A A A A
13.5 Infotype Tools and Reports 170 A A A A
14 Infotypes 175
14.1 Description 175 A A A A
14.2 Department/Staff 179 A A B B
14.3 Character 181 B C C C
14.4 Planned Compensation 182 B B C C
14.5 Restrictions 185 B C C C
14.6 Vacancy 187 A A B B
14.7 Account Assignment 189 A A B B
14.8 Health Examinations 192 B B C C
14.9 Authorities/Resources 194 B C C C
14.10 Work Schedule 196 B B C C
14.11 Employee Group/Subgroup 199 B B C C
viii Table of Contents

14.12 Obsolete 200 A A B B
14.13 Cost Distribution 201 A A A A
14.14 Quota Planning 202 B C C X
14.15 Address 206 A A B C
14.16 Mail Address 208 A A B C
15 Plan Version 209
15.1 Plan Version Concept 209 A A A A
15.2 Maintaining Plan Version 210 A A B C
15.3 Setting Plan Version 211 A A B C
15.4 Active Plan Version 211 A A B C
15.5 Number Assignment for All Plan Versions 211 A B B C
15.6 Copying Plan Versions 212 A B C X
15.7 Copying Structures 213 A B C X
15.8 Comparing Plan Versions 213 A B C X
16 Planning Status 215
16.1 Planning Status 215 A A A A
16.2 Planning Cycle 216 A A A A
16.3 Planning Status in OM Interfaces 217 A A B C
16.4 Changing Planning Status 218 A A B C
16.5 Functions Permitted in Planning Status 219 A B C X
17 Authorizations 220
17.1 Authorization Concepts 220 A A A A
17.2 Authorization Main Switches 225 A B C X
17.3 Authorization Objects for Transactions 227 A B C X
17.4 Authorization Profiles 229 A B B C
17.5 Authorization Profile Definition 230 A B B C
17.6 Authorization Profiles to User Assignment 232 A B B C
17.7 Prefix for Batch Input Sessions 233 B C X X
17.8 User Data in SAP Memory 234 B B C C
17.9 Authorization Reports 234 B C C C
18 Organizational Management Integration 235
18.1 Integration with Personnel Administration 235 A A A A
18.2 Integration with Recruitment 242 A A A A
18.3 Integration with Workflow 242 A B C C
18.4 Integration with SAP Business Partners 244 C X X X
19 Database Utilities and Dialog Control 250
19.1 Database Utilities 250 B B C C
19.2 Sequence of Languages Available 255 A B C X
19.3 Search Function Settings 256 B C X X
19.4 Parameters for Staffing Schedule 257 B C X X
Table of Contents ix

19.5 Customer Enhancements (User Exits) 258 B C X X
19.6 Settings for Simple Maintenance 259 A B C C
20 Data Transfer 260
20.1 Transport Connection 260 B C X X
20.2 Locking Infotypes for Import 261 B C X X
20.3 Manual Transport 262 B C X X
20.4 Data Transfer through Sequential Files 263 B C X X
20.5 Data Distribution using ALE 264 B C X X
20.6 Data Extraction 265 B C X X
21 Organization and Staffing Interface Customizing 266
21.1 Tab Pages 266 C X X X
21.2 Columns 273 C X X X
21.3 Search Nodes 277 C X X X
21.4 Excluding Infotypes when Copying Internal Objects 281 C X X X
21.5 Backup Prompt 282 C X X X
21.6 Assignment of InfoSets to Object Types 283 C X X X
22 Data Model 284
22.1 Object Types 284 A B C C
22.2 Essential Relationships 285 C X X X
22.3 External Object Types 286 C X X X
22.4 Structure Search 286 C X X X
22.5 Object Type Key 287 C X X X
22.6 Transactions for Maintaining Object Types 288 C X X X
22.7 Infotypes Master List 289 A B C C
22.8 Infotype Time Constraints 289 A B C C
22.9 Object Types Allowed for an Infotype 291 A B C C
22.10 Subtypes of an Infotype 291 A B C C
22.11 Customer-Specific Settings for Infotypes 292 C X X X
22.12 Country-Specific Infotypes 294 C X X X
22.13 Relationships 295 A B C C
22.14 Relationship Characteristics 296 B C X X
22.15 Additional Data on Relationships 297 C X X X
22.16 Allowed Relationships 298 A B C C
22.17 External Relationships 298 C X X X
22.18 Relationship Time Constraints 299 A B C C
22.19 Relationship Abbreviation 300 B C X X
22.20 Relationships Time Constraint Depending on
Target Object Type 300 B C X X
22.21 Relationships Until Birthday 301 C X X X
x Table of Contents

PERSONNEL DEVELOPMENT 303
23 Qualifications Catalog 305
23.1 Qualifications and Requirements 305 A A A A
23.2 Qualifications Catalog 306 A A A A
23.3 Qualification Transfer 314 A A B C
23.4 Finding Objects for Qualifications 315 A A B C
23.5 Qualification Reports 318 A A B B
23.6 Scales 319 A A B B
23.7 Qualification Control Parameters 323 A A B C
24 Profiles 325
24.1 Profiles 325 A A A A
24.2 Subprofiles 326 A A A A
24.3 Profiles for Object Types 330 A A A A
24.4 Profile Matchup 332 A A A A
24.5 Reports Based on Profiles 336 A A A A
24.6 Personnel Development View 339 C X X X
24.7 Headers 340 C X X X
24.8 Headers for PD View 341 C X X X
24.9 Subprofiles Master 342 C X X X
24.10 Subprofile for an Object Type 342 C X X X
24.11 Authorization Check for Accessing Subprofiles 343 C X X X
25 Career and Succession Planning 344
25.1 Career Planning 344 A A A A
25.2 Careers 352 A B C C
25.3 Suitability 354 A B C C
25.4 User-Specific Settings for PD 356 A B C C
25.5 Succession Planning 359 A A A A
26 Development Plan 366
26.1 Individual Development Plan 366 A A A A
26.2 General Development Plan 370 A A A A
26.3 Development Plan Catalog 374 A A A A
26.4 Development Plan States 377 A B B C
26.5 Permissible Further Processing 378 A B C C
26.6 Further Processing of Development Plan Items 379 A B C C
26.7 Automatic State Management 380 A B C C
26.8 Display of Business Events in Individual
Development Plans 382 A B C C
27 Appraisals 383
27.1 Appraisal 383 A A A A
27.2 Appraisal Catalog 390 A A A A
27.3 Appraisal Category Group 393 A X X X
Table of Contents xi

27.4 Appraisal Category 396 A X X X
27.5 Appraisal Template 402 A X X X
27.6 Appraisal Criteria Group 412 A X X X
27.7 Appraisal Criteria 415 A X X X
28 Personnel Development Integration 418
28.1 Integration with Organizational Management 418 A A A A
28.2 Integration with Personnel Administration 419 A A A A
28.3 Integration with Recruitment 420 A A A A
28.4 Integration with Training and Event Management 420 A A A A
28.5 Integration with Compensation Management 421 A A A A
28.6 Integration with Strategic Enterprise Management 421 A A A A
TRAINING AND EVENT MANAGEMENT 423
29 Business Event Catalog 425
29.1 Concepts 425 A A A A
29.2 Business Event Catalog 426 A A A A
29.3 Business Event Type Relationships 430 A A A A
30 Business Event Group 432
30.1 Business Event Group 432 A A A A
30.2 Business Event Group Creation and Display 433 A A A A
30.3 Business Event Group Change 434 A A A A
30.4 Object 435 A A B C
30.5 Description 436 A A B C
30.6 Relationships 437 A A B C
30.7 Info Business Event Group 438 A B C X
30.8 Collaboration Room 438 X X X X
31 Business Event Type 439
31.1 Business Event Type 439 A A A A
31.2 Object 440 A A A A
31.3 Delivery Method 441 A C X X
31.4 Description 442 A A B C
31.5 Main Schedule Model 443 A A B C
31.6 Capacity 447 A A B C
31.7 Prices 449 A A B C
31.8 Business Event Type Info 450 A A B C
31.9 Relationships 452 A A B C
31.10 Validity Period 456 A A B C
31.11 Further Information 457 C C C C
31.12 Business Event Demand 458 A A B C
31.13 Procedure 459 A A A B
31.14 Costs 461 A A A B
xii Table of Contents

31.15 Billing/Allocation Info 463 A B C C
31.16 Web Link 464 A B C C
31.17 Knowledge Link 466 A B C C
31.18 Workflow Settings 468 X X X X
31.19 Collaboration Room 468 X X X X
31.20 Follow-up Control Options 468 X X X X
32 Dynamic Menus 469
32.1 Dynamic Menus 469 A A A A
32.2 Information Menu 472 A A B C
32.3 Tool Menu 475 A A B C
32.4 User-Specific Settings 476 A A B C
33 Resources 486
33.1 Resource Type 486 A A A B
33.2 Room 492 A A A B
33.3 Other Resource 497 A A A B
33.4 Resource Locking 502 A A B C
33.5 Resource Reservation 504 A B C X
33.6 Resource Menu 504 A A B C
33.7 Resource Reports 505 A A B B
33.8 Location 509 A A B B
34 Business Events 513
34.1 Business Events 513 A A A A
34.2 Business Event Menu 513 A A A A
34.3 Creating Business Event without Resources 515 A A A A
34.4 Creating Business Event with Resources 519 A A A A
34.5 Creating Business Events through Planning 523 A A B C
34.6 Changing Business Event 528 A A B C
34.7 Displaying Business Event 528 A A B C
34.8 Firmly Booking Business Event 529 A A B B
34.9 Cancelling Business Event 535 A A B B
34.10 Locking/Unlocking Business Event 538 A A B B
34.11 Conducting Business Event 539 A A B B
34.12 Appraising Business Event 540 A A B B
34.13 Following Up Business Event 542 A A B B
34.14 Business Event Reports 545 A A A B
35 Attendee 553
35.1 Types of Attendees 553 A A A A
35.2 Individual and Group Attendees 554 A A A A
35.3 Person 554 A A A A
35.4 Organizational Unit 554 A A A A
Table of Contents xiii

35.5 External Person/External Instructor 555 A A B C
35.6 Company 558 A A B C
35.7 Contact Person 559 A A B C
35.8 Customer 561 A A B C
35.9 Applicant 562 A A A A
35.10 User 562 A A A A
35.11 Attendee Type Control Options 562 A C X X
36 Attendance 565
36.1 Booking Priority 565 A A A B
36.2 Attendee Checks 566 A A A B
36.3 Attendance Menu 570 A A A B
36.4 Prebooking Attendance 571 A A A B
36.5 Prebooking Attendance List 573 A A A B
36.6 Prebooking Attendee for Business Event Type List 574 A A A B
36.7 Booking Attendance 575 A A A B
36.8 Booking Attendee List 579 A A A B
36.9 Booking Attendee for Business Event List 581 A A A B
36.10 Replacing Attendance 582 A A A B
36.11 Rebooking Attendance 583 A A A B
36.12 Cancelling Attendance 586 A A A B
36.13 Attendee Appraisals 589 A A A B
36.14 Attendance Reports 591 A A A B
37 Correspondence 596
37.1 Automatic Correspondence 596 A A A A
37.2 Manual Correspondence 596 A A A B
37.3 Correspondence History 601 A A A B
37.4 Activities 603 A C X X
37.5 Recipients of Notification 604 A C X X
37.6 Recipient Groups 605 A C X X
37.7 Form for a Notification 606 A C X X
37.8 Assignment of Users to User Groups 608 A C X X
37.9 Default Output Medium 608 A C X X
37.10 Default Language 609 A C X X
37.11 Priority for Workflow Correspondence 610 A C X X
37.12 Forms 610 A B C C
37.13 Wizards 614 A C X X
37.14 Mail Connection 614 A C X X
38 Training Integration 615
38.1 Organizational Management 615 A A B B
38.2 Personnel Administration 615 A A B B
xiv Table of Contents

38.3 Time Management 616 A A B B
38.4 Personnel Development 618 A A B B
38.5 Activity Allocation 618 A A B B
38.6 Cost Transfer Posting 632 A A B B
38.7 Billing 640 A B C C
38.8 Materials Management 644 A B C C
38.9 SAP Knowledge Warehouse 649 A B C C
38.10 SAP Appointment Calendar 650 A B C C
38.11 Budget Management 653 A A B B
38.12 Integration with Workflow 661 A C X X
38.13 Employee Self-Service 662 A C X X
38.14 Training General Settings 664 A C X X
39 Utilities 667
39.1 Functionality 667 A A B B
39.2 Tables and Views 677 A A B B
39.3 Implementation Guide 681 A B B B
39.4 Transactions 697 A X X X
Index 709
WORLD GOVERNMENT 723
WORLD LANGUAGE 725
GOOD GOVERNANCE 731
CITY WITHOUT TRAFFIC LIGHTS 737
SAP Menu xv
SAP Menu
Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not
number covered covered
1 OoS
2 OoS
3 OoS
4 OoS
5 OoS
6
6.1 OoS
6.2
6.2.1 OoS
6.2.2 OoS
6.2.3
6.2.3.1 3.5
6.2.3.2
6.2.3.2.1 24.1
6.2.3.2.2 24.1
6.2.3.3
6.2.3.3.1 25.1
6.2.3.3.2 25.5
6.2.3.3.3 26.1.2
6.2.3.4
6.2.3.4.1 27.1
6.2.3.4.2 27.1
6.2.3.5
6.2.3.5.1
6.2.3.5.1.1 24.4
6.2.3.5.1.2 24.5
6.2.3.5.1.3
6.2.3.5.1.3.1 23.4
6.2.3.5.1.3.2 26.2.4
6.2.3.5.1.3.3 26.1.2
6.2.3.5.1.4 27.1
6.2.3.5.1.5
6.2.3.5.1.5.1 23.2
6.2.3.5.1.5.2 26.3
6.2.3.5.1.5.3 27.2
xvi SAP Menu

6.2.3.5.1.6 25.2.5
6.2.3.5.1.7
6.2.3.5.1.7.1 24.5
6.2.3.5.1.7.2 24.5
6.2.3.5.1.7.3 25.5.7
6.2.3.5.1.7.4 23.5
6.2.3.5.1.7.5 23.5
6.2.3.5.1.7.6 23.5
6.2.3.5.1.8
6.2.3.5.1.8.1 24.5
6.2.3.5.1.8.2 24.5
6.2.3.5.1.9
6.2.3.5.1.9.1 36.14
6.2.3.5.1.9.2 23.5
6.2.3.6
6.2.3.6.1 25.4
6.2.3.6.2
6.2.3.6.2.1 23.2
6.2.3.6.2.2 25.2
6.2.3.6.2.3 24.2.1
6.2.3.6.2.4 26.3
6.2.3.6.2.5 27.2
6.2.3.6.2.6 17.4, 17.5
6.2.3.6.2.7 17.6
6.2.4 OoS
6.2.5 OoS
6.2.6 OoS
6.2.7 OoS
6.2.8 OoS
6.2.9 OoS
6.2.10 OoS
6.3 OoS
6.4 OoS
6.5 OoS
SAP Menu xvii

6.6
6.6.1
6.6.1.1 36.3
6.6.1.2 36.7
6.6.1.3 36.8
6.6.1.4 36.9
6.6.1.5 36.4.5
6.6.1.6 36.5
6.6.1.7 36.6
6.6.1.8 36.10
6.6.1.9 36.11
6.6.1.10 36.12
6.6.1.11 36.13.1
6.6.1.12
6.6.1.12.1 37.3
6.6.1.12.2 37.2
6.6.2
6.6.2.1 34.2
6.6.2.2
6.6.2.2.1 34.4
6.6.2.2.2 34.3
6.6.2.2.3 34.6
6.6.2.2.4 34.7
6.6.2.2.5 34.5
6.6.2.3 34.8, 34.9
6.6.2.4 34.10
6.6.2.5 34.13
6.6.2.6 34.12.1
6.6.2.7 34.14
6.6.2.8
6.6.2.8.1 38.6.2
6.6.2.8.2 38.7.1
6.6.2.8.3 38.5.1
6.6.2.8.4 38.5.2
6.6.2.9
6.6.2.9.1 38.11.1
6.6.2.9.2 38.11.2
6.6.2.10 38.8.1
xviii SAP Menu

6.6.3
6.6.3.1 33.6
6.6.3.2
6.6.3.2.1 33.2
6.6.3.2.2 35.5
6.6.3.2.3 33.3
6.6.3.3
6.6.3.3.1 33.2
6.6.3.3.2 35.5
6.6.3.3.3 33.3
6.6.3.4 33.4.3
6.6.4
6.6.4.1 32.2
6.6.4.2
6.6.4.2.1
6.6.4.2.1.1 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.2 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.3 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.4 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.5 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.6 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.7 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.8 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.9 36.13.2
6.6.4.2.1.10 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.11 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.12 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.13 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.14 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.15 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.16 36.14
6.6.4.2.1.17 38.11.2
SAP Menu xix

6.6.4.2.2
6.6.4.2.2.1 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.2 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.3 34.12.2
6.6.4.2.2.4 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.5 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.6 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.7 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.8 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.9 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.10 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.11 34.14
6.6.4.2.2.12 34.14
6.6.4.2.3
6.6.4.2.3.1 33.7
6.6.4.2.3.2 33.7
6.6.4.2.3.3 33.7
6.6.4.2.3.4 33.7
6.6.4.2.3.5 33.7
6.6.4.2.3.6 33.7
6.6.4.2.3.7 33.7
6.6.4.2.4 32.2.9
6.6.5
6.6.5.1 32.3
6.6.5.2
6.6.5.2.1 19.1.1
6.6.5.2.2 19.1.2
6.6.5.2.3 19.1.3
6.6.5.2.4 19.1.4
6.6.5.2.5 19.1.5
6.6.5.2.6 19.1.6
6.6.5.2.7 19.1.7
6.6.5.2.8 19.1.8
6.6.5.2.9 19.1.9
6.6.5.2.10 19.1.10
6.6.5.2.11 38.5.1
xx SAP Menu

6.6.5.3
6.6.5.3.1 17.9
6.6.6
6.6.6.1
6.6.6.1.1 31.14.1
6.6.6.1.2 31.5.4–31.5.5
6.6.6.1.3 33.8
6.6.6.1.4 14.15.2
6.6.6.1.5
6.6.6.1.5.1 29.1
6.6.6.1.5.2 29.1
6.6.6.1.6
6.6.6.1.6.1 35.1
6.6.6.1.6.2 35.1
6.6.6.1.7 30
6.6.6.1.8 31
6.6.6.1.9
6.6.6.1.9.1 33.1
6.6.6.1.9.2 33.2
6.6.6.1.9.3 35.5
6.6.6.1.9.4 33.3
6.6.6.1.10 29
6.6.6.1.11 17.4, 17.5
6.6.6.1.12 17.6
6.6.6.2 15.3
6.6.6.3 32.4
SAP Menu xxi

6.7
6.7.1
6.7.1.1
6.7.1.1.1 1.2, 2.1, 3.2
6.7.1.1.2 1.3, 2.1, 3.2
6.7.1.1.3 2.1
6.7.1.2
6.7.1.2.1 2.2
6.7.1.2.2 2.2
6.7.1.2.3 2.2
6.7.1.3
6.7.1.3.1 12.6.3
6.7.1.3.2 12.6.3
6.7.2
6.7.2.1 2.4, 3.2
6.7.2.2 2.4, 5.2
6.7.2.3 2.4, 4.2
6.7.2.4 2.4, 9.2
6.7.2.5 8.2
6.7.2.6 2.4
6.7.2.7
6.7.2.7.1 2.3
6.7.2.7.2 2.3
6.7.2.7.3 2.3
6.7.3
6.7.3.1
6.7.3.1.1 3.5
6.7.3.1.2 3.5
6.7.3.1.3
6.7.3.1.3.1 3.5
6.7.3.1.3.2 3.5
6.7.3.1.3.3 3.5
6.7.3.1.3.4 3.5
xxii SAP Menu

6.7.3.2
6.7.3.2.1 5.5
6.7.3.2.2 5.5
6.7.3.2.3 5.5
6.7.3.2.4 5.5
6.7.3.2.5 5.5
6.7.3.3
6.7.3.3.1 4.7
6.7.3.3.2 4.7
6.7.3.3.3 4.7
6.7.3.3.4 4.7
6.7.3.3.5 4.7
6.7.3.3.6 4.7
6.7.3.3.7 4.7
6.7.3.3.8 4.7
6.7.3.3.9 4.7
6.7.3.3.10 4.7
6.7.3.3.11 4.7
6.7.3.3.12 4.7
6.7.3.3.13
6.7.3.3.13.1 4.7
6.7.3.3.13.2 4.7
6.7.3.4
6.7.3.4.1 9.3
6.7.3.4.2 9.3
6.7.3.4.3 9.3
6.7.3.4.4 9.3
6.7.3.4.5
6.7.3.4.5.1 9.3
6.7.3.4.5.2 9.3
6.7.3.4.6
6.7.3.4.6.1 9.3
6.7.3.4.6.2 9.3
SAP Menu xxiii

6.7.3.5
6.7.3.5.1 8.6
6.7.3.5.2
6.7.3.5.2.1 8.6
6.7.3.5.2.2 8.6
6.7.3.5.3
6.7.3.5.3.1 8.6
6.7.3.5.3.2 8.6
6.7.3.6
6.7.3.6.1 10.1.9
6.7.3.6.2 12.5
6.7.3.6.3 12.5
6.7.3.6.4 2.5
6.7.3.6.5 13.5
6.7.3.6.6 13.5
6.7.3.6.7
6.7.3.6.7.1 12.5
6.7.4
6.7.4.1
6.7.4.1.1 15.8
6.7.4.1.2 15.6
6.7.4.2
6.7.4.2.1 2.6.1
6.7.4.2.2 13.5
6.7.4.2.3 13.5
6.7.4.2.4 10.1.8
6.7.4.2.5 10.1.8
6.7.4.2.6 15.7
6.7.4.2.7 16.4
6.7.4.3
6.7.4.3.1 13.5
6.7.4.3.2 13.5
6.7.4.3.3 13.5
6.7.4.3.4 13.5
6.7.4.4
6.7.4.4.1 18.1.1
6.7.4.4.2 18.1.4
xxiv SAP Menu

6.7.4.5
6.7.4.5.1 17.9
6.7.4.6
6.7.4.6.1 19.1.1
6.7.4.6.2 19.1.6
6.7.4.6.3 19.1.7
6.7.4.6.4 19.1.8
6.7.4.6.5 19.1.9
6.7.4.6.6 19.1.10
6.7.4.7
6.7.4.7.1 20.3
6.7.4.7.2 20.4.1
6.7.4.7.3 20.4.3
6.7.4.8
6.7.4.8.1 20.5.1
6.7.4.8.2 20.5.2
6.7.4.8.3 20.5.3
6.7.4.9
6.7.4.9.1 14.14.6
6.7.4.9.2 14.14.6
6.7.4.9.3 14.14.6
6.7.4.9.4 14.14.6
6.7.4.9.5 14.14.2
6.7.5
6.7.5.1 15.3
6.7.5.2 2.7
6.7.5.3
6.7.5.3.1 14.10.2
6.7.5.3.2 14.9.3
6.7.5.3.3 14.8.3
6.7.5.3.4 14.5.3
6.7.5.3.5 14.5.4
6.7.5.3.6 14.15.2
6.7.5.3.7 18.1.1
6.7.5.3.8 17.4, 17.5
6.7.5.3.9 17.6
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide xxv
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide

Sequence SAP Customizing Implementation Guide (ECC 6.0) Where Why not
1 OoS
2 OoS
3 OoS
4 OoS
5 OoS
6 OoS
7 OoS
8 OoS
9 OoS
10 OoS
11 OoS
12 OoS
13 OoS
14 OoS
15 OoS
16 OoS
17 OoS
18 OoS
19 OoS
20 OoS
21 OoS
22 OoS
23 OoS
24 OoS
25 OoS
26 OoS
27 OoS
28 OoS
29
29.1 OoS
xxvi SAP Customizing Implementation Guide
29.2
29.2.1
29.2.1.1
29.2.1.1.1 15.5
29.2.1.1.2 10.2.4
29.2.1.1.3 10.2.6
29.2.1.2
29.2.1.2.1 22.1–22.6
29.2.1.2.2
29.2.1.2.2.1 22.7–22.9
29.2.1.2.2.2 22.10, 22.8
29.2.1.2.2.3 22.11
29.2.1.2.2.4 22.12
29.2.1.2.3
29.2.1.2.3.1 22.13–22.19
29.2.1.2.3.2 22.20
29.2.1.2.3.3 22.21
29.2.1.2.4 19.1.11
29.2.1.3 12.2, 12.3
29.2.1.4 2.6.2–2.6.4
29.2.1.5
29.2.1.5.1 17.1.4
29.2.1.5.2 17.1.4
29.2.1.5.3 17.1.5
29.2.1.5.4
29.2.1.5.4.1 17.4, 17.5
29.2.1.5.4.2 17.6
29.2.1.5.4.3 17.8
29.2.1.5.4.4 17.1.8
29.2.1.5.4.5 17.1.8
29.2.1.6
29.2.1.6.1 19.2
29.2.1.6.2 14.1.3
29.2.1.6.3 19.3
29.2.1.7 14.7.2
29.2.1.8 17.1.7
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide xxvii
29.2.2
29.2.2.1 20.1
29.2.2.2 20.2
29.2.2.3 20.3
29.2.3
29.2.3.1 20.4
29.2.4
29.2.4.1
29.2.4.1.1 18.3
29.2.4.1.2 18.3
29.2.4.1.3 18.1.2, 18.1.3
29.2.4.1.4 18.1.1
29.2.4.1.5 18.1.1
29.2.4.1.6 18.1.1
29.2.4.1.7 18.1.1
29.2.4.1.8 18.1.5
29.2.4.2 14.7.3
29.2.4.3 14.13.2
29.2.4.4
29.2.4.4.1 18.4.2–18.4.4
29.2.4.4.2 18.4.4
29.2.4.4.3 18.4.3
29.2.4.4.4 18.4.5
29.2.4.4.5 18.4.7
29.2.4.4.6 18.4.8
29.2.5
29.2.5.1 14.6.5
29.2.5.2
29.2.5.2.1 14.10.2
29.2.5.2.2 14.10.3
29.2.5.3 14.9.3
29.2.5.4 14.8.3
29.2.5.5 14.5.3
29.2.5.6 14.5.4
29.2.5.7 14.15.2
xxviii SAP Customizing Implementation Guide
29.2.5.8
29.2.5.8.1
29.2.5.8.2 14.14.4
29.2.5.8.3 14.14.5
29.2.6 2.3
29.2.7
29.2.7.1 12.6.2
29.2.8
29.2.8.1 19.4
29.2.8.2 19.5
29.2.8.3 19.6
29.2.9
29.2.9.1 20.6.1
29.2.9.2 20.6.2
29.2.10
29.2.10.1
29.2.10.1.1 21.1.3, 21.1.5
29.2.10.1.2 21.1.5
29.2.10.1.3 21.1.5
29.2.10.2
29.2.10.2.1 21.1.3, 21.1.5
29.2.10.2.2 21.2.3, 21.2.4
29.2.10.3
29.2.10.3.1 21.3.3, 21.3.6
29.2.10.3.2 21.1.3, 21.1.5
29.2.10.3.3 21.1.6, 21.1.7
29.2.10.4 21.4
29.2.10.5
29.2.10.5.1 21.2.3, 21.2.4, 21.3.5
29.2.10.5.2 21.2.6
29.2.10.5.3 21.2.3
29.2.10.5.4 21.2.4
29.2.10.5.5 21.3.5
29.2.10.5.6 21.2.7
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide xxix
29.2.10.6
29.2.10.6.1 21.3.6
29.2.10.6.2 21.3.3
29.2.10.6.3 21.3.6
29.2.10.6.4 21.3.6
29.2.10.6.5 21.3.6
29.2.10.7 21.5
29.2.10.8 21.6
29.3
29.3.1
29.3.1.1 22.1–22.6
29.3.1.2
29.3.1.2.1 15.5
29.3.1.2.2 10.2.4
29.3.1.2.3 10.2.6
29.3.1.3
29.3.1.3.1 22.7–22.9
29.3.1.3.2 22.11
29.3.1.3.3 22.12
29.3.1.4 22.10, 22.8
29.3.1.5 22.13–22.19
29.3.1.5.1 22.20
29.3.1.6 12.2, 12.3
29.3.1.7 2.6.2–2.6.4
29.3.1.8 19.2
29.3.1.9
29.3.1.9.1 17.1.4
29.3.1.9.2
29.3.1.9.2.1 17.4, 17.5
29.3.1.9.2.2 17.6
29.3.1.9.2.3 17.8
29.3.1.10
29.3.1.10.1 19.3
29.3.1.10.2 19.1.11
29.3.1.10.3 14.1.3
29.3.1.11 17.1.7
xxx SAP Customizing Implementation Guide
29.3.2
29.3.2.1 28.2.1, 28.2.3
29.3.2.2 28.2.2
29.3.2.3 28.3.2
29.3.2.4 28.2.4
29.3.3
29.3.3.1 2.3
29.3.3.2 23.6
29.3.3.3 23.2
29.3.3.4 25.2
29.3.4
29.3.4.1 24.6–24.10
29.3.4.2 23.7
29.3.4.3 25.3
29.3.4.4 21.6
29.3.4.5 14.6.5
29.3.4.6
29.3.4.6.1 24.11
29.3.4.6.2 23.4.1
29.3.5
29.3.5.1 24.2.5
29.3.5.2 24.2.1
29.3.6
29.3.6.1 23.7
29.3.7
29.3.7.1 26.3
29.3.7.2 26.4
29.3.7.3 26.5
29.3.7.4 26.6
29.3.7.5 26.7
29.3.7.6 26.6.5, 26.8
29.3.8
29.3.8.1 28.6.1
29.3.8.2 27.2–27.7
29.3.8.3
29.3.9 Obsolete
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide xxxi
29.4 OoS
29.5 OoS
29.6 OoS
29.7 OoS
29.8 OoS
29.9 OoS
29.10 OoS
29.11 OoS
29.12 OoS
29.13 OoS
29.14 OoS
29.15 OoS
29.16 OoS
29.17 OoS
29.18 OoS
29.19 OoS
30 OoS
31 OoS
32 OoS
33
33.1 OoS
33.2
33.3
33.3.1
33.3.1.1 15.2
33.3.1.2 15.4
33.3.2
33.3.2.1 15.5
33.3.2.2 10.2.4
33.3.2.3 38.5.4
33.3.3
33.3.3.1
33.3.3.1.1 22.1–22.6
xxxii SAP Customizing Implementation Guide
33.3.3.2
33.3.3.2.1 22.7–22.9
33.3.3.2.2 22.11
33.3.3.2.3 22.12
33.3.3.2.4
33.3.3.2.4.1 22.10, 22.8
33.3.3.2.4.2 14.1.3
33.3.3.2.5 17.1.7
33.3.3.3
33.3.3.3.1 22.13–22.19
33.3.3.3.2 22.20
33.3.4
33.3.4.1 33.8.5
33.3.4.2 33.8.5
33.3.5
33.3.5.1
33.3.5.1.1 2.6.2–2.6.4
33.3.5.1.2 38.14.2
33.3.5.1.3 38.14.3
33.3.5.2
33.3.5.2.1 19.2
33.3.5.2.2 19.3
33.3.5.2.3
33.3.5.2.3.1 38.14.4
33.3.5.2.3.2 38.14.5
33.3.5.2.4 38.14.6
33.3.5.2.5 32.1.6, 32.1.7
33.3.5.2.6 38.13.1
33.3.6
33.3.6.1
33.3.6.1.1 17.1.4
33.3.6.2
33.3.6.2.1 17.4, 17.5
33.3.6.2.2 17.6
33.3.6.2.3 17.8
33.3.7 OoS
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide xxxiii
33.3.8 PA
33.3.9
33.3.9.1 19.1.11
33.3.9.2 20.4
33.3.9.3 38.14.7
33.3.9.4
33.3.9.4.1 20.1
33.3.9.4.2 20.2
33.3.9.4.3 20.3
33.3.9.5
33.3.9.5.1 38.12.1
33.3.9.5.2 38.12.2, 38.12.3
33.3.9.5.3 38.12.3
33.4
33.4.1
33.4.1.1 38.3.1
33.4.1.2 38.3.2–38.3.4
33.4.1.3 36.2.6
33.4.2
33.4.2.1 38.8.8
33.4.2.2 38.8.2
33.4.2.3 38.8.4, 38.8.5
33.4.2.4 38.8.6
33.4.2.5 38.8.7
33.4.3
33.4.3.1 38.11.3
33.4.3.2 38.11.4
33.4.3.3 38.11.5
33.4.4
33.4.4.1
33.4.4.1.1 38.7.7
33.4.4.1.2 38.7.2
33.4.4.1.3 38.7.3
33.4.4.1.4 38.7.4
33.4.4.1.5 38.7.5
33.4.4.1.6 38.7.6
xxxiv SAP Customizing Implementation Guide
33.4.4.2
33.4.4.2.1 38.5.9
33.4.4.2.2 38.5.3
33.4.4.2.3 38.5.5
33.4.4.2.4 38.5.6
33.4.4.2.5 38.5.8
33.4.4.3
33.4.4.3.1 38.6.8
33.4.4.3.2 38.6.3
33.4.4.3.3 38.6.5
33.4.4.3.4 38.6.6
33.4.4.3.5 38.6.7
33.4.5
33.4.5.1 38.10.4
33.4.5.2 38.10.3
33.4.6
33.4.6.1 37.14.1
33.4.6.2 37.14.2, 37.14.3
33.4.7 38.9
33.5
33.5.1 31.14.1
33.5.2 31.5.4–31.5.5
33.5.3 14.15.2
33.5.4
33.5.4.1 33.8.1
33.5.4.2 33.8
33.5.5
33.5.5.1 38.14.8
33.5.5.2 35.6
33.5.5.3 3.2
33.5.6 30
33.5.7 31
33.5.8 29.2
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide xxxv
33.5.9
33.5.9.1 33.5
33.5.9.2 33.1
33.5.9.3
33.5.9.3.1 33.2
33.5.9.3.2 35.5
33.5.9.3.3 33.3
33.5.9.3.4
33.5.9.3.4.1 33.4.1
33.5.9.3.4.2 33.4.2
33.6
33.6.1 31.6, 32.1.5, 36.7.2
33.7
33.7.1 31.6, 38.14.1
33.7.2 36.4.2
33.7.3
33.7.3.1 35.11
33.7.3.2 36.2.5
33.7.3.3 36.2.3, 36.2.4
33.7.3.4 36.7.4
33.7.3.5 36.1
33.7.3.6 36.2.7
33.7.4
33.7.4.1 36.12.6, 36.12.7
33.7.4.2 36.12.6
33.7.5
33.7.5.1
33.7.5.1.1 37.13
33.7.5.1.2 37.13
33.7.5.1.3 37.13
33.7.5.1.4 37.13
33.7.5.2
33.7.5.2.1 37.6
33.7.5.2.2 37.5
33.7.5.2.3 37.4
xxxvi SAP Customizing Implementation Guide
33.7.5.3
33.7.5.3.1 37.7
33.7.5.3.2 37.8
33.7.5.3.3 37.9
33.7.5.3.4 37.10, 37.11
33.7.5.4
33.7.5.4.1 37.12.1–37.12.4
33.7.5.4.2 37.12.5
33.7.5.4.3 37.12.6
33.7.5.4.4 37.12.7
33.8
33.8.1
33.8.1.1 34.8.9
33.8.1.2 34.9.8
33.8.2 34.13.6
33.8.3
33.8.3.1 Obsolete
33.8.3.2 Obsolete
33.8.3.3 23.6
33.8.3.4 27.2
33.8.3.5 Obsolete
33.9
33.9.1 12.2, 12.3
33.9.2 32.2.8
33.10
33.10.1 38.13.2–38.13.4
33.10.2
33.10.2.1 38.13.5
33.10.2.2 38.13.6
33.11 OoS
34 OoS
35 OoS
36 OoS
37 OoS
38 OoS
39 OoS
40 OoS
Reasons for why not covered xxxvii
Reasons for ‘why not covered’
Code Reason
Obsolete These functionalities are obsolete. They are replaced by other functionalities.
OoS These nodes are out of scope of this book.
PA This topic is covered in the Personnel Administration book.
Preface
If you are a consultant or user of Organizational Management, Personnel Development,

or Training and Event Management, and at some point you did not know what the
values in a particular field meant, or what would be the impact of selecting a particular
value, this book is for you. If you did not know whether a certain functionality was
supported by SAP, this book is for you. This book is also for you, if you did not know
why your system was behaving in a certain way.
This book has evolved from the difficulty that each one of us experiences in ‘Managing
SAP’. As I constantly struggled, trying to understand the concepts of SAP and explore
their linkages with other concepts, I found memory to be a major handicap. So I started
taking notes. Before long, I could not find what I had written. Then I started reorganizing
my notes. And finally I started feeling more comfortable. I knew where to write when I
learnt something new, and I could find things I was looking for.
The notes improved continuously, and then came the desire to share them with others.
Hence this book. While writing this book, I have tried to be clear, crisp and comprehensive
as possible.
This book is also meant for users of SAP, business process owners and senior managers
of companies, who have implemented, or are in the process of implementation, or are
planning to implement, or are evaluating modules of SAP HR. Their need to understand
the subject is not as comprehensive as that of functional consultants. How all these category
of readers should use this book is described below.
How to use this book
There are two ways in which you can use this book. You can use it as a learning guide,
and you can use it as a technical reference. When you use this book as a learning guide,
you have to cover it in several iterations. Each iteration is designed to enhance your
knowledge and prepare you for the next iteration.
In terms of job roles one can classify the readers as senior managers, business process
owners, users, and functional consultants. Senior managers need to know only the important
concepts, and what SAP can do for them. BPOs need to know more of SAP concepts and
have a good idea of how to perform different tasks in SAP. Users need to have a thorough
understanding of different tasks they have to perform in SAP and concepts underlying
them. Functional consultants need to know everything, or at least everything important.
xxxix
xl Preface
In the table of contents, each topic is classified in terms of relevance and importance for
each category of user. Each topic is given A, B, C, or X rating for each category of user.
During each iteration, you can decide the role and importance level you intend to cover.
You can select the role you are going to refer to in an iteration, based on your job role,
but that is not essential. For example, if you are going to be a user of SAP, but do not
know anything about SAP, you may select senior manager role in your first iteration.
Having learnt important concepts, you may select BPO role in the next iteration. Finally
you may select user role. Also, once you become a proficient user, you may go through
the book from the perspective of a functional consultant. These ratings are repeated at the
beginning of each chapter so that at the beginning of each chapter itself you know whether
to read it, or skip it, without having to go back to the Table of Contents.
In the table of contents, I have left two blank columns. Although I have given an importance
rating to each topic, you can decide the importance based on your requirements. For
example, if Activity Allocation is not applicable to you, you may mark it as not relevant
for you. Similarly, you can decide the importance rating. There is nothing sacrosanct
about the rating given by me. You may note this rating in the blank column ‘MR’, meaning
my rating. As you read a topic, you will achieve a level of understanding. You can record
it in the column ‘UL’, meaning understanding level. You may use A/B/C/X, or any
other rating scale. After you complete an iteration, these columns will help you decide,
which topics to revisit.
When you are reading this book, you will need to work on the system. When you are
reading only the important concepts as senior manager, it may be possible to read the
book without hands-on experience. However, as you go deeper and deeper, working on
the system will become more and more necessary.
If you are using this book as a technical reference, apart from the table of contents and
index, you can also locate the relevant material by using ‘SAP Menu’, and ‘SAP Customizing
Implementation Guide (IMG)’. Expanded tree of both the SAP menu and IMG (ECC 6.0) is
given after the table of contents. Once you find the node in these structures, you will be
guided to the relevant chapter. If that node is not covered in the book, that is also
mentioned along with the reason for not covering it. In such cases you have to look for
information elsewhere; this book will not help you.
You can also use the structure of this book to keep your discoveries in an organized
way. You can maintain a Word or Excel document where you record your discoveries
either against page numbers or chapter numbers. You can also share your discoveries
with me (agrawal.prem@gmail.com) and help make this book even more useful in future
editions.
You can also use the structure of this book for guiding your discussion with the users and
recording their input. That document will finally become the configuration manual.
Preface xli
Acknowledgements
I am deeply indebted to my employer, my colleagues (particularly M/s Anamitra Basu,
D.V. Prasad, Sanjay Lavlekar, Sandeep Dalvi and Joyeeta Dasgupta), and my family, who
contributed in different ways to make this book possible. I express my sincere gratitude
to my publisher, PHI Learning, for putting their trust in me and for improving the
presentation of this book.
Individual social responsibility
There is no doubt that we must excel in our chosen profession. But our responsibility
does not end there. Indeed, we have a greater responsibility of making the world a better
place to live in—to address the challenges the world faces, to analyze, to find solutions,
to share, to network, and to make a difference. You may have wondered about the
diagram on the cover page; it is a plan for a city without traffic lights. There are four
articles at the end of this book. You will perhaps find them interesting to read. In
particular, think about Samay Daan. You are welcome to get in touch with me
(agrawal.prem@gmail.com). Let us make a difference together. It is our Individual Social
Responsibility.
P. K. AGRAWAL
Organizational Management
1 Organizational Plan
1.1 CONCEPTS
Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

Consultant Process Owner Management Rating Level
A A A A
Organizations are built for serving specific purposes. In order to do so, they perform
several activities. To perform these activities, organizations structure themselves. An
organization is divided into parts, each of which are assigned specific responsibilities.
These parts may be further subdivided into smaller parts with more specific responsibilities.
The organizational plan given below is a typical representation of an organization’s structure.
ABC
Consultant
SAP SAP
Consulting Education
Edu.
HR FI/CO MM PP PS PM Basis ABAP
Coord
3
4 SAP HR OM, PD and Training: Technical Reference and Learning Guide
Organizational unit
Organizational unit represents a functional unit in an enterprise. The entire organization
is divided into organizational units. Organizational units form a hierarchy called
organizational structure, where the lower level organizational units report to the higher
level organizational units. An enterprise often has different names for organizational
units at different levels, e.g. line of business (LOB), division, department, section, etc. In
SAP, all these are called organizational units.
Organizational structure
The organizational structure of an enterprise is a hierarchy of organizational units, where
the lower level organizational units report to the higher level organizational units.
Organizational plan
In SAP terminology, an organizational structure has only organizational units in it.
Organizational plan is a broader structure which includes organizational structure, staffing
of organizational units by positions and persons and assignment of jobs and tasks to
organizational units, positions and persons. An organizational plan can include the
following:
Ø An organizational structure
Ø Staff assignments
Ø A reporting structure
Ø A job index
Ø A work center plan
Ø A task catalog
Position
In any organizational unit, the work is done by persons. But when you are planning an
organization, you do not know who the persons would be. So you plan positions, which
are later filled by employees. If an employee leaves, the position becomes vacant, and can
be filled by another employee. Positions can also be filled by non-employees, e.g. contractors’
employees.
Person
SAP uses the term person for an employee. In an organization, persons occupy positions
and perform the duties assigned to that position.
Other holders of position

SAP recognizes that sometimes your positions may be occupied by people, who are not
your employees. SAP therefore permits Business partners, External persons, Central persons
and Users to occupy positions, and displays these position holders in the organizational
plan in the same way as your employees.
CHAPTER 1 Organizational Plan 5
1.2 CREATING THE ROOT ORGANIZATIONAL UNIT

A A A B
You start creating an organizational structure in SAP by creating the root organizational
unit. This is done using transaction PPOCE. When you run transaction PPOCE, the system
will propose a validity period for the root organizational unit.
You can modify the validity period if you want. Once you accept it, the system shows the
following screen.
In the left part of this screen you can search and select an object, e.g. organizational unit,
position, etc. and double-click it to transfer it to the right side to work on. At this point,
you are creating a new organizational unit, so this functionality is not required. The
system shows a ‘New organizational unit’. You enter a short description (ABC Consult)
and a long description (ABC Consulting) for the organizational unit. Validity dates that
you entered in the initial screen are shown here. You can modify them if you want. You
go to the tab, ‘Account assignment’ and enter cost center along with controlling area. In
address tab you enter city and country. You then save. The root organizational unit is
created. Note that the entry of cost center, controlling area, city and country is mandatory.
1.3 CREATING OTHER ORGANIZATIONAL UNITS

A A A B
To create other organizational units, you run transaction PPOME and select the organiza-
tional unit you want to work on. To create an organizational unit under the selected
organizational unit, you click . The system asks you whether you want to create an
organizational unit, or a position.
You select the organizational unit. The system creates a ‘New organizational unit’ under
the root organizational unit. You select the ‘New organizational unit’ by double-clicking
it, enter its short and long name, validity period, account assignment and save.
You can create other organizational units either by starting from a higher level organizational
unit, and creating a lower level organizational unit by clicking , or by selecting the
same level organizational unit and clicking .
1.4 CREATING POSITIONS

A A A B
You create positions under organizational units. Select the organizational unit under which
you want to create a position, click , and double-click the relationship ‘Incorporates
Position’. A ‘New position’ is created. You enter mandatory data, e.g. account assignment
and address, and save. A position is created.
1.5 ASSIGNING PERSONS TO POSITIONS

A A A B
Persons are hired in Personnel Administration using transaction PA40. They are also
assigned positions there. This creates the link between positions and persons.
1.6 ASSIGNING OTHER HOLDERS TO POSITIONS

A A A B
A position may be held by people other than persons (employees). To assign other holders
to a position, you select the position and click .
Select the type of the object and the object, who will hold the position. You need to create
the object first, before assigning it.
1.7 ORGANIZATIONAL PLAN IN SAP

A A A B
SAP provides standard reports to display organizational plan. If you want to see only the
organizational units in the organization, you can use transaction S_AHR_61016493. If you
also want to see positions along with organizational units, you can use transaction
S_AHR_61016494.
Key observations
Business uses different terms for parts of organization, e.g. business unit, plant, division,
department, section, etc. SAP uses a single term, ‘organizational unit’. This is necessary
because business does not use standard terminology, and SAP must use terminology
which would make sense in diverse environments.
Different organizations have different number of levels in their organization. Some
organizations are flat while some are deep. SAP lets you create your organizational structure
as flat or as deep as you want. There is no limit on the number of levels in your
organizational structure.
Usually business is accustomed to a top-down organizational plan as displayed in
chapter 1.1 and the users generally demand that the same be provided from SAP. This
can be done using structural graphics. However, you may note that the organizational
plan display of SAP is much more compact than the traditional organizational plan
display. It represents large structures which is not possible in the traditional top-down
view. It is recommended that the users be made aware of the benefits of the left-to-right
representation of the organizational plan.
1.8 OBJECTS, RELATIONSHIPS, AND INFOTYPES

A A A B
Organizational Management is based on the concept of objects and relationships.

Organizational unit, position, person, cost center are different types of objects. These
objects are related to each other through relationships, thereby forming structures. SAP
also lets you keep additional characteristics for objects in infotypes.
1.9 VALIDITY PERIOD

A A A B
An enterprise’s organizational plan is constantly undergoing change. For this reason,

Organizational Management allows you to modify the organizational structure, staff
assignments as well as other objects and structures from specified dates. You can see the
modified organizational plan after the specified date, as well as the original organizational
plan which existed before the specified date. The specified date may be in future, which
means that you can also update changes which will take place in future.
1.10 PARTIAL ASSIGNMENT

A A A B
If you have a productwise organization, but a sales manager in an area sales office looks
after multiple products, how do you represent it? In SAP, you can assign a percentage to
a relationship. Thus, a position may be assigned 60% to one organizational unit and 40%
to the other. SAP lets you maintain a percentage for each relationship. By default this
value is 100%, but it can be less than, or even greater than, 100%. You can see this field
when you maintain infotype 1001 in expert mode. You can also see this field in some of
the other interfaces.
1.11 PRIORITY

A A A B
If an organizational unit has ten positions, you may want them listed in a certain sequence.
The relationship infotype has a priority field, which is used for this purpose. The system
automatically generates the priority number, but you can also maintain it manually for
a relationship record. You may also change the sequence in structural display. The system
will automatically make a change in the priority value so that next time they are displayed
in the modified sequence.
Organizational
2 Management Interfaces
SAP provides multiple interfaces for maintaining your organizational plan. You can use
the interface you like most. No matter which interface you use, the data is updated in a
common database, and is shown in all the interfaces.
2.1 ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING

A A A B
SAP provides multiple methods of creating an organizational plan. You can create
each object separately using ‘Expert Mode’ and create relationships between them.
Alternatively, you can use the ‘Organization and Staffing’ interface where you create,
change and display an organizational plan using transactions PPOCE, PPOME and PPOSE.
The Organization and Staffing interface presents a more compact view of the organizational
plan. In this interface you can search and select objects, display/modify structures and
display/modify an object in the structure. This chapter explores various features of this
interface. When you execute transaction PPOME, you would see the following screen
which has five parts.
11
Area Quadrant Purpose
Search area Left-top You can search for individual organizational objects
such as organizational units, persons, jobs,
positions, tasks and users according to search
functions. The results of this search are displayed
in the Selection area.
Selection area Left-bottom You can expand or contract structures and select
an object in the Selection area, which can be trans-
ferred to the Overview area by double-clicking it.
Preview period area Right-topmost You can see and set the preview period here.
Overview area Right-top You can see different structures of the selected
object in the Overview area, and select any
displayed object to see its details in Detail area.
Detail area Right-bottom This area displays information on the object selected
in the Overview area. This information can be
edited and saved.
CHAPTER 2 Organizational Management Interfaces 13
2.1.1 Search Area

When you execute transaction PPOME, left-top part of the screen is the search area,
where you decide the starting object type, e.g. organizational unit, position, etc. You then
use one of the multiple search methods to select the objects, which are shown in the
selection area.
Free search
In free search the system gives you the infoset query screen, where you can specify
different object characteristics, and the system finds objects matching your selection criteria.
Search term
You can search for an object by specifying either name or abbreviation. You can also
search using the entry *. If necessary, you can start another search for the same object
type and then choose to add the new hits to the earlier results in the selection
area.
Structure search
If you choose structure search, the system gives you root organizational units in selection
area which you can expand to reach the objects you desire.
Object history
Search variant
In the search area you can create search variants, so that you can reuse search criteria you
have grouped together, or hits. You can add a search variant, select from search variants,
and delete search variant using .
Deleting all search variants

You can use transaction DELETE_OM_SETTINGS to reset user-specific settings in the
object manager.
2.1.2 Selection Area

When you specify the criteria in the search area, the system selects all the objects that
meet the selection criteria and exist on the key date and preview period you have set.
These are displayed in the selection area. In the selection area you select the object. If the
object is not visible, you can expand the organizational plan to reach it.
Columns in selection area

You can also decide which columns to display in the object list by clicking .
Hiding the search area

You can hide the search area and increase selection area by clicking . You click the
same icon to display the search area again.
Transferring the object to overview area

After selecting the object, you can select the view to be transferred to the overview area
by doing a right click. The view shown in bold is the default view which can be transferred
by double-clicking.
You can also drag an object (e.g. position) and drop it under the other object (e.g.
organizational unit) to create a relationship.
Object manager
Search area and selection area together is called object manager. You can either hide
completely or display the object manager, so that the other screen areas get correspondingly
bigger or smaller. To do that, choose Settings â Show Object Manager/Hide Object
Manager.
2.1.3 Preview Period Area
Key date
Every time you logon, the current date is set as the key date. You can change the key
date. Data valid on the date you have selected is displayed. If you create an organizational
unit or position in the overview area, the validity of the object and the assignment begins
with the key date set. Similarly, if you change any data in detail area, the change is
effective from the key date. Before the key date, the data remains what it was before the
change. If you have activated Query time period (Settings â Query Time Period/Create
Several Objects), the system asks you to specify the validity period of objects, relationships
and infotypes instead of using key date as the start date.
Preview period
You see the organizational plan on the key date. You may also want to see if any changes
are going to occur in the near future. SAP lets you specify a preview period. When you
logon initially, a preview period of three months is set and all changes to data that
happen in this period are displayed. You can change this preview period. Next time you
logon, the preview period which you selected is set. The organization and staffing interface
displays data for the preview period. The key date and the preview period are displayed
at the top-right quadrant of the screen . If the validity period
of an object or relationship is entirely outside the preview period, that object or relationship
is not shown. The search function also finds only those objects which are valid during the
preview period.
Setting the key date and the preview period

The key date and the preview period can be set by clicking .
You can either specify a start date and a time period, or a start date and an end date. Start
date is particularly important because all objects and relationships created using this
interface are created from this start date. The period you set here is used in different
areas of the interface.
Deleting the key date and the preview period

You can use transaction DELETE_NF_SETTINGS to reset the last object selection and the
preview period. The system then shows default preview period, current
date + three months.
Use of preview period in search area

The preview period is used to select the objects in the search area. If the validity period
of an object is entirely outside the preview period, that object is not shown in the search
area.
Use of preview period in selection area

The objects, selected as per search criteria in the search area, are displayed in the selection
area. The selected objects are also filtered for the preview period. If you are selecting the
organizational units in your enterprise, and an organizational unit is not valid in the
preview period, that organizational unit is not shown.
Use of preview period in overview area

You see the structural view of an object in the overview area. This view shows only those
objects and relationships which are either fully or partly valid during the preview period.
Also, if you create an object or relationship in the overview area, the key date is the start
date of the object or the relationship. The end date of the object is 31.12.9999 and the end
date of the relationship is the lower of the end dates of the objects between which the
relationship is being created.
Use of preview period in detail area

The detail area shows the infotype data of the selected object. This data can change with
time. Thus, there may be multiple records for the same infotype. By default, the detail
area shows the data on the key date. You can, however, access data for other periods as
well.
Query time period

If you want the system to explicitly query the time period whenever you create an object
or relationship, you can set it through Settings â
Query Time Period/Create Several
Objects.
2.1.4 Overview Area

From the selection area, you transfer the selected organizational unit to the overview
area. The overview area shows the structure of the selected object. There may be multiple
structures, which display different information about the selected object. You can also
modify the structures using the icons in the overview area. Some of the important icons
are explained below:
You can use these arrows to move back and forth just like internet explorer.
You can click this icon to see the legend of icons.
Objects whose validity, or assignment to other objects, begins only in

the preview period set, are indicated by a in the selection area. Objects,
whose validity ends in the preview period, are indicated by a .
You can use this icon to set the period for which you are viewing the
organizational plan.
Overview area displays the structure of an object. For an object, there
can be multiple structures. You can use this icon to change the structure
being displayed.
You can use this icon to assign an existing object, e.g. organizational
unit or position, to the selected object.
You can use this icon to delimit the validity of an object, or its relationship
with higher level object.
You can use these icons to change the order in which objects are displayed.
If you want the change to be permanent, you should save the data after
making changes.
If your current view shows only a part of the organizational plan, you
can move up one level to show a larger part of the organizational plan.
SAP shows different views of the organizational plan by using different

evaluation paths. You can see the evaluation path by clicking this icon.
In the evaluation path window you can right-click to switch on, or switch
off, the relationship key and text. You can also see the technical evaluation
path by clicking .
If you want to see more data about the objects in the organizational
plan, you can click this icon to add columns.
Creating an object
You can create organizational objects (organizational units, positions, etc.) in the overview
area and assign them to the objects that already exist.
Copying an object
You can create a new object by copying an object which already exists.
Assigning an object
To assign an existing object in the structure displayed in the overview area, search for the
object in search area, select the object in selection area, drag the object to the overview
area and drop in the structure at the object under which you want it to be. In case of list
display, drop it in the field in which it should be.
Moving an object
In the overview area, select the object that you want to move and drag it to the object to
which you want to assign it. The old relationship is delimited and the new relationship
is created.
Repositioning an object
In the overview area, select the object that you want to reposition and move it up or
down in the hierarchy using .
Assigning/moving using a pushbutton
As an alternative to assigning or moving with drag and drop, you can also use the
pushbutton. In the overview area, select the object that you want to assign to another
object and choose . The Restrict allowed values dialog box appears. Search for the
object that you want to assign, select it and then choose .
Terminating/deleting objects or assignments

Select the object which you want to terminate/delete or whose assignment you wish to
delete. Choose if you want to terminate, or if you want to delete. Choose
whether you want to terminate/delete the object or the assignment.
If you want to terminate, enter the date from which the object/assignment is to be terminated
in the dialog box.
Undoing/recreating changes
If you have already made changes to data in the overview area, but have not yet saved
them, you can use to undo change and to recreate them. These icons appear if
you make change or undo change.
Confirmation prompt
Once you have carried out a specified number of changes to data (specified in
view T77OMFRAMC), a dialog box appears asking whether you want to save these
changes. This helps you avoid losing data.
Configuring columns
You can decide which columns should be displayed in the overview area by clicking
.
Switching maintenance interfaces

If you are in the Organization and Staffing interface and you choose Settings â Maintenance
Interface, the system takes you to the Simple Maintenance interface.
2.1.5 Detail Area

In the detail area, you see the details of the object selected in the overview area.
Hiding/displaying detail area

You can click to hide the detail area, so that you can enlarge the overview area. You
can display the detail area again by clicking .
Detail area tabs

The detail area has several tabs. These tabs and their contents depend on the type
of object selected, whose details are being shown or edited. These are specified in
view T77OMTABUS for each type of object.
Validity period
The validity period concept is common to all types of objects. Detail area shows data
about an object which is stored in infotypes. An object can have several records in an
infotype, one for each period. The detail area shows the data on the key date, but you can
access other records as well. In detail area there are two modes of displaying validity; key
date mode and period mode.
Key date mode
The key date mode shows the date for which data is being shown .
If there is a single record during the preview period, the system shows . If
there are multiple records during the preview period, the system shows .
If you make any changes, they are made from the ‘Valid On’ date. The old record is
delimited to one day before the new date. If you click , the system switches to period
mode.
Period mode
In the period mode, the system shows the validity period of the displayed record
. You can click to see all the periods, and select the validity
period for which you want to see the record. You can also use to navigate
to first, previous, next or last record so as to see records of different periods. If you want
to change data, you can specify the period and change the data. Validity of existing
records is automatically adjusted. You can click to switch to the key date mode.
2.2 GENERAL STRUCTURES

A C X X
In Organization and Staffing, the system gives you predefined views which have predefined
evaluation paths. You can use transaction PPSC to create general structures where you
specify the evaluation path. Transaction PPSM can be used to change general structures
and transaction PPSS to display them.
2.3 SIMPLE MAINTENANCE

A C X X
2.3.1 Initial Screen

Simple maintenance is similar to Organization and Staffing. Organization and Staffing
has richer features than simple maintenance, but some people prefer simple maintenance,
and SAP continues to support it. You can create a new organizational structure using
transaction PPOC_OLD, modify it using transaction PPOM_OLD and display it using
transaction PPOS_OLD. All objects you create in Simple Maintenance automatically receive
active status. When you run transaction PPOM_OLD, you see the following screen.
Show/hide object manager

The left-top and left-bottom quadrants are search area and selection area of object manager.
Here you select the starting organizational unit, whose structure you want to see or
maintain. You can hide or display the object manager, by choosing Settings â
Show
Object Manager/Hide Object Manager.
Set plan version

You can set the plan version by choosing Settings â
Plan version …, or set active plan
version by choosing Settings â
Active plan version.
Set editing period

The editing period is equivalent to the preview period in Organization and Staffing. You
can set the editing period either on the initial screen, or by choosing View â
Editing
period.
View
You select the view you want to display or maintain. Depending on the view chosen, you
see different structures. These views are similar to the views in Organization and Staffing.
In the overall view you can work with tasks, standard tasks, workflow tasks, workflow
templates and rules, whereas in the human resources view you can work only with tasks
and standard tasks.
Main screens
In Simple Maintenance, you work with three main screens: Organizational Structure,
Staff Assignments and Task Profile. You can change from one to the other using icons or
menu item Goto. Each of these screens offers different editing functions.
Screen Function
Organizational Structure Build up and maintain the organizational structure for your
organizational plan.
Staff Assignments Create staff assignments by creating jobs and positions, and
by assigning holders to positions.
Task Profile Create, maintain, and view task profiles for jobs, positions
and organizational units.
2.3.2 Maintaining Organizational Plan

You use Simple Maintenance to display or maintain organizational plan. In doing so, you
create objects (organizational units, positions, jobs, tasks, etc.), create relationships, delete
or delimit objects or relationships, etc. You change views to see staffing plan or task
assignment. You also navigate to other screens, e.g. ‘Maintain task catalog’. Some of the
tasks you can perform are explained below.
Displaying tree structure

When you click or , you see the tree structure of the specified object in the
specified view.
Switching between display and change modes

You can switch between display and change modes by clicking .
Changing the selected item

You can change the selected item by clicking .
Displaying the selected item

You can display the selected item by clicking .
Setting editing period

You can set editing period by clicking .
Creating an object
You can create an object under the selected object by clicking . Both the object and its
relationship with selected object are created. If multiple types of objects, or relationships,
can be created, the system prompts you to choose from the possible options.
Reassigning an object
If you want to reassign an object from one object to another, you click or choose
Edit âReassign. For example, you can move a position from one organizational unit to
another.
Changing sequence of objects

Objects in an organizational plan always appear in the same sequence. If you want to
change this sequence, click .
Refreshing the screen

You can click to refresh the screen to show current status of data.
Expanding the tree structure

You can click to expand the tree structure below the selected object.
Collapsing the tree structure

You can click to collapse the tree structure below the selected object.
Displaying structural graphics view

You can click to see the selected object and the tree structure below it in the structural
graphics view.
Deleting assignment
You can delete assignment of the selected object with the higher level object by
clicking .
Displaying organizational structure

Organizational structure, Staff assignments and Task profile are sub-views of basic data
view. You can switch from other views to the organizational structure view by choosing
Goto â Organizational structure.
Displaying staff assignments

You can display the staff assignments view by clicking , or by choosing
Goto â Staff assignments.
Displaying task profile

You can display the task profile view by clicking , or by choosing
Goto â Task profile.
Assigning an existing object

You can assign an existing object to the selected object by choosing Edit â Assign. You
select the type of object, and in some cases, the relationship.
Maintaining chief position

You can display, create, delimit or delete the chief position of an organizational unit by
choosing Edit â Chief position.
Delimiting object/relationship
If you want to bring forward the end date of an object or relationship, you may do so by
â
choosing Edit Delimit. If an object is delimited, its relationships are also delimited. You
may also extend the end date.
Deleting object/relationship
If you want to delete an object or relationship, you may do so by choosing Edit â Delete.
If an object is deleted, its relationships are also deleted.
Renaming organizational units/positions

You can rename organizational units or positions by selecting the object to be renamed
and choosing Edit â
Change â
Rename.
Changing a position holder from user to person

If a position is held by a user and that user is an employee (user id of an employee is
maintained in infotype 0105 subtype 0001), you can change the holder from user to
person by selecting the user and choosing Edit â
Change â
Replace user.
Changing staffing percentage of a holder

A holder (business partner, central person, person or user) can hold a position fully or
partly. If you want to change the staffing percentage, select the holder and choose
Edit â Change â
Staffing percentage.
Displaying reporting structure

You can display reporting structure by choosing Goto â Reporting structure.
Displaying account assignments
You can display account assignments by choosing Goto â Account assignment.
Displaying further attributes
You can display further attributes by choosing Goto â Further attributes.
Maintaining job profiles
If you choose Goto âJob profiles, the system takes you to job profile screen. You can
create or modify a job there.
Maintaining tasks
If you choose Goto â
Task maintenance, the system takes you to task screen (transaction
PFTC). You can create, modify or delete a task here. However, it is recommended that
you maintain tasks in task catalog.
Maintaining roles
If you choose Goto â Role maintenance, the system takes you to role maintenance screen
(transaction PFCG).
Displaying/hiding object data

You can add or remove information columns for displayed objects through menu item
View.
Viewing color legend

SAP displays different objects in different colors. You can see the color legend by choosing
View â
Color legend.
Showing/hiding object manager

You can show/hide object manager (search and selection area) by choosing
Settings â
Show Object Manager/Hide Object Manager.
2.3.3 Views
Like Organization and Staffing, Simple Maintenance can also be used to maintain multiple
views of the organizational plan.
Basic data view

In the basic data view you can maintain organizational structure, staff assignments and
task profiles. In the overall view, you can work with tasks, standard tasks, workflow
tasks, workflow templates and rules, whereas in the human resources view, you can
work only with tasks and standard tasks.
Organizational structure view shows relationships between organizational units. It also
shows chief position of the organizational unit.
Staff assignments
Staff assignments view shows organizational structure, positions in the organizational
units and holders of positions. In this view you can also create positions and assign
holders. If you want to make changes in organizational structure, you should do so in
organizational structure view.
Task profile
From the staff assignments view, you can select an object (usually position) and come to
task profile. The system shows the tasks for the object, including those assigned through
job. Here you can select the object and assign to it task, task group, role, responsibility
or job. You can also delimit or delete an assignment.
Reporting structure
Usually an organizational unit has a chief position and all other positions in the
organizational unit report to this chief position. However, some organizations have a
more complex reporting structure and they directly define position to position reporting.
This method gives more flexibility but the enterprise has to maintain both organizational
structure and the reporting structure.
If you select a position and click , the system shows you the positions in that
organizational unit which can report to the selected position.
You select the position which reports to the elevated position and save. The system
creates the reporting relationship between them.
You can also display the reporting structure using transaction S_AHR_61016528 by
specifying evaluation path O-S-PHIE.
This evaluation path shows reporting structure within an organizational unit. You can
also maintain reporting structure between positions in Expert mode and display the
complete reporting structure using transaction S_AHR_61016528 with evaluation path S-S.
Evaluation path S-S shows reporting structure between positions without reference to
organizational units.
Account assignment
You can use this view to create cost center assignment and cost distribution. You can also
change account assignment features.
If you select an object and click , you can assign it a cost center.
If you select an object and click , you can specify how the cost of the
object should be distributed.
If you select an object and click , you can specify the

account assignment features.
If you want to change the inherited values, click .

Further characteristics
You can use this view to edit further characteristics of organizational units and positions.
You can do quota planning here by clicking .

If you select an organizational unit, and click , you will see the following
window.
Here you can set the department and staff indicators for an organizational unit. You can
also define its work schedule.
If you select a position, and click , you will see the following window
where you can set vacancy and other attributes for a position.
2.4 EXPERT MODE

A A A B
Expert mode is ideal for users who clearly understand the concepts of objects, relationships
and infotypes. The biggest advantage of the expert mode is that you explicitly specify the
validity period of objects, relationships and infotypes. Another advantage is that you can
build whichever relationship you want without looking for the view in which to create
it. All transactions in the expert mode, except transaction PFCT, call the same program
and work in the same way. The only difference is in the type of starting object. Transaction
PP01 is the most general because here you can specify the object type. Transaction PP01_DISP
is the display version of transaction PP01. When you run transaction PP01, you get the
following screen.
Using different plan versions

Usually you work in current plan version 01. How to use other plan versions is discussed
in chapter 15.
Maintaining different types of objects

In transaction PP01, you can specify the object type on which you want to work. In
contrast, transactions PO10, PO03, PO13 and PO01 have specified object types. This is the
only difference between them and PP01. All these transactions have identical behavior
and they call the same program.
Specifying object id
If you are maintaining an existing object, you specify the object id. You are not expected
to remember object ids, just select the object by clicking . If you are creating a new
object, you leave the object id field blank. If you are using external number range, you
specify the object id while creating the object as well.
Using possible infotypes

When you specify an object type in transaction PP01, all the infotypes that can be maintained
for that object type are shown. These include infotypes which are required for other
applications, e.g. appraisal, shift planning, etc. Hence, you are not expected to maintain
all of them. SAP stores objects in infotype 1000 and relationships in infotype 1001. That
is why you see Object and Relationships in the list of infotypes.
Working with existing infotypes

The infotypes that exist for an object are identified by a green tick in the Exists column.
If an infotype exists, you may delimit, change or delete it. If you copy or create another
infotype record, when an infotype record already exists, the previous infotype record will
get delimited automatically (depending on the time constraint).
Selecting an infotype
You select an infotype you want to maintain by clicking the button on the left side of the
infotype name. The selected infotype is shown in a different color. Selecting another
infotype automatically deselects the previously selected infotype.
Specifying validity period

When you create an infotype, you need to specify its validity period. Even when you
want to display an infotype, you can specify the period and the system will show you
records which belong to that period. One of the key advantages of creating an infotype
in expert mode is that you explicitly specify the validity period.
Switching between display and change modes

You can switch from change mode to display mode, or vice versa, by clicking .
Creating an object
To create an object, you leave the object id field blank, select infotype ‘Object’ and click
. If you are using external number range, you specify the object id while creating the
object as well.
Copying an object
You can also create an object by copying an existing object. To do so, enter plan version,
object type and object id of the object you want to copy from, and choose Object â
Copy.
The system gives you the following dialog box.
In this dialog box, you specify the name and abbreviation of the target object. If you are
using external number range, you also specify the target object id. The system copies all
infotypes except relationships. Relationships are copied, if you tick the ‘Copy relationships
also’ checkbox. It shows you what it has copied.
Delimiting an object
You can delimit an object. To do so, enter plan version, object type and object id of the
object you want to delimit. Select infotype Object and click . When you delimit an
object, all its infotypes and relationships are also delimited.
Deleting an object
To delete an object, enter plan version, object type and object id of the object you want
to delete and choose Object âDelete. When you delete an object, all its infotypes and
relationships are also deleted.
Creating an infotype
You specify the object id, select the infotype you want to create and click .
Changing an infotype
You specify the object id, select the infotype you want to change and click . When you
change an infotype, the data for the entire validity period changes. If you want to change
data from a certain date, you should either create or copy infotype, specifying the start
date.
Displaying an infotype
You specify the object id, select the infotype you want to display and click .
Copying an infotype
You specify the object id, select the infotype you want to copy and click . Copy facility
is used to change an infotype from certain date. This can also be done by creating infotype,
but copying lets you edit existing data thereby saving time and effort.
Delimiting an infotype
When you create an infotype, you usually specify its end date as 31.12.9999, as you do
not know the date till when it will remain valid. If it is subsequently determined when
the validity of the information ends, you need to delimit that infotype by changing its
end date. If the infotype remains valid with different data, you would create the infotype,
which will automatically delimit the earlier infotype record. However, if the validity of
information ends and no new values are available, then you delimit the infotype record.
To do so, you specify the object id, select the infotype you want to delimit and click .
If you delimit the object itself, all its relationships and infotypes are also delimited.
Deleting an infotype
If you want to delete an infotype, you specify the object id, select the infotype you want
to delete and click . If you delete the object itself, all its relationships and infotypes
are also deleted.
Displaying overview of an infotype

If there are multiple records of an infotype, you can see their important information in
an overview mode by clicking . From the overview mode, you can select a record and
display, change, copy, delimit or delete it.
Activating an infotype
If you want to change the status of an infotype to Active, you may either choose
Edit âStatus change â
Activate, or click .
Using planning status

Most companies use only active planning status. However, SAP lets you create objects,
relationships and infotypes in planned status, which may subsequently be accepted or
â
rejected. You can change planning status of an infotype by selecting Edit Status change.
Planning status is discussed in more detail in chapter 16.
Using object services

If you click , the system shows you the object services tool bar.
Through this tool bar you can do the following.

Ø Enter personal or general notes for an object.
Ø Create attachments to an object.
Ø Create relationships between an object and documents that are in the optical archive
or that are subsequently scanned in and stored.
Ø Start a workflow for an object.
Ø Display overview of all workflows, where an object is involved.
Ø Display overview of all business objects that are linked to an object. You can call the
linked objects by double-clicking—independent of whether the objects are from the
current system or another SAP System.
Ø Send an object as an attachment of a message.
Ø Subscribe to an object. The user is then notified of changes to the subscribed object.
Ø Add an object to the favorite list.
2.5 STRUCTURAL GRAPHICS

A B C X
Structural Graphics lets you make structural changes to your organizational plan by
simply moving objects around in the hierarchical structure. You can move single objects
or substructures within your organizational plan. You can switch from many other interfaces
to structural graphics interface by clicking . You can also start structural graphics by
running transaction S_AHR_61016530. Depending on the structure you want to view or
edit, you may specify the following evaluation paths.
Structure Evaluation path

Organizational structure ORGEH
Organizational structure with positions PLSTE
Organizational structure with persons PERS-O
Staffing assignment (structure) SBESX
Task assignments WF_O_TTS
Account assignment KOSTDIST
Staff assignments with reporting structure O-S-PHIE
Reporting structure S-S
Displaying toolbox
You can choose Edit âToolbox to show the toolbox in a separate window. The toolbox
shows various actions you can perform on selected objects and is a substitute for menu.
Selecting objects
You can select an object by clicking it. If you want to select multiple objects, press and
hold the Shift key and click the objects. You can also select multiple objects by pressing
the left mouse button, dragging the mouse to create a rectangle and leaving the left
mouse button. All objects completely within the rectangle are selected. You can select a
branch by pressing the Ctrl key and clicking an object. That object and all objects below
it are selected. To select multiple branches, press and hold Shift and Ctrl keys and click
the highest object of each branch.
Creating objects
To create an object, select the parent object and choose Utilities â
Create objects. You can
create up to five objects. You can also set the period and status. The system also creates
relationship between the parent object and the created objects.
Moving objects
To move an object, select the object and choose Utilities â
Move objects. The shape of the
mouse pointer changes. Select the new parent object. The object moves below the new
parent object.
Inserting objects
To insert existing objects in the structure, select the parent object and choose
â
Utilities Insert objects. The Relationship/Object type dialog box appears. Use the dialog
box to select a relationship and click the green tick. The Possible Entries dialog box
appears. Use the dialog box to select the object you want to insert and copy.
Delimiting objects
To delimit an object, select the object and choose Utilities â
Delimit object. Click the
green tick to delimit the object, its infotypes, as well as its relationship to the parent
object. You can also change the default delimitation date and status of the object.
Deleting objects
To delete an object, select the object and choose Utilities â Delete object. Click the green
tick to delete the object, its infotypes, as well as its relationship with all the objects.
Displaying object description

To display the description of an object, select the object and choose Extras â Object
description.
Displaying object data

To display the object data, select the object and choose Extras â Object quick info. The
system shows object details in a separate window.
Maintaining infotypes
If you want to maintain infotypes of an object, select the object and choose
Extras â Maintain infotypes. The system takes you to Expert mode with the selected
object. You can maintain the infotypes there.
Changing staff mode

You can tick staff checkbox for an organizational unit or position in infotype 1003. To
change the staff mode of a position or organizational unit, select the object and choose
Utilitiesâ Change staff modes. If you choose Utilities â
Change staff modes when the
staff checkbox is ticked, the tick is removed.
Changing shapes, colors and line styles

You can change shapes, colors and line styles in structural graphics by selecting the
appropriate option under Object in the menu.
Multiple views
If you have difficulty in displaying the entire structure in the window, you can open
multiple views by selecting Options â
Further view, or by clicking . In each window,
you can scroll independently or display different substructures. You can open up to four
windows. You can close windows by clicking .
Overview and detail mode
You can change from overview to detail mode and vice versa by clicking .
In the Overview mode the system compresses the hierarchical structure so that you can
see the entire structure in one view window. Because the objects are compressed, the
complete object name may not be visible. In the Detail mode the system presents a
hierarchical structure so that you can read the descriptions of the objects in the structure.
However, you may not be able to see complete structure.
Displaying close-ups of a structure

Choose Goto â Choose Section. A rectangle appears in the window. Select the rectangle
and hold down the left mouse button. Drag the rectangle over the section you want to
view in close-up. Release the mouse button.
Displaying substructures
Select the parent object in the substructure you want to view and choose Goto â Display
Substructure.
Displaying parent structure

If you have displayed substructure in structural graphics, you can select Goto âParent
Structure to display the structure of the parent of the highest object currently displayed.
Displaying whole structure

If you have displayed substructure in structural graphics, you can select Goto â Display
Whole Structure to display the whole structure.
Selecting/deselecting all objects

You can select all objects by choosing Edit â Select All. You can deselect all objects by
choosing Edit â Deselect All.
Centering objects
You can center the selected object by choosing Goto â Center Selected Object. To center
the root object, choose Goto âCenter Root Object.
Displaying paths
You can display path of an object by selecting the object and choosing Object â Display
Path.
Searching for objects

You can search for objects by selecting Object â Search for Objects. You can specify
whether the search should be case sensitive. The system highlights objects that match
your entry. If you perform another search, the newly found objects are also highlighted.
However, if you tick ‘Remove Previous Selection’ checkbox, only objects matching current
search are highlighted. If you save options, this setting is also saved.
Sorting objects
You can sort objects by priority, by key or by text in ascending or descending order by
selecting Object â
Sort Objects. This only affects display. If you save options, this setting
is also saved.
Suppressing subordinate objects

You can hide substructure below an object by selecting the object and choosing
Object âSuppress Subordinate Objects.
Displaying subordinate objects

You can display hidden substructure below an object by selecting the object and choosing
Object â Display Subordinate Objects.
Changing level of an object

The system shows objects at different levels based on relationships.
If you want to show an object at a lower level in structural graphics display, you can do
so by choosing Object â
One Level Lower.
You can do it multiple times. If you have taken an object down more than required, you
can move it up by choosing Object âOne Level Higher. These operations affect only
display. The data does not change. If you exit the structural graphics and enter again, you
will see the original structure.
View options
You can change the structural graphics display by setting your view options
(Options âView options).
You can display up to four windows by changing the number in the View field. In each
window you can scroll the structure independently. You can also set the mode
independently. In the substructure mode, the substructure of the selected object is shown.
In the parent structure mode, the parent structure of the object is shown. In the center
mode, the selected object is positioned in the center of the window. In the off mode, the
structure is shown in the normal way.
If you choose display level, only that many levels of the structure (starting from the top)
are shown. If you choose 0, all the levels are shown. You can display hierarchical structures
on a grid by ticking the Grid checkbox. You can choose between details and overview
mode. These modes are explained earlier.
Feathered mode shows the graphics left-to-right, instead of top-down.
Compact mode is a combination of top-bottom and left-to-right modes.
You can use different designs to display graphics. You may like to try them and select
the one you like the best.
Object options
In the object options you can set the text alignment, font size and the object’s look. You
can increase or decrease the space between objects by changing the outer frame and the
inner frame sizes.
Line options
You can set the attributes of relationship lines here.

Save options
You can save the options by choosing Object â Save Options.
Delete options
You can delete the saved options, and reactivate default options, by choosing
Object â
Delete Options.
Mailing structure
You can mail the structure in the active window by selecting Structure â Send.
2.6 ACTIONS

A B C X
2.6.1 Running Actions

Actions provide another method of creating objects and updating information about them.
When you run transaction PP03, you get the following selection screen.
You enter the object type, select the action you want to perform, fill in the validity period,
etc. and Execute. The system presents appropriate infotypes in the predefined sequence.
The advantage of this method over the Expert mode is that you don’t have to remember
which infotypes have to be created.
2.6.2 Master List of Actions

Actions can be maintained using transaction OOMT. You may use the actions provided
by SAP. If you create your own personnel actions, they should be between 001 and 999;
you should not use alphabets. Each action can only be defined for one object type.
2.6.3 Infotypes in Actions

When you define an action, you specify the infotypes which are to be presented when
you run the action. This is also specified in transaction OOMT.
2.6.4 Transactions for Actions

Instead of running transaction PP03 and specifying object type, you can define a transaction
for each object type. You can then run these transactions directly. These can also be
maintained in transaction OOMT.
2.7 SETTING MAINTENANCE INTERFACE

A B C X
You can set the maintenance interface by running transaction PPOM_MODE.
2.8 STANDARD SELECTION SCREEN FOR REPORTS

A A B C
Reporting in organizational management uses the logical database PCH which contains
a standard selection screen.
Plan version
You can specify the plan version for which you want to start the report.
Object type
You can specify the object type for which you want to start the report.
Object ID
You can specify the object with which you want to start the report. If you don’t know the
object id, you can use the search term field to find the object.
Search term
You can enter part of the description here to find objects. You may use * in the beginning,
at the end, or in the middle of the search text for pattern matching. If a single object
matches the search string, the id of that object is inserted in the object id field. If multiple
objects match the search string, they are displayed and you select the one you want.
Object status
You can specify that only objects with a certain status (usually Active) should be reported
on.
Data status
Even for active objects, there may be data in infotypes in planned status. Here you can
specify that only data with certain status values should be reported on.
Set structure conditions
Here you enter the structure conditions for objects that should not appear in the displayed
structure or list. You can identify a branch in the structure by Root object type, Root
object ID, Evaluation Path and Status vector. You can specify that a certain object type
(Check object type) in this branch should not be displayed.
If you specify multiple structure conditions, you need to specify whether they are to be
combined using the AND operator or the OR operator.
When an object meeting the structure condition is found, you may decide not to display
the entire branch under that object, or you may omit only that object, but show objects
below that object, unless they are also filtered by the structure conditions.
Reporting period
Here you specify whether you want the report on a given date, or for a period, specifying
the date or the period.
Evaluation path
Through evaluation path you specify which structure of the object is to be reported on.
For standard SAP reports, the evaluation path is specified by SAP. If a report is not based
on structure, this field is omitted from the selection screen.
Status vector
You can specify that only objects whose relationship infotypes (assignments) have a
certain status are to be reported on.
Status overlap
You can execute a simulation that displays the results as though all relationship infotypes
were active.
Display depth
You can specify the level of a structure to which the report is to be executed. Thus, if an
organizational plan has five levels, but you want the report only on first two levels, that
can be done by specifying 2 in this field. If you do not wish to limit the number of levels,
leave this field blank.
Technical depth
You can write an evaluation path, in which you skip displaying intermediate objects. For
example, you can display persons directly under the organizational units, without displaying
positions to which they are attached. The actual structure has positions in it, but the
display view skips them. In such cases, the display depth is less than the technical depth.
You specify the limit on the display depth in the ‘Display depth’ field. Here you specify
the limit on the technical depth of the structure. If you do not wish to limit the number
of levels, leave this field blank.
Recursion
This checkbox specifies whether the system should check the relationships among objects
for recursions. A recursion occurs when the system traces the many relationships among
objects in a structure, and finds no termination point.
Classic output
If you tick this checkbox, the output is in classical report format. If you do not tick this
checkbox, the output is more interactive. For example, you can adjust column widths and
expand or collapse tree structures.
3 Organizational Unit
3.1 ORGANIZATIONAL UNIT DEFINITION

A A A A
Organizational unit represents a functional unit in an enterprise. The entire organization

is divided into organizational units. Organizational units form a hierarchy called
organizational structure, where the lower level organizational units report to the higher
level organizational units. An enterprise often has different names for organizational
units at different levels, e.g. line of business (LOB), division, department, section, etc. In
SAP, all these are called organizational units.
3.2 ORGANIZATIONAL UNIT CREATION

A A B X
The highest organizational unit in an organizational structure is called the root organizational
unit. You can create the root organizational unit using transaction PPOCE. All other
organizational units can be created using transaction PPOME. You can also create
organizational units using transaction PO10.
55
3.3 ORGANIZATIONAL UNIT STRUCTURES

A A B C
When you select an organizational unit in Organization and Staffing (transaction PPOME),
you can work on multiple views in the overview area. Each of these views is a structure
starting from the selected organizational unit.
CHAPTER 3 Organizational Unit 57
3.3.1 Staff Assignments (Structure)
View
This is the most popular structure of an organizational unit. If you double-click an

organizational unit in the selection area, the system shows this structure of the organizational
unit in the overview area. In this structure, you see the organizational structure, positions
in the organizational units and holders of positions.
Evaluation path
If you click , the system displays which structure it is showing.
If you click , the system shows you the technical view of the evaluation path, SBESX
in this case.
3.3.2 Account Assignment
View
The above screenshot shows the account assignment view of an organizational unit. This
view shows the cost center assignment and cost distribution of an organizational unit and
positions under it. Holders of positions are also shown.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is KOSTDIST.

3.3.3 Candidate Management
View
The above screenshot shows the candidate management view of an organizational

unit. This view shows the candidate manager position of an organizational unit
(relationship A440) and its holder. Candidate management is used in E-Recruitment.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is WFM_CAND.
3.3.4 Enhanced Checks
View
The important thing in this view is the columns.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is O-O-S-P.
3.3.5 Managerial Assignment
View
This view shows the managing position and person of a single organizational unit.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is BOSSONLY.
3.3.6 Organizational Structure
View
This view shows the organizational structure of an organizational unit.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is ORGEH.

3.3.7 Project Assignments

This view is currently not in use.
3.3.8 Scheduler Assignment (MRS)
View
This view shows the shift planner position and its holders (only business partners and
users, not employees) of a single organizational unit.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is OMDISPO.

3.3.9 Staff Assignments (List)
View
This view shows the list of positions in an organizational unit. It also shows detailed
information about that position in various columns.
You can also create a position in this view by clicking .
3.3.10 Staffing Analysis
View
This view shows the staffing analysis of the entire organizational structure. This view is
very similar to the Enhanced Checks view. It provides the same information in columns
as the Enhanced Checks view.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path of this view is SBESX, which is very similar to the evaluation
path O-O-S-P of the Enhanced Checks view.
3.3.11 Staffing Management
View
This view shows the staffing manager position and its holder of a single organizational
unit.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is WFMSTAFF.

3.3.12 Task Assignment
View
This view shows tasks associated with the entire organizational structure. Tasks may be
associated directly or via job. Tasks may be associated with the organizational unit, position,
holders of positions, or work center.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is WF_O_TTS.

3.4 ORGANIZATIONAL UNIT DETAILS

A A B C
3.4.1 Basic Data
Organizational unit
If you want to change the name or abbreviation of the organizational unit, you can enter
it in these fields. This data is stored in infotype 1000.
Staff
By selecting this checkbox, you can assign a staff indicator to organizational units. A staff
flag indicates that an organizational unit is not a part of the normal reporting structure
at your company, but rather reports directly to a high level organizational unit. For
example, if the audit department reports directly to the executive board, you may assign
it a staff flag. Staff organizational units are displayed differently in the organizational
structure. This data is stored in infotype 1003.
Holder
This area shows the persons holding positions in the selected organizational unit. This is
only display area, you can’t change the information displayed here. This data is stored
in infotype 1001 as relationships between organizational unit and position and between
position and person.
Description
Here you can maintain the descriptions for an organizational unit which are stored in
infotype 1002. You first select the type of description and then enter the description. You
can import description from a file on the desktop. You can also export description to a
file on the desktop.
Validity
The data displayed in Organization and Staffing is for a validity period. If the data for
the entire period is the same, the system shows the date for which the data is shown
and also indicates that there are no split periods .
If, however, the data is different for different periods, the system shows .
If you click , the system shows the validity period, instead of a single date. It also lets
you move to different records or select a period by clicking .
If you change the data in this interface, it is changed from the date displayed, delimiting
the existing record.
This tab shows data from infotype 1008 and cost center assignment which is stored as a
relationship in infotype 1001. Account assignment of an organizational unit may be inherited
from a superior organizational unit. If that is the case, the inheritance is shown by .
If the account assignment of the current organizational unit is different from that of the
superior organizational unit, you can click and change the data. These fields are
discussed in more detail in chapter 14.7.
Enterprise organization
In view V_TKA06_CC, you can specify the controlling areas for which enterprise
â â
organization is active (Controlling Cost Center Accounting Enterprise Organization â
Enter Settings for Enterprise Organization).
Enterprise organization is based on the organizational plan in HR, and contains additional
functions and organizational units specific to accounting. It integrates the HR organizational
plan, the Cost center standard hierarchy and the Profit center standard hierarchy. If the
enterprise organization is active for a controlling area, the HR organizational structure is
â â
maintained through transaction KEO1 (Controlling Cost Center Accounting Enterprise
Organization â Create Enterprise Organization). The account assignment of the
organizational unit is specified here and not in the HR organizational structure.
3.4.3 Address
This tab shows data from infotype 1028 which is discussed in more detail in
chapter 14.15. E-mail address is stored in infotype 1032. It is inherited from the superior
organizational unit. You can change it by clicking . Infotype 1032 is discussed in
more detail in chapter 14.16.
3.4.4 Cost Distribution
This tab shows you data from infotype 1018, which is discussed in more detail in
chapter 14.13.
3.4.5 Work Schedule
This tab shows you data from infotype 1011, which is discussed in more detail in
chapter 14.10.
3.4.6 Quota Planning
Quota planning is used to perform headcount planning for an organizational unit. You
can plan how many and which positions are to be assigned in the staff assignments for
an organizational unit in the future.
Displayed periods
The planning period is determined by the system based on planning type. The planning
period for a planning type is specified in view T77POSBUD.
Time interval
You can do planning for different time intervals. The time interval specified in
view T77POSBUD is proposed by default. You can change it if you want.
Planning type
You can execute several plans. The planning type for which planning is currently going
on is specified in view T77POSBUD.
Manpower plan
Here you specify for each job, the number of positions required in each period. The
screen also shows the actual manpower for the purpose of comparison. You can add a job
by clicking and delete a job by selecting the job and clicking . You can enter the
planned manpower directly in the cells, or increase or decrease it by clicking .
3.4.7 Tasks
This tab shows tasks for an organizational unit. These are supposed to be performed by
all position holders of the organizational unit.
3.5 ORGANIZATIONAL UNIT REPORTS

A A A B
Existing organizational units

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016491 to list existing organizational units. You can
also use this program to report all objects, or all objects of certain type. To do so, tick the
checkbox ‘Standard selection screen’, Execute and then specify the object type.
Staff functions for organizational units

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016492 to list staff functions for organizational units.
You can also use this program to report staff functions of all objects, or objects of certain
type. To do so, tick the checkbox ‘Standard selection screen’, Execute and then specify the
object type.
You can use transaction S_AHR_61016493 to display the organizational structure. This
transaction uses evaluation path ORGEH. You can change layout of the report by clicking
. You can also see the output in structural graphics by clicking .
Organizational structure with positions

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016494 to display the organizational structure with
positions. This transaction uses evaluation path PLSTE. You can change layout of the
report by clicking . You can also see the output in structural graphics by clicking
.
Organizational structure with persons

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016495 to display organizational structure with persons.
It uses evaluation path PERS-O. You can change layout of the report by clicking .
You can also see the output in structural graphics by clicking .
Organizational structure with work centers

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016496 or S_AHR_61016515 to display organizational
structure with work centers.
It uses evaluation path ARBP-O. You can change layout of the report by clicking .
You can also see the output in structural graphics by clicking .
Staff assignments
You can use the old staff assignments report (program RHSBES10) to see an overview of
staffing of organizational units.
By double-clicking an organizational unit, you access detailed information.
Planning for organizational unit

You can run transaction PPEM to do Personnel Development activities for objects in an
organizational unit. When you run the transaction, the system shows you the organizational
plan (Organizational unit, Job, Position, Person and User) of the default organizational
unit specified in user settings. If the default organizational unit is not specified, the
system lets you select an organizational unit. If you want to change the organizational
unit, you may do so by choosing View â Other Organizational Unit.
You can perform all the change, display and reporting functions of Personnel Development
directly from the screen. You simply select the objects you require, and execute the function
through menu or icon.
Ø Creating a Profile
Ø Displaying a Profile
Ø Evaluating a Profile
Ø Performing Profile Matchups
Ø Finding Objects for Qualifications
Ø Career Planning
Ø Succession Planning
Ø Evaluating Appraisals
Ø Calling Up an Individual Development Plan
4 Position
4.1 POSITION DEFINITION

A A A A
In any organizational unit, the work is done by persons. But when you are planning an
organization, you do not know who the person would be. So you plan positions, which
are later filled by employees. If an employee leaves, the position becomes vacant, and can
be filled by another employee. Positions can also be filled by non-employees, e.g. contractors’
employees. Positions can be 100% filled, partially filled or vacant. One position may also
be shared by several employees, each working less than full-time. For example, two
employees can hold 60% and 40% of one position. Positions differ from jobs. A job is not
concrete but rather the basis for the creation of various positions with similar tasks and
characteristics.
4.2 POSITION CREATION

A A B X
You can create positions using transaction PPOME. You create positions under organizational
units. Select the organizational unit under which you want to create a position, click ,
77
and double-click the relationship ‘Incorporates Position’. A ‘New position’ is created. You
enter mandatory data, e.g. account assignment and address, and save. A position is
created. You can also create positions using transaction PO13.
4.3 STAFFING STATUS OF POSITIONS

A A B C
Status of position Icon in staff Text in person/ Staffing status

assignments user column in detail area
Occupied Name
Occupied by more than one person Name
Added during preview period
Removed during preview period
Newly hired person (employee)
Occupied, vacancy is filled Name Vacancy filled or
withdrawn
Occupied and vacant Name Vacancy to be filled
Unoccupied and vacant Vacant Vacancy to be filled
Unoccupied and not vacant Not vacant
Unoccupied and not vacant, Not vacant Vacancy filled or
as vacancy has been withdrawn withdrawn
Occupied and obsolete Name Obsolete
Occupied by more than one person Name Obsolete
and obsolete
Unoccupied and obsolete Not vacant Obsolete
CHAPTER 4 Position 79
4.4 CHIEF POSITION

A A B B
You can define a chief position within an organizational unit, to which all other
positions in the organizational unit report. Apart from displaying the information in the
organizational plan, the chief position is also used by workflows to determine manager
of a position. In many workflows the manager has to approve a request created by his
subordinate. SAP determines the manager of an object in Organizational Management
using the function module SWX_GET_MANAGER which uses the chief position to
determine the manager.
4.5 POSITION STRUCTURES

A A B C
If you select a position in transaction PPOME, you can view and maintain the following
structures.
View
This view shows all the tasks for a position regardless of the route through which they
are inherited.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is WF_S_TTS.

4.5.2 Candidate Management
View
This view shows the candidate manager position of a single organizational unit, who
could be an employee, user, central person or business partner. Candidate management
is used in E-Recruitment.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is WFM_CAND.
4.5.3 Managerial Assignment
View
This view shows if a position is chief of the organizational unit to which it belongs.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is A012.
4.5.4 Organizational Assignment
View
This view shows the organizational plan in reverse. It starts from a position, and shows
the entire hierarchy of organizational units to which it belongs.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is SAP_PSOO.

4.5.5 PBC: Notes
View
This view shows the following columns for the holders of position.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is O-S-P.
4.5.6 Reporting Structure
View
If you maintain a reporting structure between positions and positions, you can see that
in this view. It also shows the holder of positions.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is O-S-PHIE.
4.5.7 Staffing Analysis
View
This view shows the holder of a position and information about the position. It displays
important information about the position in the following columns.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is A008.

4.5.8 Staffing Management
View
This view shows staffing manager of an organizational unit.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is WFMSTAFF.

4.6 POSITION DETAILS

A A B C
4.6.1 Basic Data
Short and long names

In the two Position fields, enter a short and long description for a position. These are
stored in infotype 1000.
Job
The job assigned to the position is displayed in the Job field. You can assign a job directly
by entering its name here. Otherwise, you assign a job to a position in the staff assignments.
This data is stored as a relationship in infotype 1001.
Head of own organizational unit

By flagging this field, you mark a position as the chief position of the organizational unit
to which it belongs. In many business processes you need to identify an employee’s
superior, e.g. for approving an employee’s leave. This information is used for that. It is
stored as a relationship between organizational unit and position in infotype 1001.
Staffing status
You can enter the following statuses in this field. Vacancy is maintained in infotype 1007
and Obsolete status of position is maintained in infotype 1014.
Status Description
Vacancy open The position is vacant, that is an employee is to be

found for the position. The position is marked as
vacant in Recruitment.
Vacancy occupied or put on hold The position was vacant but the vacancy is put on
hold and no person is to be found for the position at
present.
Obsolete The position will no longer be required in the future.
Staff
By choosing the Staff field, you can assign a staff indicator to positions. A staff flag
indicates that a position is not part of the normal reporting structure at your company,
but rather reports directly to a high level position, or organizational unit. In this way, a
position can report directly to the chief executive officer. This information is maintained
in infotype 1003.
Holder
An employee or a user who occupies the position is displayed in the Holder table. There
may be multiple holders of a position at the same time. Sometimes they may be part
occupants of a position. Sometimes you may have a successor being groomed by the
occupant of a position. This information is maintained as a relationship in infotype 1001.
Description
You can maintain various types of descriptions for a position. These are stored in
infotype 1002.
Data on the controlling area, company code, business area, personnel area and personnel
subarea are used as default values in Personnel Administration. These values are inherited
from the organizational unit to which the position belongs and can be changed. This data
is stored in infotype 1008. Data on the cost center is stored in infotype 1001 and transferred
to Personnel Administration in infotype 0001.
4.6.3 Address
You can maintain the address details of a position in this tab which is stored in
infotype 1028.
4.6.4 Cost Distribution
If you want to distribute the cost of a position between different cost centers orders or
projects, you can maintain it in this tab which is stored in infotype 1018. The cost incurred
by the person holding the position is distributed as specified here.
4.6.5 Work Schedule

Employee group
You assign an employee group to the position. It is stored in infotype 1013 and is defaulted
when you hire a person for a position.
Employee subgroup
You assign an employee subgroup to the position. It is stored in infotype 1013 and is
defaulted when you hire a person for a position.
Origin, working time, approval

You may choose to have default value of working time, which may either come from
enterprisewide standard working time (refer to chapter 14.10.3), or from the superior
organizational unit. You can also directly specify working time for a position or enter a
percentage in the approval field, which determines the working time. The origin field
shows the method through which the working time is determined and the working time
field shows the working time value. Working time is stored in infotype 1011.
4.6.6 Qualification
In order to perform tasks associated with a position, its holder needs certain competencies.
These can be specified here and are stored in infotype 1001. Competencies (called
qualifications in SAP) required for a position can be compared with competencies of a
person to determine the fitness of a position’s holder, as well as for career and succession
planning.
4.6.7 Tasks
This tab shows the tasks that a position needs to perform. The tasks may be inherited by
the position from the job which is assigned to it. Certain tasks may also be assigned to
a position directly. This data is stored in infotype 1001.
4.7 POSITION REPORTS

A A A B
Periods when positions are unoccupied per organizational unit

You can run transaction S_AHR_61018869 for information on unoccupied positions. It
shows the number of days for which each position has remained unoccupied, and average
number of unoccupied days for each organizational unit. This data is for the period you
specify in the selection screen. You also have to specify the starting organizational unit.
The system will show you positions in that organizational unit and all the organizational
units below it. For this, it uses evaluation path SBESX. However, if you want to see
positions only under the specified organizational unit, and not under the organizational
units below the specified organizational unit, you can use evaluation
path SBES. To change the evaluation path, you tick the checkbox ‘Standard selection
screen’.
Existing positions
You can use transaction S_AHR_61016502 to list existing positions. You can also use this
program to report all objects, or all objects of certain type. To do so, tick the checkbox
‘Standard selection screen’, Execute and then specify the object type.
Staff assignments
You can run transaction S_AHR_61016503 to see positions and persons in an organizational
plan or part of it. The report also shows other employee information, e.g. working time,
staffing percentage, employee group and employee subgroup.
You can refine this report by making the following selections in the selection screen.
These are described below.
Selection parameter Description
Organizational structure reporting If you tick this checkbox, all organizational units
below the specified organizational unit are also
taken.
Basic working hours Here you specify the time period for which working
hours are shown in the report.
Display position holder only If you tick this checkbox, only position holders
are included, substitutes are not shown.
Include persons w/o position If you tick this checkbox, persons who do not have
any position are also shown.
Position description
You can run transaction S_AHR_61016504 to see comprehensive description of a position.
However, this report does not show information stored in description infotype 1002. If you
want infotype 1002 to be included, use transaction S_AHR_61016511.
Task description for positions

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016505 to see tasks for a position.
Staff functions for positions

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016506 to see all the positions which are staff functions.
Authorities and resources

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016507 or S_AHR_61016516 to see authorities and
resources for a position or for all positions directly belonging to an organizational unit.
Authorities and resources may be maintained directly for positions. Alternatively, authorities
and resources may be maintained for work centers which are linked to positions. The
evaluation path used in the report is ARBPL. This evaluation path does not take you
down the organizational structure.
If you want to see authorities and resources along organizational structure, you should
use evaluation path ARBPLX.
Planned labor costs

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016517 or S_AHR_61016508 to see planned labor costs
of an organizational unit in structural form.
The selection screen has the following important fields.
Reporting along If you select this, the cost is reported for the entire organizational
a structure structure starting from the specified organizational unit, otherwise
only for the specified organizational unit.
Values Here you specify whether minimum maximum or midpoint costs
are to be reported.
Period Here you specify whether planned costs are for a month, week, etc.
Conversion type In case the reporting currency is different from planned currency,
the method of conversion to be used is specified here.
Currency Here you specify the currency for reporting planned costs.
Vacant positions
You can run transaction S_AHR_61016509 to report vacant positions in the organizational
structure under an organizational unit.
Correct vacancies
One might consider every unoccupied position as vacant. In that case, whenever a position
becomes unoccupied, it will be declared vacant and recruitment action will get triggered.
Many companies don’t want this to happen. They would like to review unoccupied
positions, and declare them vacant selectively. Therefore, SAP provides a separate vacancy
flag for positions. Thus, a position may be unoccupied, but not vacant. In a reverse
scenario, you may declare an occupied position vacant so as to trigger recruitment action,
because you are looking for a successor. Therefore, SAP allows vacancy flag for an occupied
position. But it is possible that some occupied positions are erroneously declared vacant.
Transaction S_AHR_61016510 lets you review occupied positions which have vacancy
flag. If you find that some positions are erroneously declared vacant, you can correct it
in the same report.
Obsolete positions
When a position is no longer required, you can delimit it. But, if the position is occupied,
before delimiting it, you have to wait till it becomes unoccupied. You can declare such
positions obsolete so as to avoid the risk of accidental vacancy creation. Once a position
is declared obsolete, vacancy cannot be created for it. You can run transaction
S_AHR_61018831 to view obsolete positions. If they are unoccupied, you may like to
delimit them.
Complete position description

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016511 to see complete description of one or more
positions. The report contains the following information.
Ø Description
Ø Holder of a position
Ø Superior and subordinate positions
Ø Activity profile of the position
Ø Requirements profile if available
Ø Describing job
Ø Activity profile of the job
Ø Requirements profile of the job if available
Ø Work center assigned to the position
Ø Integration of the position in the organization
Reporting structure without persons

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016512 to see reporting structure under a position
without persons. The evaluation path is ORGA.
Reporting structure with persons

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016513 to see reporting structure under a position
with persons. The evaluation path is ORGA-P.
5 Job
5.1 JOB DEFINITION

A A A A
In an organization, work is done by persons, who hold positions. For each position, you
need to define the tasks performed by that position. In a large organization, many positions
perform similar tasks. For example, many managers in your organization may perform
tasks which are very similar. Supervisors, on the other hand, would perform tasks which
are different from those of managers. You can create different jobs, e.g. manager, supervisor,
worker, etc. Each job is a set of tasks. A job can be used to create many positions which
are similar in certain ways, but also have their individual characteristics. For example,
Manager—Purchasing, Manager—Sales and Manager—HR all may perform the tasks of
the job Manager, but each one has different responsibility. Positions are concrete and can
be held by persons in an enterprise. Jobs, in contrast, are classifications of functions in an
enterprise. A job describes a position. Through this relationship, the position automatically
inherits the tasks and characteristics assigned to the job. This significantly reduces data
entry time, as tasks and characteristics do not have to be assigned to each position separately.
Specific tasks and characteristics can also be assigned directly to positions. When you
create jobs, they are listed in a job index. A job index is a list of jobs maintained for an
enterprise.
101
5.2 JOB CREATION

A A B X
You can create a job using transaction PO03. When you run transaction PO03, you get the
following screen.
You select Object and click the create icon.
You specify the object abbreviation and name, and save. The job is created.
CHAPTER 5 Job 103
5.3 JOB STRUCTURES

A A B C
Further activities on job, e.g. assigning tasks and assigning holders, can be done in transaction
PPOME. You select a job in the Selection area and double-click it to transfer it to the
Overview area. In the Overview area you see the task assignment view which shows
tasks that constitute a job.
View
The task assignment view shows tasks for a job. You can create a new task here, but then
it will not appear in the task catalog unless you specifically create that relationship. You
can assign an existing task to a job. If you assign a higher level task, its lower level tasks
are automatically included.
Evaluation path
5.3.2 Job Usage
View
If you select the ‘Job Usage’ view, the system shows all the positions which are associated
with the job, the organizational units of those positions, and the holders of those positions.
CHAPTER 5 Job 105
Evaluation path
5.4 JOB DETAILS

A A B C
5.4.1 Basic Data
This tab has job abbreviation and job name which are stored in infotype 1000. It also has
job description which is stored in infotype 1002.
5.4.2 Tasks
This tab shows the tasks that constitute the job. These are stored in infotype 1001.
5.5 JOB REPORTS

A A A C
Existing jobs
You can use transaction S_AHR_61016497 to list existing jobs. You can also use this
Job index
You can see holders of jobs using transaction S_AHR_61016498. In the selection screen
you can also specify if the report should also display persons who are directly assigned
to a job, and not via position.
CHAPTER 5 Job 107
Job description
You can run transaction S_AHR_61016499 to see all jobs and their job descriptions. The
system first shows all the jobs.
You select the jobs whose description you want to see and click . You
navigate from one job to another using arrow icons.
Task description for jobs

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016500 to see the tasks in a job.
Complete job description

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016501 to list all jobs along with their description,
requirements profile, task profile and authorities/resources.
6 Person
6.1 PERSON DEFINITION

A A A A
A person is an employee, who holds a position and carries out the tasks assigned to that
position. Unlike other objects, persons are not created in Organizational Management.
They are created in Personnel Administration and are linked to the organizational plan
through their position assignment. They are external objects for Organizational Management.
You will not find a record in infotype 1000 for them. Also, in infotype 1001, you will only
find a single relationship pointing to a person and not the reverse relationship from
person to another object. In an organization, there may be other holders of position,
e.g. users, central persons, etc. They are not employees and are not called persons in SAP.
Object person in SAP refers only to employees.
6.2 PERSON CREATION

A A B X
Persons are created in Personnel Administration. You run the hiring action using transaction
PA40. You also assign him a position in infotype 0001. Person is an external object in the
Organizational Management. Once the person is created in Personnel Administration,
you can see him in Organizational Management as well.
109
6.3 PERSON STRUCTURES

A A B C
View
The organizational assignment of a person shows the person’s position and the position’s
organizational structure as a reverse tree.
Evaluation path

CHAPTER 6 Person 111
View
A person needs to know all the tasks he has to perform regardless of the route, e.g.
position, organizational unit, etc. through which they are assigned to him. This view
fulfils that need.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is TASKSOFP.

CHAPTER 6 Person 113
6.4 PERSON DETAILS

A A B C
6.4.1 Basic Data
The basic data tab shows a person’s position and the organizational unit of that position.
If a person holds more than one position all the positions are shown.
6.4.2 Qualification
Just as a position has required competencies, a person has available competencies. The
competencies of a person are usually maintained through infotype 0021 in Personnel
Administration, but they are actually stored in infotype 1001. Competencies (called
qualifications in SAP) required for a position can be compared with competencies of a
person to determine the fitness of a person for the position he holds. They are also used
in career and succession planning.
6.4.3 Tasks
This tab shows the tasks that a person needs to perform. The tasks may be inherited by
the person from the position he holds. Certain tasks may also be assigned to a person
directly. This data is stored in infotype 1001.
6.5 PERSON REPORTS

A A A C
There are a large number of reports related to persons in Personnel Administration, but
there are no reports in Organizational Management.
7 User
7.1 USER DEFINITION

A A A A
Users are objects that can hold positions within the organizational structure just like
employees. Users are created to access the SAP system. Users may be employees or
non-employees. If users are employees, the relationship between their personnel number
and user id is maintained in infotype 0105, subtype 0001. Users can participate in workflows.
7.2 USER CREATION

A A B X
Users can be created using transaction SU01.
115
7.3 USER STRUCTURES

A A B C
View
The organizational assignment of a user shows the user’s position and the position’s
organizational structure as a reverse tree.
Evaluation path

CHAPTER 7 User 117
View
A user needs to know all the tasks he has to perform regardless of the route, e.g. position,
organizational unit, etc. through which they are assigned to him. This view fulfils that need.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is TASKSOFP.

7.4 USER DETAILS

A A B C
7.4.1 Basic Data
This tab shows the position assigned to a user.

CHAPTER 7 User 119
7.4.2 Tasks
This tab shows the tasks that a user needs to perform. The tasks may be inherited by the
user from the position he holds. Certain tasks may also be assigned to a user directly.
This data is stored in infotype 1001.
7.5 USER REPORTS

A A B C
You can get a lot of information about users in transaction SUIM.

8 Task
8.1 TASK DEFINITION

A A A A
Tasks are micro level activities which are performed in your organization. You can create
a tree structure of tasks called task catalog. Tasks are grouped into jobs, which are assigned
to positions. Tasks of the job assigned to a position are automatically inherited by the
position. Apart from tasks inherited from the job, individual tasks can also be assigned
to positions.
8.2 TASK CATALOG

A A A A
Tasks are maintained in task catalog for ease of search. You can maintain task catalog
using transaction PFCT. When you run transaction PFCT, you get the following screen.
120
CHAPTER 8 Task 121
You fill the necessary information and Execute. You get the following screen.
8.3 TASK CREATION

A A B X
In transaction PFCT you can create tasks, either at the top level, or at the subordinate
levels. To create a top level task, select and click .
In the screen above, enter the abbreviations and names of the tasks you want to create.
To create tasks under a task, select the task, click and enter the abbreviations
and names of the tasks. You can also create tasks, other than the top level tasks, using
transaction PPOME. Other task maintenance functions, e.g. change, display and delete,
take you to the screen of transaction PP01, where you can maintain all the infotypes of
the task. It is recommended that you create tasks using transaction PFCT and maintain
tasks using transaction PP01 or PPOME.
CHAPTER 8 Task 123
8.4 TASK STRUCTURES

A A B C
8.4.1 Task Hierarchy
View
The task hierarchy shows the tasks under the selected task. Task hierarchy consists of
task groups and tasks. Task groups are activities that are routinely performed together.
If a task group is assigned to a job or position, all the tasks in the task group are assigned
to that job or position.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is TASKONLY.

8.4.2 Agents
View
If you want to see who all will perform certain task, you can see it in the agents view.
Evaluation path
The evaluation path is SAP_CTSK.

CHAPTER 8 Task 125
8.5 TASK DETAILS

A A B C
8.5.1 Name
This tab contains the name and abbreviation of the task.
8.5.2 Description
In this tab you can maintain various types of descriptions of the task.
8.6 TASK REPORTS

A A B C
Existing tasks
You can use transaction S_AHR_61016522 to list existing tasks. You can also use this
Activity profile for positions along organizational structure

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016523 to show the tasks for positions along the
organizational structure.
It uses evaluation path AUFGABEX which shows tasks and tasks in jobs for positions
which are displayed in the organizational structure.
CHAPTER 8 Task 127
Activity profile of positions with persons along organizational structure

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016524 to show the tasks for positions along the
organizational structure. Persons holding these positions are also shown.
It uses evaluation path AUFGABEP which shows tasks and tasks in jobs for positions
which are displayed in the organizational structure. Persons holding these positions are
also shown.
Character of tasks in organizational structure

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016525 to display tasks having character definition in
infotype 1004. It uses evaluation path AUFGABEX to show the tasks in the organizational
structure.
Character of individual tasks

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016526 to see the tasks for which infotype 1004 (Character)
is maintained and its character attributes
9 Work Center
9.1 WORK CENTER DEFINITION

A A A A
A work center identifies the physical location where tasks are performed. A work center
can represent something as general as a geographical location, such as the Mumbai office,
or it can be very precisely defined, such as a particular workstation with specific equipment
in a specific building (Mumbai office, Room 105, Desk III, for example). Several positions
may share one work center. For example, the reception desk may be shared by a number
of different employees working in different shifts during the day.
9.2 WORK CENTER CREATION

A A B X
Work centers can be created using transaction PO01 or PP01. When you run transaction
PO01, you see the following screen where you can create the work center and maintain
various infotypes for it.
129
9.3 WORK CENTER REPORTS

A A B C
Existing work centers

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016514 to list existing work centers. You can also use
this program to report all objects, or all objects of certain type. To do so, tick the checkbox
CHAPTER 9 Work Center 131
Work centers per organizational unit

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016496 or S_AHR_61016515 to display organizational
structure with work centers.
It uses evaluation path ARBP-O. You can change layout of the report by clicking .
You can also see structural graphics by clicking .
Authorities and resources

You can run transaction RE_RHXHFMT0, S_AHR_61016507 or S_AHR_61016516 to see
authorities and resources for a position or for all positions directly belonging to an
organizational unit. Authorities and resources may be maintained directly for positions.
Alternatively, authorities and resources may be maintained for work centers which are
linked to positions. The evaluation path used in this report is ARBPL. This evaluation
path does not take you down the organizational structure.
Planned labor costs

Work centers with restrictions along organizational structure

You can run transaction RE_RHXIAW00 or S_AHR_61016518 to see work centers with
restrictions along organizational structure. This report uses evaluation path ARBPLX. For
this report to work, the work center must be linked to position.
CHAPTER 9 Work Center 133
Single work centers with restrictions

You can run transaction RE_RHXIAW01 or S_AHR_61016519 to see restrictions on work
centers.
Work centers requiring health examinations along organizational structure

health examinations and exclusions along organizational structure. This report uses
evaluation path ARBPLX. For this report to work, the work center must be linked to position.
Single work centers requiring health examinations

You can run transaction RE_RHXIAW03 or S_AHR_61016521 to see health examinations
and exclusions for work centers.
10 Objects
10.1 OBJECTS

A A A A
10.1.1 Object Definition

An organization has a number of objects of different types, e.g. organizational units,
positions, persons, cost centers, jobs, tasks, etc. Each object has a unique id. It also
has a name and abbreviation which can change with time. Objects are stored in
infotype 1000.
10.1.2 Creating an Object

Organizational Management of SAP is based on the concept of objects and relationships.
You have already seen many important types of objects and relationships between them.
You can create any type of object using transaction PP01. There are also other transactions
which are used for creating specific type of objects. When you run transaction PP01, you
get the following screen.
134
CHAPTER 10 Objects 135
When you select the object type, the system shows all the infotypes which can be maintained
for that object type. No matter which object type you select, the first infotype is ‘Object’.
Select that infotype, enter validity period and click the create icon.
In the screen that follows, you enter the object abbreviation and object name and save.
The system creates a new object and gives it an object id.
Object type
When you create an object, you specify the type of object you want to create. There are
various types of objects. Each object type has a one or two character object type key. The
following list is only an illustration.
Object type Object type key
Organizational unit O
Position S
Job C
Person P
User US
Task T
Work center A
Cost center K
Object id
When you create any object, e.g. organizational unit or position, the system assigns it a
unique object id. An object is always identified by its unique object id, and not by object
name or abbreviation. However, you don’t need to remember the object id. When you
select an object, the system uses the object id.
Planning status
SAP provides you facility for creating an object or infotype in planned status, which
could be submitted for approval. It may then get accepted or rejected. If accepted, the
status can be changed to active. For day to day use, e.g. workflow, only the active
organizational plan is used.
Validity
When you create an object, the system automatically proposes either the current date as
the start date, or the last start date you used in your work session. For the end date, the
system usually proposes 31.12.9999. You may change these dates. Once an object’s validity
period is established, you can only change it using the delimit function.
The validity period of an object has special significance. The validity of all other infotypes
and relationships of an object must be within the validity of the object itself. If the
validity of an object is shortened by delimiting it, the validity of all other infotypes and
relationships of the object is automatically delimited.
Object abbreviation and name

When you create an object, you specify its name and abbreviation. You access the object
using object name or abbreviation. Since the object is identified primarily by the object
id, you can change the object name or object abbreviation. It is also possible to have
different names of an object during different periods. Thus, if your company decided to
change the name of an organizational unit from a certain date, you can do so in SAP.
Depending on the date specified, the system will show either the old or the new
organizational unit name.
Language key
You can maintain object name and abbreviation in different languages.
10.1.3 Creating Multiple Object Copies

If you want to create multiple positions from a job, you can use program RHMULT00.
You specify the source object, target object type, number of target objects and relationship
between the source and target objects. You should run the program in test mode first.
10.1.4 Changing an Object

If you wish to change the abbreviation or name of an object, you may do so by clicking
the change icon. If you want to change the abbreviation or name of the object from a
certain date, you create a new record for the object by clicking either create or the copy
icon. You specify the abbreviation, name and validity period and save. The system
automatically delimits the old record.
10.1.5 Delimiting an Object

You can change abbreviations and descriptions at a later time by editing object infotype
records. However, you cannot change an object’s validity period in this manner. This
must be done using the delimit function.
10.1.6 Delimiting Multiple Objects

If you want to delimit multiple objects, you can do so using transaction RE_RHGRENZ0.
The objects can be selected using evaluation path.
10.1.7 Deleting an Object

You can also delete the objects you create. However, if you delete an object, the
system erases all records of the object from the database. You should only delete objects
if they are not valid during any period. If an object was valid in the past, you should
delimit it.
10.1.8 Copying an Object

SAP provides transaction RE_RHCOPY00 to copy an object. When you copy an object, all
its infotypes are copied. You can specify whether relationships are also to be copied. You
can specify new name and abbreviation for the created object; otherwise the name and
abbreviation are also copied. You can display the copied records and do the copy in test
mode. If you do not know which object to copy from, you can use transaction
RE_RHCOPY10. You can first see the list of objects, and then choose the object to copy
from.
10.1.9 Displaying Existing Objects

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016527 to list the existing objects.
10.2 NUMBER RANGES

A A B C
10.2.1 Object Identification

Every object you create has a unique object ID. The object is identified by a combination
of plan version, object type and object ID. Object IDs are numeric. They cannot be
alphanumeric.
10.2.2 Internal and External Number Assignment

There are two types of number assignment.
Type of number assignment Object ID allocation

Internal assignment The system automatically allocates an object ID from
the corresponding number range.
External assignment The user enters the object ID.
As the search function is available, it is not generally necessary to enter meaningful

numbers using external number assignment. It is recommended that you use the internal
number assignment.
10.2.3 Number Assignment for All Plan Versions

If you are using multiple plan versions, you can decide whether objects of all plan versions
will get their numbers from the same range, or whether there will be specific number
ranges for specific plan versions. Whether your number assignment is for all plan versions,
or it is plan version specific is specified in table T77S0 (discussed in more detail in
chapter 15.5). Number assignment for all plan versions has the advantage that objects
will not be overwritten when objects are copied from one plan version to another.
10.2.4 Number Ranges

You can decide whether objects of all types will be given number from the same range,
or different object types will get their numbers from different ranges. Number ranges can
be maintained using transaction OONR.
The first two characters of the subgroup specify the plan version and the last two specify
the object type. $$ in the first two characters indicates all plan versions and $$ in the last
two characters indicates all object types. The standard entry $$$$ in the field subgroup
stands for all number ranges not listed explicitly. This entry should not be deleted.
10.2.5 Creating a New Subgroup

If you want to assign a separate internal number range for organizational units in plan
version 01, you would click , enter 01O in the subgroup and save. You
would then create the number range by clicking . The system
will take you to the next screen.
Click , to create the number range for the subgroup. Add an interval
by clicking .
10.2.6 Customer Logic for Number Assignment

If you want to use your own logic for number assignment, you can implement the following
User Exits of the enhancement RHIV001.
User exit Description
EXIT_SAPLRHIN_001 Check number ranges for integration

EXIT_SAPLRHIV_001 Internal number assignment
EXIT_SAPLRHIV_002 Check external number assignment
EXIT_SAPLRHIV_003 Check whether internal number assignment is available
11 Relationships
11.1 RELATIONSHIP DEFINITION

A A A A
Reports to/
is line
supervisor of cost center allocation
Organizational
Cost Center
Unit
belongs to
incorporates cost center
allocation
belongs to
is described by
Job
incorporates
describes
is described is described occupies Work Center

Position
by by
holder
describes
describes
Person/User
Task
141
Objects are related to each other through relationships. For example, a position belongs
to an organizational unit. Objects which are related to each other form structures. For
example, organizational structure is a structure of organizational units which form a
hierarchy. Most relationships are bidirectional. If a position belongs to an organizational
unit, the organizational unit incorporates the position. Each relationship has a name in
either direction.
11.2 RELATIONSHIP TYPES

A A A A
Objects are related to each other in different ways, i.e. they have different types of
relationships between them. A relationship is identified by a three-digit code. The
relationships between basic object types are defined in view T778V and should not be
changed because they are extensively used. You can define your own relationships. The
range AAA to ZZZ is reserved for relationships created by the customer. Relationships
between most objects are reciprocal. If a job describes a position, then the position, in
turn, is described by the job. These relationships are distinguished by the identification
A or B. It is therefore, only necessary to create a relationship between two objects in one
direction. The inverse relationship is automatically created by the system. There are certain
types of objects, e.g. person, which are called external objects. These objects don’t exist
in infotype 1000. The relationship of other objects with external objects is one-sided.
There is only one record in infotype 1001 for relationship between these two objects. This
is only a technical distinction. There is no difference in the behavior of external objects
and other objects.
CHAPTER 11 Relationships 143
11.3 IMPORTANT RELATIONSHIPS

A A A A
11.3.1 An Organizational Unit Reports to Another Organizational Unit
· An organizational unit reports to another

organizational unit A 002
Example: Finance reports to Administration
· An organizational unit is line supervisor of
another organizational unit B 002
Example: Executive Board is line supervisor of

Administration, Production, and Sales.
Organizational structure is created by relationships between superior organizational unit

and subordinate organizational units. An organizational unit could have many subordinate
organizational units, but has only one superior. A subordinate organizational unit can
have further subordinate organizational units, thus creating a tree-like organizational
structure. There is no limit to the number of levels in an organizational structure.
11.3.2 A Position Belongs to an Organizational Unit
· A position belongs to

an organizational unit A 003
· An organizational unit
B 003
incorporates a position
In an organizational plan, positions belong to an organizational unit.
11.3.3 A Position is Described by a Job
· A job describes a position.

A 007
· A position is described by a job B 007

In an organizational plan, a position is described by a job. Thereby, the position inherits

the tasks of the job. A job may describe several positions and a position may be described
by several jobs. A person or user may not hold a job, only a position.
11.3.4 A Person Holds a Position
· A position is assigned to a person as the holder B 008
· A person is the holder of a position A 008
In an organizational plan, a person holds a position and is thereby required to perform

the tasks of the position. A position may be held by more than one person and a person
may hold more than one position.
11.3.5 A Position is Chief of its Organizational Unit
· A position manages an organizational unit

A 012
· An organizational unit is managed by a position B 012
In an organizational plan, a position may be the head of the organizational unit to which
it belongs. All other positions in the organizational unit then report to him. This managerial
role is often used in business processes, e.g. approving leave, travel, etc. It is also used
for giving authorization to manager to see data of his subordinate employees.
11.3.6 A Position Reports to Another Position
· A position reports to another position.

A 002
Example: The position Payroll Administrator
reports to the Payroll Manager.
· A position is line supervisor of another position
B 002
Example: The Payroll Manager is line supervisor of
the Payroll Administrator.
By specifying chief of an organizational unit, you specify which position reports to whom.
However, the requirements of some organizations may not be met by the above design.
For example, if your organizational units are very large, you may have intermediate
reporting positions. You can directly specify reporting between positions, thus creating
a reporting structure. Reporting structure gives you more flexibility, but requires more
effort, as it has to be maintained in addition to the organizational structure. You also
have to ensure consistency between the two structures.
11.3.7 An Organizational Unit Incorporates a Cost Center
· An organizational unit incorporates a cost center B 003
The cost incurred by an organizational unit may be charged to a cost center. This is
represented by the above relationship. Note that there is no reverse relationship created
between cost center and organizational unit. This is because cost center is an external
object. You will not find a cost center in the table of objects HRP1000. However, it is just
a question of what SAP stores and what it interprets. From a user’s perspective, the
relationship between cost center and organizational unit exists, regardless of whether it
is stored or not.
11.4 RELATIONSHIPS (INFOTYPE 1001)

A A A A
In SAP you specify relationships between objects to create structures. Thus, by specifying
reporting relationship between higher level organizational units and lower level
organizational units, you create organizational structure. By linking positions to
organizational units in the organizational structure you create organizational plan. All
these relationships are stored in infotype 1001. No matter which interface you use, you
can create relationships. In transaction PP01, you can select infotype Relationships and
click to see all the relationships of an object.
You can select a line and see its details.
Object
Object (organizational unit) whose relationship is being viewed or changed.
Planning status
This field shows the planning status of the relationship, not of the object.
Validity
An organizational unit can have one cost center up to certain date, and another after that
date. This is stored using validity period of relationship. Similarly, a position may have
one holder up to certain date and another holder after that date.
Change information
If you click this icon, the system will show the user who created or last changed the
record and the date when this was done.
Relationship type and relationship

Objects relate to each other in different ways. The field ‘relationship’ identifies the nature
of relationship, e.g. parent–child relationship. This relationship has two views, viz. ‘X is
parent of Y’ and ‘Y is child of X’. In SAP, each relationship is given a code and the two
views are called type A and type B. While creating a relationship record, you should first
specify the type of related object. It is then easier to select the relationship from a smaller
list.
Type, ID, abbreviation and name of related object

This is the object with which the first object is related.
Priority
When multiple objects are located at the same hierarchical level of a structure, these must
be ordered in a specific sequence from left-to-right (or from top-down). This is done by
assigning priority values, where the value 1 is the highest (far left or top) and 99 the
lowest priority (far right or bottom). If you specify no priority, the system places objects
according to their object IDs.
11.5 PROPERTIES OF RELATIONSHIPS

A A A A
11.5.1 Inheritance
Some relationships are inherited from the relationships of parent objects. Organizational
units inherit the cost center assignment of their parent organizational unit in the absence
of their own assignment. Positions inherit the tasks related to the job that describes them.
Positions may also have direct relationships to tasks in addition to the inherited tasks.
11.5.2 Time Constraint

Time constraints are used by the system to guarantee the integrity of data. They ensure
that the data is consistent and does not contradict each other. For example, an object can
have only one name on a given day. It may have different names on different days but
on a given day it must have only one name. Time constraints of infotypes are specified
in table T777Z, where it can be defined at infotype level, infotype + subtype level, or
infotype + subtype + object type level. For Relationships infotype 1001, time constraints
are defined mostly at the level of type of relationship (subtype of infotype 1001). In
exceptional cases, the time constraint may also depend on target object type and is defined
in table T77ZR.
TC Description Explanation Example
0 May only Information must exist This time constraint is applicable only
exist once for the entire life cycle to infotype 1957.
of the object and cannot
be changed.
1 Without gaps Information must exist Infotype 1000 (Objects) has time cons-
for the entire life cycle traint 1, as it must exist without gap.
of the object but can be This time constraint is not applicable
changed. to any relationship.
2 With gaps Information is optional Infotype 1001, subtype A002 has time
but can exist only once constraint 2. An organizational unit can
within a user-defined report to only one organizational unit
period. at a time, but there may be periods
when it reports to none.
3 As often as Information is optional, Infotype 1001, subtype B002 has time
required and many data records constraint 3. An organizational unit
can exist simultaneously can be line supervisor of 0, 1, or more
within a user-defined organizational units at the same time.
period.
11.5.3 Inverse Relationship

When a relationship is created, the inverse relationship is created by the system where
applicable.
11.6 CLASSIFICATION OF RELATIONSHIPS

A X X X
11.6.1 Hierarchical
Relationship between a higher level organizational unit and lower level organizational
unit is hierarchical. In SAP, many relationships are hierarchical and often they are used
to form multilevel hierarchies.
11.6.2 Lateral
In certain relationships one cannot say which of the two related objects is higher, e.g. the
relationship between job and position. These relationships are called lateral relationships.
Two jobs which are equivalent to each other also have a lateral relationship.
11.6.3 Unilateral
When you create a relationship between two objects, SAP stores two records in
infotype 1001. First record links object X to Y, and the second record links object Y to X.
This is done to facilitate the process of creating structures. Both the objects exist in
infotype 1000. However, there are certain objects, which are not created in Organizational
Management. Persons and cost centers are two examples. These are called external objects.
For such objects, only one relationship record is kept. The relationship starting from an
external object is not kept in infotype 1001. These relationships are called unilateral
relationships.
11.7 ALLOWED RELATIONSHIPS

A B C X
Certain relationships make sense only between certain object types. Therefore, SAP has
specified which relationships are allowed between which object types. If you are creating
â
a relationship record, you can display allowed relationship by choosing Extras Allowed
relationships. Allowed relationships are stored in view T777E. The report RHRELAT0
(Allowed Relationships of Object Types) reports on the relationships permitted for an
object type.
12 Structures
12.1 STRUCTURE DEFINITION

A A A A
An organization consists of organizational units, positions, persons, etc. These objects are
related to each other to form various structures. SAP does not have separate database
tables for each structure; that would limit SAP to only those structures for which it
created database tables. Instead it has a flexible solution. It stores all objects in
infotype 1000 (table HRP1000) and all relationships in infotype 1001 (table HRP1001). A
structure uses some of these objects and some of these relationships in a certain way.
These are defined in an evaluation path. Thus, using objects, relationships and evaluation
paths, you can create unlimited number of structures.
12.2 EVALUATION PATH

A A A A
You can maintain evaluation paths using transaction OOAW. The system first shows the
list of evaluation paths.
150
CHAPTER 12 Structures 151
You can select an evaluation path and maintain its properties or create an evaluation
path starting with Z.
The above evaluation path represents a pattern. You specify a starting organizational
unit. According to the first line of the above evaluation path, all positions belonging to
the starting organizational unit are found. Then, all organizational units reporting to the
starting organizational unit are found. Thus, the first level structure of the starting
organizational unit has organizational units and positions under it. The evaluation does
not stop there. It is repeated for each organizational unit in the first level, giving the
second level. This continues until there are no more organizational units in the last level.
The evaluation takes place in the sequence of number. The system matches the object
type. Then it looks for relationship records where relationship (e.g. B003), priority and
related object type matches. It selects all the objects found in the order of priority and
goes to the next line of the evaluation path for each object. If skip is ticked, the next object
is found, but the relationship is not displayed in the structure.
12.3 USING EVALUATION PATHS IN SAP PROGRAMS

A C X X
SAP programs use the evaluation paths created by SAP. If you create your own evaluation
paths which are slightly different from SAP's evaluation paths, you may want that evaluation
path to be used instead. SAP lets you do this. Instead of hard-coding the evaluation path
in the program, it picks them from view V_T77S0AW. If you want to use your own
evaluation path, you can put it in this view, replacing SAP's entry, and the system will
use the evaluation path specified by you.
12.4 IMPORTANT STRUCTURES

A A A A
12.4.1 Organizational Structure
Evaluation path
Structure
You can see the organizational structure starting from the highest organizational unit, or
starting from any other organizational unit (in all structures you specify the starting
object). For the specified organizational unit, the next level organizational units are selected.
Then for each organizational unit in the first level, next level organizational units are
selected. This goes on until there are no more organizational units below the last level
organizational units. In standard reporting, transaction S_AHR_61016493 uses evaluation
path ORGEH to display the organizational structure.
12.4.2 Organizational Structure with Positions
Evaluation path
Structure
This structure shows the complete organizational structure and positions under each
organizational unit. In standard reporting, transaction S_AHR_61016494 uses evaluation
path PLSTE to display the organizational structure with positions.
12.4.3 Organizational Structure with Positions and Persons
Evaluation path
Structure
This structure shows the complete organizational structure with positions and persons
under each organizational unit. You can use transaction S_AHR_61016528 with evaluation
path O-O-S-P to display organizational structure with positions and persons.
12.4.4 Organizational Structure with Persons
Evaluation path
Structure
This structure shows the complete organizational structure and persons under each
organizational unit. Note that the persons are attached to positions, but positions are
omitted from display because skip checkbox is ticked. In standard reporting, transaction
S_AHR_61016495 uses evaluation path PERS-O to display the organizational structure
with persons.
12.4.5 Organizational Structure with Work Centers

Structure
This structure shows the complete organizational structure and work centers under each
organizational unit. Note that the persons are attached to positions, but positions are
omitted from display because skip checkbox is ticked. In standard reporting, transaction
S_AHR_61016496 uses evaluation path ARBP-O to display the organizational structure
with work centers. If there are positions reporting to positions within an organizational
unit, their work centers are also displayed.
12.4.6 Reporting Structure without Persons
Evaluation path
Structure
This structure shows all position to position reporting. In standard reporting, transaction
S_AHR_61016512 uses evaluation path ORGA to display the reporting structure.
12.4.7 Reporting Structure with Persons
Evaluation path
Structure
This structure shows all position to position reporting along with holders of those positions.
In standard reporting, transaction S_AHR_61016513 uses evaluation path ORGA-P to display
the reporting structure.
12.4.8 Activity Profile of Positions along Organizational Structure
Evaluation path
Structure
This structure shows the organizational structure with positions and tasks. Tasks of the
jobs associated with positions are also shown, but the jobs are not shown. If there are
positions reporting to positions within an organizational unit, those positions and their
tasks are also displayed. In standard reporting, transaction S_AHR_61016523 uses evaluation
path AUFGABEX to show the tasks for positions along the organizational structure.
12.4.9 Activity Profile of Positions with Persons along Organizational Structure
Evaluation path
Structure
This structure is the same as above, except that the persons holding positions are also displayed.
In standard reporting, transaction S_AHR_61016524 uses evaluation path AUFGABEP to
show the tasks and persons for positions along the organizational structure.
12.5 STRUCTURE REPORTS

A A A A
Displaying structures
You can use transaction S_AHR_61016528 to display structures. You specify the evaluation
path that determines the structure being shown.
Structure navigation instrument

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016529 to display objects in a structure by specifying
the starting object and the evaluation path. The system shows all objects in the structure.
You can select an object and do the following.
Icon Purpose
You can display the selected object.

You specify the evaluation path and the system takes you to structure
display/maintenance where you can maintain the structure.
The system shows you all relationships of the object. You can
select a line and perform all these functions for the related object.
You can maintain the selected object.
HR reporting via personnel planning structures

You can run a Personnel Administration report for objects selected based on organizational
plan using transaction RE_RHPNPSUB or S_AHR_61016533. In addition to the standard
selection screen, the system gives the following additional fields on the selection screen.

PA reporting Here you enter the report name you want to run.
Report variant If you have saved a report variant, and you would like to run that
variant, you specify that here.
Extended personnel If you tick this checkbox, you can select from the parameters in
selection Personnel Administration.
Sort by personnel If you tick this checkbox, you can sort the report by personnel
number number.
12.6 MATRIX STRUCTURES

A A A A
12.6.1 Purpose and Overview

An organizational plan is structured like a tree. You start with top level organizational
unit, which has smaller organizational units. The smaller organizational units may in
turn have still smaller organizational units and so on. There are positions which may belong
to any of these organizational units. Then there are persons who occupy these positions.
HR practitioners have found difficulties with this concept of single position reporting.
Should the finance manager of a plant report to the plant head, or should he report to
the corporate finance manager? In such situations, many companies adopt dual reporting.
Plant finance manager reports to the corporate finance manager functionally, and to the
plant head administratively. This is called matrix organizational structure.
Similar situation may arise when a company has presence in multiple countries, and it
is a legal entity in each country. Take the example of ABC consulting. It is organized
functionally into business units. However, it operates from multiple countries. SAP
consulting is based in India, whereas SAP education is based in U.K. It thus has a legal
structure which is country based, whereas functional structure has lines of businesses.
SAP supports matrix structures. Matrix structures have two dimensions. You create
both the structures independently and then create relationship between objects of
dimension 1 and objects of dimension 2.
12.6.2 Matrix Structure Definition

You can predefine your matrix structures in view T779M. Here you define both the
dimensions and the relationship of objects in dimension 1 with objects in dimension 2. In
each dimension, you specify the dimension name, the object type and the evaluation path.
12.6.3 Matrix Structure Creation

You create both the structures independently and then create relationship between objects
of dimension 1 and objects of dimension 2. The matrix structure can be created or changed
using transaction PPME and viewed using transaction PPMS. When you run transaction
PPME, you get the following screen.
Here you can specify the matrix type. If you specify the matrix type, the system takes
details of the two dimensions from view T779M. However, it is not mandatory. If you
don't define the matrix structure here, you can directly input the parameters in standard
selection. If you saved a variant while using this program earlier, you can specify that
variant. In the selection screen, the system gives you a choice of three views.
Structure dimension 1 view

In structure dimension 1 view, the structure of dimension 1 is displayed. Dimension 2
objects are shown linked to dimension 1 structure. Dimension 2 structure is not shown.
Structure dimension 2 view

In structure dimension 2 view, the structure of dimension 2 is displayed. Dimension 1
objects are shown linked to dimension 2 structure. Dimension 1 structure is not shown.
Matrix view
In the matrix view, dimension 1 is shown as rows and dimension 2 as columns. Dark
squares show the relationship between the two. You may switch on abbreviation
(View â Abbreviation on) to see the compact view of the matrix.
You can invert dimensions by clicking .

You can also show or hide additional object information such as the ID, the abbreviation,
or the validity period. You can also create relationships by clicking the hollow squares.
Similarly, you can delete a relationship by clicking a dark square.
You can delimit a relationship by selecting a cell in the matrix (other than square), and
clicking .
13 Infotype Features
13.1 INFOTYPES

A A A A
It is not enough to create structures using objects and relationships. There is need to
maintain information about objects. Information about objects is maintained in infotypes.
Each infotype is a logical group of information. SAP provides a large number of infotypes.
When you run transaction PP01, the system shows the infotypes you can maintain for an
object.
166
CHAPTER 13 Infotype Features 167
13.2 INFOTYPES COMMON STRUCTURE

A A A A
Important infotypes are discussed in subsequent chapters. However, there are certain
fields which are common to all infotypes. These will be discussed here to avoid repetition.
Personnel planning infotypes are stored in HRPnnnn tables where nnnn is infotype number.
Client
In a SAP server there may be multiple clients. When you logon to SAP, you specify the
client. All the data you create in infotypes is stored with logon client in client field.
Plan version
SAP lets you create alternative organizational plans using plan version. For each infotype
record the plan version is stored in this field.
Object type
There are different types of objects, e.g. organizational unit, position, etc. This field contains
the type of the object stored in the infotype.
Object id
Each object is given a unique object id by the system. An object is identified by its object
id, and not by the object name.
Subtype
This field contains the subtype of the infotype, if any.
Planning status
SAP provides you facility for creating a planned object, which could be submitted for
approval, and get accepted or rejected. If accepted, the status can be changed to active.
For day to day use, e.g. workflow, only the active objects are used.
Start date, end date

If the characteristics of an object changes, you can maintain both old and new characteristics
using these validity date fields. Validity period of the object is the outer limit of the
validity period of all infotypes and relationships of that object. If the validity of the object
is delimited, validity of all its relationships and infotypes is also delimited.
Language key
You can maintain object details in multiple languages.
Number of infotype record with same key

If time constraint of an infotype permits multiple records to be held on the same day, this
system generated field ensures uniqueness of the primary key.
Concatenation of object type and object id

This field contains concatenation of object type and object id. This is only for operational
ease of the SAP system.
Infotype
Each database table contains data of only one infotype. This field contains that infotype
number. This is also for operational ease of the SAP system.
Changed on
The system automatically stores the date and time when an infotype record was created,
or last changed.
User name
The system automatically stores the name of the user who created, or last changed, an
infotype record.
Reason
If you specify the reason for changing an infotype record, that is stored in this field.
Historical record flag

If you mark a record historical, it can be read but cannot be modified.
Text module for infotype

This field contains the text module for the infotype, which contains more detailed
description.
13.3 INFOTYPES ALLOWED FOR AN OBJECT TYPE

A A A A
SAP has a large number of infotypes. For an object type only some of these make sense.
Therefore, when you run transaction PP01, initially the system does not show any infotype.
But when you select the object type, it shows all the infotypes which are allowed for that
object type. Some of these infotypes are required in Organizational Management. Other
infotypes are used for other functionalities of SAP. Infotypes which are allowed for an
object type are stored in table T777I.
13.4 INFOTYPE TIME CONSTRAINT

A A A A
infotype + subtype + object type level. In exceptional cases, the time constraint may also
depend on target object type and is defined in table T77ZR.
0 May only Information must exist for the This time constraint is applicable
exist once entire life cycle of the object only to infotype 1957.
and cannot be changed.
1 Without gaps Information must exist for the Infotype 1000 (Objects) has time
entire life cycle of the object but constraint 1, as it must exist with-
can be changed. out gap.
2 With gaps Information is optional but can Infotype 1002 (Description) has
exist only once within a user- time constraint 2. During different
defined period. periods you may have different
descriptions and for some period
you may have none, but you can
not have more than one description
at the same time.
3 As often as Information is optional, and Infotype 1006 (Restrictions) has
required many data records can exist time constraint 3. At any time, you
simultaneously within a user- may have 0, 1, or more restrictions.
defined period.
13.5 INFOTYPE TOOLS AND REPORTS

A A A A
Infotype maintenance
You can run transaction S_AHR_61016531 or PSO3 to display and maintain infotypes.
You can specify whether country-specific infotypes are to be displayed or not. If you
specify an object, it calls transaction PP01 or PP01_DISP. If you do not specify the object,
or specify a number of objects, it shows you the infotypes maintained for each object.
Infotype reporting
You can use transaction S_AHR_61016532 or RE_RHINFAW0 to report on any infotype.
You can select the objects structurally by specifying a starting object and evaluation path.
Alternatively you may select all objects of a type, or objects in a number range. In addition
to the standard selection screen parameters, you enter the following additional parameters.
Infotype Here you specify the infotype that you wish to report on.
Infotype must be entered.
Subtype If you wish to report on a particular subtype, enter that.
If subtype field is blank, all subtypes are reported.
Evaluation of infotype fields If you do not tick this checkbox, the values of the fields
are not displayed.
Infotype field selection If you tick this checkbox, the system shows you the fields
available in the infotype and you can select the fields which
are to be displayed.
All objects If you are doing structural reporting, you get a structure
of objects. Some of these objects may have the specified
infotype, while some may not have it. If you want to see
all objects in the structure, regardless of whether they have
the specified infotype or not, you tick this checkbox.
Objects without this infotype You can tick this checkbox to generate a reverse report,
e.g. a list of jobs that do not have a description.
The selected infotypes are displayed.
Display infotypes
You can use transaction RE_RHDESC10 to display infotypes. You specify a starting object
and the evaluation path. The system shows you all the objects in the structure. You can
select an object and display infotypes by clicking . You can see
the next infotype by pressing F3 or clicking .
Individual maintenance
You can run transaction PSO4 to maintain a specific infotype from the list of objects
displayed. An indicator beside the objects shows you whether the infotype has been
maintained for them or not.
New end date

You can run transaction RE_RHGRENZ4 to set a new delimitation date for the records
found using the selection screen. It primarily serves to recreate or extend records that
have been delimited in error. The records can be given a historical flag indicator so that
they can no longer be modified using transaction PP01. You can also cancel this historical
record. To access the correct selection of records, you must enter the old delimitation
date. All records with the same end date as the delimitation date will be given the new
delimitation date. All other records remain unchanged.
New start date

You can run transaction RE_RHBEGDA0 to set a new start date for the records found
using the selection screen. It primarily serves to correct the start date of records
retrospectively. To access the correct selection of records, enter the old start date. All
records with the old start date are given the new start date. All other records remain
unchanged.
Translate
You can run transaction RE_RHTRANS0 to translate language-dependent texts and all
existing subtypes of the Object infotype (1000) and Description infotype (1002). Provided
that the texts have been translated, they are displayed automatically in the appropriate
logon language.
HR reporting via personnel planning structures

You can run a Personnel Administration report for objects selected based on organizational
plan using transaction RE_RHPNPSUB or S_AHR_61016533. In addition to the standard
selection screen, the system gives the following additional fields on the selection screen.

PA reporting Here you enter the report name you want to run.
Report variant If you have saved a report variant, and you would like to
run that variant, you specify that here.
Extended personnel selection If you tick this checkbox, you can select from the parameters
in Personnel Administration.
Sort by personnel number If you tick this checkbox, you can sort the report by
personnel number.
14 Infotypes
14.1 DESCRIPTION

A A A A
14.1.1 Description (Infotype 1002)

You may need to store descriptions of different objects. You may do so in infotype 1002.
In transaction PP01, you select ‘Description’ and click Create. You will get the following
screen.
175
Object (organizational unit)

Object whose description is being created, changed or displayed.
Planning status
Planning status of the object description.
Validity
An object can have one description up to a certain date, and another after that date. This
is stored using validity period of description.
Change information
If you click this icon, the system will show the user who created or last changed the
record and the date on which it was done.
Subtype
If you want to keep different types of descriptions for an object, you may do so by using
different subtypes.
CHAPTER 14 Infotypes 177
Language
You can keep object descriptions in multiple languages. This field gets its value from the
logon language.
Description
Here you enter the object description. The information you store in this infotype is for
reference only and cannot be reported on.
14.1.2 Types of Description
Purpose
You can define the types of description you want. It is recommended that you don't
delete the existing subtypes because they may be used in other modules, e.g. Training
and Event Management.
IMG node
SM30 â V_778U
Screen
Primary key
Infotype + Subtype
14.1.3 Formatting of Description

When you create a description in infotype 1002, SAP gives you a blank text box in which
you write your text.
However, sometimes you may want the text to be formatted. SAP lets you define the
subtypes for which you want the text to be formatted. For these subtypes, the screen
looks as under. Here for each line, you can define the format.
You can specify the subtypes for which you want the text to be formatted in view T772S.
14.2 DEPARTMENT/STAFF

A A B B
14.2.1 Department/Staff (Infotype 1003)

You can store department/staff indicator for an organizational unit or position in
infotype 1003.
Staff
Some organizations differentiate between line functions and staff functions. If an
organizational unit or position is a staff function, you can tick this checkbox. Positions or
organizational units marked with a staff flag are shown in the graphic next to their
respective superior nodes. Without a staff flag they are shown under the superior
node.
Department
When you hire an employee in Personnel Administration and assign him a position, the
system also shows his organizational unit. However, some companies define certain
organizational units as departments, while other organizational units are non-departments.
In Personnel Administration the employees are shown only against departments. If you
have such a scenario, you activate the department switch. Then you tick this checkbox for
organizational units which are departments. In Personnel Administration when you assign
a position to an employee, the system will show the organizational unit to which the
position belongs. If that organizational unit is not a department, the system will find a
superior organizational unit which is a department and show it.
14.2.2 Department Switch

You can use department flag in infotype 1003 to specify organizational units which are
departments. If you don't want to maintain the department flag in infotype 1003, you set
the department switch in table T77S0 to 0. In that case, the organizational unit directly
above a position is its department. If you want to identify only certain organizational
units as departments, then you set the switch to 1. In that case, the organizational unit
with a department flag in infotype 1003 above a position is its department.
14.2.3 Staff Reports
Staff functions for objects

You can use transaction S_AHR_61016492 or RE_RHXSTAB0 to list staff functions for
organizational units. Similarly, you can use transaction RE_RHXSTAB1 to list staff functions
for all positions. You can also use both these transactions to report staff functions of all
objects, or objects of certain type. To do so, tick the checkbox 'Standard selection screen',
Execute and then specify the object type (either organizational unit or position).
14.3 CHARACTER

B C C C
14.3.1 Character (Infotype 1004)

You can use infotype 1004 to specify the character of a task. In each box you can select
one of the characteristics for the task. Infotype 1004 can also be maintained for work
centers.
14.3.2 Character Reports
Character of tasks in organizational structure

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016525 to display tasks having character definition in
infotype 1004. It uses evaluation path AUFGABEX to show the tasks in the organizational
structure.
Character of individual tasks

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016526 to see the tasks for which infotype 1004 (Character)
is maintained and its character attributes.
14.4 PLANNED COMPENSATION

B B C C
14.4.1 Planned Compensation (Infotype 1005)

Infotype 1005 allows you to identify the compensation you plan to pay to a given position,
job, or work center. The information entered in this infotype is used as a default value
in infotype 0008 in Personnel Administration. Planned compensation can be specified in
terms of pay grade, pay scale, or direct monetary value.
14.4.2 Planned Compensation Reports
Planned labor costs

The selection screen has the following important fields.
Reporting along If you select this, the cost is reported for the entire organizational
a structure structure starting from the specified organizational unit, otherwise
only for the specified organizational unit.
Values Here you specify whether minimum, maximum or midpoint costs
are to be reported.
Period Here you specify whether planned costs are for a month or week, etc.
Conversion type In case the reporting currency is different from the planned currency,
the method of conversion to be used is specified here.
Currency Here you specify the currency for reporting planned costs.
14.5 RESTRICTIONS

B C C C
14.5.1 Restrictions (Infotype 1006)

You can use infotype 1006 to record any restrictions applicable to employees who are
assigned to a work center. For example, a work center that has no wheelchair access
would be unsuitable for disabled employees. You can also specify the reason for the
restriction. You can create an infotype 1006 record only for work centers.
14.5.2 Restrictions Reports
Work centers with restrictions along organizational structure

restrictions along organizational structure. This report uses evaluation path ARBPLX. For
this report to work, the work center must be linked to position.
Single work centers with restrictions

You can run transaction RE_RHXIAW01 or S_AHR_61016519 to see restrictions on work
centers.
14.5.3 Types of Restrictions
Purpose
Here you maintain the master list of restrictions applicable to all work centers in your
organization.
IMG node
SM30 â T778C
Transaction
S_AHR_61007156–Create Restrictions
Screen
Primary key
Restrictions
14.5.4 Reasons for Restrictions
Purpose
Here you maintain the master list of reasons for restrictions in your organization. Note
that reasons are not restrictionwise. Therefore, all reasons are available for all restrictions.
The person creating infotype 1006 record has to ensure that the reason is appropriate for
the restriction.
IMG node
SM30 â T778X
Transaction
S_AHR_61003170–Create Justifications
Screen
Primary key
Reason
14.6 VACANCY

A A B B
14.6.1 Distinction between Unoccupied and Vacant Positions

One might consider every unoccupied position as vacant. In that case, whenever a position
becomes unoccupied, it will be declared vacant and recruitment action will get triggered.
Many companies don't want this to happen. They would like to review unoccupied positions,
and declare them vacant selectively. Therefore, SAP provides a separate vacancy flag for
positions. Thus, a position may be unoccupied, but not vacant. In a reverse scenario, you
may declare an occupied position vacant so as to trigger recruitment action, because you
are looking for a successor. Therefore, SAP allows vacancy flag for an occupied position.
14.6.2 Vacancy (Infotype 1007)

Vacancy flag is stored in infotype 1007. This infotype can be maintained only for positions.
When the vacancy is filled, the system automatically changes the status of this infotype
record. You can mark vacancy records as historical records, when you no longer need
them—that is, once a position is filled. Historical records are maintained in the database,
but cannot be changed or used in processing.
14.6.3 Use of Vacancy Flag

Vacancy information is used primarily to trigger recruitment action. It is also used in
career and succession planning and personnel cost planning. SAP provides a report of
vacant positions and another which lists occupied positions which are declared vacant.
Refer to chapter 4.7 for details.
14.6.4 Vacant and Obsolete Positions

Positions cannot be flagged vacant and obsolete simultaneously. If a vacant position is
flagged as obsolete, the vacancy is delimited at the start of the validity of the obsolete flag
(minus one day).
14.6.5 Activation of Vacancy Infotype

Group Sem. abbr. Explanation
PPVAC PPVAC If your company considers every unfilled position vacant, you
maintain value 0 here. In such a case, infotype 1007 cannot be
maintained. If you want to distinguish between unfilled and
vacant positions, you maintain value 1 here, and maintain
infotype 1007 for the positions you want to fill. If integration
with the Recruitment component is active, data on vacancies
(that is, positions marked as vacant in infotype 1007) is
transferred to Personnel Administration table T750X. When
you create infotype 1007 records, you can enter the additional
information required by table T750X. Vacant positions are
available in Recruitment for recruitment action. When a vacant
position is filled by a new employee, vacancy infotype is
delimited.
PPVAC PREF If this switch is set to 'X', when you create a vacancy, the
system will ask you to enter the personnel officer and line
manager responsible. However, in the Organization and Staffing
interface, the system does not ask you to enter the personnel
officer or line manager, regardless of the value you entered
for this switch.
PPVAC VACWF When an employee leaves a position, vacancy needs to be
created. Similarly, when an employee occupies a position,
vacancy needs to be delimited. If this switch is blank, the
system pops up a dialog box asking the user to confirm these
actions. If this switch has value 'X', the system creates an
event which triggers a workflow, and these questions are put
to the chief of the organizational unit in which the position
has become occupied or unoccupied.
14.7 ACCOUNT ASSIGNMENT

A A B B
14.7.1 Account Assignment Features (Infotype 1008)

You can maintain the following account assignments for organizational units and positions.
Account assignments are inherited by lower level organizational units and positions. If
integration with Personnel Administration is active, this infotype provides values for the
classification of employees in the personnel structure. These values may be personnel

areas, personnel subareas or business areas. If the data you enter differs from the default
values, a warning message appears.
Company code
Here you can specify the company code of an organizational unit. Company code is
inherited by lower level organizational units. It is inherited by positions if position
inheritance switch is active. The inherited values cannot be changed.
Business area
Here you can specify the business area of an organizational unit. If you have specified
the cost center, you must select the business area to which the cost center belongs. Business
area is inherited by lower level organizational units. It is inherited by positions if position
inheritance switch is active. You can change the inherited business area.
Personnel area and personnel subarea

Here you can specify the personnel area and personnel subarea of an organizational unit.
Personnel area and personnel subarea is inherited by lower level organizational units. It
is inherited by positions if position inheritance switch is active. You can change the
inherited personnel area and personnel subarea.
Controlling area
An organizational plan must be entirely within one controlling area. You should specify
the controlling area of the root organizational unit. All objects will inherit it from there.
Controlling area cannot be changed for any object. If you have specified the cost center
of an organizational unit, you should leave this field blank as the controlling area is
already specified along with cost center.
Enterprise organization
You can specify the controlling areas for which enterprise organization is active in view
â â
V_TKA06_CC (Controlling Cost Center Accounting Enterprise Organization Enter â
Settings for Enterprise Organization).
Enterprise organization is based on the organizational plan in HR, and contains

additional functions and organizational units specific to accounting. It integrates the HR
organizational plan, the cost center standard hierarchy and the Profit center standard
hierarchy. If the enterprise organization is active for a controlling area, the HR organizational
â
structure is maintained through transaction KEO1 (Controlling Cost Center Accounting
â Enterprise Organization â Create Enterprise Organization). The account assignment
of the organizational unit is specified here and not in the HR organizational structure.
14.7.2 Inheritance of Account Assignment by Positions

If you want positions to inherit controlling area, company code, and business area from
their respective organizational units, you set the following switch to ‘X’ in view V_T77S0SC.
14.7.3 Default Value for Controlling Area

A cost center is always specified along with a controlling area. When you create relationships
between cost centers and positions or organizational units, the controlling area given
here will be used as default.
14.8 HEALTH EXAMINATIONS

B B C C
14.8.1 Health Examinations (Infotype 1009)

Some of your work centers may be hazardous and you may want employees working
there to undergo periodic health examinations. You can maintain such health examinations
in infotype 1009. There may also be work centers where persons with certain health
conditions are not permitted. For example, persons who have had TB may be excluded
from work centers where food is handled. You can maintain this data in health exclusions.
Information on both these conditions is maintained in infotype 1009. Infotype 1009 is
maintained only for work centers.
14.8.2 Health Examinations Reports
Work centers requiring health examinations in an organization

health examinations and exclusions along organizational structure. This report uses evaluation
path ARBPLX. For this report to work, the work center must be linked to position.
Single work centers requiring health examinations

You can run transaction RE_RHXIAW03 or S_AHR_61016521 to see health examinations
and exclusions for work centers.
14.8.3 Health Examinations Type
Purpose
Here you maintain the master lists of health exclusions and health examinations. You can
also specify the frequency of health examinations.
IMG node
SM30 â T778G
Transaction
S_AHR_61003603–Create Health Promotion Measures
Screen
Primary key
Subtype + Examination Type
14.9 AUTHORITIES/RESOURCES

B C C C
14.9.1 Authorities/Resources (Infotype 1010)

In infotype 1010 you can maintain the authority granted to a position. You can also maintain
the technical resources available to a position. You can also maintain infotype 1010 for
work centers.
14.9.2 Authorities/Resources Reports

You can run transaction RE_RHXHFMT0, S_AHR_61016507 or S_AHR_61016516 to see
authorities and resources for a position or for all positions directly belonging to an
organizational unit. Authorities and resources may be maintained directly for positions.
Alternatively, authorities and resources may be maintained for work centers which are
linked to positions. The evaluation path used in the report is ARBPL. This evaluation
path does not take you down the organizational structure.
14.9.3 Authorities/Resources Type
Purpose
Here you maintain the master list of authorities and technical resources in your organization.
You can use them in infotype 1010 to specify the authority of positions and resources
available. You can also maintain infotype 1010 for work centers.
IMG node
SM30 â T778W
Transaction
S_AHR_61007150–Create Authorities/Resources
Screen
Primary key
Subtype + Resources
14.10 WORK SCHEDULE

B B C C
14.10.1 Work Schedule (Infotype 1011)

You can define planned working times for your organizational units, positions, or work
centers in order to store the projected volume of work per object. If a position is to be
reoccupied, you can, for example, compare the planned working time stored for the
position with the planned working time stored for the employee in infotype 0007. In this
way, you can avoid unwanted inconsistencies. The work schedule is only used as a
reference in Organizational Management and does not affect payroll accounting. Work
schedules are reported in staff assignment report (transaction S_AHR_61016503). You can
create more complex work schedules using the Workforce Planning component.
Hours per day/week/month/year

You can specify working hours for a day, a week, a month, or a year.
Percentage
Instead of directly specify working hours, you can specify a percentage which will be
multiplied to default working hours to determine working hours.
Work schedule group

Within an organizational unit there may be employees of different categories. If you want
to have different working time for different categories of employees, you can create
different work schedule groups based on employee groups and employee subgroups and
assign different working times for different work schedule groups.
Standard working time

If the working time of an organizational unit is to be inherited by its subordinate
organizational units and positions, you tick this checkbox. The inherited value may be
overridden by specifying the working time for the subordinate objects. If there is no
working time specified for a position, the system will check if working time is specified
for the organizational unit to which the position belongs and whether standard working
time field is checked for the organizational unit. If both these conditions are met, the
system takes working time from the organizational unit. If these conditions are not met,
the system goes up further, until it finds an organizational unit which meets these conditions.
If no organizational unit meets this condition, the system takes the time from global
values specified in table T77S0.
14.10.2 Work Schedule Groups
Purpose
Here you specify the work schedule group for a combination of employee group and
employee subgroup. Work schedule groups are subtypes of infotype 1011.
IMG node
SM30 â T77WT
Transaction
S_AHR_61003187–Create Working Time Groups
Screen
Primary key
Employee Group + Employee Subgroup
14.10.3 Work Schedule Rule Values
Purpose
Here you specify the working time details which apply to all positions in the organization;
unless a more specific assignment exists. However, it is recommended that rather than
creating a working time for the whole enterprise, you create an infotype 1011 record for
the root organizational unit and allow the value to be passed down the hierarchy. This
will let you override the values wherever required. Also, if working hours change, you
will be able to see both old and new values. This will not be possible if you maintain
working hours here.
IMG node
SM30 â T77S0
Screen
14.11 EMPLOYEE GROUP/SUBGROUP

B B C C
14.11.1 Employee Group/Subgroup (Infotype 1013)

You can use infotype 1013 to assign employee group and employee subgroup to a position,
work center, or budget structure element. If you create this infotype for a position, and
assign the position to a person in Personnel Administration, the system suggests the
employee group and the employee subgroup, if integration is active. If you enter a different
employee group or subgroup, a warning message appears. Also, assigning a position to

an employee group/subgroup allows the system to determine the work schedule group
and the relevant working time in infotype 1011.
Master lists of employee groups and employee subgroups are defined in Personnel
Administration. If you are using Organizational Management, but not Personnel
Administration, and want to use this infotype, you have to define these master lists.
14.12 OBSOLETE

A A B B
14.12.1 Obsolete (Infotype 1014)

Positions that are no longer required as a result of reorganization, but are still occupied
can be flagged as obsolete in infotype 1014. This enables you to recognize instantly if any
action is required, e.g. searching for new activities for the holders of such positions.
When an obsolete position becomes unoccupied, recruitment action is not triggered, the
system asks you to delimit the validity period of the obsolete position. Positions flagged
as obsolete cannot be set to vacant and therefore recruitment action cannot be triggered.
Obsolete positions cannot be reoccupied. This infotype is used mainly for positions, although
you can use it for work centers as well.
14.13 COST DISTRIBUTION

A A A A
14.13.1 Cost Distribution (Infotype 1018)

Costs incurred by an organizational object are usually written to the cost center directly
assigned to the object (master cost center) or the cost center inherited by the object from
a superior object. However, sometimes you wish to distribute costs to more than one cost
center. You can do so using infotype 1018. You can distribute the costs to multiple cost
centers by specifying a percentage for each. You can even charge costs to orders and
projects (WBS elements). If the percentages add to less than 100, the balance cost is
charged to the master cost center of the object. Subordinate organizational objects within
an organizational unit (positions, work centers) inherit cost distribution, if they have not
been assigned their own master cost center or cost distribution. You can create this infotype
for organizational units, positions and work centers. Distribution of employee costs may
also be specified in infotype 0027 in Personnel Administration. If infotype 0027 exists,
costs are distributed based on infotype 0027. If infotype 0027 does not exist, costs are
distributed according to infotype 1018. Cost distribution to additional cost centers is
simulated as external relationship A014 in reports.
14.13.2 Cost Distribution Integration

For cost distribution to work, integration between organizational management and Personnel
Administration (PLOGI ORGA) and the integration of cost distribution (PLOGI COSTD)
should be active in view T77S0. Also the integration plan version should be specified.
14.14 QUOTA PLANNING

B C C X
14.14.1 Quota Planning (Infotype 1019)

You may do quota planning for an organizational unit in transaction PPOME. Quota
planning can also be done in Manager Self-Service. That data is stored in infotype 1019.
It stores number of positions or FTEs (Full-time Equivalents) for each job for an
organizational unit, for a planning type (budget type) and for a validity period.
14.14.2 Generation of Positions for Quota Planning

After quota planning, if the planned positions are more than actual positions, you need
to generate positions. On the other hand if the planned positions are less than actual
positions, you need to reduce positions. You can do this using transaction S_PH0_48000084.
If the positions are to be generated, the system generates them and displays the list. If the
positions are to be reduced, it shows the number to be reduced and lists the positions
from which you can select (List â Reduction). Alternatively, you can tick the checkbox
'Automatic reduction' and the system reduces the FTE value of all positions in the required
proportion.
14.14.3 Quota Planning Type
Purpose
If you have different types of quota planning, e.g. first planning, second planning, etc.
you set that up here. You can choose from these in the 'Budget type' field in the expert
mode and 'Planning type' field in the organization and staffing mode.
IMG node
SM30 â V_778U
Screen
Primary key
Infotype + Subtype
14.14.4 Planning Type and Periods
Purpose
Quota planning may take place in several iterations, e.g. first planning, second planning,
etc. For each planning type, you specify the planning period, default time interval, and
which planning type is currently being worked on in the planning process.
IMG node
SM30 â T77POSBUD
Screen
Primary key
Subtype
Subtype
This field contains the planning type for which you are specifying the planning period.
Current planning
A planning type is selected for each round of planning; that is, the system determines
whether this is the first round of planning, or the second, etc. The user can only plan
using the planning type flagged as current in this table. Only one planning type should
be ticked in this table.
Total
Time interval
During quota planning, the planning period is divided into multiple time intervals of the
size specified here. For example, if you have a planning period of one year, and time
interval of one month, you can plan the manpower for each of the twelve months. When
you are performing quota planning for an organizational unit, this is the default interval
which can be changed.
Start date and end date

These fields contain the planning period for a planning type.
14.14.5 Calculation in Full-time Equivalents (FTE)
Full-time equivalents
You can do quota planning either in terms of number of positions, or in terms of number
of full-time equivalents, FTEs. When you do quota planning in terms of FTEs, you consider
the working time of position and the working time of the organizational unit to determine
how many FTEs the position fills. Alternatively, you determine it on the basis of the
staffing percentage of the position in conjunction with the capacity utilization level of the
employee (person).
WORKT FTEQ If you set this switch to 'X', you are specifying that you want to
carry out quota planning using FTEs rather than positions. In
this case, in quota planning you can use FTEs with up to two
places after the decimal point.
WORKT FTEP If this switch is blank, you compute FTEs considering the working
time of position and the working time of the organizational unit.
Ø FTE of position = Working time (infotype 1011) of position/
working time of organizational unit.
Ø If working time of position is not maintained, FTE = 1.
If this switch is 'X', you compute FTE on the basis of the staffing
percentage of the position in conjunction with the capacity
utilization level of the employee (person).
Ø If the position is un-staffed, or staffed by a user, the value of
the FTE is 0.
Ø If the position is staffed by an employee (person), the value
of the FTE is the product of the staffing percentage (A/B 008
relationship between S and P) and the capacity utilization
level (stored in infotype 0008 of Personnel Administration),
where 100% corresponds to the value 1.
14.14.6 Quota Planning Tools
Copying the current required positions into a planning type

When you do quota planning for a future period, you may like to copy the current plan
and then modify. You can use transaction S_PH0_48000086 to create a future plan based
on the current plan.
Copying quota planning into another planning type

If you have done the first round of quota planning, and now want to do the second
round, it will save effort to copy the first round’s plan in the second round’s plan and
modify. You can do so using transaction S_PH0_48000087. The target planning type must
be the planning type marked as active, since it is only here that the current plan figures
can be entered. Before copying the quota planning data of a particular organizational
unit, the system deletes any existing records relating to that organizational unit which are
already in the target planning type.
Delete unoccupied positions on key date

If you have unoccupied positions and you think they may not be needed, you can run
transaction S_PH0_48000088 to delimit or delete them from the specified deletion date.
The system does the following:
Ø Unoccupied positions whose object validity period starts before the deletion date are
delimited.
Ø Unoccupied positions that exist from exactly the deletion date are deleted.
Ø Unoccupied positions whose object validity period does not begin until after the
deletion date are neither delimited nor deleted. They remain unchanged.
Freeze planned quota

When businesses face tough times, they often respond by putting their growth plans on
hold and freezing quotas until a certain date. You can do that using transaction
S_PH0_48000085. The current quota is used to overwrite quotas until the specified period.
Quotas beyond the specified period remain unchanged.
14.15 ADDRESS

A A B C
14.15.1 Address (Infotype 1028)

In infotype 1028, you can maintain addresses of organizational objects, e.g. organizational
units, positions, work centers.
14.15.2 Buildings
You can maintain addresses of your different buildings using transaction S_AHR_61003172
or S_AHR_61011843. You may also do so using transaction SM30 â T777A. Building
addresses are used in infotype 1028.
14.16 MAIL ADDRESS

A A B C
14.16.1 Mail Address (Infotype 1032)

This infotype is not usually required in Organizational Management. In Training and
Event Management, if an organizational unit is a participant in a training program, it
should receive a mail if the training program is cancelled. But who should receive this
mail? For an organizational unit, there might be a SAP user who coordinates on behalf
of the organizational unit. Or, there might be a person with an internet e-mail id, who
coordinates on behalf of the organizational unit. You can record these e-mail ids in
infotype 1032. If your company does not use a SAP mail system, you can use this infotype
to store information about mail addresses for reference purposes only. The system cannot
do anything with the data.
If you want to use internet mail, you specify Internet Mail in the system ID and specify
only internet address.
15 Plan Version
15.1 PLAN VERSION CONCEPT

A A A A
Normally you would have an organizational plan, which reflects your current organization
and is actively used. This plan may change with time to reflect your changing organization.
Plan versions are used to display and maintain

organizational plans in different scenarios
209
Sometimes companies plan a major reorganization. They will like to draw up one or more
alternate plans without disturbing the current organizational plan. They will like to compare,
discuss and decide what the organizational plan will be in future. Finally, they will like
to implement the new organizational plan. In SAP, you don't have to do this planning on
paper. You can create the alternate plans on the system without disturbing the current
and active plan. You do so using multiple plan versions. You can discuss multiple plan
versions, compare them, and decide the plan version that will represent your future
organization. Finally, you implement the new plan. You may do this by copying the
proposed plan in the current and active plan, or you may change the plan version of your
active plan.
If you are not reorganizing and therefore creating alternate organizational plans, you
don't need to worry about plan versions. By default the plan version is set to 01 (current
plan) and the same plan is integrated with Personnel Administration.
However, if you are creating an alternate plan, you set the plan version to the alternate
plan version and create the organizational plan in that plan version. You can also copy
your current organizational plan in the alternate plan version and modify it.
15.2 MAINTAINING PLAN VERSION

A A B C
You can maintain your own plan versions in table T778P.

CHAPTER 15 Plan Version 211
15.3 SETTING PLAN VERSION

A A B C
You can run transaction PSO0 or PSV4 to set plan version. Once you set the plan version,
any objects and relationships you create will be created in that plan version. You can also
set plan version in the Organization and Staffing interface by choosing
Settingsâ Plan version âAlternative, or Settings â Plan version â Active employee.
15.4 ACTIVE PLAN VERSION

A A B C
If there are multiple plan versions, the plan version which is integrated with Personnel
Administration is specified in the following entry in view V_T77S0SC.
15.5 NUMBER ASSIGNMENT FOR ALL PLAN VERSIONS

A B B C
When you are going to use multiple plan versions, you may copy objects from one plan
version to another. If you do so, should the objects be copied with same object numbers
or with different object numbers? You specify your choice in the following entry in
view V_T77S0.
Value Numbers are Copy behavior Advantage Disadvantage

unique across
X All plan Copied objects are given During copy, objects Organizational
versions new object numbers. are not overwritten. plans cannot be
compared.
Blank Within a Copied objects are given Organizational plans During copy,
plan version the same object numbers can be compared. objects may be
from which they are overwritten.
copied.
15.6 COPYING PLAN VERSIONS

A B C X
You can use transaction RE_RHCOPL00 to copy objects from one plan version to another.
If you want to copy only certain infotypes and subtypes, you may specify that. You can
also run this program in test mode.
CHAPTER 15 Plan Version 213
15.7 COPYING STRUCTURES

A B C X
You can run transaction RE_RHCOPYSTRUCT to copy structures from one plan version
to another. It copies the structure specified in the selection screen to the specified plan
version. All objects selected along the evaluation path are copied individually. All new
object IDs are determined by internal number allocation. All infotypes and all relationships
are copied for all the objects selected. The exception in this case is when a reverse relationship
(in the direction of the object to be copied) has time constraint 2.
15.8 COMPARING PLAN VERSIONS

A B C X
You can use transaction RE_RHCOPLPT to compare plan versions and to copy structures
from one plan version to another. It consists of two steps. In the first step the plan
versions are compared, and in the second step the objects are copied.
Comparing plan versions

You specify the objects or substructures that you want to compare in the selection screen.
The system compares the selected objects and substructures in the source plan version
with those in the target plan version. The result of this comparison is displayed on the
next screen as a structural evaluation. A stoplight icon indicates the extent to which an
object in the source plan version is compatible with an object in the target plan version,
or whether it exists in both plan versions.
Green The object exists in both plan versions and is compatible with the selected
evaluation path.
Yellow The object exists in both plan versions and is partially compatible.
Red The object only exists in the source plan version.
If you want to perform a more detailed comparison before copying the objects, you can
display all infotypes of the selected object by choosing Goto â
Object description.
Copying objects
You specify the objects you want to copy by selecting an area and clicking .
16 Planning Status
16.1 PLANNING STATUS

A A A A
You can create all types of organizational objects using transaction PP01. When you run
transaction PP01, you see the following screen. This screen shows tabs, e.g. Active, Planned,
Submitted, etc. and you may have wondered what they are.
215
While creating your organizational objects, you can either create them directly in the
Active status, or create them as Planned, and take them through an approval cycle. The
planning status identifies the status of the object.
Objects with different status can appear in the same plan version. The active objects
represent current operations in your organization, and the planned objects represent
changes you plan to make, for example, adding a new department or a new position.
You must assign a status to every object and infotype record you create. However, you
do not need to use all the statuses. If you are not using the planning cycle, you can
directly create your organizational objects in the Active planning status. Most companies
do just that.
16.2 PLANNING CYCLE

A A A A
The status feature allows the object to go through an approval cycle.
Planned
Submitted
Rejected
Active
Approved
If you decide to follow the approval cycle, you first create an organizational object in the
Planned status. Planned status is actually work-in-progress. Decision makers don't look
at planned objects.
Once you have completed working on a planned object, you change its status to Submitted.
Submitted objects are reviewed by decision makers, who may change their status either
to Approved, or to Rejected.
CHAPTER 16 Planning Status 217
Once an object is approved, you may change its status to Active. Objects in Active status
are in current use. You may also create objects in Active status directly.
If an object is Rejected, you may either discard it, or change its status to Planned, and
work further on it.
Status Description
Planned Indicates that an object is proposed or anticipated, but not currently operable.
You can create, change, display, delimit, delete and list the planned objects.
Submitted Indicates that an object has been submitted for review and subsequent
approval/rejection. You cannot create objects with submitted status. Nor
can you make changes.
Approved Indicates that an object, previously submitted for review, is accepted or
authorized. By changing the status to active, you can edit the object (create,
change, display, delimit, delete and list).
Rejected Indicates that an object is rejected or turned down. You can only display
objects with rejected status. However, you can change the status to planned
so that you can work with the object again.
Active Indicates that an object is currently operable. You can create, change, display,
delimit, delete and list the active objects.
16.3 PLANNING STATUS IN OM INTERFACES

A A B C
Interface Specifying planning status
Organization and Staffing All infotypes are created in the Active planning status only.
General Structures All infotypes are created in the Active planning status only.
Simple Maintenance All infotypes are created in the Active planning status only.
Expert Mode You select the tab in which you create the infotype. Each tab
corresponds to a planning status.
Structural Graphics In transaction S_AHR_61016530 you specify the planning
status on the selection screen.
Actions You specify the planning status on the selection screen.
16.4 CHANGING PLANNING STATUS

A A B C
There are two ways in which you can change the status applied to objects and infotype
records in the organizational plan.
Change status in expert mode

You can change planning status of an infotype in the expert mode transactions, e.g. PP01.
You go to the appropriate tab, select the record whose planning status you want to
change and choose Edit â
Status change.
Change object status report

You can use transaction RE_RHAKTI00 to change the status of one or more objects and
their infotypes. You specify the change in planning status you want to make.
The status of the infotype record is changed as specified. If you propose change for an
active or rejected infotype record, a copy of the infotype record is created in planned
status while the active or rejected record remains unchanged. In all other cases, planning
status of the record is changed.
In transaction PP01, you can change the planning status of one infotype record at a time,
whereas by using this report, you can change the planning status of a number of
objects and their infotypes at the same time. Also, by ticking multiple checkboxes, you
can run all the steps in one execution. For example, you can move an object directly
from the 'planned' to 'active' status if you tick the checkboxes as shown in the screenshot
above.
CHAPTER 16 Planning Status 219
16.5 FUNCTIONS PERMITTED IN PLANNING STATUS

A B C X
Depending on the planning status of an infotype (including object and relationship

infotypes), SAP lets you perform certain functions. These are specified in table T777F
(Function Code Assignment to Planning Status). These are summarized below. You will
notice that the functions which are restricted are the functions which should not be
logically performed on an infotype in that planning status. For example, only an approved
record can be activated, or only a submitted record can be approved.
Active Planned Submitted Approved Rejected
Activate
Approve
Change Change
Create Create
Delete Delete
Delimit
Display Display Display Display Display
List display List display List display List display List display
List display List display
with change with change
Propose change Propose change
Reject Reject
Submit
17 Authorizations
17.1 AUTHORIZATION CONCEPTS

A A A A
17.1.1 Authorization Objects
Creating a test role

The best way to understand how SAP controls authorizations is to create a test role using
transaction PFCG. After creating the role, you go to ‘menu’ tab, and add a transaction,
e.g. PA20. You then go to ‘Authorizations’ tab, and click ‘Change Authorization Data’.
You will see the following screen.
220
CHAPTER 17 Authorizations 221
Object classes
The ‘Test Role’ has two object classes, namely AAAB and HR.
Authorization objects
The ‘Test Role’ has five authorization objects. Expand the authorization object P_ORGIN.
Authorization fields
The screenshot above shows authorization fields in one authorization object. An
authorization object groups up to ten authorization fields that are checked in an AND
relationship. In this object you specify the authorization given to a role (or profile), which
will become the authorization for one or more users through assignment of the role to
users. In this object, you specify the following:
Ø For which infotype and subtype, the user has authorization.
Ø For which personnel area, employee group and employee subgroup, the user has
authorization.
Ø If you use organizational key, for which organizational key, the user has authorization.
Ø What is the level of authorization, e.g. display or change?
If a user tries to create an infotype 0001 record for a person, the system will check
whether the user has authorization for each field above. If any of the tests fail, the user
will not be able to carry out the action. In other words, the final result is determined by
applying AND operation to the result of all tests within an authorization object.
Multiple copies of the same authorization object

But what would you do if you want to give display authorization for infotype 0001 and
change authorization for infotype 0002? You can do that by creating two authorization
objects in the same role, one for each infotype. If the user satisfies any one authorization
object fully, he will be able to perform the transaction.
Adding an authorization object manually

You can add an authorization object manually. If you don’t know the technical name of
the organization object, you click . It opens the following screen.
This screenshot shows the authorization objects, grouped under object classes. You find
the authorization object and add. The system shows the authorization objects that were
manually added, and those, which were added by the system.
Default authorization objects and values

When you generated authorization profile, the system automatically added certain
authorization objects, and in some cases, it also put values for the fields. SAP has created
these defaults, but you can change the default settings if you want. You are advised not
to do so, unless you have adequate mastery over the subject.
Authorization objects for infotypes

You have seen an authorization object of type P_ORGIN. This can be used to control
authorization for infotypes. There are also other authorization objects, e.g. P_ORGXX,
which can be used to control authorization for infotypes. If you wish to give infotype
authorization based on administrator, rather than PA, EG and ESG, you can use
authorization object P_ORGXX. Similarly, if you want to use structural authorization,
you can use authorization object P_ORGINCON. SAP provides a large number of
authorization objects, which you can use to control different activities in SAP.
Authorization objects for personnel planning

For personnel planning infotypes you use authorization objects PLOG or PLOG_CON.
17.1.2 Structural Authorizations

For infotypes, you can control authorizations based on personnel area, employee group
and employee subgroup in authorization object P_ORGIN. However, there is often a
need to control authorization based on organizational structure. SAP meets this requirement
through structural authorizations.
To maintain structural authorizations, you first maintain authorization profiles. This topic
is discussed in detail, later in this chapter. Then, you use authorization object P_ORGINCON,
in place of P_ORGIN. In P_ORGINCON, there is an additional field, ‘Authorization Profile’.
You attach the authorization profile created earlier to this field. In this way you will give
authorization only for a specified part of organizational structure. If you are using structural
authorizations, usually you do not restrict based on personnel area, employee group and
employee subgroup.
17.1.3 Authorizations for Users Own Data

In Employee Self-Service (ESS), an employee may see, or update his own data, but he
should not see data of other employees. To meet this requirement, SAP provides an
authorization object P_PERNR. Also, you may want that while HR administrators update
data for everyone else, they should not be able to update their own data. Even this
requirement can be met through authorization object P_PERNR. The link between a user
and his personnel number is maintained in infotype 0105, subtype 0001.
17.1.4 Roles and Profiles

You can create a role using transaction PFCG. You can also create a menu for a role. This
is displayed in user menu of all users, who are assigned that role.
If you go to authorizations tab, and click ‘Change authorization data’, SAP proposes a set
of authorization objects, along with their default values. You fill up the missing values,
and check whether the proposed values are okay. If necessary, you may change them.
Finally when you save them, all authorization objects should be green, as only those
authorization objects are effective.
You can also see all users who have been granted the role. If ‘User comparison’ button
on the user tab is not green, click it. Otherwise, the authorizations may not work correctly.
17.1.5 Authorization for User

You can use transaction SU01 to assign roles to users. You can assign him one or more
roles, which govern user authorization in SAP. You can also specify a reference user,
whose authorizations will be available to the current user. You can also assign a user one
or more profiles, which also grant him authorization in SAP.
17.1.6 Authorization for Organizational Units and Positions

The work done by a person depends on his position in the organization. It therefore
makes sense to give authorization to positions which may be inherited by the persons
holding those positions. SAP supports this. It provides infotype 1016 through which you
can assign profiles to positions. The holder of the position will then inherit the authorization.
When he logs onto the system using a user id, the system will determine his personnel
number from infotype 0105, subtype 0001, and give him the authorization granted to the
position he holds.
Through infotype 1016 you can also give authorization to an organizational unit, which
will then be available to all positions in the organizational unit. You can also give
authorization to a job, which will be available to all positions which are linked to that job.
You can also give authorization to a task, which will be available to all jobs which contain
that task and all positions which perform that task. Infotype 1016 can be used only for
normal authorization profiles. If you want to assign a structural authorization profile to
positions, organizational units, etc. you may use infotype 1017.
17.1.7 Change Log
Change log for personnel planning infotypes

You may want to record change to critical data so that it can be reviewed periodically
and is also available for audit. You can specify the data for which change log is to be
maintained in view T77CDOC_CUST.
Change log for personnel administration infotypes

You can activate the change document in the Implementation Guide (IMG) for Personnel
Management under Personnel Administration â
Tools â
Revision â
Set up change
document. For more information about the change document, see the documentation of
this IMG activity.
The change document has nothing to do with the authorization check. It does not prevent
unauthorized users from accessing data. Rather it logs attempts made by unauthorized
users to access data. You can evaluate the changes using the RPUAUD00 report (Logged
Changes in Infotype Data).
17.1.8 Customer Enhancements

SAP lets you implement your own logic for authorization checks.
BadI Use
HRPAD00AUTH_CHECK You can use this BadI to replace the standard SAP authori-
zation checks completely. As soon as an implementation for
this BadI is active, all HR master data authorization checks
are stopped and checks only in the activated implementation
are performed.
HRBAS00_STRUAUTH You can use this BadI to replace structural authorization
checks.
HRBAS00_GET_PROFL If you use this BadI, you do not have to maintain the structural
profiles in table T77UA (User Authorizations).
17.1.9 Troubleshooting Authorization Problems

When a user faces authorization failure, you need to know what authorization he required,
and what authorization he had. This is displayed by executing transaction SU53 immediately
after authorization failure.
17.2 AUTHORIZATION MAIN SWITCHES

A B C X
17.2.1 Purpose
SAP provides you a lot of choices in authorization control. These are exercised through
switches explained in this chapter.
17.2.2 IMG Node

SM30 â V_T77S0 (Group name AUTSW)
17.2.3 Screen
17.2.4 Authorization Switches
Switch Explanation
ADAYS If an HR administrator changes the organizational assignment of a person,
and he has no authorization for the new area where the employee now
belongs, he will not be able to see the record he has created. This can
cause problems. Here you can specify the number of calendar days, for
which the administrator can see the record he created, even though he
does not have authorization for employee’s new area.
APPRO You set this switch to 1 if you want to implement infotype 0130, test
procedures. Test procedures can be used if certain entries are to be checked
centrally and should not be changeable after the check without further action.
DFCON See the explanation in switch ORGPD.
INCON This switch determines whether authorization object P_ORGINCON is
used in the authorization check.
NNCON This switch determines whether customer-specific authorization
object P_NNNNNCON is used for authorization check. Note that this is
not a standard authorization object.
NNNNN This switch determines whether customer-specific authorization
object P_NNNNN is used for authorization check. Note that this is not a
standard authorization object. You have to create the authorization object
first.
ORGIN This switch determines whether authorization object P_ORGIN is used
for authorization check. Alternatively you could use P_ORGXX or
P_ORGINCON.
ORGPD Structural authorizations can be implemented in two ways; by using
P_ORGINCON object, or by assigning a profile to user in table T77UA. If
you are using P_ORGINCON method, you use switch DFCON. If you are
using T77UA method, you use switch ORGPD. These switches determine
whether structural authorization check is on, and what is its behavior.
In structural authorization, a user has authorization for an organizational
unit. The organizational unit has positions. The positions are linked to
persons in infotype 0001. This is the link to determine whether a user has
authorization for a personnel number or not.
However, sometimes you use default positions. In that case the above
link will not work. You have the following options:
1 SAP Unit Checked (Initial â
No Authorization)
2 SAP Unit Not Checked (No Authorization)
3 SAP Unit Checked (Initial â
Authorization)
4 SAP Unit Not Checked (Authorization)
In options 1 and 3, employee’s organizational unit in infotype 0001 is
checked. If the organizational unit exists, it determines whether the user
Switch Explanation
is authorized or not. However, if the organizational unit does not exist,

in option 3 the user is authorized, and in option 1 he is not authorized.
In options 2 and 4, the employee’s organizational unit is not checked at
all. In option 4 the user is authorized, and in option 2 he is not authorized.
ORGXX This switch determines whether authorization object P_ORGXX is used
for authorization check. You use this object if you want to check
authorization of administrators.
PERNR This switch determines whether authorization object P_PERNR is used
for authorization check. You can use this object to permit, or deny, the
user to see/change his own data.
XXCON This switch determines whether authorization object P_ORGXXCON is
used in the authorization check.
17.3 AUTHORIZATION OBJECTS FOR TRANSACTIONS

A B C X

When you add a transaction in menu of a role and generate authorization profile, the
system proposes the authorization objects, and in some cases default values. These are
defined here, and you can change them if you wish.
The objects shown under C are checked, and objects shown under CM are both checked
and maintained, i.e. inserted in the profile when you add a transaction to a role. You can
add or delete an object. You can change between U, N, C and CM, simply by clicking the
point of your choice. These are just like radio buttons. You can maintain default values
of the fields, which will appear when the object is inserted.
17.3.2 Transaction
SU24 – Authorization Object Check under Transactions
17.3.3 Screen
17.4 AUTHORIZATION PROFILES

A B B C
17.4.1 Purpose
Here you maintain the master list of structural authorization profiles. These are either
assigned to users in view T77UA, or assigned to the profile field in authorization
object P_ORGINCON.
17.4.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T77PQ (table T77PQ)
17.4.3 Transaction
S_AHR_61003751—Define Authorization Profiles
OOSP—Authorization Profiles
S_AHR_61011912—Maintain Authorization Profiles
17.4.4 Screen
17.4.5 Primary Key

Authorization Profile
17.5 AUTHORIZATION PROFILE DEFINITION

A B B C
17.5.1 Purpose
You can give authorization to a user for a part of the organizational structure, which
is identified by a starting object and an evaluation path. These parts of the organiza-
tional structure are defined as authorization profiles. Alternatively, you can use
BadI HRBAS00_GET_PROFL to implement an alternative determination of structural
profiles.
17.5.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T77PQ (view T77PR)
17.5.3 Transaction
17.5.4 Screen
17.5.5 Primary Key

Authorization Profile + Sequence Number
17.5.6 Important Fields
Authorization profile
Here you enter the authorization profile being defined.
Sequence number
An authorization profile may consist of several structures or sub-trees. Each structure is
identified by a sequence number.
Plan version
Here you specify the plan version for which the defined profile is valid. Note that plan
version 01 is generally the active plan version.
Object type and object ID

Here you specify the start object for the evaluation path.
Maintenance
If you tick this field, a user can maintain (create/change) data. If this field is not ticked,
he can only display data. This can further restrict the authorization granted to the user
in activity field.
Evaluation path
In structural authorizations, the authorization is for a part of structure. The part of structure
is defined by a starting object and an evaluation path, which determines the structure.
The evaluation path is specified here.
Status vector
Status vector determines whether you want to take into account only active relationships
or planned relationships as well.
Depth
When you go down the evaluation path, there may be multiple levels. If you do not want
to go beyond certain depth, you can specify that here.
Sign
Your evaluation path takes you in a certain direction of structure. If you want to go in
reverse direction, you enter a ‘–’ here.
Period
The structures have a validity period. If you want to see the structure as on a certain date,
or period, you can specify that here.
Function module
Although you can explicitly specify a starting object in structural profiles, you will end
up creating one profile for each user, just because the starting object is different. SAP lets
you specify a function module where you can logically determine the starting object for
each user.
If a position is manager of an organizational unit (A012), you can use function
module RH_GET_MANAGER_ASSIGNMENT which uses evaluation path MANASS or
MANAS to determine the manager of an organizational unit. In this way, you need only
one profile for all managers, instead of one profile for each manager.
SAP also provides a function module, RH_GET_ORG_ASSIGNMENT which uses evaluation
path ORGASS or ORGAS. If you specify this function module in a profile, the starting
object for a person is the organizational unit to which he belongs. For both these
functionalities to work, user to person relationship must be maintained in infotype 0105.
17.6 AUTHORIZATION PROFILES TO USER ASSIGNMENT

A B B C

Here you can assign structural authorization profiles to users. A user’s authorization is
limited to the objects (ultimately employees) selected by these profiles. These profiles
restrict the authorization a user is granted otherwise. A user can be assigned multiple
authorization profiles, thereby giving him authorization for multiple groups of employees.
However, his authorization for all the employees will be same. If you want a user to have
different authorization for different groups of employees, e.g. display of organizational
assignment for all employees but change of organizational assignment for his subordinates,
this method cannot support it.
SAP has therefore introduced an authorization object P_ORGINCON, where you can
assign an authorization profile to an authorization object, and thereby provide different
authorizations to a user for different groups of employees. To enable that method, you
do appropriate coding in HRBAS00_GET_PROFL Business Add-In (BAdI). Alternatively,
you grant unrestricted authorization to the user in this table by giving him authorization
profile ‘ALL’ and restrict him in authorization object P_ORGINCON as appropriate.
If there is no entry in this table for a user, he is granted authorization profile which is
linked to the user SAP*. Thus, if you maintain an entry with ‘SAP*’ in user name field
and ‘ALL’ in authorization profile field (This entry is there in the table by default), all
users who are not present in this table will have unrestricted authorization. Their
authorization will then be restricted only by the authorization object P_ORGINCON.
17.6.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77UA
17.6.3 Transaction
S_AHR_61003750—Assign Authorization Profiles
OOSB—Assign Authorization Profiles
17.6.4 Screen
17.6.5 Primary Key

User Name + Authorization Profile + Start Date
17.7 PREFIX FOR BATCH INPUT SESSIONS

B C X X
17.7.1 Purpose
When you run batch jobs, you may want to prevent users from seeing each other’s job
and printing the output of others. SAP provides an authorization object, S_BDC_MONI,
where you can give authorization based on session name. You then need to name your
sessions correctly so that unauthorized persons cannot view your session. In feature
BIMAP, you can define a prefix based on program name, and thus control unauthorized
viewing of batch jobs.
17.7.2 IMG Node

PE03 â BIMAP
17.7.3 Screen
17.7.4 Fields for Decision-making

Transaction Code
Function Code
ABAP Program Name
User Name
Company Code
Personnel Area
Personnel Subarea
Country Grouping
Employee Time Management Status
17.7.5 Return Value

A prefix, which is inserted in front of the session name.
17.8 USER DATA IN SAP MEMORY

B B C C
You can specify users for whom structural authorization data should be permanently
stored in SAP memory in table T77UU. The main purpose of this function is to avoid
performance problems for users with extensive authorization profiles.
17.9 AUTHORIZATION REPORTS

B C C C
You can run transaction RE_RHAUTH00 to see authorization for a user or a profile.
18 Organizational Management
Integration
18.1 INTEGRATION WITH PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION

A A A A
18.1.1 Data Storage in Both OM and PA
Dual storage
235
SAP keeps data about organizational units, positions, jobs, work centers, and relationship
between position and person, in both Organizational Management and Personnel
Administration. However, you don’t have to enter the data twice. If integration between
Organizational Management and Personnel Administration is active, when you create
data in one, it is automatically created in the other. You generally create organizational
units, positions, jobs and work centers in Organizational Management and this data is
created in Personnel Administration automatically by the system. While hiring or
transferring employees in Personnel Administration, you specify his position, and this
data is created in Organizational Management automatically by the system. Entries created
by the system are identified by value P in field MAINT. These entries cannot be deleted
or changed.
Table description Table name

Jobs T513, T513S
Positions/work centers T528B, T528T
Organizational units T527X
Organizational assignment PA0001
Objects HRP1000
Relationships HRP1001
Data transfer
SAP stores this data in two places because an organization may decide to implement only
Organizational Management, or only Personnel Administration, instead of implementing
both of them together. But if an organization, having implemented one module, wishes
to implement the other module, it needs to transfer data to the other module. SAP provides
a number of programs to do that as shown in the diagram on the previous page.
Program Transaction
RHINTE00 OOPH
RHINTE10 OOHP
RHINTE20 OOPP, S_AHR_61003129
RHINTE30 OOHQ
In order for the RHINTE reports to work correctly, SAP has created the following table
entries which you must not change.
Table Table name Entry
T77S0 System Table PLOGI PRELI

T77FC PD Function Codes INTE
T778A Evaluation Paths INTE-PS, INTEBACK, INTECHEK, INTEGRAT
and INTE_OSP
CHAPTER 18 Organizational Management Integration 237
Consistency check
SAP also provides program RHINTECHECK to check consistency between Organizational
Management and Personnel Administration.
18.1.2 OM PA Integration Switches

You determine the nature of integration between Organizational Management and Personnel
Administration by maintaining integration switches in Personnel Management Organi-â
zational Management â Integrationâ Integration with Personnel Administration â
Set up
â
Integration with Personnel Administration Basic Settings. Note that some of the switches,
e.g. PLOGI PLOGI, are not displayed in this view. These switches are explained below:
Basic integration
Group Sem.abbr. Description Explanation
PLOGI PLOGI Integration Plan Version/ Since you can have multiple plan
Active Plan Version versions in Organizational Manage-
ment, you need to specify integration
plan version here, if integration is on.
PLOGI ORGA Integration Switch: This is the main integration switch
Organizational Assignment between Organizational Management
and Personnel Administration. If
integration between Organizational
Management and Personnel Adminis-
tration is on and you create the data in
one, it is duplicated automatically in
the other.
PLOGI PRELI Integration: default This position is used for those employees,
position for whom Organizational Management
to Personnel Administration integra-
tion is not active.
PLOGI PRELU Integration: PA update You can decide whether changes made
online or batch in Organizational Management will be
updated in Personnel Administration
immediately or not. If they are to be up-
dated in batch, use program RHINTE30.
PLOGI SPLIT Integration: New infotype 1 Sometimes you could change descrip-
record at name change tion of jobs, positions or organizational
units, without changing the objects
themselves. Till some date, there is old
description, after which there is new
description. If you wish that the descrip-
tion is correctly shown in Personnel
Administration, both before and after
the date of change, then the Personnel
Administration record needs to be split,
otherwise it will show new description
for the entire period. This choice is
controlled by this integration switch. If
this switch is set to ‘X’, and you change
the description of jobs, positions or
organizational units, new infotype 0001
records for the personnel numbers con-
cerned are created on the date of change.
PLOGI TEXTC Integration: transfer In Organizational Management, objects
short text of job have a short text, and a long text. If
this switch is blank, long text of the job
is shown. If it is ‘X’, short text is shown.
PLOGI TEXTD Integration: Selection Date If you do not create split when the
for OM Texts (IT0001) Organizational Management text
changes (PLOGI SPLIT), whether the
Organizational Management text should
be shown for the latest period or the
earliest period is controlled by this.
PLOGI TEXTO Integration: transfer short If this switch is blank, long text of
text of org. unit the organizational unit is shown. If it
is ‘X’, short text is shown.
PLOGI TEXTS Integration: transfer short If this switch is blank, long text of
text of position the position is shown. If it is ‘X’, short
text is shown.
Cost distribution
PLOGI COSTD Integration of Cost You can activate integration between

Distribution PersAdm/ Organizational Management and
OrgManag Personnel Administration for cost
distribution by setting the value of this
switch to ‘X’.
Department switch
PPABT PPABT Switch: department You set this switch to ‘1’ if you want to
identify organizational units which are
departments using infotype 1003.
Default personnel area, subarea and cost center
PPINT BTRTL Default value for This value is used as the default value
personnel subarea of personnel subarea if, for example,
positions are reoccupied but do not have
a record of infotype 1008 “Account
Assignment Features”.
PPINT PERSA Default value for This value is used as the default value
personnel area of personnel area if, for example,
positions are reoccupied but do not have
a record of infotype 1008 “Account
Assignment Features”.
PPINT PPINT Default value for When you create relationships between
controlling area cost centers and positions or organiza-
tional units in Organizational Manage-
ment, the system requires that the
controlling area be specified along with
cost center. The value of this entry is
used as the default value for the cont-
rolling area.
Enhanced integration
PLOGI EVENB Enhanced integration If extended integration is set in this

(X = on, Space = off) switch, you can move a person, position
or organizational unit when these
changes lead to a change in company
code for the person concerned.
Otherwise, you cannot.
PLOGI EVCCC Master data action: If a position is moved to another
company code change company code, the employee is locked
(lock entry in table T77INT). A personnel
action must then be executed for the
employee concerned. This entry enables
you to determine the action that is
executed next for all employees who
have changed company code and are
flagged in table T77INT.
PLOGI EVCRE Generate event with By setting this switch to ‘X’, you
entry T77INT determine that an event is generated
(action designat.) for employees who are flagged for an
action in table T77INT. A workflow can
then respond to this event.
PLOGI EVEGC Master data action: This entry is not relevant for customizing.
employee subgroup change
18.1.3 Extent of OMPA Integration
Purpose
Sometimes organizations do not wish to maintain organizational structure for all their
employees. SAP permits you to maintain partial integration between Organizational
Management and Personnel Administration. Through feature PLOGI, you can specify
which groups of employees participate in integration, and which groups do not.
IMG node
PE03 â PLOGI
Screen
Fields for decision-making

Transaction Class for Data Storage
Country Grouping
Company Code
Personnel Area
Personnel Subarea
Employee Group
Employee Subgroup
Return value
X Integration on
Blank Integration off
18.1.4 Replace User

If you have users holding positions in the organizational plan, you can replace them with
respective employees using transaction RE_RHREPL20. To do this, integration between
Organizational Management and Personnel Administration should be active and relationship
between user id and employee’s personnel number should be maintained in infotype
0105, subtype 0001.
18.1.5 Validity Period of Persons to Organizational Management

In standard SAP the following employees are considered to be active:
Ø Employees with employment status 3 (Active).
Ø Employees with employment status 1 (Inactive), provided at least one record with
employment status 3 (Active) exists for the employee, and the record with employment
status 3 is earlier than the records with employment status 1.
Business Add-In HREIC_RETIREES enables you to override this SAP standard procedure
to determine which employees are defined as active employees in your system. Employees
with employment status 0 (Withdrawn) must not be interpreted as active, even with the
help of this BAdI.
18.2 INTEGRATION WITH RECRUITMENT

A A A A
Recruitment is done to fill vacant positions. Vacancy of a position is defined in infotype 1007.
Also, recruitment cannot be done for obsolete positions. Obsolete positions are identified
in infotype 1014. When a position is filled, vacancy record is automatically delimited.
18.3 INTEGRATION WITH WORKFLOW

A B C C
Use of organizational management in workflow

Workflow uses Organizational Management in two ways.
Ø Organizational management stores information on manager of a person, which is
needed in processes supported by workflows, e.g. approval of leave, travel, etc. This
information is frequently used by workflows.
Ø You can assign tasks to organizational units, positions, users, etc. which helps workflows
in finding possible agents, etc.
Workflow for organizational change

You can run transaction EXEORGCHEARM to do agent assignment and event linkage of
this workflow.
Possible agents must be specified for each task in order to define clearly the organizational
responsibility for processing. Workflows can only be started in dialog by their possible
agents. If a scenario requires that the relevant workflow be started in dialog, this workflow
must be assigned to its possible agents. When you click , you get the
following screen.
You choose agent assignment âCreate, to create possible agents. You select the type of
agent who will be performing the task.
After you assign the possible agent, the system will show it.
When you click , you get the following screen.
You can click detail view icon, tick event linkage activated checkbox and save. The event
linkage is activated.
Workflow message about new employees

You can run transaction WF_NEW_MAN to do agent assignment and event linkage of
this workflow. You can assign possible agents and activate triggering event to
workflow WS01200136 in the same way as described above.
18.4 INTEGRATION WITH SAP BUSINESS PARTNERS

C X X X
18.4.1 Business Partners

SAP uses the concept of business partners in the following applications.
Ø SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SRM)
Ø SAP Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
Ø SAP E-Recruiting
Ø SAP Collaboration Projects (cProjects)
Ø SAP Strategic Enterprise Management (SAP SEM)
Ø SAP Internet Communication Manager (ICM)
Employees and organizational units are also considered business partners. Therefore,
whenever an employee or organizational unit is created or changed, corresponding business
partner must be created or changed. SAP provides a method of automating this process.
18.4.2 Business Partner Integration
Business partner HR integration

You activate integration between business partners and HR by setting this switch to ‘X’
in table T77S0.
18.4.3 Business Partners in Employee Role
Creating business partners automatically

When an employee is created in the HR system, you may want a business partner in
employee role to be created automatically. If this switch is OFF, business partner is not
created. If it is CREATE, business partner is created when employee is created, but not
changed when employee data changes. If it is ON, business partner is created and changed
when an employee is created or changed. Data from infotypes 0002, 0006 (subtype 1) and
0105 (subtypes 0005, 0010 and 0020) are transferred.
Replication of time recording (CATS) in the business partner

If you set this switch to ‘X’, the system replicates time recording (CATS) data in the
business partner.
ALE distribution of inactive employees

If you set this switch to ‘X’, business partners are also generated for inactive employees.
Import qualifications
If you set this switch to ‘X’, qualifications are written to the business partner.
Number assignment of business partner

Here you specify the method of numbering business partners in employee role.
Value Description
1 A business partner number with internal number assignment is taken from the
general number range of the business partner.
2 An individual number range interval exists for the business partner with the
employee role. This interval must be indicated as an internal number assignment.
A business partner grouping of the same name must have been created and
specified in switch HRALX PSUBG.
3 The business partner in the employee role is to receive the same number as the
corresponding employee. An individual number range interval must have been
created with external number assignment. At the same time, you must also create
a business partner grouping of the same name and specify in switch HRALX
PSUBG.
Subgroup of the number range interval

This switch contains the subgroup of the number range interval for the business partner
in the employee role.
18.4.4 Business Partners in Organizational Unit Role
Creating business partners automatically

When an organizational unit is created in the HR system, you may want a business
partner in organizational unit role to be created automatically. If this switch is OFF,
business partner is not created. If it is CREATE, business partner is created when
organizational unit is created, but not changed when organizational unit data changes.
If it is ON, business partner is created and changed when an organizational unit is
created or changed. Data from infotypes 1000, 1028 and 1032 are transferred.
Address necessary for business partner

Integration with HR organizational units is used by Supplier Relationship Management (SRM).
To enable integration with SRM, you must also ensure that the business partners in the
organizational unit role have an address. If you set this switch to ‘X’, the system ensures
that an address is available for business partners in organizational unit role.
Standard address of business partners

If an organizational unit does not have address, the system can take a standard address.
Here you can specify the ID of the business partner that contains the standard address.
This will always be used when creating business partners belonging to the organizational
unit role if the relevant organizational units do not have an address of their own.
Business partner warnings

If you set this switch to ‘X’, all warnings are ignored when creating the business partner.
Number assignment of business partner

Here you specify the method of numbering business partners in organizational unit role.
Value Description
1 A business partner number with internal number assignment is taken from
the general number range of the business partner.
2 An individual number range interval exists for the business partner with the
organizational unit role. This interval must be indicated as an internal number
assignment. A business partner grouping of the same name must have been
created and specified in switch HRALX OSUBG.
3 The business partner in the organizational unit role is to receive the same
number as the corresponding organizational unit. An individual number range
interval must have been created with external number assignment. At the
same time, you must also create a business partner grouping of the same
name and specify in switch HRALX OSUBG.
Subgroup of the number range interval

This switch contains the subgroup of the number range interval for the business partner
in the organizational unit role.
18.4.5 Data Synchronization
Synchronizing HR and business partners data

If your HR system already has employees or organizational units when you activate
integration with business partners, you may want to create business partners for existing
employees and organizational units. You may use report HRALXSYNC to run a consistency
check for the integration of HR master data and organizational data with business partner
data. If the business partner data is incomplete, you can also synchronize the data.
Integration error in IDOC

If this switch is activated, any errors that occur are entered in the relevant IDOC and the
IDOC is set to incorrect.
Recipient of error message

If there are errors in creating business partner, this switch determines who receives the
error message.
Value Message sent to

0 No workflow document is created and nobody, therefore, is informed about
the incorrect settings.
1 A workflow document is created that is sent to the workflow administrator.
2 A workflow document is created that is sent to the user who is currently
logged on.
3 A workflow document is created that is sent to the workflow administrator
and the user who is currently logged on.
18.4.6 Business Partner Integration in Separate Logical Systems

If your business partners and HR are in different systems, you have to set up ALE for
data transfer. You may see SAP help on how to do this and other aspects that need to be
considered.
18.4.7 Mapping of Marital Status Keys
Purpose
Here you define which marital status keys in Human Resources are to correspond to
which marital status keys in SAP Business Partner.
IMG node
SM30 â V_TB027HR_NEW
Screen
Primary key
Marital Status Key
18.4.8 Mapping of Form of Address Keys
Purpose
Here you define which form of address keys in Human Resources are to correspond to
which form of address keys in SAP Business Partner.
IMG node
SM30 â V_TSAD3HR_NEW
Screen
Primary key
Form-of-Address Key
19 Database Utilities and
Dialog Control
19.1 DATABASE UTILITIES

B B C C
19.1.1 Database Statistics

You can run transaction RE_RHDBST00 to see database statistics. In the summarized
form, it shows table typewise number of records and storage in KB.
You can also see plan versionwise data.
250
CHAPTER 19 Database Utilities and Dialog Control 251
You can also see tablewise data.
You can also see plan versionwise tablewise data.
19.1.2 Database StatisticsNumber of Objects

You can run transaction RE_RHVSTA00 to see number of objects of each object type.
19.1.3 Database StatisticsNumber of Notes

You can run transaction RE_RHVSTA10 to see number of notes under each object type,
infotype and subtype.
19.1.4 Database StatisticsNumber of Object Types per Infotype

You can run transaction RE_RHVSTA20 to see number of objects of each object type for
a given infotype.
19.1.5 Database StatisticsNumber of Infotypes

You can run transaction RE_RHVSTA30 to see statistics of all infotypes.
19.1.6 Checking Consistency

You can run transaction RE_RHCHECK1 to perform the following checks.
Ø Do all infotypes of an object lie within the validity period of infotype 1000?
Ø Do all the objects exist that are referenced by relationships?
Ø Does a correct inverse relationship exist for every relationship?
19.1.7 Checking Relationships

You can run transaction RE_RHCHECKV to display and create missing inverse relationships.
If you tick the 'Automatic Without Display' checkbox, the system automatically creates all
incorrect inverse relationships.
19.1.8 Displaying Database Records

You can run transaction RE_RHRHAZ00 to display database records. You can select the
objects by specifying an evaluation path and starting object. You can display specified
infotypes and subtypes. You can also display data contents and the user who last changed
the record.
19.1.9 Deleting Database Records

You can use transaction RE_RHRHDL00 to delete objects and their infotypes. If you want
you can lock the records instead of deleting. It is recommended that you first run this
transaction in test mode and display objects and records which will be deleted. Only after
you are sure of deleting the objects and records, you run transaction in update mode.
19.1.10 Deleting Database Records with List

Transaction RE_RHRHDL00 does not let you select the records you want to delete. This
functionality is provided by transaction RE_RHRHDC00. This transaction lists all infotype
records it finds. You can delete them by selecting individual records and choosing the
Delete function. However, you cannot use this program to delete records with time constraint
1, such as infotype 1000 (Object). If you need to delete such records, you have to use
transaction RE_RHRHDL00 or transaction PP01.
19.1.11 Installation Consistency Check

You can run transaction OOCH to check consistency of data.
19.2 SEQUENCE OF LANGUAGES AVAILABLE

A B C X
19.2.1 Purpose
If you are using multiple languages and information is not available in your logon language,
the system shows it in another language. The language is selected from this table in the
order of sequence.
19.2.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T778L
19.2.3 Screen
19.2.4 Primary Key

Sequence Indicator
19.3 SEARCH FUNCTION SETTINGS

B C X X
19.3.1 Purpose
Here you can determine the behavior of the search function that is used to find objects
in Organizational Management, Training and Event Management, etc.
19.3.2 IMG Node

SM30 â V_T77S0SC
19.3.3 Screen
19.3.4 Primary Key

Group Name + Semantic Abbreviation

SEARK GENER This switch controls whether or not a confirmation prompt is
displayed before the user executes a generic search of all data in
a plan version. If the value is 1, confirmation prompt is displayed.
If the value is 0, no prompt is displayed. It is recommended to
set the value of this switch to 1 to prevent searches from being
carried out for all objects.
SEARK LMODE This switch controls how the database search for objects is
performed. Value 0 specifies that the search is only performed in
the logon language. Value 1 specifies that the search is performed
first in the logon language. If the system finds no object in the
logon language, it continues to search in the languages listed in
table T778L (Supported Languages) in the order in which the
languages are ranked until it finds an object. It is recommended
that you use this value. Value 2 specifies that the system always
searches in all languages. This setting can be time consuming.
SEARK NOAHQ This switch determines whether the free search is hidden or
displayed in input help for persons and applicants. If the switch
has the value blank, the system displays the free search. If the
switch has the value 'X', the free search is hidden.
SEARK SMODE This switch determines whether the possible entries help supports
all search options such as the search function, the structure search
and the standard matchcode (value 1), or only the option that
the system stored from the first use of the function per user and
per object type (value 0).
19.4 PARAMETERS FOR STAFFING SCHEDULE

B C X X
19.4.1 Purpose
Staff Assignments report is available in old version (program RHSBES10) and new version
(program RHSBES00, transaction S_AHR_61016503). Both these reports call four evaluation
paths which are specified here. Also, the old report calls three function modules which
are specified here. In case you want to change the behavior of these reports, you can
make a change here.
19.4.2 IMG Node

SM30 â V_T77S0SC
19.4.3 Screen
19.4.4 Primary Key

19.5 CUSTOMER ENHANCEMENTS (USER EXITS)

B C X X
19.5.1 Purpose
SAP provides you a number of user exits which you can use to enhance customer
functionality. You can implement enhancements RHGB0001, RHGP0001 and RHSI0001
with their components.
Enhancement Component Description
RHGB0001 SAPLRHGB+CUS Additional info on/off

SAPLRHGC+CUS Additional info on/off
EXIT_SAPLRHGB_001 Further info on/off
EXIT_SAPLRHGB_002 Fill text for customer-specific field
EXIT_SAPLRHGB_003 Fill header for customer-specific field
RHGP0001 SAPLRHGP+CUS Additional info on/off
EXIT_SAPLRHGP_001 Further info on/off
EXIT_SAPLRHGP_002 Fill text for customer-specific field
EXIT_SAPLRHGP_003 Fill header for customer-specific field
RHSI0001 SAPLRHSI+CUS Additional info on/off
19.5.2 IMG Node

Personnel Management â
Organizational Management â Dialog Control â Customer
Enhancements (User Exits)
19.6 SETTINGS FOR SIMPLE MAINTENANCE

A B C C
19.6.1 Purpose
Here you make settings for Simple Maintenance Interface.
19.6.2 IMG Node

SM30 â V_T77S0SC
19.6.3 Screen
19.6.4 Primary Key


PPOM EXTCK If an organizational unit has positions and you delimit or delete
the organizational unit, the position's assignment to the
organizational unit will also get delimited. If your company wants
the assignment of the subordinate objects to be delimited or deleted
automatically, you keep this switch blank. But if your company wants
to give error message so that de-assignment of subordinate objects
is done explicitly before delimiting or deleting a superior object, you
set this switch to 'X'. This setting is for Simple Maintenance only.
PPOM LEPER If you leave this switch blank, only the current (key date) chief or
the next future chief of an organizational unit is displayed. If you
set it to 'X', then all chiefs of an organizational unit are displayed.
20 Data Transfer
20.1 TRANSPORT CONNECTION

B C X X
20.1.1 Purpose
Here you specify whether you want the system to create transport request when you
create, change or delete personnel planning objects in the customizing client.
20.1.2 IMG Node

SM30 â V_T77S0SC
20.1.3 Screen
260
CHAPTER 20 Data Transfer 261
Group Sem. abbr. Value Explanation

TRSP CORR Blank Automatic transport connection is activated. Whenever
you create, change, or delete objects, a dialog box always
appears asking you to assign the object to a transport
request or to create a new request.
TRSP CORR X Automatic transport connection is deactivated. You have
to transport the changed objects yourself. You can do so
using transaction RE_RHMOVE30 (Manual Transport).
You have to enter the objects to be transported yourself,
which means that you have to ensure that all changed
objects have been transported.
TRSP CORR T Transport is via object lock (repair flag). If you decide to
use the object lock option, there is no automatic query
regarding a transport request. However, you can use
the report RHMOVE50 (Transport of objects using object
lock) to transport any objects that were changed.
20.2 LOCKING INFOTYPES FOR IMPORT

B C X X
20.2.1 Purpose
Here you can specify the object type, infotype and subtype which are not to be imported.
This can be used to prevent the data from being accidentally overwritten.
20.2.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77TR
20.2.3 Screen
20.2.4 Primary Key

Object Type + Infotype + Subtype
20.3 MANUAL TRANSPORT

B C X X
20.3.1 Purpose
If you want to transport the personnel planning objects you create in customizing client,
you can do so using automatic transport, manual transport, or transport via object lock.
If you choose manual transport option, you use this program to create the manual transport.
The program creates a customizing request which can be transported like any other
customizing request. The starting object and the evaluation path you specify determine
the objects which are included in the customizing transport request.
20.3.2 Transaction
RE_RHMOVE30—Manual Transport Link
20.3.3 Selection Screen
20.3.4 Functionality
The system transports the object infotype 1000 records and their dependent infotype
records, e.g. infotype 1001. However, you can set an import lock using customizing in the
target system. By doing so, you determine which infotypes are transported. Certain objects
are not stored in infotype 1000. These objects such as cost centers or persons are called
external objects and they are not transported.
When relationships of an object are imported, the relationships in the target system can
only be created if the related object exists. This is true only for non-external objects. A
relationship to the external object is always created. That is, the system does not first
check that the external object exists. Thus, the system may create relationship records for
external objects that do not exist.
If you specify that the objects be deleted, they are deleted from the source system. They
are also deleted from the target system if they exist before importing them from the
source system.
If you don’t have employees in the target system, while transferring data, you can replace
persons with users using their link in infotype 0105.
You can run the program in test mode.
20.4 DATA TRANSFER THROUGH SEQUENTIAL FILES

B C X X
20.4.1 Create Sequential File

You can run transaction OOMV to create a sequential file of organizational management
data in your SAP system.
20.4.2 Edit Sequential File

You can edit the sequential file generated in the previous step using transaction
OOMW. You can select a row and click . The system lets you edit the data.
After making the required change you click .
20.4.3 Load Sequential File

The sequential file generated and edited in the above steps is loaded in SAP using transaction
OODT. You can specify the client, so that data file created in one client can be loaded into
another client.
20.5 DATA DISTRIBUTION USING ALE

B C X X
20.5.1 Distribute Master Data

If you have multiple SAP servers, you can maintain data on one server and distribute it
to the other servers using ALE. Configuration of ALE is done using transaction
SALE and distribution is done using transaction PFAL.
20.5.2 Display ALE Change Pointers

To distribute changes after a complete transport, you can use change pointers. You can
run transaction RE_RHALECPS to display change pointers.
20.5.3 Evaluate ALE Change Pointers

You can run transaction RE_RHALESMD to evaluate change pointers. This program
creates IDOCs based on the change pointers for HR organizational data and HR master
data that have been written since the specified date and time. It then dispatches them to
the receiving systems. If change pointers have been processed already, they are processed
again. The receiving systems are determined on the basis of the distribution model for
this message type.
20.6 DATA EXTRACTION

B C X X
20.6.1 Scenarios
In view T77SCEN_AW you can define scenarios. Scenario ORGC with evaluation path
ORGCHART is used in organizational management to extract data.
20.6.2 Assignment of Queries to Scenarios

The evaluation path assigned to a scenario gives only basic data about the objects. If you
want additional data, you need to specify a query in view T77SCENQY. This query can
be different for different object types. You specify user group along with the query to
uniquely identify it.
Organization and Staffing
21 Interface Customizing
When you run transactions PPOSE, PPOME or PPOCE, you get a user interface. This user
interface can be customized to your requirements.
21.1 TAB PAGES

C X X X
In Organization and Staffing interface, you see tab pages. You can do the following so
that they are as per your requirement.
What to do How to do Chapter
Create your own tab page Create new tab page in 21.1.3
table T77OMTABS
Change name of a tab page Change name of a tab page 21.1.3
in view T77OCTABST
Add your tab page for an Add a tab page in 21.1.5
object type view T77OCTABUS
Hide a tab page Hide a tab page in 21.1.5
view T77OCTABUS
266
CHAPTER 21 Organization and Staffing Interface Customizing 267

Change name of a tab page Call a function module to return 21.1.5
dynamically depending on the tab page name for an object
object type type in view T77OCTABUS
Change icon of an object type Call a function module to return 21.1.5
icon for an object type in
view T77OCTABUS
Change sequence of tab pages Change sequence of tab pages in 21.1.5
view T77OCTABUS
Define your own service and For newly created object define 21.1.6
its attributes for newly created your own service in T77OBJSER
object and its attributes in view T77OMATGT
Define your own request and Define your own request in 21.1.7
assign it to an object type for T77OMREGIS and assign it to an
use in structural overview object type in T77OMIA_C for
use in structural overview
21.1.2 Dialog Structure

In order to make the changes listed in chapter 21.1.1, you can run transaction
OOFRAMEWORKCUST. You will see the following screen. Against each line the table
name is given. You may make the changes in them. Note that these tables are cross-
client. Some of these tables have a corresponding customer table. You may modify them
using transaction SM30.
Dialog structure Cross-client Client-specific Chapter

view view
T77OMTABS T77OCTABST 21.1.3

T77OBJSER 21.1.6
T77OMATGT 21.1.6
T77OMSCENF 21.1.4
T77OMFRAS 21.1.4
T77OMFRAM 21.1.4
T77OMICON 21.1.4
T77OMTABUS T77OCTABUS 21.1.5
T77OMREGIS 21.1.7
T77OMIA T77OMIA_C 21.1.7
21.1.3 Tab Pages
Tab page id
Tab pages display information about the selected object in detail area. In order to customize
tab pages, you need to know their ids. You can display the tab page id by adding
parameter OM_TABTYPE_DISPLAY with value 'X' in System â
User Profile â Own
Data â Parameters. When you do so, the tab page name will be followed by tab
page id .
Tab pages (cross-client)

Tab pages are defined in table T77OMTABS. If forecast time logic is active, you can
switch between the period view and key date view on the tab page. If the tab page is for
a single infotype, you tick the checkbox infotype-specific, and specify the infotype. In this
way you can add any infotype as a tab page and display in Organization and Staffing.
While you may add your own tab pages here, it is recommended that you do not change
the characteristics of SAP provided tab pages. If you want to change the text on a tab
page, you may do so in view T77OCTABST, which is client dependent and your changes
will not be overwritten by SAP.
Tab page texts (client-specific)

Although you can change tab page name in table T77OMTABS, it is recommended that
you don't do so. Table T77OMTABS is a cross-client table and there is a risk that your
change may be overwritten by SAP in client 000, which would affect all clients. You may
change the tab page name in view T77OCTABST, which is client dependent.
21.1.4 Scenario
SAP uses hierarchy framework for multiple purposes. Organization and Staffing is
scenario OME0.
Scenario definition (cross-client)

Scenarios are defined in table T77OMFRAS.
Scenario attributes (cross-client)

The attributes of a scenario are defined in view T77OMFRAM. The attributes of
scenario OME0 can be seen in the following screenshot. You can see that transactions
PPOSE, PPOME and PPOCE are linked to scenario OME0. These are predefined by SAP,
and you don't need to do anything.
Scenario groups (cross-client)

Scenario groups are defined in view T77OMSCENF. Each scenario belongs to a group.
Organization and Staffing belongs to scenario group ORGMANAGEMENT.
Scenario icons (cross-client)

Icons linked to a scenario are specified in table T77OMICON.
21.1.5 Tab Pages for Each Object Type
Tab pages for each object type (cross-client)

For Organization and Staffing, the tab pages which are displayed for each object type is
defined in view T77OMTABUS. For an object type, you can add a tab page, hide a tab
page, and change the sequence of tab pages. If you don't want to display a tab page, you
don't need to remove it; you just need to tick the 'Do not display' checkbox. You can
define the function module for the icon to be displayed. If you want to change the tab
name depending on object type, you can specify a function module for that.
Tab pages for each object type (client-specific)

It is recommended that you don't make changes in table T77OMTABUS as it is a
cross-client table and there is a possibility of your entries getting overwritten by SAP in
client 000, which would affect all clients. Instead, you may make your changes in
table T77OCTABUS, which has identical structure and which is client specific. The entry
in table T77OCTABUS overrides the entry in table T77OMTABUS and is read with other
entries in table T77OMTABUS.
21.1.6 Services
Services (cross-client)
Services of an interface object are defined in view T77OBJSER. They are used in the
overview area.
Attributes of services (cross-client)

Attributes of services are defined in view T77OMATGT.
21.1.7 Requests
Requests (cross-client)
Requests are defined in table T77OMREGIS.
Requests for object types (cross-client)

Requests are linked to object types for each scenario in view T77OMIA.
Requests for object types (client-specific)

Customer-specific changes are in view T77OMIA_C which has the same structure as
T77OMIA.
21.2 COLUMNS

C X X X
In the selection area and overview area of transaction PPOME, the system shows data
about the objects in columns. These columns are defined and grouped in column groups
and assigned to the selection area and the overview area. If you click in the selection
area or the overview area, you will see the associated column group and columns in it.
You can hide or display these columns. You can also see the technical names of columns
and column groups if you set parameter OM_ARRAYTYPE_DISPLAY to 'X'.
In Organization and Staffing interface, you can do the following.
Define your own column Create new column in table T77COL 21.2.3
Add columns in a column group Add columns in a column group in 21.2.4
view T77ACOLC
Define your own column group Define your own column group in table 21.2.4
T77ARRAYTP
Define your own hierarchical Define your own hierarchical column 21.2.6
column groups groups in view T77HIERATC
Define your own column Define your own column header type 21.2.7
header type in view T77COLHTYP
Define your own column Define your own column headers in view 21.2.7
headers T77COLH_C

OOCOLFRAMCUST. You will see the following screen. Against each line the table name
is given. You may make the changes in them. Note that these tables are cross-client. Some
of these tables have a corresponding customer table. You may modify them using transaction
SM30.

view view
T77COL 21.2.3
T77ARRAYTP 21.2.4
T77ACOL T77ACOLC 21.2.4
T77ACOLINI T77ACOLC 21.2.4
T77COLOTYP 21.2.5
T77HIERATP T77HIERATC 21.2.6
T77COLHTYP 21.2.7
T77COLHEAD T77COLH_C 21.2.7
21.2.3 Columns
Columns (cross-client)
If you want to add a new column, or modify the definition of an existing column, e.g.
column heading, you can define it in table T77COL.
21.2.4 Column Groups
Column groups (cross-client)

You can define column groups in table T77ARRAYTP.
Columns in column group (cross-client)

Columns are grouped in column groups in view T77ACOL.
Visibility of a column (cross-client)

Visibility of a column is defined in view T77ACOLINI.
Columns in column group and visibility of a column (client-specific)

If you want to make changes in columns in a column group, you do so in view T77ACOLC
instead of views T77ACOL and T77ACOLINI, which are based on cross-client tables.
21.2.5 Column/Object Type Assignment
Column/object type assignment (cross-client)

Columns are assigned to object types in view T77COLOTYP.
21.2.6 Hierarchical Column Group
Hierarchical column groups (cross-client)

Hierarchical column groups are defined in view T77HIERATP.
Hierarchical column groups (client-specific)

Customer changes are done in view T77HIERATC which has the same structure as view
T77HIERATP.
21.2.7 Column Headers
Column header types (cross-client)

Column header types are defined in view T77COLHTYP.
Column headers (cross-client)

Column headers are defined in view T77COLHEAD.
Column headers (client-specific)

Customer modifications are made in view T77COLH_C.
21.3 SEARCH NODES

C X X X
SAP has defined the object types which appear in the object manager. If you want to add
your own object type, you can do so by running transaction OOOBJMANCUST, where
you define search nodes. You also need to customize the overview area and the detail area.
You can do the following to customize the Organization and Staffing interface as per
your requirement.
For the new object type you created, For the new object type you 21.3.3
create a new search node created, create a new search
node in table T77FSEAN
For the new search node you created, For the new search node you 21.3.6
define its properties, e.g. the order created, define its properties
in which the new object will appear in table T77CNODORD
in the search area
For the new search node you created, For the new search node you 21.3.6
define search tools created, define search tools in
view V77CSEAT
Define your own coherence relationship Define your own coherence 21.3.5
relationship in table T77FRIEND
Exclude nodes from search range Exclude nodes from search 21.3.6
range in view T77CNOD_EX
Exclude search tools from searching Exclude search tools from 21.3.6
a search range searching a search range
in view T77CSEAT_E

OOOBJMANCUST. You will see the following screen. Against each line the table name
is given. You may make the changes in them. Note that these tables are cross-client. Some
of these tables have a corresponding customer table. You may modify them using transaction
SM30.

view view
T77FSEAN 21.3.3
T77FSEAS 21.3.4
T77FRIEND 21.3.5
T77FOBJMAN 21.3.6
T77FNODORD T77CNODORD 21.3.6
T77FSEAT V77CSEAT 21.3.6
T77FSEATGB V77CSEAT 21.3.6
T77CNOD_EX 21.3.6
T77CSEAT_E 21.3.6
21.3.3 Search Nodes
Search nodes (cross-client)

Search nodes are defined in table T77FSEAN.
21.3.4 Search Tools
Search tools (cross-client)

Search tools are defined in table T77FSEAS.
21.3.5 Coherence Relationships
Coherence relationships (cross-client)

Coherence relationships are defined in table T77FRIEND.
21.3.6 Object Manager Scenarios
Object manager scenarios (cross-client)

Object manager scenarios are defined in view T77FOBJMAN.
Search nodes in a scenario (cross-client)

Search nodes in a scenario are defined in table T77FNODORD.
Search nodes in a scenario (client-specific)

Customer-specific changes are done in table T77CNODORD.
Excluding nodes from search range (client-specific)

You can exclude nodes from search range in view T77CNOD_EX.
Search tools in a scenario (cross-client)

Search tools in a scenario are defined in table T77FSEAT.
Column group for a search tool (cross-client)

Column group for a search tool is defined in view T77FSEATGB.
Column group for a search tool in a scenario (client-specific)

If you want to make changes in table T77FSEAT or view T77FSEATGB, you make changes
in view V77CSEAT instead.
Exclude search tools from search range (client-specific)

If you want to exclude search tools from searching a search range, you can do so in
view T77CSEAT_E.
21.4 EXCLUDING INFOTYPES WHEN COPYING INTERNAL OBJECTS

C X X X
21.4.1 Purpose
When you copy an object, its infotypes are also copied except for those specified in
table T77ITEX. If you want to exclude more infotypes from getting copied, you can define
them here.
21.4.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77ITEX_C
21.4.3 Screen
21.4.4 Primary Key

Hierarchy Framework: Scenario + Object Type + Infotype + Subtype + Type of Related
Object
21.5 BACKUP PROMPT

C X X X
21.5.1 Purpose
In Organization and Staffing interface you can go on changing data in different tab pages
in the detail area, or modify structures in the overview area. The data is saved only when
you click the save icon. If your session gets interrupted due to some reason, your changes
will be lost. In scenario OME0, you can specify the number of steps after which the
system prompts you to save your data. The prompt is only a suggestion. You may save
the data and continue to work, or you may continue to work without saving the data.
21.5.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77OMFRAMC
21.5.3 Screen
21.5.4 Primary Key

Hierarchy Framework: Scenario
21.6 ASSIGNMENT OF INFOSETS TO OBJECT TYPES

C X X X
21.6.1 Purpose
Search functions for different object types are based on different infosets which are defined
in table T77OMAHQ_FUNCARS.
If you add your own object types, and therefore need to change infoset linkage, you
should not change the above view but create a record in the view given below.
21.6.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77OMAHQ_FUNCAR
21.6.3 Screen
21.6.4 Primary Key

Object Manager: Scenario + Object Type
22 Data Model
22.1 OBJECT TYPES

A B C C
22.1.1 Purpose
SAP has defined the object types required for Organizational Management. If you need,
you can also define your own object types. For example, if your company has cross-
functional teams, you can create them as an object type. Employees of the company may
be members or leaders of these teams. Object types created by you should be in the range
of 01 to 99.
22.1.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T7780 (view T778O)
22.1.3 Screen
284
CHAPTER 22 Data Model 285
22.1.4 Primary Key

Object Type
22.2 ESSENTIAL RELATIONSHIPS

C X X X
22.2.1 Purpose
Here you can define the relationship that should be proposed in the course of the structural
authorization check.
22.2.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T7780 (view T77SO)
22.2.3 Screen
Table T77SO contains only four entries.
22.2.4 Primary Key

Object Type
22.3 EXTERNAL OBJECT TYPES

C X X X
22.3.1 Purpose
This table contains the list of object types which are external. These objects are not created
in Personnel Planning. For these object types, you must specify the interface program
used to access these object types. For external objects, there is no record in infotype 1000.
These objects exist only in infotype 1001. Person and cost center are examples of external
object types.
22.3.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T7780 (view T77EO)
22.3.3 Screen
22.3.4 Primary Key

Object Type
22.4 STRUCTURE SEARCH

C X X X
22.4.1 Purpose
This table contains the evaluation path used for structural search of an object type.
22.4.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T7780 (view T77OS)
22.4.3 Screen
22.4.4 Primary Key

Object Type + Sequence Number
22.5 OBJECT TYPE KEY

C X X X
22.5.1 Purpose
If you have created new object types, change the value of the semantic abbreviation of
each object type in the parameter group OTYPE, where necessary.
22.5.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T7780 (view V_T77S0OT)
22.5.3 Screen
22.5.4 Primary Key

22.6 TRANSACTIONS FOR MAINTAINING OBJECT TYPES

C X X X
22.6.1 Purpose
You use different transactions to maintain different object types, e.g. PO10 to maintain
organizational units and PO13 to maintain positions. These are specified in the parameter
group TCODE in table T77S0.
22.6.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T7780 (view V_T77S0OT)
22.6.3 Screen
22.6.4 Primary Key

22.7 INFOTYPES MASTER LIST

A B C C
22.7.1 Purpose
This table contains the master list of infotypes.
22.7.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778T (view T778T)
22.7.3 Screen
22.7.4 Primary Key

Infotype
22.8 INFOTYPE TIME CONSTRAINTS

A B C C
22.8.1 Purpose
infotype + subtype + object type level. If object type is *, the time constraint applies to
all object types. If subtype field is blank, then the time constraint applies to all subtypes.
If there is another more specific record, which specifies the object type or subtype or both,
that gets priority. In exceptional cases, the time constraint may also depend on target
object type and is defined in table T77ZR.
0 May only Information must exist for the This time constraint is applicable
exist once entire life cycle of the object only to infotype 1957.
and cannot be changed.
1 Without gaps Information must exist for the Infotype 1000 (Objects) has time
entire life cycle of the object constraint 1, as it must exist without
but can be changed. gap.
2 With gaps Information is optional but can Infotype 1002 (Description) has time
exist only once within a user- constraint 2. During different periods
defined period. you may have different descriptions
and for some period you may have
none, but you cannot have more
than one description at the same time.
3 As often as Information is optional, and Infotype 1006 (Restrictions) has time
required many data records can exist constraint 3. At any time, you may
simultaneously within a user- have 0, 1, or more restrictions.
defined period.
22.8.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778T (view V_T777ZIT)
SM34 â V_778U (view T777Z)
22.8.3 Screen
22.8.4 Primary Key

22.9 OBJECT TYPES ALLOWED FOR AN INFOTYPE

A B C C
22.9.1 Purpose
Here you define which object types are allowed for each infotype. When you specify an
object type in transaction PP01, this table is used to show the infotypes which can be
maintained for that object type.
22.9.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778T (view T777I)
22.9.3 Screen
22.9.4 Primary Key

Subtype column is blank for all entries. It is also not shown in the view.
22.10 SUBTYPES OF AN INFOTYPE

A B C C
22.10.1 Purpose
Here you specify subtypes for each infotype.
22.10.2 IMG Node

SM34 â V_778U (view V_778U)
22.10.3 Screen
22.10.4 Primary Key

Infotype + Subtype
22.11 CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC SETTINGS FOR INFOTYPES

C X X X
22.11.1 Purpose
In this table, you make customer-specific settings for infotypes.
22.11.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77CD
22.11.3 Screen
22.11.4 Primary Key

Infotype
Infotype
Infotype whose properties are being specified.
Alternative screen number

Here you specify the screen number of the single infotype screen if you are not using the
standard screen 2000.
Alternative list screen number

Here you specify the screen number of the list screen for the infotype if you are not using
the standard screen 3000.
No maintenance
Here you specify whether the infotype can be maintained in a standard transaction.
Delete blank lines

If you tick this checkbox, blank lines are deleted when you save the infotype.
Sort entries
If you tick this checkbox, the entries in table infotypes are sorted.
Sort sequence
Here you specify the sort sequence of the records.
Value First sort field First sort order Next sort field Next sort order
Blank Subtype Ascending From date Descending

1 From date Descending Subtype Ascending
2 Subtype Ascending From date Ascending
3 From date Ascending Subtype Ascending
22.12 COUNTRY-SPECIFIC INFOTYPES

C X X X
22.12.1 Purpose
Here you specify that an infotype is only relevant for a particular country or countries.
This determines whether an infotype is displayed via country settings in basic transactions.
22.12.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77NI
22.12.3 Screen
22.12.4 Primary Key

Infotype + Country Key for Country – Specific Infotype
22.13 RELATIONSHIPS

A B C C
22.13.1 Purpose
This table contains the list of relationships between objects. A relationship between objects
X and Y have two views; from X to Y, and from Y to X. The text for both these views is
specified here. If you want to create your own relationships, you may do so. The name
of the relationship should comprise three characters and you should use only letters
A to Z.
22.13.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778V (view T778V)
22.13.3 Screen
22.13.4 Primary Key

Relationship Between Objects
22.14 RELATIONSHIP CHARACTERISTICS

B C X X
22.14.1 Purpose
Here you can specify the checks that should be performed when relationship records are
created.
22.14.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778V (view T77VA)
22.14.3 Screen
22.14.4 Primary Key

Relationship Specification + Relationship Between Objects
A/B, relationship, relationship name

The relationship, whose characteristics are being specified.
100% check
Here you can specify whether the 100% limit should be checked when percentages are
entered for weighted relationships in infotype 1001. You specify whether the system
should give error, issue warning, provide information, or perform no check.
Check work schedule

A position can have a work schedule in infotype 1011. A person can have a work schedule
in infotype 0007. When a relationship between a position and a person is created, it is
possible that the person has more working hours than those required by the position.
Here you specify whether the system should give error, issue warning, provide information,
or perform no check.
Check obsolete
Here you can specify the system reaction when relationships are entered or changed for
positions or work centers which are declared obsolete in infotype 1014. The system can
give error, issue warning, provide information, or perform no check.
22.15 ADDITIONAL DATA ON RELATIONSHIPS

C X X X
22.15.1 Purpose
Here you can specify additional properties of relationships.
22.15.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778V (view T77AR)
22.15.3 Screen
22.15.4 Primary Key

Relationship Between Objects
22.16 ALLOWED RELATIONSHIPS

A B C C
22.16.1 Purpose
Relationships have a specific meaning and they make sense only between certain object
types. This table contains the pair of objects between which a relationship is permitted.
22.16.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778V (view T777E)
22.16.3 Screen
22.16.4 Primary Key

Object Type + Relationship Between Objects + Type of Related Object + Relationship
Specification
22.17 EXTERNAL RELATIONSHIPS

C X X X
22.17.1 Purpose
This table contains the relationships between objects and external objects.
22.17.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778V (view T77EV)
22.17.3 Screen
22.17.4 Primary Key

Object Type + Relationship Specification + Relationship Between Objects + Type of Related
Object
22.18 RELATIONSHIP TIME CONSTRAINTS

A B C C
22.18.1 Purpose
This view shows time constraints on relationships.
22.18.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778V (view V_T777ZVK)
22.18.3 Screen
22.18.4 Primary Key

22.19 RELATIONSHIP ABBREVIATION

B C X X
22.19.1 Purpose
If you want to change the name of a relationship, you may do so in parameter
group PPREL in view V_T77S0VK.
22.19.2 IMG Node

SM34 â T778V (view V_T77S0VK)
22.19.3 Screen
22.19.4 Primary Key

22.20 RELATIONSHIPS TIME CONSTRAINT

DEPENDING ON TARGET OBJECT TYPE

B C X X
22.20.1 Purpose
If the time constraint of a relationship depends on object types of related objects, you may
specify that here.
22.20.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77ZR
22.20.3 Screen
22.20.4 Primary Key

Object Type + Infotype + Subtype + Type of Related Object
22.21 RELATIONSHIPS UNTIL BIRTHDAY

C X X X
22.21.1 Purpose
Usually relationship between two objects is within the validity period of the two objects.
However, in case of persons and applicants, certain relationships can extend beyond the
validity period of the related object. These are specified here.
22.21.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T777BIRTH
22.21.3 Screen
22.21.4 Primary Key

Object Type + Relationship Specification + Relationship Between Objects + Type of Related
Object
Personnel Development
23 Qualifications Catalog
23.1 QUALIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A A A A
People in an organization need competencies (skill, knowledge, or ability) to perform the

work assigned to them. The organization needs to know which competencies are required
for which position and which competencies are available with its employees and applicants,
so that it can find the right candidates for the positions in the organization. SAP uses the
term qualification to mean competency or skill, and not educational qualification. In this
book, the terms qualification, competency and skill are used interchangeably.
305
Finding suitable person for a position

One of the key activities of a Human Resource department is to find suitable person for
a position. How do you determine suitability of a person for a position? By comparing
competencies required for a position with competencies that a person has. Competencies
(called qualifications in SAP) are the common parameters on which persons and positions
are compared and suitability of persons for positions determined.
23.2 QUALIFICATIONS CATALOG

A A A A
23.2.1 Qualifications Catalog

The master list of competencies required by the organization is maintained in qualifications
catalog using transaction OOQA or S_AHR_61003929 and displayed using transaction
PPQD. The qualifications catalog is not a straight list of qualifications. It is a tree-like
structure, in which similar qualifications are grouped together in qualification groups
and qualification groups are further grouped in larger qualification groups. You can drill
down the qualifications catalog to find the qualification you are looking for.
CHAPTER 23 Qualifications Catalog 307
When you run transaction OOQA for the first time, you get a blank qualifications catalog.
23.2.2 Qualification Group

Qualification groups are groups of qualifications. You create a qualification group by
clicking , which gives you the following screen.
Abbreviation and name

A qualification group has an abbreviation and a name which helps the users to find the
qualification they are looking for.
Validity period
Here you can enter the validity period of the qualification group.
Description
Here you can enter the description of the qualification group.
Scale
You assign a scale to the qualification group which is inherited by all the qualifications
and qualification groups belonging to that qualification group. The inherited scale can be
changed for a qualification group, but not for qualifications. You cannot have different
scales for different qualifications in a qualification group. Choosing the right scale is very
important. If necessary, create your own scale so that the proficiencies are easily and
correctly understood.
Proficiencies
You can either use default proficiency descriptions, or remove the tick from the Default
checkbox and enter your own description for all proficiency levels.
23.2.3 Qualifications
You create qualifications under qualification groups. Select the qualification group and
click . The system asks you whether you want to create a qualification group or a
qualification. Choose qualification.
Qualification

A qualification has an abbreviation and a name which describes in short what the
qualification is all about.
Validity period
You can specify a validity period for qualifications. This validity information enables you
to show that certain qualifications, e.g. licenses, expire and have to be renewed at regular
intervals. The validity determines the relationship period. If you assign a qualification to
a person and the qualification has validity, the qualification is automatically deleted from
the person's subprofile when the validity period expires.
You can run the Expired Qualifications report for a specific organizational unit and
evaluation period. This report generates a list of the employees in the organizational unit
whose qualifications has expired, or will expire, in the period specified. This information
is based on the validity defined for the qualifications in question in the qualifications
catalog.
It is also possible to use a workflow to monitor qualifications with limited validity. The
standard system contains a standard workflow that can be adapted to specific customer
requirements. The relevant person (the responsible course instructor, the employee's
supervisor, and so on) is then informed that the qualifications in question are about to
expire.
Description
Here you can describe the qualification in more detail.
Scale
Note that you cannot change the scale of a qualification because you cannot have different
scales for different qualifications in a qualification group.
Proficiencies
When you specify that a position requires a qualification, you also specify the level of
that qualification required, by choosing a value from the scale. When you create the scale
you can describe the proficiency. When you assign the scale to a qualification, these are
inherited. You can also change the description of the proficiency for a qualification to
make it more appropriate. In the Proficiencies tab, remove the tick from the Default
checkbox and enter the description for each value of proficiency. If the Default checkbox
is ticked, you will see the default description, instead of your custom description for all
values of proficiency.
Additional data
Depreciation meter
Sometimes you lose a competency if you don't use it. You can specify this as a depreciation
meter for the qualification. If a qualification with depreciation meter is assigned to a
person, there are two possible scenarios.
Ø If the person's position requires that qualification, the person's proficiency remains
unchanged.
Ø If the person's position does not require that qualification, the person's proficiency
decreases exponentially. It becomes half in the period specified in the depreciation
meter.
The proficiency stored in the database does not change. It is computed during comparison
of qualifications with requirements. Even at that time you can make a user-specific setting
specifying that the depreciation meter should not be included in evaluations in transaction
PPUP. This setting may be temporary or permanent.
Alternative qualifications
For a qualification, you can specify one or more alternative qualifications in the additional
data tab. You can store alternative qualifications for a qualification by clicking . If the
alternative qualification is not a full replacement of the qualification, but a partial one,
you can specify a percentage. You can also specify the validity period of the alternative
qualification. The relationship between qualification and alternative qualification is
bi-directional (if A is an alternative to B, then B is also an alternative to A). A qualification
can only be defined as an alternative to another if both qualifications have the same
proficiency scale. Qualifications with different scales cannot be compared with each other.
In transaction PPUP, you can make a user-specific setting specifying whether or not
alternative qualifications should be included in evaluations. This setting may be temporary
or permanent.
23.2.4 Qualifications Catalog Menu Items
Structuring the qualifications catalog

You would notice that SAP sorts the qualifications catalog alphabetically. However, you
can use to change the order in which the qualifications catalog is structured. You
can use to expand or collapse the qualifications catalog or any of its branches.
Overview of a qualification
You may click to see the overview of a qualification.
Where-used list
If you select a qualification or qualification group and choose Entry â
Where-Used List,
the system shows the relationship between that qualification, or qualification group, and
all other objects.
Translation
You can translate the entries in your qualifications catalog and their corresponding
descriptions by choosing Entry â
Translate. This enables you to use the qualification
catalog in different languages.
Abbreviation on
â
You can switch abbreviation on by choosing View Abbreviation on. For this functionality
to work, you should set switch QUALI SHORT to 'X'. You can further specify that
abbreviation should be on by default for a user by setting second character of user parameter
POK to 'X'.
Setting period and plan version

You can see the qualifications catalog for a specific period, or in a different plan version,
by changing them in Settings in the menu.
23.3 QUALIFICATION TRANSFER

A A B C
If a person attends a training course, this might mean that the person will have an
additional qualification at the end of the course. In the follow-up activities to the business
event, this qualification and its proficiency are transferred to the attendee. The default
proficiency can be changed for individual attendees.
Similarly, if an employee completes a development plan successfully, the qualifications
assigned to the development plan (and the corresponding proficiencies) can be copied to
the person's qualifications profile. In Customizing, you can specify whether the qualifications
should be copied automatically in the background, or if this operation should be confirmed
by users first.
23.4 FINDING OBJECTS FOR QUALIFICATIONS

A A B C
23.4.1 Purpose
You can use the Find Objects for Qualifications report to search for persons (applicants,
etc.) who have specific qualifications. You can also specify that a specific proficiency is
required for each individual qualification. You can restrict your selection further by entering
further selection criteria. You can use business add-in HRPDV00QSEARCH0001 to provide
more selection options for the "Find Objects for Qualifications" function. This means that
you can restrict the objects to be selected even further.
23.4.2 Transaction
PPPE_SEARCH_FOR_Q Find Objects for Qualifications

Search and selection area

When you specify the qualifications for which you are trying to find objects, you can
select qualifications individually from the qualifications catalog and/or you can take the
qualifications/requirements profiles of objects of your choice and adapt them to your
needs.
Qualifications
In the Qualifications tab, you can have multiple qualifications. You can add qualifications
by transferring from selection area. You can select a qualification and click delete icon to
delete the selected qualification. When you specify the proficiencies you are looking for,
you can enter individual values or value ranges. Furthermore, by setting the Essential
requirement flag for a qualification, you can specify whether the object you are looking
for must have the qualification in question. If you set the Essential requirement flag for
a qualification, then only objects with at least this qualification are selected.
Restrict to object types

You can limit your search to objects of specific object types. For example, you might wish
to restrict your search to employees (object type P), or to applicants (object type AP). The
search result is filtered to have only these object types.
Restrict further
Depending on the object types you specify, you can then go on to limit your search even
further. For example, you might limit your search to objects of the object type Person, and
then specify that the persons must belong to a particular organizational units and restrict
the selection even further to specific personnel areas, employee subgroups, and so on
(infotype data). The ad hoc query is the basis for defining these selection criteria by
selecting fields. The objects that meet your criteria are inserted in the list in this tab and
the search is restricted to these objects.
Availability
In addition, you can use the criteria availability when searching for persons with
qualifications (object type P). This is checked via the interface with Time Management.
The resulting hit list of persons is restricted to persons that are available for a certain
number of days (entered in Planning days) in the planning period.
23.4.4 Output
The list generated by the report contains the objects that BOTH have the qualifications
and proficiencies specified AND also fulfill the other selection criteria. Planning objects
with alternative qualifications are also listed if you have specified this in the user-specific
settings (transaction PPUP).
23.5 QUALIFICATION REPORTS

A A B B
Qualifications overview
You can run transaction S_PH9_46000016 to generate a list of all the qualifications that
exist in an organizational unit, and to calculate the average proficiency for each of these
qualifications. The holders of each qualification are also displayed in this list. You can go
directly from the holder of a qualification displayed in the list to that person's profile.
You might use this report to get an insight into the ability of an organizational unit. This
report gives a list output.
You can also select and display a line in a more convenient form.
Expired qualifications
You can run transaction S_AHR_61015536 to generate a list of all the planning objects in
an organizational unit that have qualifications that have expired/will expire during the
specified period. The list tells you which planning objects are affected and gives details
of the qualifications and their validity periods. You can also generate training proposals
that are suitable for refreshing/renewing the qualifications in question.
You can choose between a planning object view and a qualification view. In the planning
object view, each planning object is listed along with the qualifications it has that are
about to expire. In the qualification view, each qualification about to expire is listed along
with the planning objects that are affected. You can go directly from each planning object
to the transaction for displaying its profile and to the transaction for career planning.
Maintained qualifications
You can run transaction HRPDV00REPORT0001 to generate a list of all qualifications
maintained in the system.
List of alternative qualifications

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000022 to generate a list of all qualifications for which
alternative qualifications have been defined. The replacement percentages are also displayed
in the list.
23.6 SCALES

A A B B
23.6.1 Scale
Scales are used to determine levels of qualifications. Different qualifications are measured
in different ways, i.e. on different scales. A scale is assigned to a qualification group
and applies to all qualifications in that qualification group. There are different types of
scales, e.g. quality scales, quantity scales, etc. Only quality scales can be assigned to
qualification groups, and thereby qualifications. Scales are maintained using transaction
SM34 â VC_T77SK.
23.6.2 Proficiency
Each quality scale has multiple levels of proficiencies. Proficiencies have a numeric id
and a text. The numeric id value is used for determining suitability. If a person has a
qualification at level 4, and the position requires it at level 5, he is 80% suitable. The
proficiency text, along with proficiency description, helps you determine the proficiency
of a qualification required for a position or available with a person.
You must define proficiencies in ascending order (that is, the proficiency with the highest
value in the ID field must be the highest (best) proficiency of a qualification). The lowest
proficiency must have the value 1; all subsequent proficiencies must be numbered
consecutively. You cannot use proficiency 0 for rating qualifications or requirements;
instead you would delete that qualification or requirement.
23.6.3 Proficiency Description

Proficiency descriptions enhance the understanding provided by proficiency texts. To
determine a person's competence, you can compare it with different proficiency descriptions
and find the description which best represents his competence, thereby determining his
proficiency.
Proficiency descriptions are inherited by qualification groups and qualifications. However,

if you can write a better description of proficiency for a qualification group or qualification,
you are allowed to do so. In the proficiency tab of qualification group or qualification, if
you tick the 'Default' checkbox, you see the inherited proficiency description.
However, if you remove the tick from the 'Default' checkbox, you get blank space to write
proficiency description which better represents the proficiency of that particular qualification
or qualification group.
23.7 QUALIFICATION CONTROL PARAMETERS

A A B C
23.7.1 Purpose
Here you specify various parameters related to qualifications that control system behavior.
23.7.2 IMG Node

SM30 â V_T77S0SC
23.7.3 Screen

QUALI ESSST ESS: Initial skills group There is an ESS service which is used
for profile maintenance to edit the skills profile. Normally, it
shows the entire qualifications catalog.
However, if you want, you can restrict
it to show only part of the tree instead
of the whole. Here you can enter a
qualification group. In ESS, this qualifi-
cation group and the entire structure of
qualifications catalog under it will be
shown. If you do not enter a qualification
group here, the ESS service displays the
entire qualifications catalog for profile
maintenance.
QUALI MAXEN Maximum number of This parameter specifies the maximum

entries in the hit list number of entries that appear at a time
in the ranking lists of Career and
Succession Planning. You can scroll to
see more entries.
QUALI OVERQ Valuation of over- If a person has higher proficiency than
qualification requirement, it is called over-qualification
and you can consider it in the following
ways.
Value Meaning Suitability
–1 Extra credit > 100%
0 Ignore 100%
+1 Penalize < 100%
This setting can be changed at user level
either temporarily or permanently.
QUALI QBUSE Use qualifications If you enter 'X' here, qualifications
bundle bundle is activated. For more infor-
mation on qualification bundles and
qualification blocks, see SAP help.
QUALI QPROZ Replacement percentage Here you specify the default replacement
for alternative qual. percentage that is proposed when you
create alternative qualifications.
QUALI SHORT Code in qualifications Here you specify whether the abbreviation
catalog of an object in the qualifications catalog
(qualification, qualification group) can
be displayed. This setting affects all
applications that use qualification objects
except Appraisals. If the value for this
setting is 'X', it is possible to display
the abbreviation. You can display the
abbreviation in the applications in
question by choosing View â Abbre-
viation on. You can set second character
of user parameter POK to 'X' to specify
whether the abbreviation should be
displayed by default for a specific user.
24 Profiles
24.1 PROFILES

A A A A
An object, e.g. a person or a position, has a profile. You may run transaction PPPM to
create or edit a profile and transaction PPPD to display it.
A profile consists of several subprofiles which are displayed as tab pages. You can use
profile of a person to do profile matchup and career planning. Similarly you can use
profile of a position to do profile matchup and succession planning. You can also display
the entire profile on a single screen by choosing Goto âOverall Profile (List).
325
You can see the same list by running transaction PEPP. In this program you can include
multiple objects and these objects can be of different types. If you want you can also
exclude certain subprofiles.
24.2 SUBPROFILES

A A A A
24.2.1 Qualifications Subprofile

In the qualifications subprofile, you maintain qualifications possessed by a person. To
create the qualifications subprofile of a person, you run transaction PPPM and select the
person. In the qualifications tab, you click and select the qualification.
CHAPTER 24 Profiles 327
The system lets you enter proficiency, start date and end date. If a qualification has a
validity period, its end date is restricted. You can also create a note for every qualification
to keep additional details. The Qualifications subprofile can be assigned to person, external
person, applicant, user, company and contact person.
Creating qualifications subprofile of several objects

You can also create qualifications subprofile of several objects using transaction
OOQM or S_AHR_61003917.
You can select all the objects which should possess the same qualifications, select those
qualifications and choose Profiles â Save. The qualifications are added to the profiles of
selected objects. Later you can edit the profiles of these objects individually if, for example,
you don't want the same proficiency for all the objects.
Transfer of qualification
If a person attends a training course, this might mean that the person will have an
additional qualification at the end of the course. In the follow-up activities to the business
event, this qualification and its proficiency are transferred to the attendee. The default
proficiency can be changed for individual attendees.
Similarly, if an employee completes a development plan successfully, the qualifications
assigned to the development plan (and the corresponding proficiencies) can be copied to
the person's qualifications profile. In Customizing, you can specify whether the qualifications
should be copied automatically in the background, or if this operation should be confirmed
by users first.
24.2.2 Potentials Subprofile

The Potentials subprofile is used to store information regarding a person's future suitability
and professional development. Identifying the potential of an employee gives a clearer
direction to his development. A person, external person, applicant or user can have
potential for a position, job, qualification, task or work center. When you create a potential,
you select the object type and then the object for which a person has potential. The
system creates the entry and you can modify the validity period and maintain a note.
Potentials can be taken into account in career and succession planning.
24.2.3 Preferences Subprofile

You should take a person's preferences into account while considering him for a position
or job. These are maintained in the preferences subprofile. Preferences subprofile can be
maintained for persons, external persons, applicants and users. They can have preferences
for a position, job, qualification, task or work center. When you create a preference, you
select the object type and then the object for which a person has preference. The system
creates the entry and you can modify the validity period and maintain a note. Preferences
can be taken into account in career and succession planning.
24.2.4 Dislikes Subprofile

You should take a person's dislikes into account while considering him for a position or
job. These are maintained in the dislikes subprofile. Dislikes subprofile can be maintained
for persons, external persons, applicants and users. They can have dislikes for a position,
job, qualification, task or work center. When you create a dislike, you select the object
type and then the object for which a person has dislike. The system creates the entry and
you can modify the validity period and maintain a note. Dislikes can be taken into
account in career and succession planning by not selecting the objects for which a person
has dislike.
24.2.5 Requirements Subprofile

A position has a set of tasks which are performed by its holders. In order to perform
those tasks competently, the holder of the position needs to have certain competencies or
qualifications. These qualifications are the requirements of the position and are captured
in requirements subprofile. If you edit profile of a position, you will see the requirements
tab where you define the qualifications required for that position.
When you add a qualification to the requirements subprofile of a position, you can enter
the proficiency level required, the period for which the qualification is required for the
position (usually indefinitely) and write any other details in a note.
Essential requirements
In addition to the above, you specify whether the requirement is essential or optional.
This factor can be taken into account in profile matchups or during career and succession
planning. In user settings (transaction PPUP), you may specify that the essential requirements
must be met. When you search for persons who may hold a position, the system will pick
up only those persons who possess essential qualifications required by the position.
Inherited requirements
If you have defined requirements for a job, it is natural that positions which are based
on that job should require those qualifications. Requirements of the job are shown as
inherited requirements in positions which are based on that job. Requirements of tasks
are also inherited by jobs, positions, and work centers to which that task is assigned.
Inherited requirements are identified by in the status column. In the Requirements

subprofile, you can click this icon in the Status field to go from the inherited requirement
to the profile of the original object (i.e. the object that passed on the requirement).
Inherited requirements cannot be deleted from the subprofile. However, they can be
assigned a different proficiency or even a different status. This is achieved by recreating
the requirement in question for the object in the subprofile.
Copying requirements profiles to position holders

During an implementation, you would create requirements profile for positions, and
qualifications profile for their holders. Since the holders hold their positions because they
are competent to hold them, it will save effort if the requirements of positions can be
copied as qualifications of their holder and then edited to make required changes. SAP
provides a tool to do that. You can run transaction OOQ5 to copy requirements profiles
to position holders. When you perform this function, the proficiencies of any existing
qualifications in persons' profiles are overwritten.
24.3 PROFILES FOR OBJECT TYPES

A A A A
Profiles for different Object Types have different subprofiles in them. Some of these
subprofiles have been discussed in the previous chapter. Subprofiles relating to Appraisal
and Development plan are discussed in chapters dealing with them. Subprofiles of some
object types are given below. For other object types they can be seen on the system.
24.3.1 Person
24.3.2 User
24.3.3 Position, Job, Task, Work Center

24.4 PROFILE MATCHUP

A A A A
24.4.1 Purpose
One of the key purposes of creating profiles for positions and persons is that you can
compare them. Comparing profiles can help you answer several key questions in the HR
practice.
Ø Who are the best employees/candidates for a position?
Ø Are the holders of positions in my organization competent enough to hold them? If
not, what needs to be done to make them suitable for their current positions?
Ø What positions can an employee occupy in future (career planning)?
Ø Which employees can occupy a position in future (succession planning)?
24.4.2 Transaction
PEPM–Profile Matchup
Objects to be compared
In the profile matchup screen you specify the objects which have requirements and the
objects which have qualifications to meet those requirements. You can enter one or more
objects on each side. The system compares each object on one side with every object on
the other side, thus creating m into n comparisons.
Generate training proposals

If you tick this checkbox, training proposals are generated to cover the qualification
deficit, provided that there are training courses which impart that qualification.
Qualification deficits only

Profile matchup shows the comparison between requirements of a position and qualifications
of a person. Sometimes a person may have a qualification which is not required by the
position. Sometimes a person's qualification may meet or exceed the requirement. Normally,
the comparison shows all these entries. If you tick this checkbox, then only those require-
ments which are not met are displayed.
24.4.4 Output
The proficiencies of requirements and qualifications are compared against each other.
Requirements and qualifications are sorted by qualification group in the list. The scale
and corresponding proficiencies of each qualification group are also displayed.
A standardized representation of the scale is used to make it easier to compare the
qualifications with requirements visually. If requirements are essential requirements, they
are flagged accordingly. If alternative qualifications are included in the matchup, these
might also appear in the list. If so, they are flagged accordingly.
All qualifications that are not specified in the requirements profile, but which a person
has anyway, are output at the end of the list. You can save this list to file and/or print
it out.
ALV list
List
If you click , the profile matchup is displayed as a list.
Graphic
If you click , the profile matchup is displayed as a graphic.
24.5 REPORTS BASED ON PROFILES

A A A A
Profile evaluation
You can display profiles of one or more objects using transaction PEPP. You specify the
objects and subprofiles in the selection screen.
The output shows the profile of each selected object. The profile contains the selected
subprofiles.
This graphic profile evaluation list gives you an overview of the profiles of persons,
positions, and so on. You can specify which subprofiles you want to display for each
object type.
This list displays general information for each object, and also information specific to the
subprofiles you chose. For example, you can specify that you want to display the
Qualifications and Potentials subprofiles for the object type Person. This means that the
system will display qualifications and potentials (but no preferences or dislikes) for all
the employees you specified.
A standardized scale representation is used to make it easier for you to compare different
qualifications/requirements. You can save this list to a file and/or print it out.
Profiles for an organizational unit

You can use transaction S_AHR_61015533 to display the subprofiles of all planning objects
(positions, holders of positions, jobs that describe the positions, and so on) within a
specific organizational unit. The system shows you all the objects. You can select the
objects whose profiles you want to see. You can also limit your selection to specific
subprofiles.
Profile matchup: positions/holders for an organizational unit

If you want to know how well an organizational unit is manned, you will like to do the
profile matchup of all its positions with the holders of those positions. You can do this
using transaction S_AHR_61015532. This report compares the requirements of all the
positions in one or more organizational units with the qualifications of the people who
hold these positions. You can restrict your selection to situations involving qualification
deficits. If Personnel Development is integrated with Training and Event Management,
or if you also use the Development Plans component, you can also display suitable training
proposals.
Objects without qualifications or requirements

You may want to know if there are positions for which the requirement profile has not
been maintained. Similarly, if there are any persons for whom the qualifications profile
has not been maintained. You can get answer to these questions by running transaction
S_PH9_46000019. This report generates a list of all the objects of a specific object type to
which no qualifications or requirements have been assigned. You can go directly from an
object in this list to profile maintenance to maintain the profile.
Objects with unevaluated qualifications or requirements

For every qualification or requirement, you should specify proficiency. You would like to
know if there are any objects for which proficiency has not been defined. You may use
transaction S_PH9_46000018 to do that. This report generates a list of all the objects of a
specific object type that have qualifications or requirements with the status Unevaluated.
You can go directly from an object in this list (a person, for example) to profile maintenance.
24.6 PERSONNEL DEVELOPMENT VIEW

C X X X
24.6.1 Purpose
SAP has created various views including a Personnel Development view.
24.6.2 IMG Node

SM34 â VC_T77PP_PROFILE (Table T77PP_VIEW)
24.6.3 Screen
24.6.4 Primary Key

Profile Maintenance – View of Profile Display
24.7 HEADERS

C X X X
24.7.1 Purpose
Here you can define various headers. There may be more than one header for an object
type. When headers are assigned to a view, e.g. Personnel Development view, there will
be only one header for each object type.
24.7.2 IMG Node

SM34 â VC_T77PP_PROFILE (View T77PP_HEAD)
24.7.3 Screen
24.7.4 Primary Key

Object Type + Two-digit Number
24.8 HEADERS FOR PD VIEW

C X X X
24.8.1 Purpose
Here you assign headers to each object type in the PD view. These headers are displayed
in profiles.
24.8.2 IMG Node

SM34 â VC_T77PP_PROFILE (View V_T77PR_V_H)
24.8.3 Screen
24.8.4 Primary Key

Profile Maintenance – View of Profile Display + Object Type
24.9 SUBPROFILES MASTER

C X X X
24.9.1 Purpose
Here you can define various subprofiles.
24.9.2 IMG Node

SM34 â VC_T77PP_PROFILE (Table T77PP_PART)
24.9.3 Screen
24.9.4 Primary Key

Count Parameters
24.10 SUBPROFILE FOR AN OBJECT TYPE

C X X X
24.10.1 Purpose
Here you specify which subprofiles will appear for an object and in what sequence. If you
don't want a tab to appear in the profile of an object type, remove the tick from the Active
checkbox.
24.10.2 IMG Node

SM34 â VC_T77PP_PROFILE (View V_T77PR_V_H_P)
24.10.3 Screen
24.10.4 Primary Key

Profile Maintenance – View of Profile Display + Object Type + Count Parameters
24.11 AUTHORIZATION CHECK FOR ACCESSING SUBPROFILES

C X X X
You can use BAdI HRPDV00PROFILE0001 to run authorization checks when subprofiles
are called up in display mode or change mode. These checks are run in addition to the
structural authorization check.
25 Career and Succession
Planning
25.1 CAREER PLANNING

A A A A
25.1.1 Purpose
You plan careers of your employees so that employees can progress through organizational
hierarchy, acquiring the skills required, contributing to the organization and remaining
motivated. SAP lets you do the career planning considering employees’ qualifications,
potentials, preferences, dislikes, etc. These are called planning criteria.
25.1.2 Transaction
PPCP—Career Planning
25.1.3 Settings for Career Planning

When you do career planning, your settings which are done using transaction PPUP play
an important role.
344
CHAPTER 25 Career and Succession Planning 345
Display vacant positions only

If you tick this checkbox, the system will only show vacant positions which are suitable
for the career of an employee. This will exclude positions which are likely to fall vacant
in future. Hence, you must be careful about selecting this checkbox.
Include essential requirements

A position may have several requirements. In career and succession planning, if you
insist that a person must have all the qualifications to be eligible for a position, you may
severely restrict your options. On the other hand, you may not want to consider a person
who does not have some of the essential competencies to succeed in the position, which
you specify while defining requirements for a position. If you tick this checkbox, the
system selects only those positions for which a person meets the essential requirements.
You can do career planning for various types of objects.
You select the object type and the object. You specify the key date for career planning.
Career planning shows the objects which are suitable for a person (or the object) for
whom you are doing career planning. The objects selected depend on the planning criteria
you specify.
Include qualifications
If you use this planning criterion, then all objects that require even one qualification
possessed by person will appear in the career plan. If you find that you are getting too
many positions in the career plan, you may change the user settings to take essential
requirements into account. The system will then show only those positions for which the
employee meets all essential requirements.
Include preferences
If you tick this checkbox, the system includes the objects which are preferences of the
person, in the career plan.
Include potentials
If you tick this checkbox, the system includes all entries except qualifications from the
Potentials subprofile of the person, in the career plan.
Include designations
In an earlier career or succession planning exercise, you may have designated a person
for certain positions. If you tick this checkbox, the system includes all positions or jobs
for which the person is designated, in the career plan.
Exclude dislikes
If a person has expressed dislike for certain positions, jobs, etc. these are excluded from
the career plan. They are not shown under any planning criteria.
Include career
The current position of a person may be in one or more career paths. Other objects in that
career path are selected.
Additional career
If you specifically specify a career, its career items are included in the career plan.
25.1.5 Career Plan

When you do career planning, the system shows positions and other objects under each
planning criterion.
All the objects that fulfill a criterion are displayed under that criterion. An object may
appear more than once under different criteria. The vacancy period of vacant positions
is displayed.
Creating designation
Out of the several positions displayed as possible career items for an employee, you
decide the positions which will be in the employee’s career path. You record your decision
by selecting the position and choosing, Planning â
Create â
Designation. Thus, by
designating the employee to one or more positions, both the employee and the management
know which positions the employee is going to hold in future, and the employee’s
development plan can be prepared accordingly.
Deleting designation
If you want to delete a designation created earlier, you may do so by selecting the
position and choosing, Planning â
Delete â
Designation.
Creating preference/potential
During career planning, apart from creating designation, you may create the employee’s
preference or potential. You may do so by selecting the position and choosing,
Planning â Create âPreference/Potential.
Deleting preference/potential
If you want to delete a preference/potential created earlier, you may do so by selecting
the position and choosing, Planning â
Delete â
Preference/Potential.
Transferring an employee
You can also transfer an employee, or enter a planned transfer which will come in
effect on the specified date. You do so by selecting the position and choosing,
Planning â Transfer/Planned Transfer. You then enter the transfer date and staffing
percentage in the dialog box and save.
Ranked list of possible career items

If you find the classical display confusing as the same position appears multiple times
and you do not know the suitability of the employee for various positions, you may
â
switch the display to a ranked list by choosing, Goto Ranking List. The system computes
the employee’s suitability for each position. If the system is not able to compute the
suitability percentage, it will show the suitability as 0% but still show that the person is
suitable for the position (as shown in the screenshot below).
Display profile
You can display the profile of the selected object by choosing, Goto â Profile.
Career path in graphic format
The career plan shows the careers. If you want to see the career in graphic format, select
the career and choose, Goto â Career.
LB 50000191 SAP
Consulting
C 50000122 SAP
Consulting
S 50000086 SAP ABAP

Consulting
Legend
Career Job Position
01.06.2009
View options
You can display/hide the object key by choosing, View â
Key on/Key off. You can
â
display a compact or expanded view by choosing, View Switch Layout. You can display
color legend by choosing, View â
Color Legend.
25.1.6 Profile Matchup
Profile matchup
You can select an object in the career plan or ranked list and see the profile matchup.
Profile matchup (all)

You can also display profile matchup of the person with all the objects selected in career
planning.
Displaying qualification deficit
In the profile matchup screen, if you click , and choose ‘Qualification

Deficits only’, the system will only show those requirements where there is a deficit.
Generating training proposals

If a qualification does not meet a requirement and there is a training course or development
plan that would impart the missing qualification, the system displays the training proposal
icon and the name of the business event or development plan. To book the person on the
â
business event in question, or to edit the development plan, choose Edit Further training.
Alternatively, in the profile matchup screen, click , and choose ‘Generate
Training Proposals’.
Graphic display
You can see the profile matchup in a graphical form by clicking .
25.2 CAREERS

A B C C
25.2.1 Purpose
Careers are non-person-specific paths within an organizational structure. They show the
principal personnel development paths within your company. Careers can be used as a
basis for career and succession planning.
25.2.2 Transaction
OOQ4—Career Maintenance
S_AHR_61007208—Edit Careers
25.2.3 Creating a Career

You can create careers using the create icon. The system gives you a dialog box, where
you enter the name of the career and click the create icon.
The system creates an object of type career. You then select the career and click the
change icon. The system takes you to structural graphics.
25.2.4 Adding Career Items

Here you can add career items (jobs and positions) in the career. Careers can contain jobs
and positions in any combination. You can depict vertical and horizontal movements
within a career. The career items within a career are arranged in such a way that those
lowest down in the hierarchy appear at the bottom of the career, and those higher up in
the hierarchy appear at the top. Career items from the same hierarchy level appear beside
each other.
LB 50000191 SAP
Consulting
C 50000122 SAP
Consulting
S 50000086 SAP ABAP

Consulting
25.2.5 Career Reports

You can run transaction S_AHR_61015524 to see a list of careers.
25.3 SUITABILITY

A B C C
Suitability
During career planning you compare profile of one person with profiles of multiple
positions. For each position, the system shows you how the person’s profile compares
with the position’s profile. It also determines suitability of the person for each position.
Suitability for a requirement item

Suitability is computed for each requirement. Each requirement has a numeric proficiency
value. If the person has that qualification, his qualification also has a numeric
proficiency value. Suitability is computed as proficiency of the qualification divided by
proficiency of the requirement.
Suitability in the case of over-qualification

For a qualification, if the person’s proficiency is higher than the proficiency of the
requirement, what should be the suitability percentage? SAP gives you three choices. You
may give the person extra credit, you may ignore over-qualification, or you may consider
him less suitable because of over-qualification. This choice is captured in the following
system switch in table T77S0.
Suitability in the case of alternative qualifications

Some qualifications have alternative qualifications. If the person does not have the
required qualification, but has an alternative qualification, that can be taken into account.
In your user-specific setting (transaction PPUP), you specify .
If you tick this checkbox, alternative qualifications are taken into account. Alternative
qualifications may have a replacement percentage, which is also taken into account in
computing suitability.
Sometimes a person may have both the required qualification as well as alternative
qualifications. In that case, the qualification which has better proficiency (after multiplying
by the replacement percentage in case of alternative qualification) is considered.
Suitability in the case of depreciation meter

Sometimes qualifications have depreciation meter. If the employee has a qualification,
but is not using it because the position does not require it, it depreciates. While
computing suitability, you can choose to disregard depreciation meter by ticking
in user settings (transaction PPUP). If not disregarded,
the person’s qualification is depreciated, reducing his suitability.
Suitability percentage of a position for a person

After computing suitability percentage for each requirement, it is averaged for all
requirements. If certain requirements are flagged as essential requirements, and you have
ticked in user settings (transaction PPUP), a person is
considered suitable only if he fulfils all essential requirements. Suitability percentage is
shown in the ranked list of possible career items.
Suitability range
Some companies discourage decision makers from taking suitability percentage literally.
While they are useful for sorting ranking lists, the suitability percentage is calculated
solely on the basis of system data, and cannot take all external factors into account. They
define suitability ranges (range of suitability percentages). The decision makers then treat
all positions in the same suitability range as equally suitable and consider external factors
in making the final choice. You can define suitability ranges in view T77CS.
If the system is set up to treat over-qualification as being positive (switch QUALI OVERQ),
then it is possible to have a suitability percentage greater than 100%. If you specify an
upper limit of 100% for your suitability ranges, then the system will display all objects
with a suitability percentage greater than 100% in the highest suitability range. Alternatively,
you can define a suitability range for over-qualification as shown above.
25.4 USER-SPECIFIC SETTINGS FOR PD

A B C C
25.4.1 Purpose
You can make a number of user-specific settings. You can use these user-specific settings
to override standard settings or to propose default values for specific fields. In Personnel
Development, you can define the following user-specific settings.
25.4.2 Transaction
PPUP—User-Specific
In profiles, Settings â User-specific
25.4.3 Screen
Plan version
If you always work a certain plan version you can specify that here. This plan version
will be proposed automatically by the system at the relevant points.
Reporting period
By default, the start date is current system date and end date is 31.12.9999. These are
proposed automatically by the system at the relevant points. You can change it if you want.
Include alternative qualifications

In career and succession planning you compute suitability percentage. If alternative quali-
fications are included, these are multiplied by the replacement percentage before the suitability
percentage is calculated. If a person has both the qualification specified and a permissible
alternative qualification, the qualification that gives the highest suitability percentage is taken.
Include essential requirements

A position may have several requirements. In career and succession planning, if you
insist that a person must have all the qualifications to be eligible for a position, you may
severely restrict your options. On the other hand, you may not want to consider a person
who does not have some of the essential competencies to succeed in the position, which
you specify while defining requirements for a position. If you tick this checkbox, the
system selects only those positions for which a person meets the essential requirements.
This setting does not affect the Find Objects for Qualifications search function.
Disregard depreciation meter

If a qualification has depreciation meter, a person’s competency will decrease with time
(provided that his current position does not require that qualification) and his suitability
for a position requiring that qualification will reduce. If you don’t want to depreciate the
competencies, even though they are defined in the system, you may do so by ticking this
checkbox.
Organizational unit
If you always work a certain organizational unit you can specify that here. If you specify
a default organizational unit, you must also specify a plan version. This organizational
unit will be proposed automatically by the system at the relevant points. If you do not
specify an organizational unit here and you are chief of an organizational unit, that
organizational unit is defaulted.
Display vacant positions only

If you tick this checkbox, the system will only show vacant positions which are suitable
for the career of an employee. This will exclude positions which are likely to fall vacant
in future. Hence, you must be careful about selecting this checkbox.
Appraisal model
Here you specify the default appraisal model.
Appraiser
Here you specify the object type of the appraiser.
Appraisee
Here you specify the object type of the appraisee.
Temporary
If you store the user settings temporarily, they only apply to the current terminal session.
In this case, any permanent settings are overwritten temporarily.
Permanent
If you store the user settings permanently, they apply to all future terminal sessions of
the logged on user.
Reset
If you have made temporary change in settings, and want to switch back to permanent
settings, you click this icon.
25.4.5 Storage of Permanent User-Specific Settings

When you define permanent user-specific settings, you are in effect defining user parameters
(System âUser Profile â
Own Data).
25.4.6 User Parameters for Personnel Development

In addition to these user-specific settings, the following user parameters are also available
for Personnel Development.
Parameter Use
HRPDV_OTYPE You can use this parameter to specify a default standard object
type for Personnel Development (does not apply to Appraisal
Systems). This parameter overrides the standard setting, which
is usually the object type User (exception: the standard default
object type in Succession Planning is S for position).
HRPDV_SEARCH_OT You can use this parameter to define default object types when
YPES searching for objects for qualifications and requirements. You
can specify multiple object types, each 2-character long without
separators. If an object type is only one character, you leave
second character blank. For example, <USP AP> represents user,
person and applicant.
POK You can use this parameter to switch on the display of the ID (of
all displayed objects) and abbreviation (of qualifications objects)
generally in Personnel Development.
25.5 SUCCESSION PLANNING

A A A A
25.5.1 Purpose
Succession planning is very similar to career planning. In career planning, the starting
point is an employee, and you identify the positions he can hold. In succession planning,
the starting point is a position, and you identify the persons who can hold that position.
You do succession planning of a position to ensure smooth transition in a critical position.
Apart from position, you can do succession planning for a job, task, work center, capacity
and requirements profile. SAP lets you do the succession planning considering employees’
qualifications, potentials, preferences and dislikes.
25.5.2 Transaction
PPSP—Succession Planning
You can do succession planning for the types of objects given below.
You select the object type and the object. You specify the key date for succession planning.
Succession planning shows the objects which are suitable for a position (or the object) for
which you are doing succession planning. The objects selected depend on the planning
criteria you specify. The objects which are displayed when you select a planning criterion
are discussed below.
Include qualifications
If you use this planning criterion, then all objects that possess even one qualification
required by position will appear in the succession plan. If you find that you are getting
too many persons in the succession plan, you may change the user settings to take essential
requirements into account. The system will then show only those persons who meet all
essential requirements.
Include preferences
If you tick this checkbox, the system includes all the persons who have shown preference
for a position in the succession plan of that position.
Include potentials
If you tick this checkbox, the system includes all the persons who have potential for a
position in the succession plan of that position.
Include designations
If you tick this checkbox, the system shows all persons who are designated for the position
as possible successors.
Exclude dislikes
If a person has expressed dislike for a position, for which succession planning is being
done, then he is excluded from the list of possible successors.
Include career
If the current position belongs to one or more career paths, then all positions in those
career paths are selected and their holders are displayed.
Additional career
All persons who hold a position in the specified career plan are displayed.
25.5.4 Succession Plan

When you run succession planning, the system shows the result as under:
Creating designation
Out of the several persons displayed as possible successors for a position, you decide the
persons who will be successors for that position. You record your decision by selecting
the person and choosing, Planning â

Create â
Designation. Thus, by designating one or
more employees to the position, both the employee and the management know which
employees are likely to hold the position in future, and the employees’ development plan
can be prepared accordingly.
Deleting designation
If you want to delete a designation created earlier, you may do so by selecting the person
and choosing, Planning âDelete â
Designation.
Creating preference/potential
During succession planning, apart from creating designation, you may create the
employee’s preference or potential. You do so by selecting the person and choosing,
Planning âCreate â
Deleting preference/potential
If you want to delete a preference/potential created earlier, you may do so by selecting
the person and choosing, Planning â
Delete â
Transferring an employee
You can also transfer an employee to a position, or enter a planned transfer which will
come in effect on the specified date. You do so by selecting the person and choosing,
Planning â Transfer/Planned Transfer. You then enter the transfer date and staffing
percentage in the dialog box and save.
Restricting the number of potential successors

If you want to restrict the number of potential successors, you may choose
Planning â Detail Selection. The ad hoc query is used for detail selection. You can use
detail selection to delete or retain objects of a specific object type in the hit list. The object
types Person and Applicant are special in that you can also restrict the hit list further by
specifying additional selection criteria. You make detail selection specifications separately
for each object type. The system then outputs a list of persons and applicants who also
fulfill the additional criteria. You can repeat detail selection as often as you want.
Ranked list of possible successors

If you find the classical display confusing as the same person appears multiple times and
you do not know the suitability of different employees for the positions, you may switch
the display to a ranked list by choosing, Goto â
Ranking List. The system computes the
suitability of different employees for the position. If the system is not able to compute the
suitability percentage, it will show the suitability as 0%.
Display profile
You can display the profile of the selected object by choosing, Goto â Profile.
Career path in graphic format
The succession plan shows the careers. If you want to see the career in graphic format,
select the career and choose Goto â
Career.
LB 50000191 SAP
Consulting
C 50000122 SAP
Consulting
S 50000086 SAP ABAP

Consulting
Legend
Career Job Position
01.06.2009
View options
You can display/hide the object key by choosing, View â
Key on/Key off. You can
display a compact, or expanded, view by choosing, View â
Switch Layout. You
can display color legend by choosing, View â
Color Legend.
25.5.5 Profile Matchup

The profile matchup functionality in succession planning is similar to the profile matchup
functionality in career planning.
25.5.6 Succession Simulation

If an employee becomes successor for a position, the position that he is holding will
become vacant and you will need to find a successor for it. This phenomenon will repeat
until the successor does not leave behind a position, or you reach an obsolete position.
You can perform succession simulation by choosing Planning âPerform Simulation in
the initial screen of succession planning. When the simulation is completed, the system
displays a list of all positions that have to be re-staffed, and proposes suitable persons for
these positions. You are also shown each person’s suitability, and the planning criteria
they fulfill.
When you simulate succession planning for a position or other object, the system always
simulates the transfer of the person with the highest suitability. The system then works
through a succession scenario for the new vacancy caused by this person. The simulation
stops if a successor does not leave behind a position, or if a successor does not leave
behind a position that requires re-staffing, or if it reaches an obsolete position.
25.5.7 Succession Overview

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000017 to see succession overview of an organizational
unit. It displays an overview of the succession situation for all positions in an organizational
unit. Potential successors are determined for every position on the basis of the planning
criteria specified. The number of potential successors found is displayed for each planning
criteria selected, and for all criteria as a whole. You can then go directly from here to a
list of the potential successors found. The suitability of the best potential successor is
always displayed in the succession overview. From here too you can go to a list of all
potential successors. This list tells you how suitable each candidate is for the position in
question.
26 Development Plan
26.1 INDIVIDUAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN

A A A A
26.1.1 Development Plan and Development Plan Items
Individual development plan

In order to develop your employees, you need to plan their development, and then
execute the development plan. Individual development plan is a part of a person’s profile.
366
CHAPTER 26 Development Plan 367
Development plan items

A development plan contains development plan items, e.g. training, on-the-job training,
job rotation, etc. A development plan item can be in different states, e.g. planned, completed,
etc. It also has a period during which it is expected to be implemented. It is also possible
for items to run in parallel to each other.
26.1.2 Individual Development Subprofile
Changing individual development plans

You can run transaction PPDPIM or PPPM to change the profile of a person. You click
the tab ‘Individual development’ to change the individual development plan of a person.
Creating development items

Individual development subprofile is used to plan and manage an employee’s individual
development. Individual development may take place in many ways. The employee may
be provided training, on-the-job training, job rotation, etc. When you create an individual
development plan item, the system lets you choose from the following types of development
plan items.
You first select the type of development plan item, and then the development plan item.
When the record is inserted, you maintain the state (planned) and validity period. You
can also keep notes.
Updating state
Every item in an individual development plan has a state. When the item is created, the
state is ‘Planned’. When the employee starts working on an item, e.g. undergoing training
or working in a position, etc. the state is changed to ‘Current’. When the item is completed,
e.g. completed working in a position, the state is changed to ‘Completed’. If there is an
evaluation to check whether the employee has completed the item successfully or not,
e.g. a test at the end of a training program, the state may be changed either to ‘Completed
successfully’, or to ‘Completed unsuccessfully’. If the item is not carried out as planned,
the state is changed to ‘Not carried out’.
Linkage between development activity and the state of development plan item
Development plan items represent development activity. If a position is in an employee’s
individual development plan and the employee is transferred to that position, the state
of that development plan item should be changed to ‘Current’. SAP supports this linkage
in both ways. If the employee is transferred to the position, the state of the development
plan item is automatically changed. Conversely, if the state of the development plan item
is changed to ‘Current’, the employee is automatically transferred.
Triggering further processing steps

When, in a development plan item, an object of a certain type achieves certain state, the
system automatically triggers certain actions in the system.
Ø When the state of a position is changed to ‘Current’, the person is transferred to the
specified position.
Ø When the state of a business event type is changed to ‘Current’, the person is booked
to a business event of that type.
Ø When the state of an appraisal model is changed to ‘Current’, the ‘perform appraisal
function’ is triggered. This processing needs to be activated in the system.
You can also make settings in Customizing to specify whether users have to confirm
execution of a further processing module, or whether it should be executed entirely in the
background.
Automatic state management

You can assign and update the state of a development plan item manually. It is, however,
possible to partially automate state management. You can specify that certain events
should automatically trigger a change in the state of a development plan item.
Ø When appraisal process is completed, the state of the appraisal model is set to
‘Completed’.
Ø When an employee is booked for a training program, the state of the development
plan item of that business event type is set to ‘Current’.
Ø When an employee completes the training program, the state of the development
plan item of that business event type is set to ‘Completed’.
Ø If an employee cancels his attendance for a training program, the state of the
development plan item of that business event type is set to ‘Planned’.
Ø If an employee’s staffing assignment for a position is deleted, the state of the
development plan item of that position is set to ‘Not carried out’.
Ø When an employee is transferred to the position in his development plan item, the
state of that item is set to ‘Current’.
Ø When an employee is transferred out of the position in his development plan item,
the state of that item is set to ‘Completed’.
Automatic entry of training in individual development plan

If you use the Training and Event Management functionality to book a person for a
business event, this information can be written automatically to the individual development
plan of the person.
Finding objects for a development plan item

You can run transaction PPDPSPFS to find all objects for a development plan item in
various states.
26.2 GENERAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN

A A A A
26.2.1 General Development Plans

Individual development plans are development plans which are specific to individual
employees. However, over a period of time you may observe certain patterns and may
want to create general development plans which can be assigned to employees. SAP lets
you do that. These general development plans also contain a set of development plan
items. When you assign a general development plan to an employee, two things happen.
Ø The development plan appears in the ‘Development plan history’ subprofile of the employee.
Ø Development plan items are copied from the general development plan to the
employee’s individual development plan.
Subsequently, you complete both the individual development plan items in the ‘Individual
development’ subprofile and the development plan in the ‘Development plan history’
subprofile. When you complete the development plan in the ‘Development plan history’
subprofile, qualifications associated with the development plan are assigned to the employee.
26.2.2 Copying a General Development Plan

You can run transaction PPDPIM to copy a general development plan into an individual
development plan.
Selection Screen
Development plan for

You can create individual development plan for a person or for a user. You select the
object type and the object. However, the profile of object type user does not contain
‘Individual development’ and ‘Development plan history’ subprofiles. You may have to
enable it in view cluster VC_T77PP_PROFILE.
Model development plan

Here you specify the development plan you want to copy from. If you are not copying
from a development plan, then you can create the individual development plan directly
in the profile of the employee.
Planning start
The individual development plan you create will be valid from the planning start date
and will delimit any existing development plan.
Evaluation period
You can specify the evaluation period to restrict the data displayed in an individual
development plan to a specific period.
26.2.3 Copying Development Plan Items
General development plan sub-screen

When you run transaction PPDPIM with a model development plan, the system shows
all development plan items. You can either transfer all items, or only mandatory items,
to the employee’s individual development plan. You can also copy individual items in
the general plan to the individual plan by double-clicking them.
Individual development plan sub-screen

When you copy development plan items, they get copied to the individual development
plan of the employee which is in the right-half of the screen. Apart from development
plan items, the development plan also gets assigned to the employee and shows in his
‘Development plan history’ subprofile. There it needs a state value, which you specify on
the following screen.
26.2.4 Development Plan History Subprofile
Development plan history subprofile

You can run transaction PPPM to see the ‘Development plan history’ subprofile of a
person which contains development plans assigned to him.
Creating development plan

Development plans are assigned to a person by copying a development plan using
transaction PPDPIM. You cannot insert a record in the Development plan history subprofile
of a person. However, you can delete a development plan from the subprofile.
Updating state
Every item in the development plan history has a state. When the item is created, the
state is ‘Planned’. When the employee starts working on a development plan the state is
changed to ‘Current’. When the development plan is completed, the state is changed to
‘Completed’. If there is an evaluation to check whether the employee has completed the
development plan successfully or not, the state may be changed either to ‘Completed
successfully’, or to ‘Completed unsuccessfully’. If the item is not carried out as planned,
the state is changed to ‘Not carried out’.
Triggering further processing steps

If the state ‘Completed successfully’ is assigned to a development plan in the ‘Development
plan history’ subprofile, the qualifications imparted by the development plan are written
to the person’s qualifications subprofile. If the person already holds a qualification, only
the proficiency of the qualification is updated provided that the new proficiency is higher
than the existing one.
Finding objects for a development plan

You can run transaction PPDPSPFP to find all objects for a development plan in various
states.
26.3 DEVELOPMENT PLAN CATALOG

A A A A
26.3.1 Purpose
General development plans are listed in the development plan catalog. The development
plan catalog is a multi-level hierarchy of development plan groups, which contain general
development plans.
26.3.2 Transaction
OOEC—Change Development Plan Catalog
S_AHR_61007168—Edit Development Plan Catalog
PPDPCS—Display Development Plan Catalog
26.3.3 Development Plan Group

In the development plan catalog, when you click create, the system asks you whether you
want to create a development plan group or a development plan. Usually you first create
development plan groups. For a development plan group you specify a name, a description
and a validity period.
26.3.4 Development Plan

Having created the structure of the development plan catalog in the form of development
plan groups, you create general development plans under the development plan group.
For a development plan also you specify a name, a description and a validity period. In
addition, you can specify the qualifications which will be imparted if the development
plan is completed, or completed successfully (in Development plan history subprofile).
Propose qualifications
You can specify which qualifications should be imparted upon completion of a general
development plan. You can have the system propose qualifications to help you here. In
this case, the system proposes all the qualifications or requirements (including proficiencies)
that are related to the individual items in the development plan. For example, if a position
is a development plan item, and if it requires English (proficiency Good), then English
(proficiency ‘Good’) will be proposed by the system as the qualification to be imparted
upon completion of the development plan. You can change the list of qualifications proposed
by the system, in other words, you can delete qualifications, or add more qualifications.
You can also change the proficiencies proposed for the qualifications.
26.3.5 Development Plan Catalog

The development plan catalog shows the hierarchy of development plan groups and
development plans.
26.3.6 Development Plan Item

A development plan contains development plan items. You click to create items in
the development plan. When you transfer development plan items from general
development plan to individual development plan, you can specify whether you want to
transfer only mandatory items or all items. Also, the system proposes an end date for the
item in the individual development plan, computing it from the start date and the period
specified here.
26.4 DEVELOPMENT PLAN STATES

A B B C
26.4.1 Purpose
The development plan items may have several states, e.g. planned, completed, etc. The
state represents the current progress made in a development measure. States have to be
assigned and updated manually for individual development plan items. In some cases,
they may also be updated automatically. Here you define the master list of states you
want to have in your organization.
26.4.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77BZ
26.4.3 Screen
26.4.4 Primary Key

State of Development Plan
26.5 PERMISSIBLE FURTHER PROCESSING

A B C C
26.5.1 Purpose
When the state of a development plan item changes, the system can trigger further processing
which is defined in view T77BX. Here you define the master list of further processing
steps which will be available for selection in view T77BX.
26.5.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77FUNC
26.5.3 Screen
26.5.4 Primary Key

Type of Use for Function Module + Name of Function Module
26.6 FURTHER PROCESSING OF DEVELOPMENT PLAN ITEMS

A B C C
26.6.1 Purpose
Here you can define the further processing steps that can be triggered when a certain
state is assigned to a development plan item of a certain object type.
Object type State Further processing

Development plan Completed The qualifications imparted by the development plan
successfully are written to the person’s qualifications profile.
Appraisal model Current Perform appraisal function can be triggered by function
module RHPQ_T77BX_START_APPRAISAL. This
function module is available, but the table does not
contain this entry.
Business event Current The standard entry calls function module RHPQ_T77BX_
type PARTICIPATION_INS which books the person for the
business event of that type. If you want, you can call
function module RHPQ_T77BX_PART_INS_NO_DIALOG,
which books the person for the business event of that
type without user confirmation.
Position Current The person is transferred to the specified position.
The standard system contains the entries given above. However, you can also define
further processing steps of your own. To help you do this, the standard system provides
function module RHPQ_T77BX_INTERFACE_SAMPLE, which contains information on
the interfaces, and can be used as a template to copy from.
26.6.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77BX
26.6.3 Screen
26.6.4 Primary Key

Object Type + State of Development Plan + Function Module for further Processing in
Dev. Plan
26.6.5 Confirmation of Further Processing Step

SAP lets you specify whether users have to confirm execution of a further processing
module, or whether it should be executed entirely in the background. If you enter the
value ‘X’ for the following entry in table T77S0, the users will have to confirm the further
processing step.
26.7 AUTOMATIC STATE MANAGEMENT

A B C C
26.7.1 Purpose
In certain cases, it is possible for the system to automatically change the state of a
development plan item on the basis of predefined events for particular object types. For
example, a person is transferred to a position as a development measure and the state of
the development plan item is set to Current. When the person has completed the
development plan item, he is transferred to his original position. The transfer triggers the
event S_OLD “Holder leaves position”, and this sets the item in the person’s individual
development plan to Completed. Note that the change of state does not depend on the
validity date of development plan items.
26.7.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77BW
26.7.3 Screen
26.7.4 Primary Key

Development Plan: State Key
State key and text

In this field, you enter the event that is to trigger a change in the state of an item.
Active
If you do not wish to use certain events, do not delete them—deactivate them instead.
Original state
Here you enter the state that the item must have when the event occurs.
Target state
Here you enter the new state to be assigned to the item when the event occurs.
26.8 DISPLAY OF BUSINESS EVENTS IN INDIVIDUAL

DEVELOPMENT PLANS

A B C C
If you have an individual development plan for a person, he should be attending only
those training programs which are in his individual development plan. But if he is booked
for a training program, which is not in his individual development plan, what should the
system do? If you want the system to show that training program in his individual
development plan, you set the following switch in table T77S0 to 1. If you don’t want the
system to show the training programs which are not included in the individual development
plan, you set this switch to 0.
If the above switch is set to 1 and the business event for which the employee is booked
is written in his development plan, what should be the state of that development plan
item? You specify that state in the system switch given below.
27 Appraisals
27.1 APPRAISAL

A A A A
SAP had an old ‘Appraisal Systems’, which has been replaced by ‘Objective Setting and
Appraisals’. Although the old system also works, this book deals only with the new
system. You have to specify whether you want to use the old system or the new system
in the following switch.
You can create appraisals in a person’s profile using transaction PPPM. In subprofile for
an object type (view V_T77PR_V_H_P, chapter 24.10), you should activate the subprofiles
related to objective setting and appraisals which are for the new appraisal system and
deactivate the subprofiles for the old appraisal system.
383
The Objective Setting and Appraisals (received) subprofile contains appraisals where the
person was appraised. The Objective Setting and Appraisals (created) subprofile contains
the appraisals where the person acted in the role of appraiser. You can also use this
subprofile to create and edit appraisals.
You create appraisals using transaction APPCREATE or using transaction PPPM and
selecting the tab ‘Objective Setting & Appraisals (Open)’. Both transactions give the same
user interface. When you run transaction PPPM, and select the tab ‘Objective Setting &
Appraisals (Open)’, you will see the screen with all open appraisals. To create a new
appraisal, you click and select the template you want to use for creating the
appraisal.
CHAPTER 27 Appraisals 385
After selecting a template, you select the appraisee and the appraiser (during customi-
zing the terms may have been changed to employee and manager, for example). You are
in the preparation stage of the appraisal. You may like to save the data by clicking
and do objective setting later or proceed with . The system
shows the appraisal form containing the header data and columns.
Header data
The header data contains the names of the appraisee and the appraiser. Validity period
is the period for which appraisal is being done. Execution period is the period when
appraisal will be done. If you do not wish some of these fields to be shown in the header,
your consultant can hide them while defining the template.
Appraisal status
During the appraisal process, at each stage the appraisal document has a status.
While defining the appraisal template, it is decided which status values are applicable to
you and how the status is going to change.
Criteria
The lower part of the template contains the criteria on which a person would be appraised.
The criteria may be grouped in criteria groups, which may be grouped in further criteria
groups. They are displayed in a numbered hierarchy. The system can be configured to
display roman numbers or alphabet characters instead.
While defining the template, depending on your requirements, your consultant can specify
whether a criterion can be deleted. If so, you will see the delete icon in the column ‘Delete
Element’. You can also add elements in certain criteria groups. In which criteria groups
you can add criteria, and in which you can’t, is defined by your consultant based on your
requirements. These are displayed in the column ‘Add Element’.
Scales
Each criterion is evaluated on a scale defined in the template. The scales may be quantitative
or qualitative. For qualitative scales you should ensure that the descriptions are meaningful
for each criterion. If need be, get a scale defined for each criterion, rather than use scales
with general descriptions. Also, even in qualitative scales, the values are numeric and
they are used for computation. On a 1–5 qualitative scale, if actual is 1 and target is 5,
the target is achieved 20%. Hence, you must ensure that the numbers assigned are
representative.
Columns
You set the target and enter actual values achieved for a criterion in columns. The columns
are customized as per your requirement and typically include target, current value (actual
achieved), final appraisal (actual/target), weighting of different criteria and weighted
result (final appraisal multiplied by weighting). The scales on which these column values
are measured are also displayed in separate columns. SAP also provides you facility to
write notes. These are displayed as wherever notes are permitted.
In some of the columns, e.g. target, current value (actual), weighting (relative importance
of criteria), you enter values. In some columns, e.g. final appraisal (actual/target), the
value is computed. If for a criterion, computation is specified in a column but entry
is also permitted, the system will compute the value which can be overwritten
manually.
Status flow
As the appraisal process progresses, the appraisal document goes through change of
status. You may modify the appraisal using transaction PPPM or APPCHANGE. Depending
on the status of the appraisal, the actions you perform would be different. Accordingly
you will find different action icons on the screen, e.g. .
Further statuses can be added to the status specified above:

Ø Approved
Ø Rejected
Ø Finally approved
Ø Finally rejected
Further processing can be triggered using the workflow and can underlie an approval
process, whereby, for instance, the employee accepts his or her own appraisal.
In this scenario, approval would trigger updation of qualifications, as well as adjustment
of the compensation components.
Part appraisals
You can have multiple part appraisals and a final appraisal based on the part appraisals.
Anonymous appraisals
In the appraisal template, in processing tab, in template mode field, you can specify that
appraisals are anonymous by choosing from the following options.
Ø Not anonymous
Ø Anonymous with registration
Ø Anonymous without registration
Ø Make anonymous when closing without registration
Ø Make anonymous when closing with registration
Workflow and appraisal subprofiles

Appraisals may be implemented with or without workflow. If implemented without
workflow, appraisals can be created in ‘Objective Setting & Appraisals (Open)’ tab of a
person’s profile. The appraisee sees the appraisals in ‘Objective Setting & Appraisals
(Received)’ tab. Appraisers process them in ‘Objective Setting & Appraisals (Created)’ tab.
Appraisals related to training

You can create appraisal templates for business events and attendees.
Appraisal approval
A standard workflow is available for approving appraisals. Approval of appraisals is
only possible with this workflow. Once an appraiser has held and completed an appraisal,
the appraisal can be passed on to the appraisee for approval. The appraisee can view the
appraisal, and decide whether he wishes to approve or reject the appraisal. If the appraisee
rejects the appraisal, the appraisal is automatically put back in the status ‘In process’ so
that the appraiser can review it.
Evaluate appraisal documents

You can use transaction APPSEARCH to find appraisal documents as per the selection
criteria you specify. You can display an appraisal document by clicking its hyperlink.
27.2 APPRAISAL CATALOG

A A A A
Appraisal customizing structure

Appraisal documents are created based on the appraisal templates, which are defined by
consultants according to customer requirements using transaction PHAP_CATALOG_PA,
PPAD, OOAM or S_AHR_61003969. Appraisal customizing consists of the following nested
elements.
Category group
Category
Template
Criteria group
Criteria
Criteria
Criteria
Criteria group
Criteria group
Template
You can create different categories for different appraisal processes (for example, objective
setting, 360 degree appraisals, standard appraisals, certificates of employment, and so on).
Category group, category

Appraisal templates are grouped in categories, which are further grouped in category
groups. Category groups are, in general, only created by System Administration. At the
level of category group, the permissible object types are determined that are available in
the forms. These object types are available for selection when you define participants in
categories. Properties of category group and category apply to all appraisal templates
under them. Category group and category can be used for authorization control, as these
fields are available in authorization object P_HAP_DOC.
Template
You create appraisal templates for groups of people who need to be appraised in a
similar manner. For example, they may have the same set of criteria, and you may not
want the participants in the appraisal process to delete any criteria. Planning of appraisal
templates for an organization should be done very carefully. One strategy is to create few
templates, each containing large number of criteria. In this scenario, the person setting
the objectives will delete the criteria not applicable to the appraisee. Some organizations,
on the other hand, may have well defined job roles and fixed set of criteria for each job
role. These organizations may prefer to have well defined job role based appraisal templates.
Template can be used for authorization control, as this field is available in authorization
object P_HAP_DOC.
Criteria group
Criteria are grouped in criteria groups, so that the appraisal document is well structured.
Criteria groups can be grouped in further criteria groups creating a tree structure. Criteria
numbering reflects this multi-level organization. Criteria groups can be sorted in the
desired order and they can be given different weightings which are taken into account
while computing final appraisal rating.
Criteria
A person is appraised based on pre-defined criteria. Each criterion has a scale which may
be quantitative or qualitative. For each criterion, final appraisal value is computed which
is rolled up to generate the final appraisal of the person. Criteria can also be sorted and
weighed. You can also use qualification or business event type as a criterion in the
appraisal template. When you insert a node in a criteria group, you can choose to insert
qualification or business event type.
Since you can use qualification as an appraisal criterion, you can also use qualification
group in place of criteria group.
Creating templates
You can create appraisal templates in the following ways.
Ø Using example form
Ø Using wizard
Ø By uploading
Ø By creating manually
Releasing templates
After defining a template, it is released. Only then it is available for the appraisal process.
If you want to change a released template, you can cancel release, provided that it has
not been used to create any appraisal document. You can archive templates that you no
longer want, since these cannot be deleted.
Using template versions

After an appraisal template has been used, you may need to modify it before next appraisal
cycle. SAP does not permit modification of appraisal templates after they have been used.
So, you have to archive it and create another one. SAP identifies the appraisal template
by its object id, and not by its name. It is, therefore, possible to create another appraisal
template whose name is the same as that of an existing template (the screenshot below
has two templates using the same name, ‘Sales Manager’). This will not create any problem
for the users because they will see only released templates and not the archived templates.
But it may present a problem to the maintenance persons, who would see two templates
with the same name in customizing, without any visible sign that one is released and
another is archived. You should avoid having two released appraisal templates with the
same name, as the users will not know which template to use and may use the wrong one.
In order to avoid such confusion you may suffix the template name by version number
(e.g. v1, v2 or 2008, 2009). Otherwise, maintenance persons have to know that if multiple
appraisal templates have the same name, the last one is in use.
Copying and inserting

If you are defining a number of templates, you may like to create them by copying and
changing. SAP lets you copy template, criteria group and criteria to clipboard and insert
from clipboard. When you copy template or criteria group to clipboard, the entire
substructure gets copied, and when you insert, the entire substructure gets inserted. In
this process a copy of all the objects is created. Increasing the objects in this manner is
undesirable from the maintenance point of view. It is okay to copy and insert a criterion
to create another criterion with similar attributes. But, don’t copy and insert templates or
criteria groups. Instead, create template or criteria group and add lower level objects by
right-clicking and selecting Insert âExisting Element.
Where used
If you use an appraisal element in multiple templates, changing it will change its behavior
in all the places where it is used. Therefore, before changing an appraisal element, right-
click and select Where-Used List to determine whether it is safe to change an appraisal
element or you should create a new one instead.
Master template
If you are going to use multiple templates, it is better to maintain a master template in
which you define all the criteria in appropriate criteria groups. Whenever you need a
new criterion, you should define it in master template and use in other templates. This
will prevent proliferation of criteria. You also need to standardize their attributes and
behavior. Unless this is done, different individuals will define the same criterion in multiple
ways. This will result in proliferation of criteria and other appraisal elements leading to
a maintenance nightmare.
Translation
You can enter language-specific texts in multiple languages using translation function.
Appraisal authorization
You can control authorization of appraisal documents using authorization object
P_HAP_DOC. In this authorization object, you can also specify authorization profile which
restricts your authorization to the specified part of the organizational structure. If you
use substitution of managers, you need to maintain the following entry in table T77S0.
Then you can give different authorization to an employee for an area where he is a
manager, and different authorization for area where he is substituting for the manager
of that area.
27.3 APPRAISAL CATEGORY GROUP

A X X X
27.3.1 Allowed Object Types
Here you can enter the type of objects that participate in the appraisal process. When you
define participants at category level, you can choose from these object types.
27.3.2 Status
During the appraisal process, an appraisal can have different statuses. Here you specify
the status values that will be available for selection. These may be further restricted at
category level.
27.3.3 Person Authorized

Here you specify the roles that persons are going to play in the appraisal process. For
example, if you are not going to have part appraisals, you may not select ‘Part Appraiser’.
These may be further restricted at category level.
27.3.4 Event
Here you specify the events that are applicable to your appraisal process when you use
workflow. These may be further restricted at category level.
27.4 APPRAISAL CATEGORY

A X X X
27.4.1 Use of Category

When you create a category, you specify its use.
27.4.2 Participants
Here you specify the participants in the appraisal process, their object types and texts. If
you would like to use the word employee in place of appraisee, or manager in place of
appraiser, you may enter that here. Similarly, the appraisal header contains a field, validity
period. If you do not like that term and would like to call it ‘Appraisal Period’, or ‘Period
Appraised’, you may enter that here. If you do not specify any text, the system will use
the text, ‘Validity Period’. When an appraisal document is created, you specify the
appraisee, the appraiser, etc. This information is displayed in the header of the appraisal
document.
27.4.3 Columns
Here you specify the columns used in the appraisal template. Each column has a specific
purpose. Customer-specific columns can be defined using transaction OOHAP_BASIC. In
the template, you specify the columns that will appear in the appraisal document.
27.4.4 Roles
Here you specify the roles in the appraisal process. Customer-specific roles can be defined
using transaction OOHAP_BASIC. Note that there is no link between the roles of Objective
Setting and Appraisals and the role concept delivered by SAP.
27.4.5 Value Lists
Here you specify the scales and currencies you are going to use. You may define
scales using SM34 âVC_T77SK. If you want to define any other type of value list, you
may use transaction OOHAP_BASIC. In the template, value lists are associated with
columns.
27.4.6 Enhancements
Here you can specify the enhancements that you are going to use. Enhancements are
defined in transaction OOHAP_BASIC.
27.4.7 Status Flow
Status
Here you can further restrict the status values used in the appraisal process for this category.
Persons authorized
Here you can further restrict the authorized persons.
Event
Here you can further restrict the workflow events.

27.5 APPRAISAL TEMPLATE

A X X X
You create appraisal templates for groups of people who are to be appraised in a similar
fashion. For example, they may have the same set of criteria, and you may not want the
participants in the appraisal process to delete any criteria. Planning of appraisal templates
for an organization should be done very carefully. One strategy will be to create a few
templates, each containing large number of criteria. In this scenario, the person setting
the objectives will delete the criteria not applicable to the appraisee. Some organizations,
on the other hand, may have well defined job roles and fixed set of criteria for each job
role. Such organizations may prefer to have well defined job role based appraisal templates.
In such cases, you may like to create a master template to control creation of criteria. An
appraisal template has a name. It belongs to a category group and category, whose properties
apply to the appraisal template. An appraisal template has the following properties.
27.5.1 Description
You can maintain both ‘Standard’ and ‘Web Layout’ descriptions of a template. Standard
description is used in the ECC environment and web layout description is used in the
web environment. Alternatively, you can maintain only ‘Standard’ description which is
then used in both the environments.
27.5.2 Layout
Here you define the layout of the appraisal document based on this template.
Numbering
An appraisal document has criteria which are grouped in one or more levels of criteria
groups. These criteria are numbered. Here you can define the style of criteria numbering.
Header
An appraisal document has a header with a variety of information. Some companies do
not want to display some of this data in the appraisal document. Here you can specify
the data that is not displayed in the header of an appraisal document.
Further
Here you can specify additional header data, placeholders for text replacement and various
document layouts.
Links
You can display a number of pushbuttons in an appraisal document. These pushbuttons
are links to additional information. Here you decide the links that are included in the
appraisal documents based on this template.
27.5.3 Columns
At the category level you define the columns that are available. Here you specify
Ø The columns that will appear in the appraisal document
Ø The sequence in which the columns will appear
Ø The value list for a column where applicable
Ø Value determination logic for a column where applicable
Ø Whether entry is optional, required, or not permitted
Ø Whether notes can be stored, for example, to explain the current/actual value
27.5.4 Column Access
You can define which roles (for example, employees or managers) involved in the appraisal
process can access which columns during a particular phase of the appraisal process. You
can choose from various default settings, or specify your own. The roles involved in the
appraisal process can either be the owner of a column, or another user (abbreviation:
other). You can define the type of column access (for example, change access) for owners
and others, for each process phase. During the runtime, the system checks the attribute
assignment of the column access depending on the current status of the appraisal. As
soon as an appraisal has the status completed or greater, the system always displays all
columns.
27.5.5 Value Descriptions
For the Final Appraisal column, you specify a value list. Here you can specify a description
for each value in the value list.
27.5.6 Roles
Roles reflect the relationship between the appraisee and other persons involved in the
appraisal process. The roles are used for the following purposes.
Purpose Description
To prepare appraisal For the proposal of the corresponding appraiser or appraisee.

documents
To clarify the role of A role can be assigned to part appraisers. You can allocate this
the part appraisers role specifically in the SAP system, or the SAP system can determine
for the appraisee it automatically. To determine a role, the system uses a BAdI
implementation for the role in question (for example, it can
determine the appraisee’s manager via the chief position in an
organizational structure).
To control access At criteria group and criteria level you can specify which role has
authorizations on authorization for which criteria or criteria group. Thus, managers
element level and colleagues can appraise an employee on different criteria in
(Subappraisals) the same template.
27.5.7 Processing
Self-appraisal not allowed

If you tick this checkbox, a person cannot appraise himself, i.e. he cannot have the role
of appraiser and appraisee at the same time.
Do not check appraisal date

If you tick this checkbox, the system does not check the appraisal document date against
the validity period of the appraisal document.
No review phase
If you tick this checkbox, the status ‘In Review’ cannot be assigned to the appraisal
document.
No authorization check for appraiser

If you tick this checkbox, the system does not check an appraiser’s authorizations when
an appraisal document is called.
Multiple appraisers allowed

If you tick this checkbox, you can use more than one appraiser in the appraisal document.
Multiple appraisees allowed

If you tick this checkbox, you can use more than one appraisee in the appraisal template.
Attachment allowed
If you tick this checkbox, users can add attachments to an appraisal document. You can
only attach documents if you have activated the switch GENER OBJSV in table T77S0.
Approval process activated

If you tick this checkbox, you specify that the approval workflow for appraisal documents
is active.
Template mode
You can specify one of the following modes for an appraisal template.
Mode Description Explanation
Blank Not anonymous

R Anonymous with The administrator must register participants (appraisers).
registration Only those participants, who are registered by an
administrator, are authorized to participate. The adminis-
trator enters participants in a separate table so they are
not associated with the actual appraisal document.
A Anonymous without Any user may participate in the appraisal. If the
registration parameter ‘Appraisal Document Creation Check’ is set
so that a participant may only participate in an appraisal
once, an entry is still written to the anonymous
registration table for these templates. This is to prevent
participants from participating more than once.
C Make anonymous Users can temporarily store anonymous appraisal
when closing documents and continue editing them at a later point.
without registration The system only makes the template anonymous after
users close the appraisal document so that users can no
longer access it.
X Make anonymous The administrator must register participants (appraisers).
when closing with Users can temporarily store anonymous appraisal
registration documents and continue editing them at a later point.
The system only makes the template anonymous after
users close the appraisal document so that users can no
longer access it.
Appraisal document creation check

Here you specify whether multiple appraisal documents can be created at the same time,
or only one document can be created for an appraisee at a time. You may also specify that
there can be one document per appraiser for an appraisee.
Action log
You can specify that the action log is not activated, or is in summarized form, or is in
detailed form. If created, the action log may be visible in the appraisal document, or it
can only be analyzed using transaction SLG1.
Processing of archived appraisal docs

Here you specify whether completed appraisal documents are reset or not, and deleted
or not.
Further template behavior

Here you can specify template enhancements for further behavior.
Maximum number of part appraisers

If you have selected only the Part Appraiser (PAPP) and/or Importance Part Appraisal
(PWGT) columns in an appraisal template, this is a 360° appraisal, and the system does
not restrict the number of part appraisers allowed. If you select the Objective Setting
(OBJ0) column or any other column, it is no longer a 360° appraisal, and the system
restricts the number of part appraisers.
Follow-up processing
These enhancements enable you to determine the functions that are available for users
when they perform follow-up processing for an appraisal document. If an appraisal template
contains qualifications, they can be transferred in the follow-up activities.
27.5.8 Status Flow
Here you specify the pushbuttons that will appear on the appraisal form depending on
the status of the appraisal form. You can navigate to different buttons using the left and
the right arrows in the top-right corner of the screen.
Outbound status and substatus

When the status of the appraisal form matches the outbound status, the pushbuttons
specified on this page are displayed on the appraisal form.
Changes not allowed

This flag indicates that the appraisal document cannot be changed. It enables you to
override the entries on the Column Access tab page. If according to an entry made on this
tab page, change access is allowed for the appraisal document during a particular phase,
the flag overrides this entry and the appraisal document can only be displayed. It makes
more sense to set this flag for a substatus.
Pushbutton
This is the pushbutton which is displayed on the appraisal form. There can be multiple
pushbuttons for an outbound status and substatus. You navigate to different pushbuttons
using .
Person authorized
Here you specify the persons who are authorized to press the pushbutton.
Highlight pushbutton
Here you specify that the pushbutton is highlighted and pressing Enter amounts to clicking
the pushbutton. You should highlight only one pushbutton for an outbound status and
substatus.
Target status and substatus

Here you specify the status and substatus that the appraisal form will receive after the
pushbutton is pressed.
Next status
After saving the document, you can either exit the appraisal document, or change its
status to display.
Workflow event
Here you specify the workflow event that will be generated by the system to trigger the
workflow.
Create note
Here you can specify whether a note can be created, and if so, whether it is mandatory
or optional.
27.6 APPRAISAL CRITERIA GROUP

A X X X
27.6.1 Description
Here you can maintain descriptions of a criteria group.

27.6.2 Columns
Here you can make changes in column properties at criteria group level. These will apply
to all criteria under the criteria group.
Here you can specify value descriptions at criteria group level.
27.6.4 Element Access
The system uses the settings on this tab page to control access to elements according to
the individual participant and the participant’s role in the appraisal process. These can
be defined at criteria group level and further refined at criteria level.
27.7 APPRAISAL CRITERIA

A X X X
27.7.1 Description
Here you can maintain descriptions of a criterion.

27.7.2 Columns
Here you can make changes in column properties at criterion level.

Here you can specify value descriptions at criterion level.
27.7.4 Element Access
The system uses the settings on this tab page to control access to elements according to
the individual participant and the participant’s role in the appraisal process. These can
be defined at criteria group level and further refined at criteria level.
28 Personnel Development
Integration
28.1 INTEGRATION WITH ORGANIZATIONAL MANAGEMENT

A A A A
28.1.1 Determining an Employees Superior

Organizational structure is used for determining an employee’s superior in appraisal
workflow.
28.1.2 Development Plan Item and Position

Change in the status of a development plan item, which is a position, can result in the
employee getting transferred. Conversely, transfer of an employee to a position, which is
also a development plan item, can result in the change of status of the development plan
item.
418
CHAPTER 28 Personnel Development Integration 419
28.2 INTEGRATION WITH PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION

A A A A
28.2.1 Integration of Qualification

In Personnel Administration and Recruitment, you have the option either of using
infotype 0024, or of using Personnel Development subprofiles to create qualifications. If
you wish to manage qualifications in Personnel Development, you must activate the
following integration switch by setting its value to ‘1 A032 Q’.
If this integration switch is activated, and you use transaction PA30 (Maintain HR Master
Data) to call up infotype 0024, you will go to the profile of the person in question. From
here, you can then work through the tasks you wish to carry out. Integration will only
take effect if an active plan version has been specified in switch PLOGI PLOGI.
28.2.2 Transfer of Qualification Data from PA to PD

While implementing Personnel Development, qualifications data stored in Personnel
Administration can be transferred to Personnel Development. You use transaction OOQI
to generate a batch input session with the appropriate qualifications and relationships.
This batch input session is imported into the system by transaction OODT. Infotype 0024
records of the persons are deleted.
28.2.3 Integration of Appraisal
If integration between Personnel Administration and Appraisal is active (value 1 in the

above switch), infotype 0025 in Personnel Administration shows appraisal data stored in
Personnel Development.
28.2.4 Transfer of Appraisal Data from PA to PD

While implementing Personnel Development, appraisals data stored in Personnel
Administration can be transferred to Personnel Development using transaction OOAI.
28.3 INTEGRATION WITH RECRUITMENT

A A A A
28.3.1 Integration of Qualification

Refer to chapter 28.2.1.
28.3.2 Transfer of Qualification Data from Recruitment to PD

While implementing Personnel Development, qualifications data stored in Recruitment
can be transferred to Personnel Development. You use transaction OOQB to generate a
batch input session with the appropriate qualifications and relationships. This batch input
session is imported into the system by transaction OODT. Infotype 0024 records of the
applicants are deleted.
28.4 INTEGRATION WITH TRAINING AND EVENT MANAGEMENT

A A A A
28.4.1 Training with Qualification

Qualifications can be prerequisites for business events. Training programs can impart
qualifications. When a person completes a training program, this qualification can be
added to his profile. Based on the qualification deficits in profile matchup, training programs
can be proposed.
28.4.2 Training with Development Plan Item

Change in the status of a development plan item, which is a training program, can result
in the employee being booked for the training program. Conversely, booking for a training
program, which is also a development plan item, can result in the change of status of the
development plan item.
28.4.3 Training with Appraisal

You can hold business event appraisals and attendee appraisals.
CHAPTER 28 Personnel Development Integration 421
28.5 INTEGRATION WITH COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT

A A A A
28.5.1 Appraisal with Compensation Management

When the appraisal is completed, the appraisal results can be passed on to compensation
management.
28.6 INTEGRATION WITH STRATEGIC ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT

A A A A
28.6.1 Appraisal with Strategic Enterprise Management

The value from the SAP Strategic Enterprise Management Performance Matrix can be
transferred to the individual appraisals in SAP HR. The descriptions from the Performance
Matrix are displayed on the appraisal sheets and represent the individual objectives in
more detail. Strategic Objectives can also be taken into account as individual objectives,
whereby these are accepted in the appraisal documents of the individual employees.
If you want to integrate appraisals with SAP Strategic Enterprise Management you specify
the RFC connection of the Strategic Enterprise Management system in the following
switch.
Training and Event Management
29 Business Event Catalog
29.1 CONCEPTS

A A A A
Business event
In SAP, training programs are called business events. Business events have wider meaning
and include, apart from training programs, conferences, seminars, conventions, etc. Business
events are scheduled training programs. If a training program is held on multiple dates,
each one is a separate business event. In this book, the terms ‘training program’ and
‘business event’ are used interchangeably.
Business event type

Business event types are templates of business events. They have content, duration and
instructors. Business events are created by copying these templates and specifying the
dates on when they will be held.
Business event group

Related or similar business event types are grouped in business event groups so that they
can be easily found. Business event groups can be grouped in larger business event
groups, thus creating a tree structure.
425
Business event catalog

A company normally has a list of training programs it usually conducts. These are organized
in a business event catalog. A business event catalog is a tree-like structure of business
event groups which contain business event types.
Organizer
A business event has an organizer. The organizer may either be an organizational unit
or a company as can be seen by running transaction PSVQ to create organizer or
transaction PSVO to change/display organizer.
Instructors
Instructors teach at business events. There may be internal instructors or external instructors.
Internal instructors are employees of the company and are created in Personnel
Administration. External instructors are created as external persons.
29.2 BUSINESS EVENT CATALOG

A A A A
Before creating the business event catalog on the system, you first create it on paper. It
is important to have clear unambiguous groupings of business event types. This task
may require brainstorming by key stake holders, and may require a few iterations
before it is completed. You then create the business event catalog on the system using
transaction OOC3 or S_AHR_61011887. When you first run this transaction, you will see
a blank business event catalog.
CHAPTER 29 Business Event Catalog 427
You select the top line (Current plan) and create an entry below it by choosing
Object â Create âCreate Level Lower. The system will give you the screen to create the
business event group.
Enter the abbreviation and name. Take note of the validity period. The business event
group you are creating will be valid for this period. Save your data; you can enter remaining
data later. Create other top level business event groups in the same way.
Having created the top level business event groups, create the next level business event
groups by selecting the higher level business event group. The process is the same except
that the system asks you whether you want to create business event group or business
event type.
Now you create business event types under business event groups. The process is the
same, except that now you choose business event type when the system asks you, and
you choose ‘Classroom Training’ as the delivery method.
When you save, the system will ask you to enter capacity; do that. The business event
type will get created. You can also create objects at the same level and objects by copying.
In this manner, create the full business event catalog.
29.3 BUSINESS EVENT TYPE RELATIONSHIPS

A A A A
Business event catalog not only shows business event types organized in business event
groups but also a number of relationships that business event types have with other
objects.
If you select a business event type, right-click and choose ‘Create Lower Level’, the
system gives the following choices.
All these relationships of a business event type are displayed in the business event catalog.
It is recommended that you create these objects and their relationship with the business
event type using appropriate transactions. Use the business event catalog to display these
objects and check their correctness and completeness.
30 Business Event Group
30.1 BUSINESS EVENT GROUP

A A A A
The purpose of business event groups is to classify business event types so that they can
be easily found. Business event groups can also be grouped in larger business event
groups, thus creating a tree structure called business event catalog.
432
CHAPTER 30 Business Event Group 433
30.2 BUSINESS EVENT GROUP CREATION AND DISPLAY

A A A A
When you create a business event group in business event catalog or using transaction OOEG
or S_AHR_61011889 you can enter all the data about it in tabs. Similarly, when you
display a business event group, you can see the data in tabs.
30.3 BUSINESS EVENT GROUP CHANGE

A A A A
However, changing data about a business event group is possible only in the ‘Maintain
object’ format. This should not bother you because both the formats capture the same
data and store in the same place. Only the user interfaces are different.
30.4 OBJECT

A A B C
When you created the business event group by entering its abbreviation and name, the
object infotype was created. Each object is identified by a unique eight-digit system generated
numeric id. If you want to change the abbreviation or name of the business event group,
you may do so. You can even have different names during different periods. You can also
maintain the object abbreviation and name in different languages.
30.5 DESCRIPTION

A A B C
You may maintain the description of a business event group when you create it, or you
may do so in the ‘Maintain object’ screen. In the latter case, you should select the subtype
‘General description’. The description is maintained in infotype 1002.
30.6 RELATIONSHIPS

A A B C
The Relationships tab shows the relationships that exist between the displayed object and
all other objects. Although you never explicitly created a relationship, the system created
it when you created business event type ‘Positive Attitude’ under business event group
‘Attitude’. But, why does the screen not show the business event type ‘Think Customer’?
Click and the system shows both the business event types. This is done to
conserve space in the main display.
You don’t always create relationships by creating new object under an object. If the object
already exists, you can create relationship in the ‘Maintain object’ screen.
30.7 INFO BUSINESS EVENT GROUP

A B C X
You may notice that in the ‘Maintain object’ screen ,

this infotype is shown as existing although you never created it. When you created the
business event group, the system automatically created it with default value.
In this infotype you specify whether a business event group is displayed in the Training
Center of the Employee Self-Service (ESS). If you select this indicator, the business event
group will be displayed in the ESS under Subject Area. If you select a subject area, the
system only searches for business events that belong to the specified subject area (business
event group). If you do not select this indicator, the business event group will not be
displayed in the ESS under Subject Area. Therefore, an employee will not be able to select
this business event group in the Subject Area and search for business events in it.
30.8 COLLABORATION ROOM

X X X X
This infotype is used in LSO.

31 Business Event Type
31.1 BUSINESS EVENT TYPE

A A A A
Business event types are templates of business events. They have content, duration and
instructors. Business events are created by copying these templates and specifying the
dates on when they will be held.
439
31.2 OBJECT

A A A A
When you create a business event type in business event catalog or using transaction OOET
or S_AHR_61011888 you see the following screen.
A business event type is an object. It has an object type (L), an object id and a validity
period. This data is stored in infotype 1000. A business event type also has many properties
which are shown in different tabs and stored in different infotypes. You can see all the
tabs and navigate to them by clicking .
CHAPTER 31 Business Event Type 441
31.3 DELIVERY METHOD

A C X X
In the delivery method you specify how the training program is delivered. This attribute
of a business event type has a lot of significance in Learning Solutions (LSO), which is
the newer version of Training and Event Management. In Training and Event Management,
the delivery method is ‘Classroom Training’.
31.4 DESCRIPTION

A A B C
You can use extended business event text to maintain a longer name for the business
event. In the business event contents you maintain the content of the business event. You
can also maintain notes about the business event type. The descriptive texts you enter
here can be included in the business event brochure and displayed in the ESS/Internet
applications.
31.5 MAIN SCHEDULE MODEL

A A B C
A training program has certain duration. You can define the duration for a business
event type which is inherited by business events of that type. You can define this duration
in three different ways. When you plan or create a business event date, you can copy the
schedule model stored for the business event type and use it as the actual schedule for
your business event.
31.5.1 Business Event Type without Pattern
Even if you don’t want to specify more details, you should at least specify the duration
of business events of a type in number of hours and number of days. If business
events of a type usually start on certain days, you can specify the start day. When you
create or plan a business event date, the schedule without pattern becomes a generalized
schedule.
31.5.2 Business Event Type with User-Defined Schedule
You can specify a more sophisticated schedule for a business event type in the User-
defined tab. A business event may last several days, and in each day there may be several
segments. You can select from predefined day segments which may have multiple intervals.
You can also indicate whether the business event is a one-off occurrence or whether it
will recur multiple times at monthly or weekly intervals.
31.5.3 Business Event Type with Pattern
You use this method when you want to use predefined schedules. You specify the schedule
and start day if any. You can also indicate whether the business event is a one-off occurrence
or whether it will recur multiple times at monthly or weekly intervals.
31.5.4 Day Segment
Day segments are parts of a day. They may consist of up to three time intervals. For
example, if you normally have a morning session from 9:00 AM to 1:00 PM with a tea
break from 11:00 to 11:15, you may define it as a day segment. Day segments are used
when you specify a user-defined schedule for a business event type. They are also used
in defining time schedules, which are used in defining schedules for business event types
with pattern. You can create day segments and time schedules using transaction OOTM,
S_AHR_61011844 or SM34 â
T77AM.
31.5.5 Time Schedule

If business events follow a time pattern, you can create these patterns called time schedules
and use them repeatedly in schedules with pattern. Time schedules are created using
transaction OOTM, S_AHR_61011844 or SM34 â
T77AM.
After defining the name of the schedule, you specify the time segments for each day of
the schedule.
31.6 CAPACITY

A A B C
Minimum, optimum and maximum capacity

In this tab, you specify the minimum, optimum and maximum number of attendees for
business events of this type. When you firmly book a business event and booking is less
than the minimum capacity, the system asks you whether you will like to cancel the
business event.
Inheritance by business event

When you create a business event, the capacity specified for the business event type is
defaulted for the business event. However, you can change these capacity values for the
business event.
Capacity of the room

The capacity defined for a business event may be further restricted by the capacity of the
room reserved for the business event.
Capacity and booking priority

When booking is made, normal priority bookings can be made up to optimum capacity.
Essential priority bookings can be made up to maximum capacity. Any bookings beyond
maximum capacity are waiting list bookings.
Filled capacity
Business events which are filled to different capacities are shown in different traffic light
colors in the system.
Standard capacity
If you do not specify the capacity for the business event type, as well as for the business
event, the standard capacity defined in the system is taken as the optimum and maximum
capacity for the business event.
Maximum waiting list capacity
Here you can specify the maximum number of waiting list bookings permitted for each
business event in terms of the percentage of the maximum number of attendees.
Message type when waiting list capacity exceeded
If a booking is made after the maximum waiting list capacity has been exceeded you can
give an error, a warning, information, or no message.
31.7 PRICES

A A B C
In this tab, you store an internal price for internal activity allocation and an external price
for billing. You can use the option of the price proposal function to have the system
calculate a suitable attendance price taking all the business event costs into consideration.
Price proposal is discussed in detail in chapter 34.14.
31.8 BUSINESS EVENT TYPE INFO

A A B C
31.8.1 Without Time Management Integration
When integration of Training and Event Management with Time Management is off, you
see the following screen.
Include in brochure
If you tick this checkbox, the business event type is included in the business event brochure.
No intranet
You tick this checkbox if you do not want a business event type to be available in the
Employee Self-Service.
Booking option
In LSO there are curricula and certain business events can be booked only as a part of
a curriculum. In Training and Event Management, you use the option ‘Individual booking
allowed’.
31.8.2 With Time Management Integration
When integration of Training and Event Management with Time Management is on,
attendance records are written to Time Management for instructors and attendees and
availability checks are carried out. You can turn off these checks at business event type
level in this tab. When integration is on you see the following screen.
No integration
If you tick this checkbox for a business event type, attendance records are not written to
Time Management. No availability checks are carried out either.
Allowed in time off

In view T77KA you can specify that an employee cannot be an attendee or an instructor
on his off days. You can deactivate this check for a business event type in this field. If
you do so, an employee can be an attendee or an instructor even on his off days as per
shift plan. When an employee does so, an attendance record is not written for him and
he does not get credit for working as an attendee or an instructor during time evaluation.
Minimum % attendance
If an employee attends a business event partly, would you say that he attended the
business event or would you say that he did not? Here you can specify the minimum
percentage which the employee must attend so that he is considered present for the
business event. If you do not specify a value in this field for a business event type, the
global value you specify in table T77S0 is taken.
If you create absence records such that the attendance of the attendee falls below the
minimum percentage, his booking for the business event is cancelled.
31.9 RELATIONSHIPS

A A B C
31.9.1 Screen
31.9.2 Allowed Relationships
If you click , the system shows you all the relationships allowed
with a business event type.
31.9.3 Explanation of Relationships

You can maintain different types of relationships for a business event type. Their significance
is explained below.
Code Relationship Object types Explanation

A003 Belongs to Development Plan A business event type may belong to a
development plan. A person undergoing
a development plan is expected to attend
a business event of this type.
A003 Belongs to Business event In the business event catalog, a business
group event type is shown under a business event
group because of this relationship. Note
that this relationship has time constraint 3.
Therefore, it is possible to show a business
event type under multiple business event
groups at the same time.
A011 Cost center Cost center Here you specify the cost center to which
assignment the cost incurred by business events of this
type is charged.
A022 Requires Resource type You may have different types of resources,
e.g. overhead projector. Each overhead
projector is a resource with unique id. All
overhead projectors are resources of type
‘overhead projector’. A business event type
requiring an overhead projector can use
any one of the overhead projectors.
Therefore, you specify a resource type
which is required for a business event type.
A026 Is held by External person You use this relationship to specify which
Person instructors can hold business events of this
Contact person type. The system proposes these during
User resource reservation. You can have multiple
instructors for a business event type.
A028 Imparts Qualification Here you specify the qualifications imparted
by business events of this type. After an
attendee successfully completes a business
event, these qualifications are transferred
to his profile in the follow-up activities.
A029 Has prerequisite Business event You use this relationship to specify the
type prerequisites of a business event type.
Curriculum When an attendee is booked for a business
Type event, the system ensures that he fulfils
Qualification these requirements.
B029 Is prerequisite Business event You use this relationship to specify that
of type this business event type is a prerequisite
Curriculum for another business event type. When an
Type attendee is booked for a business event,
the system ensures that he fulfils these
requirements.
A033 Is planned for Rule Here you specify the target audience
Job (persons holding a job) for business events
of this type. Information regarding the
target group at which a business event is
aimed can be included in the business event
brochure. A business event type may be
planned for more than one job.
A034 Was partici- Applicant You can set up the system in such a way
pated in by External person that when a business event is followed up
Prospect (confirmed that it was held), the system
Customer can create this relationship between all its
Organizational unit attendees and the business event type.
Person
Contact person
Company
User
A036 Is organized by Prospect You use this relationship to specify the
Customer organizer of business events of this type.
Organizational unit You can have multiple organizers for a
Company business event type.
B049 Develops Person Business events of this type develop a
User person or a user.
A054 Uses Material You use this relationship to specify the
(for participant) material, e.g. training material, which is
required for each participant.
A055 Uses Material You use this relationship to specify the
(for business material which is required for each business
event) event.
A057 Has particpnt Appraisal Model Here you can specify the appraisal model
aprsl model for appraisal of participants. If an appraisal
model is specified for a business event type,
it overrides the global appraisal model for
attendees.
A058 Has event Appraisal Model Here you can specify the appraisal model
apprsl model for appraisal of business events of this type.
If an appraisal model is specified for a
business event type, it overrides the global
appraisal model for business event types.
A090 Is responsi- External person Here you can specify the person who is
bility of Person responsible for doing administrative work
Contact person for business events of this type. He corres-
User ponds with the attendees and instructors,
provides resources and answers queries.
A607 Is described by Criterion You can use a business event type as a
criterion in Appraisal. You specify that
here.
A608 Has appraisal Appraisal Here you specify the appraisal template
template template for a business event type.
A615 Mandatory for Job Here you can specify that a business event
Organizational unit type is mandatory for the specified object.
Person
Position
A712 Imparts Criteria group If you attend business event of this type,
Criterion you achieve this criteria or criteria group.
31.10 VALIDITY PERIOD

A A B C
This infotype lets you define the validity for a business event type. After this period,
attendance of business event of this type expires. If this business event type is a prerequisite
of another business event type, that requirement is not fulfilled by an expired business
event.
31.11 FURTHER INFORMATION

C C C C
Through this tab of the business event type you can create, change or delete data in
various infotypes. Each of these infotypes is discussed separately.
31.12 BUSINESS EVENT DEMAND

A A B C
During the planning cycle, you would plan business events based on demand. In an
ongoing system, demand data can be derived from prebookings to date, previous year’s
bookings, or previous year’s demand, or their combination. However, if the demand is
expected to change drastically, or if demand data is not available because the system is
new, you may enter demand for a business event type in this infotype. The demand is
specified for a period (quarter), location and language. The unit of demand is number of
business events, and not number of attendees.
31.13 PROCEDURE

A A A B
In view V_T77KV_1 you specify attendee-related checks before business event booking
which apply to all business event types.
Also, in view V_T77KV_2 you specify business event follow-up actions which apply to
all business event types.
If you make an entry in the procedure tab for a business event type, you can override the
above settings. This gives you more flexibility as your checks can be different for different
business event types.
Attendee type
You can have different checks for different attendee types.
Check for bookings for the same business event type (BookT)
When an attendee books for a business event, you may want to know if the attendee has
already attended a business event of the same type or is already booked to attend such
a business event. If yes, you may give an error (E), a warning (W), or a message (I). If
you don’t want to perform this check, you can leave this field blank.
Check for prebookings on the same business event type (PrebT)

When an attendee prebooks for a business event type, you may want to know if the
attendee has already attended a business event of the same type or is already booked to
attend such a business event. If yes, you may give an error (E), a warning (W), or a
message (I). If you don’t want to perform this check, you can leave this field blank.
Check for prerequisite business event (ChPre)

When an attendee books for a business event, you may want to know whether the
attendee has attended the prerequisite business events. If yes, you may give an error (E),
a warning (W), or a message (I). If you don’t want to perform this check, you can leave
this field blank.
Check attendees qualification (CheckQ)

When an attendee books for a business event, you may want to know whether the attendee
has the qualifications or alternative qualifications required to attend the business event.
If yes, you may give an error (E), a warning (W), or a message (I). If you don’t want to
perform this check, you can leave this field blank.
Transfer objectives to attendee as qualifications (Quals)

A business event may impart a qualification. When an attendee attends a business event,
he acquires that qualification. You may add the qualification to the attendee manually,
or you may want the system to do it automatically. If you want the system to do it
automatically, you tick this checkbox.
Delete and create relationships (Del.BE/A, E/A rel)

When an attendee books a business event, relationship 025 is created which says that the
attendee takes part in the business event. When the business event has actually taken
place (followed up), this relationship 025 is deleted and another relationship 034 is created
which says that the attendee participated in the business event type. Relationship 034
was read by the system to determine whether the employee has attended prerequisite
business event. However, now the system reads both relationships 025 and 034. Hence,
the system will work equally well if relationship 025 was not deleted and relationship 034
was not created. If you choose to delete and create relationships, you should tick both
these checkboxes; although it is recommended that you leave both these checkboxes blank.
31.14 COSTS

A A A B
31.14.1 Cost Items

When you hold a business event you incur cost under various heads or items. You define
these cost items using transaction OOKB or S_AHR_61011845 in table T77KB and specify
which cost items are required for which business events. Cost items are required for cost
transfer posting of business event costs, for internal activity allocation of instructors’
costs (via resource type), and for determining a price proposal.
In the cost item you specify the proposed amount with currency. You also specify whether
the amount is per business event, per time unit, per attendee or per attendee per time
unit. You specify whether the cost item is relevant for cost transfer. If yes, the cost is
transferred to which controlling area and cost element.
Cost may be incurred directly for a business event, or indirectly through use of a resource.
You can store cost items for resource types, resources, business event types, and business
events using the Costs infotype. If the same cost item is stored for a business event type
and the corresponding business event, the system takes the value stored for the business
event. Similarly, if the same cost item is stored for both resource type and resource, the
value stored for the actual resource is taken.
31.14.2 Costs
When you hold a business event you incur cost under various items. Here you specify
the cost items under which cost is incurred for a business event type. The proposed
amount and currency specified for the cost item is displayed. Whether the amount is per
attendee or per business event is displayed. If time unit field is blank, the cost is per
attendee or per business event. If it contains a time unit, the cost is per time unit either
for each attendee or for the entire business event. If you want to specify your own values,
click the checkbox ‘Direct’. All the fields are opened and you can specify your own
values.
31.15 BILLING/ALLOCATION INFO

A B C C
Details for billing and activity allocation are defined at global level. If you want to use
different values for a business event type, you can specify them in this infotype.
Sales area
In Sales and Distribution, you sell through a sales area, which comprises of sales
organization, distribution channel and division. Your Sales and Distribution consultant
will set up the sales areas you require. In this infotype, you will click the ‘Sales area’ icon
and select the appropriate sales area. The system will populate the sales organization,
distribution channel and division.
Account assignment group for materials

The revenue from different types of materials you sell might go to different accounts.
This is determined by the account assignment group for materials. Your Finance and
Sales and Distribution consultants will decide the account assignment group for materials
and you will choose from this list as per their guidance.
Activity allocation
Whereas you bill your external customers using Sales and Distribution, you charge your
internal customers using activity allocation. Activity allocation is done based on activity
types. You can specify an activity type for attendees which will be used to charge your
internal attendees. You can also specify an activity type for instructors which will be used
to create credit for the work done by your instructors. You specify the controlling area
in which both these activity allocations will take place.
Billing/allocation info for organizers

You can also maintain this infotype for organizer of a business event. If this infotype is
maintained both for the organizer and the business event type, which one should be used
by the system? You can specify this in the evaluation path stored in the following entry
in table T77S0.
The evaluation path LSOFLWAY gives priority to the organizer of the business event. If
you want to give priority to the business event type, you can create your own evaluation
path, and specify it in the above entry.
31.16 WEB LINK

A B C C
When you right-click a business event type in business event menu and some other
dynamic menus, the system shows you ‘Web link’.
If you have created web links using this infotype, you can access them from there. If there
is a single web link, it is opened directly. If there are multiple web links, the system
displays them and you choose the one you want to see.
31.17 KNOWLEDGE LINK

A B C C
In SAP, there is a lot of knowledge, created by both SAP and you, which is stored in
various places.
Some of this information may be useful for a business event. For example, you may have
created a document in Solution Manager which may be useful in training your SAP users.
SAP lets you store a link to these documents in a business event type. Note that most of
these areas need RFC connection and you will need the help of your Basis consultant to
know which ones are available. In addition, you need to know which documents are
available where, so that you can choose an appropriate document to create a knowledge
link. Once you create a knowledge link using Edit â Insert Entry, you can access the
document by clicking the knowledge link in this infotype for a business event or a business
event type. You can also access the document in the Employee Self-Service.
31.18 WORKFLOW SETTINGS

X X X X
31.19 COLLABORATION ROOM

X X X X
31.20 FOLLOW-UP CONTROL OPTIONS

X X X X

32 Dynamic Menus
32.1 DYNAMIC MENUS

A A A A
32.1.1 Overview
Training and Event Management provides the following dynamic menus.
Menu Chapter
Master data catalog (Business event catalog) 29.2

Attendance menu 36.3
Business event menu 34.2
Information menu 32.2
Planning menu 34.5
Resource menu 33.6
Tool menu 32.3
You can perform most of the functions in Training and Event Management through
dynamic menus. The advantage of the dynamic menus is that you create data and
access functions directly in the clearly structured environment of the business event
hierarchy.
469
32.1.2 Navigation
There are two ways of navigating in dynamic menus. You can select an object and choose
the function in the menu. Alternatively, you can right-click an object and choose the
function. You can switch between the attendance menu, the information menu, and the
business event menu as required. You always access the same level of the structure as the
one you leave.
32.1.3 Substructure Access

If you want to access only a part of the business event catalog from a menu, you can do
so by setting access.
Set access
You select a root object (business event group or business event type) from which you
want to access the structure and choose . The display includes all objects underlying
the root object you select. This access setting is valid until you delete it.
Delete access
You can revoke the access at any time by choosing . The entire business event catalog
is displayed.
General overview
From within your own special access, you can choose to view the complete structure.
Your access choice is not deleted when you do this.
32.1.4 Extended Search

You can search for different objects in dynamic menus. When you click , the system
gives you the following dialog box, where you enter the search criteria.
CHAPTER 32 Dynamic Menus 471
The search is not limited to the name or abbreviation of the object. You can even search
the descriptions of business events. Similarly, you can search for business events which
impart certain qualification. The menu structure need not be expanded when you start
the search.
32.1.5 Planning Period
In dynamic menus, you specify a planning period. The setting above is used the first time
the planning period is read in the dynamic menus (with the exception of the Planning
menu). After this, the planning period is created user-specific. In addition, the value you
enter here is used when you create a business event using transaction PV10 or PV11.
32.1.6 Virtual Business Event Group
If you have too many business event groups and business event types at the top level, the
system performance in dynamic menus may be affected. You can create a virtual business
event group to which all top level business event groups and business event types belong
using relationship B003, and enter the name of the virtual business event group here.
This business event group will not be shown in the business event catalog and the system
performance will considerably improve.
32.1.7 Additional Line in Dynamic Menus
You use this entry to specify that an additional line is output under each node in the
dynamic menus. The standard system contains the sample function module RH_MORINFO
that you can copy and adapt to suit your requirements.
32.2 INFORMATION MENU

A A B C
32.2.1 Purpose
Information menu provides an easy and organized method of accessing standard reports
in Training and Event Management. You select a business event group, a business event
type, a business event or an attendee and right-click. You choose the report category and
then the report. The system runs the report taking the object you selected as parameter.
If you want the system to run the report directly, without showing selection screen, check
and if necessary correct the user-specific settings.
Traffic lights show whether the business event is full, accepting only essential bookings,
or accepting normal bookings.
32.2.2 Transaction
PSV3—Information Menu
32.2.3 Navigation
Select an object and right-click (or go through menu).
32.2.4 Screen
32.2.5 Information Menu: Attendance

You can run the following reports in the attendance menu.
32.2.6 Information Menu: Business Events

You can run the following reports in the business events menu.
32.2.7 Information Menu: Resources

You can run the following reports in the resources menu.
32.2.8 Integration of Customer-Specific Reports

The information menu you see above contains standard reports provided by SAP. You
can add your own reports to the information menu using transaction PVDM.
32.2.9 Ad Hoc Query

You can use transaction S_PH0_48000535 to query the Training and Event Management
database and extract information as per your need.
32.3 TOOL MENU

A A B C
32.3.1 Purpose
In the tool menu, you cannot create business event group, business event type or business
event; but you can change all information about them. You can also translate language-
dependent data, lock/unlock objects and maintain prices.
32.3.2 Transaction
PSVT—Tool Menu
32.3.3 Navigation
32.3.4 Screen
32.4 USER-SPECIFIC SETTINGS

A A B C
32.4.1 Purpose
You can run transaction PSVI to make user-specific settings so that you see only that data
in the dynamic menus which you want to see. For example, you may want to see only
firmly booked business events, and not planned business events, because you don't want
to book attendance for a business event about which there is uncertainty. But another
user is keen on finding a business event whose dates suit him better, even though the
organizers have not yet taken a final decision on it. These settings, as the name suggests,
are user-specific. Each user's choice of access is retained even after the user logs off.
You can also see and change user-specific settings in all the dynamic menus under
Settings â Change Settings.
32.4.2 Reporting
Currency key
All amount fields displayed in the dynamic menus are in this currency unless you specify
some other currency in the report's selection screen.
Display selection screen

If you do not tick this checkbox, the report from dynamic menus is run directly without
showing the selection screen. If you tick this checkbox, the selection screen is shown
first.
Standard selection screen

If you tick this checkbox, the field 'Standard selection screen' on the selection screen of
reports is selected by default.
32.4.3 Filter
Here you can restrict the business events that are displayed in the dynamic menus by
specifying a language, location, status, or business event attributes (such as internal or
external). You should be careful with these settings because these settings will hide certain
business events and you may wonder why you are not seeing certain business events. It
will be worse if you don't even realize that you are not seeing certain business events.
However, these settings are also a great boon if used properly. For example, the person
in charge of the training function may want to see only locked business events and ask
why they are locked and when they will be unlocked.
32.4.4 Sort Order
Business event group/type

In the first field you define how the business event groups and business event types are
sorted. You can sort by the following fields.
In case the sort key is identical, the sorting is done by the second field and if necessary
by the third field.
Attendees
Attendees can similarly be sorted by the following fields.
In case the sort key is identical, the sorting is done by the second field, third field and so on.
32.4.5 Business Event Menu
Period
You can enter a start and an end date here to determine the data selection period. If you
select the option 'Fixed date', the dates you enter are retained. If you do not select this
option, the start and end dates are moved forward by one day on a daily basis.
Initial screen
If you don't want to see the entire business event catalog in the business event menu, but
only certain business event type, you can specify that here.
32.4.6 Planning Menu
Period
Initial screen
If you don't want to see the entire business event catalog in the planning menu, but only
certain business event type, you can specify that here.
32.4.7 Resource Menu
Period
Initial screen
If you don't want to see all the resource types in the resource menu, but only certain
resources, you can specify that here.
32.4.8 Tool Menu
Period
Initial screen
If you don't want to see the entire business event catalog in the tool menu, but only
certain business event type, you can specify that here.
32.4.9 Master Data
These settings are used for business event catalog.
Display PC editor
If you tick this checkbox, you can use a text editor for entering subtypes of the Description
infotype. If you do not select the option, only a line editor is available.
Display tabstrips
When you select an object and choose Display, if this checkbox is ticked, the infotypes of
the object are displayed as tab pages. If this checkbox is not ticked, the infotypes are
displayed one below the other.
External number assignment

If you tick this checkbox, you can assign object IDs manually when you create new
objects. Otherwise, the system uses internal number assignment.
Display dropdown
If you tick this checkbox, possible entries help is available for input fields in the form of
a dropdown list.
Last changed by
If you tick this checkbox, data change information is automatically displayed.
Period
Initial screen
If you don't want to see the entire business event catalog, but only certain business event
type, you can specify that here.
32.4.10 View
With key
If you tick this checkbox, the object IDs and object type keys are displayed in the dynamic
menus.
With additional information

If you tick this checkbox, additional information is displayed in the dynamic menus.
With abbreviation
If you tick this checkbox, the object short name is displayed in the dynamic menus.
33 Resources
33.1 RESOURCE TYPE

A A A B
33.1.1 Purpose
Business events require resources. You may have different types of resources, e.g. overhead
projector. Each overhead projector is a resource with unique id. All overhead projectors
are resources of type 'overhead projector'. Resource types describe the general attributes
of resources. A business event type requiring an overhead projector can use any one of
the overhead projectors. Therefore, you specify a resource type which is required for a
business event type. When you create a business event, the system automatically proposes
resources, which you can then reserve for it depending on availability. Properties of a
resource type stored in availability indicator apply to all resources of that type and
cannot be changed for individual resources. Relationships, capacity and cost are defaulted
for the resources but they can be changed for individual resources.
33.1.2 Transaction
S_AHR_61011886—Resource Type
OORT—Create Resource Type
486
CHAPTER 33 Resources 487
33.1.3 Object
Resource type id
Each resource type is assigned a unique object id by the system.
Validity
You specify the validity period of the resource type.

You specify the abbreviation and name of the resource type.
33.1.4 Availability Indicators

Room/instructor/material/other resource
Resource types can be categorized into room, instructor, material and other resources.
This categorization is very important and you must understand the differences among
them.
For categories room and other resources, you create resources (object type G). You
may create resources, e.g. conference rooms 1 to 3, classrooms 1 to 5, Overhead
projectors 1 to 7, and personal computers 1 to 25. After these resources are created, you
can reserve them for your business events. For rooms you can also maintain capacity
which may restrict the capacity of a business event.
For category material, you do not create resources; instead you create material, e.g. Training
manual SAP HR. You also specify which materials are required by which business event
types. For a business event, you create material reservation or purchase requisition.
For category instructor also, you do not create resources. Instructors may be External
persons, Persons, Contact persons or Users. Persons (employees) and Users should exist
in the system in the normal course. You may create External persons or Contact persons
if required. For a business event type, you specify instructors. For a business event you
choose from the available instructors and reserve.
Resource priority
Resource priority specifies the sequence in which resources are allocated to business
events when you plan and create business events.
Location dependent
If you are using locations in Training and Event Management, the system carries out a
check when you plan and create business event dates to see whether location-dependent
resources are available at the location you specify. You must set this indicator for resources
of the type room that are only available in a certain location.
Required resource
Resource types flagged as required must be reserved when you plan business event
dates. If a required resource is not reserved for a business event, the business event
cannot be held.
Single/multiple reservation
Some resources may be reserved by one business event only, while others may be reserved
by a number of different business events at the same time. You set this indicator here.
Amount available
Resources can be reserved per event or per attendee. This data is needed to calculate the
required number of resources for a business event. If two attendees share a PC, you can
indicate 1 quantity per 2 attendees. The system will then calculate 5 PCs for 9 attendees.
Alternative resource search

This function is used for resources of type material and instructor. It lets you specify a
relationship or object type to be used by the system in the search for these resources. The
system automatically defaults the relevant relationship depending on whether you are
searching for a material or an instructor.
33.1.5 Relationships
Screen
Allowed relationships
Explanation of relationships
From To Relationship Relationship Explanation

code description
R K A011 Cost center This relationship specifies the cost center
assignment for a resource type.
R G B020 Is a generali- This relationship specifies that a resource
zation of is of a particular resource type.
R G B021 Is contained in This relationship specifies that the resource
is equipped with certain resource types.
For example, room number 101 has PCs.
R D B022 Is required by This relationship specifies that a resource
type is required by a business event type.
33.1.6 Further Information
Through this tab of the resource type you can create, change or delete data in various
infotypes. Each of these infotypes is discussed separately.
33.1.7 Capacity
Capacity infotype is required only for rooms. Here you specify the optimum, maximum
and minimum number of attendees who can be accommodated in the room. The capacity
defined for a business event may be restricted by the capacity of the room reserved for
the business event.
33.1.8 Costs
You can define cost for both resource type and resource. The cost of resource type is
defaulted when you create a resource. The cost of a resource type as well as a resource
is defined under various cost items. The proposed amount and currency specified for the
cost item is displayed. Whether the proposed amount is per attendee or per business
event is also displayed. If the time unit field is blank, the cost is either per attendee or
per business event. If it contains a time unit, the cost is per time unit either for each
attendee or for the entire business event. If you want to specify your own values, click
the checkbox 'Direct'. All the fields are opened and you can specify your own values.
33.2 ROOM

A A A B
33.2.1 Purpose
A room is a physical space in a building with an address and a room number or name.
A room is a resource. First you create resource types, e.g. conference rooms, classrooms,
interview rooms, etc. Then you create specific rooms, e.g. Classroom 101, etc.
33.2.2 Transaction
S_AHR_61011885—Room
OORA—Create Room
PO18—Room
You can create a new room, modify details of an existing room, display details of a room,
delete a room and create a room by copying from another room.
33.2.4 Object
Resource id
Each room is assigned a unique object id by the system.
Validity
You specify the validity period of the room.

You specify the abbreviation and name of the room.
Screen

code description
G F A003 Belongs to This relationship specifies that the resource
belongs to a location.
G K A011 Cost center This relationship specifies the cost center
assignment of a resource.
G R A020 Is a specializa- This relationship specifies that the resource
tion of is of a certain resource type.
G R A021 Is equipped This relationship specifies that the resource
with is equipped with certain resource types.
G VE B039 Is supplied by This relationship specifies that the resource
is supplied by a service.
33.2.6 Capacity
Capacity infotype is required only for rooms and not for other resources. Here you specify
the optimum, maximum and minimum number of attendees who can be accommodated
in the room. The capacity defined for a business event may be restricted by the capacity
of the room reserved for the business event.
33.2.7 Address
A room is a part of a building. Therefore, you need to define a building before you can
define the address of a room.
Building
You can define buildings using transaction S_AHR_61011843. Building address is needed
when you define rooms.
33.2.8 Further information
Through this tab you can maintain the cost details for a room.
33.2.9 Costs
33.3 OTHER RESOURCE

A A A B
33.3.1 Purpose
All resources other than room, external instructor and material are created under other
resource. First you define the resource type, e.g. PC, and then you define individual
resources, e.g. PC001.
33.3.2 Transaction
S_AHR_61011901—Other Resource
OORE—Create Resource
PO07—Other Resource
You can create a new resource, modify details of an existing resource, display details of
a resource, delete a resource and create a resource by copying from another resource.
33.3.4 Object
Resource id
Each resource is assigned a unique object id by the system.
Validity
You specify the validity period of the resource.

You specify the abbreviation and name of the resource.
Screen

code description
G F A003 Belongs to This relationship specifies that the resource
belongs to a location.
G K A011 Cost center This relationship specifies the cost center
assignment of a resource.
G R A020 Is a speciali- This relationship specifies that the resource
zation of is of a certain resource type.
G R A021 Is equipped This relationship specifies that the resource
with is equipped with certain resource types.
G VE B039 Is supplied by This relationship specifies that the resource
is supplied by a service.
33.3.6 Capacity
Certain types of resources may have capacity constraint. For example, if you have
master–slave equipment for PCs, it may be able to connect to only a limited number of
PCs.
Through this tab you can maintain the cost details for a resource.
33.3.8 Costs
33.4 RESOURCE LOCKING

A A B C
33.4.1 Defining Service to Lock Resources

SAP treats locking a resource as reservation of the resource by a service, e.g. Maintenance.
This service is created as an object of the type VE using transaction PVV0.
33.4.2 Assigning Service to Lock Resources
Here you specify the service which is used to lock resources.
33.4.3 Resource Locking

You can use transaction PVG2 to lock a resource for specified periods. The system shows
the period for which the resource is reserved. When you lock a resource, the system
creates a reservation (relationship 023) between the resource and the service. When you
unlock a resource, the reservation is deleted.
33.5 RESOURCE RESERVATION

A B C X
You do resource reservation in business events. You can write a function module to
directly access the resource reservation tables, for example, to delete or add reservations.
You enter that user exit here.
33.6 RESOURCE MENU

A A B C
33.6.1 Purpose
The resource menu gives an overview of all your resources grouped by the resource type.
For each resource, the business event which has reserved it is shown, so that you can see
when the resources are booked and when they are free. You can create, change or display
resources. You can lock rooms so that they cannot be reserved (for example, when the
room is under maintenance). You can unlock a locked room. You can also reserve resources
for business events.
33.6.2 Transaction
PSVR—Resource Menu
33.6.3 Navigation
33.6.4 Screen
33.7 RESOURCE REPORTS

A A B B
Resource equipment
You can run transaction S_AHR_61016224 to display the resources with which another
resource (usually a room) is equipped. The report lists objects of type R (resource type)
which are related with objects of type G (resource).
Instructor information
You can run transaction S_PH0_48000096 to see reservation of one or more instructors.
Resource reservation
You can run transaction S_ALR_87014087 to generate a tabular display of the reservation
of a selected resource type over a specified period of time. The report also displays any
business events that have reserved the resource type. Depending on the period type you
choose, the table is displayed in an hourly, daily or weekly period split.
Graphical resource reservation

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000441 to see resource reservation in graphical format.
You can click a reservation to see its details.
Available/reserved resources
You can run transaction S_AHR_61016225 to display reserved and available resources of
a specified resource type in a given period.
On the selection screen you specify whether you want to see available resources or reserved
resources. You can also change from one to the other inside the report. The report displays
available resources one day at a time. You can scroll down to see the availability/reservation
for further days. You can select a resource and click to see the
following view. There are also other views which you can explore.
Resource reservation statistics

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000440 to see reservation statistics of one or more
resources over a period of time.
Resources not yet assigned per resource type

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000439 to see the resources which are required by
business events but not yet assigned. If resources are available, they need to be assigned
to these business events. If they are not available, alternative arrangements need to be
made.
33.8 LOCATION

A A B B
33.8.1 Purpose
There may be different locations where you conduct your business events. You can assign
locations to both business events and location-dependent resources. The use of locations
in Training and Event Management is optional. If you want to use location, you set the
following switch in table T77S0 to 1. If you don't want to use locations, you set it to 0.
33.8.2 Transaction
S_AHR_61011841—Location
OOLC—Location
You can create, change, display or delete a location. You can also copy a location from
another location.
33.8.4 Object
Object id
Each location is assigned a unique object id by the system.
Validity
You specify the validity period of the location.

You specify the abbreviation and the name of the location.
33.8.5 Site-Dependent Info

Default factory calendar

Factory calendar is used to determine the off days of a location. If a factory calendar is not
defined in the above infotype, the factory calendar defined in the following entry is taken.
Factory calendar
Factory calendar can be defined using transaction OY05.
Location currency
Here you define the currency used at a location.
Language
Here you define the language used at a location.
33.8.6 Address
Here you define the address of a location.

Through this tab of location you can create, change or delete the web link infotype for
the location. In the web link infotype you specify an internet link.
34 Business Events
34.1 BUSINESS EVENTS

A A A A
In SAP, training programs are called business events. Business events have wider meaning
and include, apart from training programs, conferences, seminars, conventions, etc. Business
events are scheduled training programs. If a training program is held on multiple dates,
each one is a separate business event. A business event is a concrete entity. It has content
which comes from business event type. It is scheduled to be held on specific dates. It is
held at specific location in specific rooms. It has instructors who teach.
34.2 BUSINESS EVENT MENU

A A A A
34.2.1 Purpose
In the business event menu, you can execute all the functions related to creating and
editing business events. You can create business events with or without resources. You
can change, firmly book, cancel, lock, unlock or follow-up a business event. You can do
513
appraisal, price proposal, cost transfer posting, activity allocation, billing, budgeting and
material procurement for a business event. You can display a variety of information
about a business event. You can see business events under a business event type and
attendees for a business event. But you cannot book attendees for a business event in this
menu; you do that in the attendance menu. Traffic lights show whether the business
event is full, accepting only essential bookings, or accepting normal bookings. You can
switch between the business event menu, the attendance menu and the information menu
as required. You always access the same level of the structure as the one you leave.
34.2.2 Transaction
PSV2—Business Event Menu
34.2.3 Navigation
34.2.4 Screen
CHAPTER 34 Business Events 515
34.3 CREATING BUSINESS EVENT WITHOUT RESOURCES

A A A A
34.3.1 Purpose
You create business event without resources when you are not using resource management.
34.3.2 Transaction
PSV2—Business Event Menu (Create w/o Resources)
PV11—Create without Resources
34.3.3 Business Event Menu

When you run transaction PSV2, the system shows you the business event catalog.
You select a business event type and create a business event either through menu (Business
Event â Dates â Create âWithout Resources), or right-click and choose Create w/o
Resources. The system gives you the following screen in which you enter the business
event data.
34.3.4 Business Event without Resources
Business event type

You always create a business event from a business event type. Most of the data you store
for business event types is proposed as default values for the actual business events. You
can overwrite this data as required. You only need to specify date, location and language
at the business event level and do resource reservation.
Business event
When you create a business event, the system gives it a unique id.
Start date
The business event starts on this date.
Internal/external
You can specify whether a business event is an internal event, or an external event.
Planned/firmly booked
You should create the business event in planned status if you are not certain that it will
actually take place. If you are certain that it will take place, you can create the business
event in firmly booked status from the outset. When you create a business event in
planned status, attendees booked for the business event receive provisional booking
confirmation initially. Once you change the status to firmly booked, attendees receive
definite confirmation of place. Business events created as planned have planning status
Planned, and not Active. The relationship of the business event with business event type
is also in the Planned status. Similarly, the relationship between a planned business event
and its attendees is also in the Planned status.
Locked
You can lock a business event to prevent attendees from booking it. When you want to
allow bookings for the business event, you simply unlock it.
Name
Abbreviation and name of the business event type is copied to the business event.
End date
End date is determined from the start date and schedule.
Location
You specify the location where the business event will be held.
Language
You specify the language in which the business event will be held.
Schedule
You can copy the schedule from the business event type, or you can create your own. The
schedule can be with pattern, without pattern, or user-defined.
A schedule with pattern follows a predefined schedule which you specify.
A schedule without pattern has only number of days and number of hours. You should
not use a schedule without pattern for a business event because the attendees, the instructors
and the organizers need to know the exact time when the business event would take place.
In user-defined schedule you define daywise segments.
Number of attendees
Minimum, optimum and maximum numbers of attendees are copied from the business
event type. You may change these figures if you want.
Internal and external prices with currencies

Internal and external prices with currencies are copied from the business event type. You
may change these figures if you want. If you click , the system proposes price based
on cost. The logic of proposing the price is explained in the price proposal report in
chapter 34.14.
Controlling area and cost center

Controlling area and cost center are copied from the business event type. You may change
them if you want.
Organizer
Organizer is copied from the business event type. You may change the organizer if you
want.
General description
General description is copied from the business event type. You may change it if you want.
Business event contents

Business event content is copied from the business event type. You may change it if you
want.
34.4 CREATING BUSINESS EVENT WITH RESOURCES

A A A A
34.4.1 Purpose
You create business event with resources when you are using resource management.
34.4.2 Transaction
PSV2—Business Event Menu (Create with Resources)
PV10—Create with Resources
34.4.3 Business Event with Resources

When you create business events with resources using transaction PSV2, the system gives
you the screen which is similar to the screen you get when you create business event
without resources.
The key difference is in , which lets you reserve resources.

However, if you have not specified resource types which are required for the
business event type, you will not get this icon. Instead you will get a message
. Note that the attribute internal is automatically
selected since you can only carry out resource reservation for internal events. After entering
the details, you may either directly proceed with resource reservation or save the business
event without resources. In the latter case, you select the business event, right-click and
choose Change to do resource reservation.
34.4.4 Resource Reservation
Resource requirement
When you click the 'Resource Selection' icon, you see the following window which shows
the resources required and their availability.
The system shows the requirement, availability % and % of resource not yet reserved.
The checkbox 'Required' specifies that a resource is essential and must be reserved for the
business event. The checkbox 'Multiple' specifies that a resource can be reserved by multiple
business events at the same time. The checkbox 'Critical' specifies that the number of
resources available is insufficient for the business event.
Adding to resource requirement

If your resource list is incomplete, you can add a resource type permanently by clicking
or temporarily by clicking .
Automatic resource assignment

If you click , the system will automatically assign the available
resources. Only resources flagged as required are automatically allocated.
Manual resource assignment

To do manual assignment, you click . The system shows you all the resources of the
resource type.
You can select the resource and click to reserve the resource. You can also add a
resource by clicking , or temporarily add by clicking .
Resource detail selection

If you click in the above screen, the system lets you reserve resources
for specific time blocks within the business event schedule and thus, reserve different
resources for individual time blocks. For each time block, you can click and
assign from the available resources.
Resource selection overview after resource assignment
After resource assignment, the system shows the percentage availability of the resource.
In case the requirement is fully met, it also shows it pictorially.
34.5 CREATING BUSINESS EVENTS THROUGH PLANNING

A A B C
34.5.1 Purpose
If you routinely hold business events of a type, you can create multiple business events
based on demand using the planning function, instead of manually creating them one by
one. You can also use the planning menu to see the resource reservation for business
events.
34.5.2 Transaction
PSVP—Planning Menu
34.5.3 Planning Menu
The system shows you the business event catalog with business events and the resources
required for them.
34.5.4 Planning Screen

You select a business event type, right-click and choose 'Create Planning' to plan business
events of that type. The system gives the following screen.
Planning year and quarters

Here you specify the planning year and quarters you are planning for.
Language
Here you specify the language in which the business event will be held. If you want to
plan business events in multiple languages, leave it blank.
Location
Here you specify the location where the business event will be held. If you want to plan
business events at multiple locations, leave it blank.
Status
Here you specify whether the business events will be created in the planned status or
firmly booked status.
Schedule
You also specify a time schedule for the business events either by copying the time
schedule stored for the business event type or by creating a new one.
Period without days off

If you tick this checkbox, the system proposes business event dates in such a way that
there are no off days in a business event. The off days are taken from the factory calendar.
Start day as in schedule

If you tick this checkbox, the system proposes business event dates that starts on the day
specified in the time schedule.
Cover resource requirements

If you click this icon, the system proposes business event dates in such a way that the
resources flagged as required are actually available.
Selection: resource types/resources

If you choose this function, the list of resource types required for the business event type
is displayed and you can select the resource types that are required.
Business event spacing

Here you specify whether the business events should be evenly spaced or that they
should be planned at specified intervals.
34.5.5 Demand Determination

When you click , the system lets you create demand if you have not already
created it.
Based on your inputs, it gives you the demand. If you want, you can create your own
entries. The unit of demand is number of business events, and not number of attendees.
You select the entries and either transfer, or save. If you transfer an entry, it is used in
the current planning process, but the demand infotype is not created.
34.5.6 Date Proposals

When you either save or transfer, the system determines and displays date proposals in
the GANTT chart format.
You can display and change the details of the planned business events by clicking the
display or change icon.
You can either copy a business event, delete a business event, move a business event, or
change its schedule. When you change the schedule, you can change both date and time.
34.5.7 Business Event Creation

After you are satisfied, you can save the business events. This completes the business
event planning exercise.
34.6 CHANGING BUSINESS EVENT

A A B C
34.6.1 Purpose
If you want to change a business event, you get the same screen as you get when you are
creating a business event. You make your changes and save.
34.6.2 Transaction
PSV2—Business Event Menu (Change)
PV1A—Change
34.7 DISPLAYING BUSINESS EVENT

A A B C
34.7.1 Purpose
If you display a business event, you get the same screen as you get when you are changing
a business event. Only, all the fields are grayed out and activity icons are missing.
34.7.2 Transaction
PV1B—Display
34.8 FIRMLY BOOKING BUSINESS EVENT

A A B B
Planning status
When you create a business event as firmly booked, it is stored in the objects
table HRP1000 with planning status 1 (Active). In contrast, if you create a business event
as planned, it is stored in the objects table with planning status 2 (Planned). Its relationship
with the business event type also has status Planned. All bookings for a planned business
event are also stored using status Planned. When you firmly book a business event, the
planning status of the business event as well as all its relationships and infotypes is
changed to Active.
Attendee list changes

When the business event is firmly booked, the attendee list is also revisited. If there were
some cancellations, and the places were not given to waitlisted candidates, you now have
the opportunity to do so. Also, if any waiting list remains, you can rebook them to other
business events of the same type, leave them on the waiting list, or convert them into
prebookings. You can also swap confirmed bookings with waitlisted bookings. Or, you
may want to change the business event to increase its capacity.
Communication
When attendees booked a planned business event, they received communication confirming
provisional booking. When the business event is firmly booked, attendees receive definite
confirmation of place. So do instructors.
Further options
Firmly booking a business event is irrevocable, it cannot be undone. However, you can
cancel the business event.
34.8.2 Transaction
PV12—Firmly Book/Cancel
34.8.4 Bookings Less than Minimum Capacity

When you click , if the bookings are less than the minimum capacity, the
system asks you whether you will like to cancel the business event.
34.8.5 Data Screen

If there are enough bookings, or you choose not to cancel the business event, you get the
following screen.
34.8.6 Swapping Attendees

The system automatically moves unplaced attendees to the placed attendees list. You can
swap attendees by clicking .
34.8.7 Saving with Rebooking

If you save with rebooking, the system proposes the first business event after the 'Rebooking
as of' date you specified in the initial screen.
If you accept the rebookings and save, bookings are transferred. If you remove the tick
and save, it is equivalent to saving without rebooking. The status of the business event
is changed to firmly booked. The planning status of the business event and all its
relationships and infotypes is changed from Planned to Active.
34.8.8 Saving without Rebooking
You can save without rebooking by clicking . Unplaced attendees

may remain on the waiting list, or may be moved to prebooking.
34.8.9 Waitlist Procedure

When you save without rebooking, unplaced attendees may remain on the waiting list,
or may be moved to prebooking. This depends on the following setting in table T77S0.
If this switch is 0, unplaced attendances remain on the waiting list unless they are rebooked.
If it is 1, unplaced attendances are cancelled and prebookings are created for them instead,
leaving the waiting list empty.
34.8.10 Waitlist Procedure for a Business Event

You can also change this setting temporarily before firmly booking a business event by
choosing Settingsâ Waitlist Procedure. The system gives the following window, where
you can change the setting temporarily.
34.8.11 Attendee Notification for Rejection of Registration

If an attendee remains on the waiting list when the business event is firmly booked, he
receives the following notification.
34.8.12 Attendee Notification for Conversion to Prebooking

If an attendee is moved to prebooking when the business event is firmly booked, he
receives the following notification.
34.9 CANCELLING BUSINESS EVENT

A A B B
34.9.1 Purpose
Sometimes you may cancel a business event due to insufficient bookings, or other reasons.
When you cancel a business event, reserved resources are released. You can rebook attendees
for other business events. The system displays suitable alternatives where available. If
attendees are not rebooked, they may be converted to prebookings depending on
customizing setting. A delete flag is appended to the business event. Necessary
correspondence is automatically generated. Cancelling a business event is irrevocable, it
cannot be undone.
34.9.2 Transaction
PV12—Firmly Book/Cancel

34.9.4 Rebooking Proposals

In the case of business event cancellation, the system takes you directly to rebooking
proposals.
34.9.5 Saving with Rebooking

The system proposes the first business event after the 'Rebooking as of' date you specified
in the initial screen. If you save, rebooking is done. If you remove the ticks, attendances
may be deleted, or may be moved to prebooking.
34.9.6 Waitlist Procedure

When you save without rebooking, unplaced attendees may be moved to prebooking.
This depends on the following setting in table T77S0.
If this switch is 0, unplaced attendances are lost unless they are rebooked. If it is 1,
unplaced attendances are cancelled and prebookings are created for them instead, leaving
the waiting list empty.
34.9.7 Waitlist Procedure for a Business Event

You can also change this setting temporarily before firmly booking a business event by
choosing Settings âWaitlist Procedure. The system gives the following window, where
you can change the setting temporarily.
34.9.8 Cancellation Reasons

When you save, the system asks you for cancellation reason. Cancellation reasons are for
information and analysis purpose only. You may or may not specify a cancellation reason.
Cancellation reasons can be defined in view T77CR and can be used for information and
analysis.
34.10 LOCKING/UNLOCKING BUSINESS EVENT

A A B B
34.10.1 Purpose
You can lock a business event to prevent attendees from booking it. When you want to
allow bookings for the business event, you simply unlock it. Locked business events may
not show in the business event menu because in the dynamic menu settings, they are
filtered out by default . You
can change this setting to show all business events, but it may be confusing as the system
does not show any distinguishing mark against the locked business events. If you want
to view all locked business events, you may temporarily change this setting to ‘Locked
only’.
34.10.2 Locking/Unlocking a Business Event

In transaction PV14, you select the business event, choose lock/unlock radio button and
save. The business event is locked/unlocked.
34.10.3 Locking/Unlocking in Business Event Menu

You can select a business event in the business event menu (transaction PV14), right-click,
and choose Lock/Unlock. The business event is locked/unlocked.
34.10.4 Booking for Locked Business Events

Normally, a locked business event does not show in the attendance menu as it is filtered
out. However, if you display it by removing filter, select it and right-click, you will find
that you cannot book attendance for the business event.
If you try to book attendee for a business event using transaction PV00, the locked business
event does not show in the list of business events.
34.11 CONDUCTING BUSINESS EVENT

A A B B
When you conduct a business event, you normally take signatures of the attendees. You
can run transaction S_PH9_46000433 to generate attendance list for a business event. You
can sort it by the organizational assignment or alphabetically. The attendees can sign the
attendance list.
34.12 APPRAISING BUSINESS EVENT

A A B B
34.12.1 Appraising Business Event

You can run transaction PV33 to perform appraisal of a business event by attendee. The
system shows you the appraisal templates available for Training and Event Management.
Appraisal templates are created by consultants using transaction OOAM as per your
needs (Refer to chapter 27).
You select the appropriate template. The system shows you the appraisal form. You enter
the attendee, the business event, and the training period.
You then the appraisal, enter the appraisal data and it.
34.12.2 Business Event Appraisals Report

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000451 to see business event appraisals. You can filter
appraisals based on appraisal template, appraisal status and period. The system shows
you a list of appraisals meeting your selection criteria.
You can select an appraisal document and display or change it. You can even create an
appraisal document from this report. You can delete an appraisal document. You can
change the status of a completed document to 'In process'.
34.13 FOLLOWING UP BUSINESS EVENT

A A B B
34.13.1 Purpose
After a business event has been conducted, you need to update absenteeism as cancellations.
You also need to do booking for attendees who turn up at the last moment. You then
indicate to the system that the business event is over so that it can perform follow-up
actions, e.g. printing attendance certificates. This is done by 'Following up' the business
event. When a business event is followed up, the following activities take place.
Ø The correspondence linked to following up the business event is triggered. This may
include printing certificate of attendance, which may be given to the participants.
Ø The business event may be marked historical. This means that no further changes can
be made to the business event data.
Ø If the business event imparts a qualification, it may be updated for the attendees
either manually or automatically.
Ø The relationship attendee takes part in the business event may be deleted and the
relationship attendee participated in the business event type may be created.
34.13.2 Transaction
PV15—Follow-up
Here you can specify whether you want to mark the business event historical. You can
use transaction RE_RHGRENZ1 to remove the historical record flag from a business
event.
34.13.4 Data Screen
The system shows you the follow-up actions. You click the save icon to take the action.
The system confirms that the actions have been taken.
34.13.5 Procedure
The follow-up actions can be set in the last three columns of the procedure infotype of
the business event type. If the procedure infotype is not maintained for a business event
type, global follow-up actions are taken.
For a business event type you can specify a procedure. In this infotype, for each attendee
type, you specify the following.
Transfer objectives to attendee as qualifications

A business event may impart a qualification. When an attendee attends a business event,
he acquires that qualification. You may add the qualification to the attendee manually,
or you may want the system to do it automatically. If you want the system to do it
automatically, you tick this checkbox.
Delete and create relationships

When an attendee books a business event, relationship 025 is created which says that the
attendee takes part in the business event. When the business event has actually taken
place (followed up), this relationship 025 is deleted and another relationship 034 is created
which says that the attendee participated in the business event type. Relationship 034
was read by the system to determine whether the employee has attended prerequisite
business event. However, now the system reads both relationships 025 and 034.
Hence, the system will work equally well if relationship 025 was not deleted and
relationship 034 was not created. If you choose to delete and create relationships, you
should tick both these checkboxes; although it is recommended that you leave both these
checkboxes blank.
34.13.6 Global Follow-up Actions

In view V_T77KV_2 you specify business event follow-up actions which apply to all
business event types. You can also specify them in procedure infotype of a business event
type. If the procedure infotype exists for a business event type, the specification there
gets a priority over global specification here.
34.14 BUSINESS EVENT REPORTS

A A A B
Attendee list
You can run transaction S_PH9_46000434 to see the list of attendees for one or more
business events. You can filter the business events selected based on period and location.
You can filter the attendee list of selected business events by booking priority.
Attendance list
You can run transaction S_PH9_46000433 to generate attendance list of a business event.
You can sort the list alphabetically, or by organizational assignment. You can take signatures
of attendees on an attendance list.
Price proposal
You can run transaction PV1D to determine prices of one or more business events based
on cost and to transfer it to infotype 1021. You may individually specify business events,
or specify that business events belonging to a business event type or business event
group within specified period be selected.
The price may be based on either optimum capacity or actual booking. The following
items are added together to determine a price proposal:
Ø Cost items of business event (E).
Ø Cost items of business event type (D).
Ø Cost items of resources (G) reserved for the business event.

Ø Cost items of the resource types (R) related with the business event type.
Ø Cost items of the equipment (R) in the room reserved for the business event.
If the same cost items are maintained for both the business event and the business event
type, the values stored for the business event itself are taken. The same applies to cost
items stored for resource types and resources, the values stored for the actual resources
are taken.
Business event demand

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016220 to display demand for a business event type.
You can also create or change demand. You can call business event planning function
from here.
Business event schedule

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000438 to see the time schedule of a business event.
Business event hierarchy

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016217 to see the hierarchy of a business event group
or business event type. You can also see business event brochure, prices and knowledge
links of business events.
Attendance statistics
You can run transaction S_ALR_87014085 to see the number of attendees and status of
business events. You can select a business event and firmly book it, cancel it, or follow
it up.
Business event brochure

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016218 to generate business event brochure.
You can use extended formatting options to decide which of these items are included in
the business event brochure.
Business event information

You can run transaction S_PH0_48000476 to display detailed information stored for business
event dates such as event location, instructor, room, telephone number of room, event
owner, availability of places on the business event, or duration of the business event.
Business event dates

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016219 to see business event dates of a business event
type or a business event group.
Resource list per business event

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000437 to see the resources reserved by one or more
business events. Resources which are required and not reserved are shown as blank entries.
Resources not yet assigned per business event

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000436 to see resources not yet assigned for a business
event.
Material requirements per business event

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000435 to see the material required for a business
event. You can also select a material and reserve. If the material is available, it is reserved.
If it is not available, a purchase requisition is generated.
Business event prices

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016221 to see prices of business event types. If you
don't select one or more business event types, this report shows prices of all business
event types. Note that this report does not show prices of business events which may be
different from their respective business event types.
35 Attendee
35.1 TYPES OF ATTENDEES

A A A A
A business event is attended by attendees. SAP supports various types of attendees as

can be seen by running transaction PSV8 to create an attendee or transaction PSV9 to
change/display an attendee.
This is actually an area menu. Depending on the type of attendee, appropriate transaction
is called.
553
35.2 INDIVIDUAL AND GROUP ATTENDEES

A A A A
There are two types of attendees, namely individual attendees and group attendees.
Person, external person, contact person, applicant and user are individual attendees,
whereas organizational unit, company and customer are group attendees. In the case of
group attendees, you can specify the number of persons who would attend a business
event.
35.3 PERSON

A A A A
A person is an employee of the company. He is created in the SAP system when he is

hired in Personnel Administration.
35.4 ORGANIZATIONAL UNIT

A A A A
Organizational units are created in Organizational Management. They have been discussed
in chapter 3.
CHAPTER 35 Attendee 555
35.5 EXTERNAL PERSON/EXTERNAL INSTRUCTOR

A A B C
35.5.1 Purpose
An external person is a person external to your organization. He may belong to a company,
customer or prospect. External persons may be instructors or attendees. You maintain
their name, relationship with the company, address and name format.
35.5.2 Transaction
PVH0—Create/Change External Instructor
S_AHR_61011893—External Instructor
OOER—Create External Instructor
PO19—External Instructor
If you create an external person as attendee, you create a relationship between him and
his company.
If, on the other hand, you create an external person as instructor, you not only create his
relationship with the company but also with the business event type which he teaches. The
relationship to a business event type is used to determine the instructors proposed to
hold business events during resource selection. An external person may be instructor for more
than one business event types. An external instructor may be reserved by a business event.
35.5.4 Address
The system determines the business address of an external instructor using the company
to which the instructor is assigned if the relationship, ‘belongs to company’ has been
maintained. You can also maintain an address specifically for the instructor here.
35.5.5 Name Format
Here you can maintain the form of address, title, etc. for an external person.
35.6 COMPANY

A A B C
35.6.1 Purpose
A company is an entity, external to your organization. It may be the organizer of a
business event type. When you create a business event of that type, the company will get
defaulted as the organizer of the business event. As the organizer of a business event, a
company would correspond with business event attendees. A company can be a group
attendee of a business event. It may have external persons, who may be instructors of a
business event. External persons can also be attendees of a business event. You create a
company by specifying its name and address. The system gives it a unique id.
35.6.2 Transaction
PVU0—Create/Change Company
35.6.3 Address
35.6.4 External Training Provider
External training provider key is a unique key used in infotype 5043 in LSO.
35.7 CONTACT PERSON

A A B C
35.7.1 Purpose
Contact persons belong to a customer. Contact persons may be instructors or attendees.
Normally contact persons are created by your colleagues in the sales department.
35.7.2 Transaction
VAP1—Create Contact Person
VAP2—Change Contact Person
35.7.3 Screen
35.8 CUSTOMER

A A B C
35.8.1 Purpose
Customers may be attendees in your business events. Normally, customers are created by
your colleagues in the sales department.
35.8.2 Transaction
XD01—Create Customer (Centrally)
XD02—Change Customer (Centrally)
35.8.3 Screen
35.9 APPLICANT

A A A A
Applicants are created in Recruitment. Applicants may be attendees in your business

events.
35.10 USER

A A A A
Every SAP system has users. Some of them may be your employees, whereas some may
not be. You would identify employees by their personnel number in Training and Event
Management. Users who are not employees may be attendees or instructors in Training
and Event Management. Users are created by Basis consultants.
35.11 ATTENDEE TYPE CONTROL OPTIONS

A C X X
35.11.1 Purpose
When you perform different functions, e.g. prebook, book, rebook, replace, and cancel,
the system shows you different attendee types in different tabs. Here you specify the
properties of each attendee type. You can also specify the order in which attendee type
tabs appear. You can specify a maximum of six attendee types under Sort order in the
number range of 01 to 06. The sort sequence function only lets you specify the display
sequence; it does not enable you to hide certain attendee types.
35.11.2 IMG Node

SM30 â V_T77R3_1
35.11.3 Overview Screen
35.11.4 Details Screen
Attendee type
You specify the control options for each attendee type.
Individual attendee
Certain attendees are individual attendees, e.g. person; whereas certain attendees are
group attendees, e.g. organizational unit. In the case of group attendees, you specify the
number of attendees. Here you specify whether the attendee type is an individual attendee.
Internet attendee type

This setting determines, for example, whether the attendee type is included during user
maintenance for internet applications.
Organizational assignment
Here you specify the evaluation path used to determine an attendee's organizational
assignment. For example, a person is linked to his organizational unit using evaluation
path P-S-O, while an external person is linked to his company using evaluation
path A003.
Function moduleorganizational assignment

Instead of specifying an evaluation path, you can specify a function module used to
determine the organizational assignment of an attendee.
Billing and allocation information

You specify the settlement type (billing, activity allocation, or free of charge) used to
settle costs for the attendee type. This settlement type is proposed as default when you
use the function 'Book with Fee' for an attendee of this type.
Cost center assignment

Cost center is required for activity allocation of attendance fees or cancellation fees. The
value you enter here is proposed as default.
Function modulecost center assignment

Instead of specifying a cost center, you can specify a function module used to determine
the cost center assignment of an attendee.
36 Attendance
36.1 BOOKING PRIORITY

A A A B
When booking a business event, you specify priority. Priority can be given a value
from 00 to 99. 00 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority.
Parameters MAXMU and MINWL divide the priority range in three intervals.
Booking type Priority from Priority to Explanation

Essential 00 Priority value in the Essential booking can be booked
booking parameter MAXMU up to maximum capacity.
Normal Priority value Priority value in the Normal booking can be booked
booking in the parameter parameter MINWL – 1 up to optimum capacity.
MAXMU + 1
Waiting list Priority value 99
booking in the parameter
MINWL
565
Priority specified in parameter NPRIO is the default priority for normal booking. You
must ensure that MAXMU < NPRIO < MINWL.
36.2 ATTENDEE CHECKS

A A A B
36.2.1 Individual and Group Attendee Checks

When you book an attendee, the system performs several checks to ensure data integrity.
The following checks are performed for both individual and group attendees.
Ø Existence check
Ø Availability check
Ø Capacity check
36.2.2 Individual Attendee Checks

The following checks are carried out for individual attendees.
Ø Is the attendee booked to attend another business event at the same time?
Ø Is the attendee reserved as instructor of a business event at the same time?
CHAPTER 36 Attendance 567
Ø Is the attendee booked for a business event of the same type?

Ø Is the attendee prebooked for a business event of the same type?
Ø Has the attendee attended the prerequisite business events?
Ø Does the attendee have the required qualifications?
Ø Are there attendance or absence records which are incompatible with business event
attendance?
36.2.3 Attendance/Attendance Conflict
When you book attendees for business events, a check is performed to see if the attendee
is already booked to attend another business event at the same time. Here, you can define
whether the system should give error, warning, message, or perform no check.
36.2.4 Attendance/Instructor Conflict
When an attendance is booked, a check is performed to determine if the attendee is

already booked as an instructor of a business event at the same time. Here, you can
define whether the system should give error, warning, message, or perform no check.
36.2.5 Attendee Checks

In view V_T77KV_1 you can specify attendee-related checks before business event booking
which apply to all business event types. These checks can be different for different attendee
types. You can also specify these checks at business event type level in the procedure
infotype, which get priority.
Booked for same type

When an attendee books or prebooks for a business event, you may want to know if the
attendee has already attended a business event of the same type or is already booked to
attend such a business event. If yes, you may give an error (E), a warning (W), or
a message (I). If you don't want to perform this check, you can leave this field blank.
Prebooking on same business event type

When an attendee books or prebooks for a business event type, you may want to know
if the attendee is already prebooked for this business event type. If yes, you may give
an error (E), a warning (W), or a message (I). If you don't want to perform this check, you
can leave this field blank.
Check prerequisite
When an attendee books for a business event, you may want to know whether the
attendee has attended the prerequisite business events. If yes, you may give an error (E),
a warning (W), or a message (I). If you don't want to perform this check, you can leave
this field blank.
Check qualification
When an attendee books for a business event, you may want to know whether the attendee
has the qualifications or alternative qualifications required to attend the business event.
If yes, you may give an error (E), a warning (W), or a message (I). If you don't want to
perform this check, you can leave this field blank.
36.2.6 Incompatible Attendance and Absence Types
Purpose
If an employee is on leave, you may want that the system should not allow him to be
booked as an attendee for a business event. You can build such checks here. When
attendance is booked, or instructor reserved, the system carries out checks specified in
this table. If the checks fail, attendance cannot be booked or instructor cannot be reserved.
IMG node
SM30 â T77KA
Screen
Incompatible attendance and absence types

You specify the attendance/absence types when an employee cannot attend a business
event. You also specify the attendance/absence types when an employee cannot be an
instructor at a business event. You should replace the entries in this table with your own
entries.
Check against day off

If your company policy is that an employee cannot be an attendee or an instructor at a
business event on his off days, you retain the entries with absence type $$$$; otherwise
you delete them. If you retain these entries, a check is carried out against the employee's
shift plan to ensure that he is not an attendee or an instructor on his off days.
If you specify that an employee cannot be an attendee or an instructor on his off days,
you can deactivate this check for a business event type in infotype 'Business Event Type
Info'. If you do so, business event attendance is allowed regardless of what is recorded
in the shift plan.
36.2.7 Additional Checks

In BAdI RHPV0001 you can build additional checks of attendance or business event data
before an attendee is booked for a business event.
36.3 ATTENDANCE MENU

A A A B
36.3.1 Purpose
In the attendance menu, you can execute all the functions related to booking activities.
For business event groups, business event types and business events you cannot change
information. For a business event type, you can prebook attendance. For a business event,
you can book attendance. For an attendee, you can replace, rebook or cancel attendance.
You can also do appraisals and correspondence. Traffic lights show whether the business
event is full, accepting only essential bookings, or accepting normal bookings.
36.3.2 Transaction
PSV1—Attendance Menu
36.3.3 Navigation
36.3.4 Screen
36.4 PREBOOKING ATTENDANCE

A A A B
36.4.1 Prebooking
If you want to attend a business event of certain type but there are no business events,
or the business event dates do not suit you, you can prebook attendance for a business
event type.
36.4.2 Checking Business Events When Prebooking

Usually prebooking is done because there is no business event available during the period
you want to attend. If a business event is available, you would like to be informed. You
can set the following switch to 1 if you want the system to check whether a business
event is available during the planning period and to give a message if a business event
exists. If you don't want the system to give such a message, you set this switch to 0.
36.4.3 Converting Prebookings to Bookings

You can display prebookings when booking attendance. You can convert prebookings to
bookings when a suitable business event becomes available.
36.4.4 Planning Status of Prebookings

Prebooking is stored as a relationship between the business event type and the attendee.
This relationship is in the Planned status, because prebooking is just a plan.
36.4.5 Prebooking Attendance

You can use transaction PV02 to prebook attendee for a business event type. For prebooking
each type of attendee, there is a separate tab. For group attendees, you also specify the
number of attendees. You can also write a note when you do prebooking.
Prebooking individual attendance
Prebooking group attendance

36.5 PREBOOKING ATTENDANCE LIST

A A A B
You can run transaction PV06 to prebook attendee list for a business event type. You can
create a prebooking list and save to prebook the whole list for a business event type.
Business event type screen
Attendee list
When you click save, prebooking of all attendees for the business event type takes place.
36.6 PREBOOKING ATTENDEE FOR BUSINESS EVENT TYPE LIST

A A A B
You can run transaction PV16 to prebook attendee for business event type list.
Attendee screen
Business event type list
When you click save, prebooking of the attendee for all business event types takes place.
36.7 BOOKING ATTENDANCE

A A A B
36.7.1 Booking Attendance

You can use transaction PV00 to book attendee for a business event type. For booking
each type of attendee, there is a separate tab. For group attendees, you also specify the
number of attendees. You can also charge a price to the internal or external customer for
participation of an attendee in a business event.
36.7.2 Booking Individual Attendance
If you choose , the billing and allocation data stored for the attendee
type is transferred automatically. For , refer to chapter 36.7.4.
In the above screen, the system shows you the period by default. This period is used to
filter the business events shown in the screen, from which you can select the business
event you want to book. The start date of this period is current date. The end date is
determined from the start date and the following system setting.
36.7.3 Booking Group Attendance
If the number of attendees is more than the remaining capacity of the business event, the
booking is split. One booking is made with normal priority, filling the business event up
to the optimum capacity. Next booking is made with essential priority which can fill the
business event up to the maximum capacity. If the requirement is still not met, the third
booking is made with waiting list priority.
36.7.4 Charging for Participation in Business Event

If you click , the system shows you the fees screen where you can
specify whether the business event is free of charge, or it is to be billed to external party,
or it is to be charged to internal customer using activity allocation.
Charge fee by default
The system either defaults the fee, or defaults free of charge depending on the switch
given above. If the value here is zero, all business events are free of charge by default.
If the value is 1, the fee specified in the prices infotype is proposed by default. In either
case, you can change the default value proposed by the system.
Cost maintenance
This entry contains the name of the function module that can be called at the time of
booking or cancelling attendance in Training and Event Management. If the fee is to be
charged by default, the function module specified here determines the assignment of
settlement type (billing, activity allocation, free of charge).
Billing document
Here you specify the details for billing and card payment.
Activity allocation
Here you specify the details for activity allocation. You can also distribute costs by
selecting .
Free of charge
36.8 BOOKING ATTENDEE LIST

A A A B
You can run transaction PV07 to book attendee list for a business event type. You can
create a booking list and save to book the whole list for a business event type.
Business event screen
You select the business event you want to book the attendees for.
Attendee list
The system shows the selected business event. When you save, all the attendees are
booked for the business event.
36.9 BOOKING ATTENDEE FOR BUSINESS EVENT LIST

A A A B
You can run transaction PV08 to book attendee for business event type list.
Attendee screen
Business event list
When you save, the attendee is booked for all business events.
36.10 REPLACING ATTENDANCE

A A A B
Attendee to be replaced
You can run transaction PV03 to replace one attendee by another. You can also replace
a group of attendees. In the initial screen, you specify the attendees to be replaced.
Business event in which replaced
When you click , the system shows the business events in which the
attendee is booked in the specified period. You select the business event in which you
want to replace the attendee.
Replacement attendee
You click . The system gives you the screen in which you can
specify the replacement attendee.
You can replace one attendee type with another attendee type. In the case of group
attendees, you can specify the number. The attendee being replaced can be rebooked to
another business event of the same type, or can be prebooked. You can replace group
attendees completely or partially. The same checks are carried out as for booking with the
exception of the capacity check. The booking priority, the price, and the fee assignment
remain the same.
36.11 REBOOKING ATTENDANCE

A A A B
Rebooking attendance screen

If you have booked a business event for a certain date, but want to change to another date
for the same business event type, you can rebook attendance using transaction PV01.
In the initial screen you specify the personnel number. The period should cover the date
of the business event you want to rebook and the period in which you want to book the
attendance.
Booked business events

The system shows you the business events booked during the period.
You select the business event you want to rebook and click .
Rebooking business event

The system shows you the business events of the same type.
You select the business event you want to book, select the priority and save. The existing
booking is cancelled and a new booking is created. The system carries out the same
checks which are carried out at the time of booking. If the attendee type is person and
the integration with Time Management is on, old attendance records are deleted and new
attendance records are created in Time Management.
36.12 CANCELLING ATTENDANCE

A A A B

You can cancel bookings with any priority and for all attendee types. You can cancel
bookings for group attendees partially or completely. Whenever a cancellation is
made, a cancellation record is created between the attendee and the business event
(relationship 040). You can specify a cancellation reason which is then used to levy
cancellation fees. If you are integrated with Time Management, the relevant attendance
records are deleted for attendees of the type Person in Time Management. You can move
candidates up from the waiting list to fill the places that become available due to
cancellations.
36.12.2 Transaction
PV04—Cancel Attendance

36.12.4 Attendance to be Cancelled

36.12.5 Moving-up the Waitlisted Candidates
36.12.6 Reasons for Attendance Cancellation

In view T77CAR you can define the reasons for attendance cancellation. For each reason
you can specify cancellation fee as a percentage of attendance fee, or you may specify
that there is no cancellation fee.
If no cancellation reason is specified when attendance is cancelled or if a cancellation

reason has been specified for which no cancellation fee is stored in view T77CAR, default
cancellation fee is charged. Default cancellation fee is stored as a percentage of attendance
fees in the following parameter.
36.12.7 Moving-up on Cancellation
Here you specify the move-up procedure for waiting list candidates to fill the places
freed by cancellations. There are three options available: no move-up takes place, interactive
move-up by the user, or the system automatically selects move-up candidates on the
basis of booking priority and date. The move-up procedure defined here does not apply
to rebookings.
36.13 ATTENDEE APPRAISALS

A A A B
36.13.1 Appraising Attendees

You can run transaction PV34 to perform appraisal of attendees by a business event
(instructor). The system shows you the appraisal templates available for Training and
Event Management. Appraisal templates are created by consultants as per your requirements
using transaction OOAM (Refer to chapter 27).
You select the appropriate template. The system shows you the appraisal form. You enter
the attendee, the business event, and the training period.
You then the appraisal, enter the appraisal data and it.
36.13.2 Attendee Appraisals Report

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000452 to see attendee appraisals. You can filter appraisals
based on appraisal template, appraisal status and period. The system shows you a list of
appraisals meeting your selection criteria.
You can select an appraisal document and display or change it. You can even create an
appraisal document from this report. You can delete an appraisal document. You can
change the status of a completed document to 'In process'.
36.14 ATTENDANCE REPORTS

A A A B
Attendee list
You can run transaction S_PH9_46000434 to see the list of attendees for one or more
business events. You can filter the business events selected based on period and location.
You can filter the attendee list of selected business events by booking priority.
Attendance list
You can run transaction S_PH9_46000433 to generate attendance list of a business event.
You can sort the list alphabetically, or by organizational assignment. You can take signatures
of attendees on an attendance list.
Employee list
You can run transaction S_PH9_46000432 to find employees of a company, customer,
interested party or organizational unit. You can also include employees of subordinate
organizational units of the selected organizational unit.
Bookings per attendee

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016215 to see bookings for one or more attendees
during a period. You can restrict the report to a business event type. This report does not
give details of days and hours of training. If you need that information, use Attendee's
training history.
Attendee's training history

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000431 to see training history of one or more employees.
A training history is a list of all training events that the attendee already has attended or
is booked to attend.
Attendance prerequisites
You can run transaction S_PH9_46000430 to see prerequisites for attending business events
of a type. The prerequisite may be a qualification, or attending business events of a type.
If there are no prerequisites, the system gives the message ‘no data found for the values
entered’.
Attendee's qualifications
You can run transaction S_PH9_46000429 to see an attendee's qualifications.
Prerequisites matchup
You can run transaction S_PH9_46000428 to check whether an attendee meets the
prerequisites to attend a business event type. The result is shown in traffic lights.
Prebookings per business event type

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000427 to see all prebookings for one or more business
event types.
Prebookings per attendee

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016214 to see all prebookings for one or more attendees.
Attendees for rebooking

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000426 to identify attendees who need to be rebooked.
Attendees who remained on waiting list of business events, or attendees of cancelled
business events need to be rebooked.
Attendance statistics
You can run transaction S_ALR_87014085 to see the number of attendees and status of
business events. You can select a business event and firmly book it, cancel it, or follow
it up.
Attendance and sales statistics

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000425 to see the number of bookings and total fees for
each business event type which is relevant for billing, internal activity allocation and free
of charge.
Cancellations per business event

You can run transaction S_PH9_46000424 to see cancellation of attendance in business
events for a period. You can also generate the list for a specific attendance cancellation
reason.
Cancellations per attendee

You can run transaction S_AHR_61016216 to see cancellation of attendance done by an
attendee. You can also generate the list for a specific attendance cancellation reason.
37 Correspondence
37.1 AUTOMATIC CORRESPONDENCE

A A A A
Training and event management can be set up for automatic correspondence with different
categories of recipients, e.g. attendees, instructors, etc. The correspondence can take place
in different media, e.g. e-mail, fax, postal service, etc. When a correspondence-relevant
activity takes place, e.g. attendance booking or business event cancellation, appropriate
correspondence automatically takes place. The content of the correspondence depends on
the activity and related data. If automatic correspondence fails for any reason, administrators
are informed through a workflow. They can then complete the process manually.
37.2 MANUAL CORRESPONDENCE

A A A B
37.2.1 Purpose
Manual correspondence is needed if automatic correspondence fails, or if automatic
correspondence is disabled by setting no output in view T77VD.
596
CHAPTER 37 Correspondence 597
37.2.2 Transaction
PP40—Manual Output
The list of activities and corresponding notification abbreviations are defined in

configuration. You select from that list.
37.2.4 Output Medium
You can click to set the output medium. You can further set different
output media for different recipients in the output list.

You click to input further selection parameter. Business event is a
mandatory entry. You can enter attendee data to further restrict the output list.
37.2.6 Output List
The output list shows the list of recipients and the output medium. You can select different
output media for different recipients. You can see print preview, screen output,
correspondence history and error log. You can output the correspondence in the specified
media.
37.2.7 Output
37.3 CORRESPONDENCE HISTORY

A A A B
37.3.1 Purpose
There are occasions when you want to see what correspondence has taken place with
whom. This program lets you see that with a variety of search options.
37.3.2 Transaction
PVK0—History

In this screen, you can specify the search criteria for a business event type, business
event, agent (user) or recipient. In addition, you can specify the period, booking priority,
output status and activity.
37.3.4 Output
There are a number of fields you can add in the list by modifying the layout. Alternatively,
you can see all the fields by selecting a line and clicking .
37.4 ACTIVITIES

A C X X
37.4.1 Purpose
You need to correspond when certain activities occur, e.g. an employee books a business
event. Activity definition may include more details. For example, an employee books a
planned business event and an employee books a firmly booked business event may be
two different activities because the correspondence would differ. SAP provides predefined
activities. An activity is linked to a notification abbreviation. Notification abbreviations
are linked to forms, which are correspondence templates with variable fields that get
filled at runtime.
37.4.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77VI
37.4.3 Screen
37.4.4 Primary Key

Key: Activity + Abbreviation for Notification
37.5 RECIPIENTS OF NOTIFICATION

A C X X
37.5.1 Purpose
Notification abbreviations are linked to forms, which are correspondence templates with
variable fields that get filled at runtime. When an event (activity) triggers a notification,
it is output to a recipient group, which is specified here. Recipient group 0000, or blank,
are attendees. When you do correspondence using transaction PP40, you get a selection
screen which is also specified here.
37.5.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77VE
37.5.3 Screen
37.5.4 Primary Key

Abbreviation for notification
37.6 RECIPIENT GROUPS

A C X X
37.6.1 Purpose
Recipient groups are the addressees of various types of correspondence generated in
Training and Event Management. Recipients in a recipient group are determined by the
function module specified here.
37.6.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77VG
37.6.3 Screen
37.6.4 Primary Key

Recipient Group
37.7 FORM FOR A NOTIFICATION

A C X X
37.7.1 Purpose
Notification abbreviations are linked to forms here. Forms are correspondence templates
with variable fields that get filled at runtime. You can maintain a form in multiple languages.
The language of notification is determined in the following sequence: (1) Language of the
attendee, (2) Language of the business event and (3) Language specified in switch SEMIN
CLANG. You can also specify the default output medium. For automatic output, you
must specify the output medium (such as P for printer, I for Internet Mail). For manual
output, you specify ‘No output’. Under Maintain global standard texts for forms, you can
maintain the logo, the sender and the footer for all the forms you use. You can use the
standard forms, or copy and modify them. In the latter case, you specify the modified
form here.
37.7.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77VD
37.7.3 List Screen
37.7.4 Detail Screen
37.7.5 Primary Key

User group for notifications + Abbreviation for notification
37.8 ASSIGNMENT OF USERS TO USER GROUPS

A C X X
37.8.1 Purpose
Here you specify the users in a user group. Depending on the logged on user, appropriate
form for correspondence will be picked up.
37.8.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77KU
37.8.3 Screen
37.8.4 Primary Key

User Name + User Group for Notifications
37.9 DEFAULT OUTPUT MEDIUM

A C X X
37.9.1 Purpose
Here you can specify the default output medium for each attendee type.
37.9.2 IMG Node

SM30 â V_T77KV_3
37.9.3 Screen
37.9.4 Primary Key

Attendee Type
37.10 DEFAULT LANGUAGE

A C X X
37.10.1 Purpose
The language of notification is determined in the following sequence.
1. Language of the attendee
2. Language of the business event
3. Language specified here
37.10.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77S0
37.10.3 Screen
37.11 PRIORITY FOR WORKFLOW CORRESPONDENCE

A C X X
37.11.1 Purpose
Here you can set priority for errors that occur in the correspondence function of Training
and Event Management. The highest priority is 1 and the lowest priority is 9. If this field
is blank, default priority value of 5 is used.
37.11.2 IMG Node

SM30 â T77S0
37.11.3 Screen
37.12 FORMS

A B C C
37.12.1 Standard Forms

SAP provides standard forms for all notification abbreviations. If you want to have your
own forms, you can copy them and modify the copied forms. You also link the copied
form to the notification abbreviation in view T77VD. Alternatively, you can use the
wizard at IMG node Training and Event Management â
Day-to-Day Activities â
Correspondence â
Wizards â
Correspondence Setup.
37.12.2 Subobjects
The forms you specify for a notification are in SAPScript which can be defined using
transaction OOFO. A SAPScript form consists of subobjects shown below.
37.12.3 Windows
A form usually has multiple windows, each containing different types of information.
37.12.4 Text Elements

The real content lies in the text elements in the windows. You select a window by double-
clicking it and then click . The system shows you the content. The content can be
modified as per your requirements. You may need the help of an ABAP consultant.
37.12.5 Sequence of Text Elements

There may be multiple text elements in a window. You can change their sequence in
view T77VB.
37.12.6 Text Variables

You can see and if necessary edit the text variables, which can be used in text elements,
in view T77VC.
A text variable can be flagged as required for form output. If you flag a text variable as
required, the form cannot be output unless the variable has been filled during the data
procurement process.
37.12.7 Name Format for Recipients

You can define the name format for recipients in view T777N.
37.13 WIZARDS

A C X X
You can also do customizing of correspondence through wizards. They also result in the
same tables getting populated.
37.14 MAIL CONNECTION

A C X X
37.14.1 RFC Destination

RFC destination is set by your Basis consultants using transaction SM59.
37.14.2 RFC Destination for Connection to Mail System
If this setting is blank, messages are sent to the current system. If you specify a RFC
destination here, messages will be sent to that system. Your Basis consultant will guide
you on this setting.
37.14.3 Subtype for Mail Connection
You can send mail to SAP users. If you are sending mail to an employee, his user id is
determined from subtype 0001 of infotype 0105. If you are sending mail to other objects,
e.g. organizational units, you take the address from infotype 1032 using subtype specified
here. It is recommended that you do not change the standard setting 0001.
38 Training Integration
38.1 ORGANIZATIONAL MANAGEMENT

A A B B
Organizational units can be booked as attendees and can organize business events.
38.2 PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION

A A B B
Persons from the HR master data record can be booked as attendees or reserved as
instructors.
615
38.3 TIME MANAGEMENT

A A B B
38.3.1 Integration Switch of Training with Time Management
Here you can specify whether Training and Event Management is integrated with Time
Management or not. If this field is blank, integration is off. If this field contains 1, integration
is on. If integration is on, you can deactivate it for a business event type using the
infotype ‘Business Event Type Info’.
38.3.2 Attendance Type for Attendee
If integration with Time Management is active, and an employee is booked to attend a

business event, his attendance record is created in Time Management. The value here is
used as the attendance type of the infotype 2002 record.
CHAPTER 38 Training Integration 617
38.3.3 Attendance Type for Instructor
If integration with Time Management is active, and an employee is reserved to hold a

business event as an instructor, his attendance record is created in Time Management.
The value here is used as the attendance type of the infotype 2002 record.
38.3.4 Minimum Attendance Percentage

If an employee attends a business event partly, would you say that he attended the
business event or would you say that he did not? Here you can specify the minimum
percentage which the employee must attend to be considered present for the business
event.
You can also specify this value for a business event type in infotype ‘Business Event Type
Info’. If you do so, the value specified for the business event type is taken instead of the
global value.
If you create absence records such that the attendance of the attendee falls below the
minimum percentage, his booking for the business event is cancelled.
38.3.5 Incompatible Attendance and Absence Types

Refer to chapter 36.2.6.
38.4 PERSONNEL DEVELOPMENT

A A B B
38.4.1 Training with Qualification

Qualifications can be prerequisites for business events. Training programs can impart
qualifications. When a person completes a training program, this qualification can be
added to his profile. Based on qualification deficits in profile matchup, training programs
can be proposed.
38.4.2 Training with Development Plan Item

Change in the status of a development plan item, which is a training program, can result
in the employee being booked for the training program. Conversely, booking for a training
program, which is also a development plan item, can result in the change of status of the
development plan item.
38.4.3 Training with Appraisal

You can hold business event appraisals and attendee appraisals.
38.5 ACTIVITY ALLOCATION

A A B B
38.5.1 Activity Allocation for Attendees
Purpose
Attendance fees can be settled using internal activity allocation. The employee’s cost
center is debited and the organizer’s cost center is credited. The amount charged is
specified in the internal price field of the business event.
Prerequisites
Ø The business event should be firmly booked.
Ø The business event should have internal price.
Ø For the attendee, the business event should not be free of charge.
Ø The attendee should not be on the waiting list.
Ø The organizer must have a cost center (sender cost center).
Ø The employee must have a cost center (receiver cost center).
Ø Both cost centers must be in the same controlling area.
Ø Configuration given in this chapter should be maintained.
Activity allocation
You run transaction PV18 to do activity allocation for attendees. You get the following
screen.
You enter the business event for which you want to do activity allocation, and other
details, and Execute.
Activity allocation proposal
Activity allocation
You click to carry out activity allocation. The system does activity
allocation and gives the following message.
When you click the previous screen, the system shows the reference document number.
Reference document
You can click to display the reference document. Note that the document
number field is blank.
Document comparison
You place the cursor on the document number and click . The system gives
the following message.
You confirm the change of status and return to the previous page. The change in status
is reflected by the icon prefixed to the document number.
If you now display the reference document, it also shows the original document number
which was missing earlier.
Original document
Now you can also display the original document by clicking .
Document flow
You can see the link between the reference document and the original document by
clicking .
You can see a lot more information about the reference documents by running
transaction RE_RHREFDOC0. Since these reference documents are for business events,
the object type is E. For activity allocation of attendees, select V in the field ‘Document
Operation’.
Log
You can see the log by clicking .
38.5.2 Activity Allocation for Instructor
Purpose
Instructor fees can be settled using internal activity allocation. The organizer’s cost center
is debited and the instructor’s cost center is credited. The amount charged is specified in
the cost infotype of the resource type to which the instructor belongs.
Prerequisites
Ø The business event should be firmly booked.
Ø Instructor should have been specifically added to the business event in resource
selection.
Ø The resource type must have a cost center (sender cost center).
Ø The organizer must have a cost center (receiver cost center).
Ø Both cost centers must be in the same controlling area.
Ø Cost item must be maintained for resource type for determining the amount to be
transferred.
Ø Configuration given in this chapter should be maintained.
Activity allocation
You run transaction PV19 to do activity allocation for instructor. You get the following
screen.
You enter the business event for which you want to do activity allocation, and other
details, and Execute.
Activity allocation proposal

Activity allocation
You click to carry out activity allocation. The system does activity
allocation and gives the following message.
When you click the previous screen, the system shows the reference document number.
Reference document
number field is blank.
Document comparison
is reflected by the icon prefixed to the document number.
If you now display the reference document, it also shows the original document number
which was missing earlier.
Original document
Document flow
clicking .
You can see a lot more information about the reference documents by running transaction
RE_RHREFDOC0. Since these reference documents are for business events, the object
type is E. For activity allocation of instructors, select W in the field ‘Document Operation’.
Log
38.5.3 Activity Allocation Switch
If you want to use activity allocation for attendees and instructors, set this switch to 1.
38.5.4 Number Range
You maintain number range for reference documents using transaction OORB.
38.5.5 Controlling Area Selection
Here you specify the default value for controlling area in which activity allocation takes
place.
38.5.6 Cost Center Selection

Internal activity allocation for attendance fees lets you settle costs for in-company activities
between the cost object and the attendees of a business event. In this process, attendance
fees are debited from the cost center of the attendee, and the cost center of the cost object
is credited. In internal activity allocation for instructor, the instructor’s cost center is
credited and the cost center of the cost object is debited.
Cost center of the cost object is found using the evaluation path specified here. Evaluation
path LSOCOSTC specifies that the attendance fee be credited to, and instructor fee be
debited to, the organizational units which organize the business events.
If the system finds no cost center along the evaluation path, it takes the cost center from
the following entry.
38.5.7 Cost Element
Here you specify a secondary cost element for activity allocation.
38.5.8 Activity Type Determination
In order to do activity allocation for internal attendees and instructors, you determine
their activity types. The activity types are determined in the following sequence.
Ø Activity type of the organizational unit which organizes the business event.
Ø Activity type of the business event type.
Ø Activity type for Training and Event Management.
Activity type of the organizational unit which organizes the business event and activity
type of the business event type are maintained in the Billing/Allocation Info infotype.
Activity type for Training and Event Management is specified in the screen above. The
logic that the activity type of the organizational unit which organizes the business event
should be picked up first is specified in the evaluation path LSOFLWAY.
38.5.9 Wizard
The above settings can also be done through wizard.
38.5.10 Number Ranges for Controlling Documents

You need to run transaction KANK and ensure that a number range is assigned to
transaction RKL in it (Controlling â
General Controlling Organizationâ Maintain â
Number Ranges for Controlling Documents).
38.5.11 Activity Type

Your CO consultant will define the activity types required for the attendee and instructor
functions using transaction KL01.
You should make the following settings.
Field Value
Activity unit PC
Activity type category 1
Allocation cost element Should be a secondary cost element which has cost element
type 43 (internal activity allocation). Secondary cost
elements are created using transaction KA06.
Price indicator 1
38.5.12 Activity Price

In Controlling, you specify which cost centers produce which activities and what their
prices are. In activity allocation of attendees the price comes from the internal price of the
business event. Similarly, the instructor fee comes from the cost of the resource type of
the instructor. Therefore, you need to define that the prices of both these activities are
manual. You do so in transaction KP26 for each cost center where the activity can be
produced (sender cost center). For attendees, the sender cost center is the organizer
organizational unit’s cost center. For instructors, the sender cost center is the cost center
of the resource type of the instructor.
You click to specify the pricing mechanism for the activity type.
Since the pricing of both attendees and instructors are defined in Training and Event
Management, you do not need to specify the fixed cost, variable cost, planned activity
quantity and capacity. You set the field PPI to 3, specifying that the price is determined
manually.
38.6 COST TRANSFER POSTING

A A B B
38.6.1 Cost of a Business Event
Cost center
When a business event is conducted, it uses resources. The cost of these resources is
incurred by the cost centers of these resources. Certain costs are incurred directly by a
business event in its own cost center.
Cost item
You may incur various types of costs in maintaining a resource. For example, in maintaining
a PC you may incur depreciation cost and maintenance cost. Each of these is called a cost
item. Details of a cost item include the amount and unit (per business event, per unit
time, per attendee or per attendee per unit time).
38.6.2 Cost Transfer Posting
Purpose
The purpose of cost transfer posting is to transfer the cost of resources from the cost
center of the resources to the cost center of the organizational unit organizing the business
event. Costs incurred directly by a business event are also transferred from the cost
center of the business event to the cost center of the organizational unit organizing the
business event.
Prerequisites
Before you do cost transfer posting, you should ensure that
Ø The business event is in firmly booked status.
Ø The organizer of the business event is an organizational unit and it has a cost center.
Ø The resources used by the business event have cost centers.
Ø All cost centers are in the same controlling area.
Ø The cost data of the resources and business event is maintained.
Ø The customizing discussed in this chapter is done.
Cost transfer posting

You run transaction PV1C to do cost transfer posting. The system gives you the following
selection screen.
You enter the necessary details and Execute to get the cost calculation.
Business event cost calculation
Cost transfer
If the calculations are correct, you click . The system transfers the cost
and gives you the reference document number created.
Reference document
number is blank.
Document comparison
You place the cursor on the document number and click . The system
gives the following message.
is reflected by the icon prefixed to the document number. It changes from
to . If you now display the reference document, it also shows the original
document number which was missing earlier.
Original document
Document flow
clicking .
You can see a lot more information about the reference documents by running
transaction RE_RHREFDOC0. Since these reference documents are for business events,
the object type is E. For cost transfer posting, select U in the field ‘Document Operation’.
Log
38.6.3 Cost Transfer Switch
If you want to use cost transfer, set this switch to 1.
38.6.4 Number Range
You maintain number range for reference documents using IMG node Training and Event
Management âBasic Settings â
Number Range Maintenance â
Define Number Ranges
for External Operations.
38.6.5 Controlling Area Selection
Here you specify the default value for controlling area in which cost transfer takes place.
38.6.6 Cost Center Selection
Costs are debited to the cost center of the cost object of a business event, which is found
using the evaluation path specified here. Evaluation path LSOCOSTC specifies that the
cost be debited to the organizational units which organize the business event.
38.6.7 Cost Items

Cost items are assigned to resource types, resources, business event types, and business
events. Here you specify the amount which is used for cost transfer. The amount may be
per attendee, per attendee per time unit, per business event or per time unit. You also
specify whether the cost item is relevant for transfer and if so, what is the controlling area
and cost element.
38.6.8 Wizard
The above settings can also be done through wizard.
38.6.9 Number Ranges for Controlling Documents

You need to run transaction KANK and ensure that a number range is assigned to
transaction RKU1 in it (Controlling â
General Controlling Organization â
Maintain â
Number Ranges for Controlling Documents).
38.7 BILLING

A B C C
38.7.1 Billing
Integration with Billing lets users of Training and Event Management create invoices for
attendance fees for attendees of business events via the Sales and Distribution Billing
interface. A billing document is generated in Sales and Distribution per customer and
business event, and a billing form is output. You can run transaction PV17 to bill your
customers and contact persons who attend your business events.
Billing document creation takes place in the same way as activity allocation or cost transfer.
Check and repair wrong billing documents

Report RHBELNRFIX checks for wrong billing documents and repairs them. You can do
the following checks.
38.7.2 Integration Switch of Training with Billing
If customers and contact persons attend your business events and you would like to bill
them using Sales and Distribution, you set this switch to 1.
38.7.3 Organizational Elements
In order to bill the customers, you determine their sales area. A sales area is made up of
a sales organization, a distribution channel and a division. The sales area is determined
in the following sequence.
Ø Sales area of the organizational unit organizing the business event.
Ø Sales area of the business event type.
Ø Sales area for Training and Event Management.
Sales area of the organizational unit organizing the business event and the business event
type are maintained in the Billing/Allocation Info infotype. Sales area for Training and
Event Management is specified in the screen above. The logic that the sales area of the
organizational unit organizing the business event should be picked up first is specified
in the evaluation path LSOFLWAY.
You can also specify a one-time customer in switch KUCPD for attendees that are not
assigned to any customer. One-time customers in the SAP System are customers with
whom you only do business one time or not on a regular basis. It is not necessary to
create a customer master record for such customers.
38.7.4 Invoice Creation Settings
These settings are done on the advice of Sales and Distribution consultant. Usually the
default settings are good enough.
38.7.5 Credit Memo Creation Settings
These settings are done on the advice of the Sales and Distribution consultant. Usually
the default settings are good enough.
38.7.6 Prices, Taxes and Account Assignment
These settings are done on the advice of the Sales and Distribution consultant. Account
assignment group for this material is determined in the following sequence.
Ø Account assignment group for this material of the organizational unit organizing the
business event.
Ø Account assignment group for this material of the business event type.
Ø Account assignment group for this material for Training and Event Management.
Account assignment group for this material of the organizational unit organizing the
business event and the business event type are maintained in the Billing/Allocation Info
infotype. Account assignment group for this material for Training and Event Management
is specified in the screen above. The logic that the account assignment group for this
material of the organizational unit organizing the business event should be picked up
first is specified in the evaluation path LSOFLWAY.
Condition type for billing is specified on the advice of the Sales and Distribution consultant.
Attendance fees for business events are transferred to this condition type. For the purpose
of tax determination, you specify a country. You also specify whether you want to use
profit centers for invoice creation.
38.7.7 Wizard
You can also do the above settings using the wizard. Even if you do the customizing
without wizard, it is helpful to run the wizard to ensure completeness. The wizard for
Billing contains a lot of pointers for configuration in Sales and Distribution.
38.7.8 Settings for Payment Cards

If you use payment cards in Sales and Distribution, you do the necessary settings there.
In that case, you can also use payment cards for payment of attendance and cancellation
fees in Training and Event Management.
38.8 MATERIALS MANAGEMENT

A B C C
38.8.1 Materials Procurement

You may need material to conduct business events. SAP lets you order material for a
business event. You first create resource types which are material and specify that a
business event type requires those resource types. You also link materials to business
event types. When you create a business event with resources, you also specify that you
need material resources. Material can be procured only for firmly booked business events.
Once you have assigned the firmly booked status to a business event, you can order
materials for it. When doing so, you can decide whether material requirements are based
on the optimum or the actual number of attendees of the business event. The system
automatically creates a material reservation or purchase requisition depending on the
availability of material. You can use transaction PV1M to display materials from the
material master (resources of the type Material) required by business events.
If you enter one or more business event groups, the system determines all business events
belonging to the specified groups and displays their material requirements. If you enter
one or more business event types, the system determines all business events belonging
to the specified types and displays their material requirements. If you enter one or more
business events, the system displays their material requirements.
To order the above material, click . If the number of attendees are

less than the optimum capacity of the business event, the system asks you whether
you will like to order material for the actual number of attendees, or for the optimum
capacity.
If the material is available, it is reserved and the reservation number is shown. If it is not
available, a purchase requisition is created and the purchase requisition number is shown.
If a business event does not require material, a message to this effect is output.
Compare document
is reflected by the change of icon.
38.8.2 Integration Switch of Training with Materials Management
In order to reserve material or to raise purchase requisition you need to set this switch
to 1.
38.8.3 Number Ranges
You maintain number range for reference documents using IMG node Training and Event
Management âBasic Settings âNumber Range Maintenance â
Define Number Ranges
for External Operations.
38.8.4 Plant and Storage Location
Here you specify a plant and a storage location where reservations and purchase requisitions
for Training and Event Management are processed. When you specify the materials that
are required for a business event type, materials in this plant and storage location are
only available for selection.
38.8.5 Default Value for Controlling Area
Here you specify the default value for controlling area in which material costs are posted.
38.8.6 Cost Center of Business Event Costs
Here you specify the evaluation path used to find the cost center of the cost object of a
business event. Evaluation path LSOCOSTC specifies that business event costs be charged
to the organizational units which organize them.
38.8.7 Document Type and Movement Type
While creating a purchase requisition, you need to specify a document type. Here you
specify the document type which is used for purchase requisitions created from Training
and Event Management. Similarly, while creating material reservation, you need to specify
a movement type. Here you specify the movement type which is used for material
reservations created from Training and Event Management. Both these are standard settings
and should be changed only if recommended by the materials management consultant.
38.8.8 Wizard
You can also do the above configuration using wizard.
38.9 SAP KNOWLEDGE WAREHOUSE

A B C C
If you have installed SAP Knowledge Warehouse, you can link it with Training and
Event Management by means of the Knowledge Link. You can maintain this infotype for
business event types and business events.
The Knowledge Link lets you create links from business events to the information material
(InfoObjects) stored in SAP Knowledge Warehouse, such as training materials or the
complete online documentation in the SAP Library. You can thus access additional relevant
information from business events and business event types without creating or copying
it. You can display this information from Training and Event Management as well as
from Employee Self-Service. When you implement SAP Knowledge Warehouse, you do
the configuration given under ‘SAP Knowledge Provider’. These are not specific settings
required for Training and Event Management.
38.10 SAP APPOINTMENT CALENDAR

A B C C
38.10.1 Appointment Calendar

In SAP Office you can maintain your appointment calendar using transaction SSC1.
Whenever you are booked as an attendee or an instructor for a business event, the system
can automatically create an entry in your appointment calendar.
38.10.2 Appointment Types

Appointments are categorized into appointment types. You create appointment types for
attending business events and teaching at business events in view SCAPPTTYPE.
38.10.3 Specifying Appointment Types

In view T77S0, you specify appointment types for attendees and instructors. When a
person is booked to attend a business event, or to teach at one, these appointment types
are used to create an entry in the appointment calendar by the system automatically.
38.10.4 Activating Integration

You activate integration of appointment calendar with Training and Event Management
by setting 1 in the following entry in table T77S0.
38.10.5 Automatic Entry in Appointment Calendar

When an employee is booked as an attendee for a business event, or reserved as an
instructor, the system automatically generates a calendar entry. The appointment calendar
is for a user. When a personnel number is booked as an attendee, the system needs to
determine his user id. It does so by referring to infotype 0105 subtype 0001 where the
relationship between personnel number and user id is maintained.
38.11 BUDGET MANAGEMENT

A A B B
38.11.1 Budgeting
Purpose
In Training and Event Management you can create budgets for organizational units and
compare the budgets with the actual costs incurred.
Budget structure
Usually you create budget for the entire organizational structure. The budget of a superior
organizational unit includes the budgets of its subordinate organizational units. In this
way managers can control budgets of higher level organizational units even when some
subordinate organizational unit overspends.
While budgeting, SAP provides some flexibility. You can have, for example, a combined
budget for two organizational units. SAP creates a budget structure which is usually a
replica of the organizational structure. Budget units in this case have one-to-one
correspondence with organizational units. However, your budget structure can differ
from your organizational structure and there may be budget units which finance more
than one organizational unit. However, unless you have reason to do so, it is a good
practice that your budget structure mimics your organizational structure.
Generating budget structure from organizational structure

You run transaction PVB0 to generate the budget structure and click to create your
budget structure from the organizational structure. The system gives you the following
screen.
Budget type, organizational unit and budget period

You specify the budget type, the organizational unit and the budget period for which you
want to generate the budget structure. Note that the budget structure can be different for
different budget types and periods.
Organizational structure depth

If you want to generate budget structure only for certain number of levels in your
organizational structure, you specify the organizational structure depth. If you leave this
field blank, budget structure is generated for all the levels of the organizational structure.
Generate financing relationship

A budget unit finances an organizational unit. This is specified by creating a financing
relationship (314) between the two. If you tick this checkbox, the system automatically
generates this relationship.
Use relationship period of organizational units

What happens if your organizational structure is going to change during the budget
period? If you tick this checkbox, the budget structure will also reflect that change.
Generate budget structure

Click to generate the budget structure. The system shows the budget structure generated.
Specify budget amount

You can select a budget unit and click to specify the budget amount and save.
Distributed budget
Distributed budget of a budget unit is the budget it has distributed to its subordinate
budget units. If distributed budget exceeds the total budget, the system highlights it in
red color. You can then change the budgets of the budget units suitably, or you may use
the Revalue budget function.
Revalue budget
If you select a budget unit and click , the system shows the following window in
which you can specify the change in budget either in amount or in percentage.
Releasing budget
The budget structure is created in planned status. You release the budget structure by
choosing Budget structure â Set statusâ Release. Once the budget structure is released,
you can no longer edit it. Only released budgets are used for monitoring and control.
Maintaining budget structure

You can change the budget structure if you want. You can also change the organizational
units they finance.
Carrying forward budgets

You can carry forward the unspent budget amounts. Click and enter
the details in the following screen.
After entering the data, click to carry forward the budget.

38.11.2 Budget Comparison
Purpose
You can run transaction PVBA or S_PH9_46000423 to compare Training and Event
Management budget with the actual cost.
Selection screen
In the selection screen you specify the organizational unit. If you want to include the
subordinate organizational units, you tick that checkbox. Actual costs are taken only up
to the key date. If you want to include the cancellation fees in the actual cost, you tick
that checkbox.
Budget comparison
38.11.3 Budget Currency
Purpose
Here you specify the currency you wish to use in budget management.
IMG node
SM30 â V_T7PM2
Screen
Primary key
Section of Overall Budget + End Date
38.11.4 Budget Types
Purpose
For Training and Event Management you should use the budget type 0001 in budget
group 03. You should specify that it is a monetary budget, i.e. the budget type unit
assigned to the budget is a currency. You should also specify that the budget is allocatable,
meaning that it is allowed for budgeting.
IMG node
SM30 â V_T7PM3_B
Screen
Primary key
Budget Type Group + Budget Type
38.11.5 Budget Period
Purpose
Here you specify the period over which you want to exercise budgetary control. For
example, you may create quarterly budgets and ask your organization to control their
expenditure accordingly. Or, it may be okay to control the Training and Event Management
budget for the financial year. The key date is the date on which the currency conversion
takes place.
IMG node
SM30 â V_T7PM9_B
Screen
Primary key
Budget Type Group + Budget Period
38.12 INTEGRATION WITH WORKFLOW

A C X X
38.12.1 Activating Event Linkage
Set this switch to ‘X’ to activate automatic event linkage for Personnel Planning.
38.12.2 Allowed Business Object Types for HR Objects, Infotypes and Subtypes
Purpose
You need to maintain this table only if you have defined business objects for customer-
specific infotypes, and the operations of a customer-specific infotype are used to trigger
events.
IMG node
SM30 â T777IBO
Screen
Primary key
Object Type + Infotype + Subtype + Object Type
38.12.3 Event Linkage
Purpose
The events that deviate from SAP standard events must be defined for the business
objects concerned. The rules for event creation that deviate from the standard must be
defined in a customer-specific function module.
IMG node
SM30 â T779X
Screen
Primary key
Object Type + Infotype + Subtype + Update Operation + Key: Activity + Sequence Number
for Workflow Events
38.13 EMPLOYEE SELF-SERVICE

A C X X
38.13.1 Set Up External Search Engine
You can set up the connection to an external search engine to be used to facilitate the
search for business events in the Employee Self-Service Training Center using
transaction PVSEARCH_ADM.
38.13.2 Booking Priority for Internet
Here you can set a booking priority for bookings made in the Employee Self-Service
Training Center. If you make no entries, internet bookings are created with the same
priorities as assigned by the system automatically. The priority assigned by the system
depends on the number of bookings received at the time of booking.
38.13.3 Event Generation in Web Transactions
If you set the switch to 0, the user can book, prebook, and cancel directly on the web as
long as he has the appropriate authorization. If you set this switch to 1, general event
creation is activated and all these activities trigger appropriate workflows.
38.13.4 Cancellation Reason for Employee
If you want to use a specific cancellation reason for ESS applications, you specify the ID
of the reason here. The cancellation reason will determine the cancellation fee. If you do
not make an entry, the value stored in the customizing switch SEMIN CCDEL is taken
as the basis for calculating cancellation fees.
38.13.5 Customer-Specific Attendance Cancellation Reason

You can determine a suitable cancellation reason dynamically using the Business
Add-In HRTEM00NET_WEBST, which you then transfer to the ESS application. This
BAdI can be found at Training and Event Management â
Employee Self-Service (ESS) â
Business Add-Ins (BADIs) for ESS âBAdI: Set Up Customer-Specific Attendance
Cancellation Reason.
38.13.6 Customer-Specific Setup of My Bookings

You can use the Business Add-In HRTEM00NET_ACTIVITY to modify the hit list of
event attendance bookings that appears in the Employee Self-Service PV8I My
Bookings. This BAdI can be found at Training and Event Management Employee â
Self-Service (ESS)âBusiness Add-Ins (BADIs) for ESS â
BAdI: Customer-Specific Setup
of ‘My Bookings’.
38.14 TRAINING GENERAL SETTINGS

A C X X
38.14.1 Changes to Historical Attendances
This entry lets you specify the system reaction if a user tries to change (cancel, rebook,
replace) an attendance booking that has a historical record flag. You can give an error,
a warning, information, or no message. It is recommended that you give an error to
prevent a historical record from being modified.
38.14.2 Specifying Data Screen Display
When you display the master data of an object in Training and Event Management, the
system can display all infotypes (value 1 here), or only those infotypes for which data has
been stored (value 0 here).
38.14.3 Customer Enhancement for Master Data
Here you can specify a program that reads customer-specific object types and infotypes
(such as in industry solutions) for master data of Training and Event Management.
38.14.4 Notes for Infotypes

In view T77NT you can make settings for formatting of notes in the editor and in print.
For each combination of object type, infotype, and subtype, you specify one form and one
style for the screen display and one form and one style for the printout.
38.14.5 Procedure for Entering Notes
Notes consist of one or more single entries. When you create a note, you create the first
single entry, and each time you modify a note, you add a new single entry to the existing
ones. When you modify a note, the system displays all previously created single entries
and a new line editor. If this switch is on (value 1), all previously created single entries
are protected. If this switch is off (value 0), previously created single entries are modifiable.
If this switch is changed from 1 to 0, previously created protected entries are still not
modifiable. You can run program RHNOTE00 with transaction SA38 to see and edit all
existing notes.
38.14.6 List Entry for Attendee Activities
In list entry transactions you update several entries at once. If you want a message to be
output for each entry, you set this value to 1. If you set it to 0, no message is output for
each entry. A message is output on completion of the processing loop.
38.14.7 Pushbutton Settings for Batch Input
This switch determines the pushbuttons used for batch input in transactions PA30 and
PP02. It should be ‘X’ if batch input takes place using pushbuttons for Release < 4.5A;
otherwise it should be blank.
38.14.8 Default Organizer Types
Here you can maintain default organizer types.

39 Utilities
39.1 FUNCTIONALITY

A A B B
39.1.1 Users
Logging on
If you are going to work in SAP, your system administrator will create a SAP logon pad
on your desktop/laptop. The logon pad can be accessed either through a shortcut on
your desktop, or through the Windows Start icon. When you open the SAP logon pad,
you will find one or more entries in it.
667
Each entry represents a server. Your system administrator will tell you the purpose for
which each server is to be used. You select the server you want to work on, and click the
‘Log On’ icon. The system gives you the logon screen.
You enter the details given to you by your system administrator. You can change your
password or press Enter to logon. The system gives you the SAP menu.
CHAPTER 39 Utilities 669
You can open the tree-like structure of the SAP menu to reach the transaction you want
to carry out. You can switch to user menu, if one has been set up for you. You can add
transactions to the Favorites folder, which can have sub-folders.
Executing a transaction in the command field

An important part of all SAP screens is the command field, located in the top-left
corner of the screen. Here, you can enter a transaction directly, instead of going through
a menu. If you are already in some transaction which you want to leave, prefix the
transaction with /n, e.g. /nPA30. If you want to run the new transaction in a new
session, prefix the transaction with /o, e.g. /oPA30.
Aborting the current transaction

You can abort the current transaction by entering /n in the command field.
Opening multiple sessions

You can open another session of SAP (same server and client) by clicking icon, or by
entering /o in the command field.
Closing a session
You can close a session by entering /i in the command line or by closing the window.
If the session you are closing is the only session on a client, you are logged off. The
system asks you to confirm that you want to log off.
Logging off
You can log off by entering /nend or /nex in the command line. In the former case, the
system asks you to confirm that you want to log off. All the sessions on the client are
closed.
Displaying transaction codes

You work in SAP either through menu, or through transaction codes. Experienced users
often prefer the latter method. Therefore, they need to know the transaction codes of
various transactions. You can display the transaction codes in the menu by ticking the
checkbox in Extras â
Settings. The menu display changes as
shown below.
Displaying keys in dropdown lists

In many fields, SAP provides a dropdown list from which you can choose a value. These
dropdown lists usually have a key and a description. Users who like to see the key in
addition to description can tick . They can even sort the
dropdown list by the key by ticking . You access these checkboxes by
clicking ÿâ Options â
Expert.
Quick copy and paste

SAP provides a method of quick copy and quick paste. You enable this by ticking
in . After that, if you press the left button of the mouse, move
the mouse on some text, and leave it, the text gets copied to the clipboard. The text is not
selected, as would be the case, if this feature is not enabled. Also, if you press the right
button of the mouse in any field of SAP, the text is pasted from the clipboard. The text
may have been copied on the clipboard from any application, e.g. Microsoft Word.
Business workplace
SAP provides a wide range of office functionality, e.g. mail, workflow, etc. in business
workplace. You can access it using transaction SBWP, or by clicking the icon as shown.
You can create document and send by selecting ‘New message’ from business workplace,
or by running transaction SO00, or through menu (System â
Short Message).
Maintain own data

You can maintain your own data using transaction SU3 (System â User Profile â Own
Data).
Running ABAP programs

You can run ABAP programs using transaction SA38 (System â
Services â
Reporting).
It is recommended to avoid doing this by creating a transaction for every program.
Quick viewer
You can run quick viewer using transaction SQVI (System â Services â QuickViewer).
Output control
You can run transaction SP01 (System âServices â
Output Control) to list the spool
requests and output requests for a user id in a specific period. You can display their
contents, print them and delete them. You can run transaction SP02 (System Own â
Spool Requests) to list your own spool requests.
Batch input
You can run transaction SM35 (System â
Services â
Batch Input â
Sessions) to
monitor, process and analyze the batch input sessions. You can see the logs using
transaction SM35P (System â Services â
Batch Input â
Logs). You can do recording for
batch input using transaction SHDB (System â
Services â
Batch Input â
Recorder).
Computer-aided test tool

You can use transaction SECATT (System â Services â ECATT â Record) to perform
computer-aided testing.
Background jobs
You can use transaction SM36 to define and schedule a background job (System â
Services
â Jobs â Define Job). You can use transaction SM37 (System â
Services âJobs â
Job
Overview) to monitor and manage jobs. You can release a job, stop an active job, delete
a job, display spool list, display job log and display step list. You can also check status,
change status from released to scheduled, copy job, change job, repeat scheduling and
move the job to a different server. You can also run transaction SMX to see your own jobs
(System â Own Jobs).
Queue
You can use transaction SM38 (System â Services â Queue) to display queue.
Reporting authorization problems
You can use transaction SU53 (System âUtilities âDisplay Authorization Check) to see
details of authorization problems and to report to the Basis team for resolution. Immediately
after you encounter the authorization problem, enter /nSU53. The system will show a
comparison between authorization available and authorization required.
Archived documents
You can use transaction OAAD to store and assign a new document in the content server.
The transaction also provides a facility to search the archived documents.
Download file
You can use transaction CG3Y to download a file from the application server to your
desktop.
Upload file
You can use transaction CG3Z to upload a file from your desktop to the application
server.
SAP query
You can start SAP queries using transaction SQ00.
39.1.2 Functional Consultants
Customizing
Transaction SPRO is used for accessing the customizing environment. You can customize
the SAP system using the SAP reference IMG (Implementation Management Guide) or
you can define projects for customization, e.g. adapting the reference IMG to the needs
of your company and/or subdivide the customization task into different subprojects.
View maintenance
Transactions SM30 (System â
Services â
Table Maintenance â
Extended Table
Maintenance) and SM31 are used for maintaining data in one or more tables through a
maintenance view. The transaction also provides a facility to navigate to the underlying
IMG node for a particular maintenance view. Transaction SM34 (System â
Services â
Table Maintenance â
View Cluster Maintenance) is used for maintaining view clusters.
Customizing comparison
You can compare customizing of two systems or two clients in the same system by using
transaction SCMP. You can also create comparison runs involving multiple objects using
transaction SCU0 or OY19.
Transport management
You can use transactions SE09 and SE10 for creating and releasing a customizing or
workbench transport request.
Data migration, computer-aided testing, BDC

You can use transaction LSMW to migrate legacy data to SAP. You can use transaction SCAT
or SECATT for creating a test case by recording a transaction and creating and loading
test data. You can record or modify a BDC and run it using transaction SHDB.
View data in tables

You can view data in a table using transaction SE11, SE16, SE16N or SE17.
Logon to OSS
You can use transaction OSS1 (System â
Services â SAP Service) to logon to OSS. It is
generally used to import and apply SAP notes.
Search SAP notes

You can search SAP notes for keywords at http://service.sap.com/notes. You will need
user code and password which your system administrator will provide to you.
Search string in programs

You can use the program RPR_ABAP_SOURCE_SCAN to search strings in programs.
Search in SAP menu

You can use transaction SEARCH_SAP_MENU to search in SAP menu.
Search in user menu

You can use transaction SEARCH_USER_MENU to search in user menu.
SAP query
You can use transaction SQ01 to maintain SAP queries, transaction SQ02 to maintain
infoset and transaction SQ03 to maintain user groups. You can start SAP queries using
transaction SQ00.
Workflow builder
You can use transaction SWDD for creating and editing workflows.
System status
You can see SAP version, operating system and database by clicking System â Status.
You can also see transaction, program and screen number.
Translation
You can use transaction SE63 to translate texts for various ABAP and non-ABAP objects.
39.1.3 ABAP
ABAP programs
You can create, modify, delete, and display source code of ABAP programs using
transaction SE38. You can also execute ABAP programs using transaction SA38 or SE38.
You can compare ABAP programs using transaction SE39.
Function modules
You can create, modify, delete, display and test function modules using transaction SE37.
You can also maintain a function group.
Dialog modules
You can create, modify, delete, display and test dialog modules using transaction SE35. You
can create menus using transaction SE41. Screens can be painted using transaction SE51
and its underlying flow logic defined.
Classes
You can create, modify, delete, display and test classes using transaction SE24.
Logical databases
You can create, modify, delete, display and test logical databases using transaction SE36.
SAP provides several logical databases for HR, e.g. PAP, PCH, PNP, PNPCE.
Enhancements
You can create enhancements through transaction CMOD. Enhancements are created in
projects, which are logical groups of enhancements. You can test the enhancements using
transaction SMOD.
BAdIs
You can use transaction SE19, to implement a Business Add-In. SAP provides predefined
BAdIs for use by the customers. If you want to define your own BAdI, use transaction SE18.
Area menus
You can create area menus using transaction SE43. Area menus can be used in creating
role menus in transaction PFCG.
Tables and views

You can create, modify, delete and display tables and table fields using transaction SE11.
You can view data in a table using transaction SE11, SE16, SE16N or SE17. You can
display/change technical settings of a table in transaction SE13.
Documentation
You can create documentation using transaction SE61.
SAP scripts
You can create SAP scripts using transaction SE71. Other transactions related to SAP
script are SE72, SE73, SE74, SE75, SE75TTDTGC, SE75TTDTGD, SE76, SE77 and SO10.
Messages
You can maintain messages using transaction SE91. You can then call them in your own
programs. You can also use SAP-defined messages in your own programs.
Transactions
You can maintain transactions using transaction SE93. It is recommended that you have
a transaction for every program so that the users are not required to run programs using
transaction SA38 or SE38. This provides better control on authorizations. It is also
recommended that you keep the transaction code same as the program name.
Repository information
SAP has created a lot of software objects. You can use transaction SE15/ SE85/ SE84 to find
them.
BAPIs
You can see the BAPIs provided by SAP using transaction BAPI.
Object navigator
You use transaction SE80 to organize your programming in an integrated development
environment. Development objects are arranged together in object lists. Each object list
contains all of the objects in a certain category, such as package, program and global
class. From the object list, you can select an object by double-clicking it. When you open
an object, the workbench calls up the development tool with which the object was created.
ABAP dump analysis

You can use transaction ST22 to see details of any runtime error or short dump. This will
help in analyzing the root cause of the dump and finding its solution.
39.1.4 Basis
System administration
You can use transaction S002 to get the menu for system administration.
Users
You can maintain users using transaction SU01. You can get a variety of information
about users, roles and authorizations using transaction SUIM. You can view users’ logon
date and password change using transaction RSUSR200. You can use transaction SM04
to check the status of the users; for example, how many users have logged on and how
many sessions a user is working on.
Roles
You can maintain roles using transaction PFCG. The system automatically inserts
authorization objects based on transactions selected by you (These can be maintained
using transaction SU22 or SU24). You update them with appropriate values. You can see
change documents for roles using transaction RSSCD100_PFCG. The same program is
called by transaction RSSCD100_PFCG_USER. Transaction S_BCE_68001403 gives a list
of critical authorizations.
Maintain the authorization objects

You can run transaction SU21 to maintain the authorization objects.
Transport management
You can manage transports using transactions SE01, SE03, SE09 and SE10.
SAPconnect
You can use transaction SCOT for monitoring the status of the inbound and outbound
traffic through SAPconnect.
ALE
Customizing of ALE can be done using transaction SALE. You can monitor ALE Messages
using transaction BD87.
Display and delete locks

Transaction SM12 is used for checking and releasing lock entries.
Lock/unlock transactions
You can use transaction SM01 to lock/unlock transactions.
39.2 TABLES AND VIEWS

A A B B
39.2.1 Data Dictionary
Domains
View DD01V contains the list of domains. View DD07V contains values for domains.
Data elements
View DD04V contains data elements and their descriptions.
Tables
View DD02V contains the list of tables.
Table fields
Table DD03L contains table fields and DD03T their descriptions. Table DD03M contains
table fields with data elements, texts, and domains. View DDVAL contains fixed values
for table fields.
Foreign key fields

View DD08V contains foreign key relationship definitions.
Pool/Cluster structures
View DD06V contains pool/cluster structures.
Technical settings of tables

Table DD09L contains technical settings of tables.
Matchcode objects
View DD20V contains matchcode objects. Table DD24S contains fields of a matchcode ID.
Views
Table TVDIR contains directory of views. Table DD25T contains views, matchcode objects
and lock objects. Table DD27S contains fields in a view, matchcode object or lock object.
39.2.2 Software Repository
Packages
All objects are developed under Packages (earlier called Development Classes), which are
logical grouping of objects. Table TDEVC contains list of Packages. Packages of SAP HR
can be identified by selecting entries from table TDEVC where software component is
SAP_HR. Some of the important Packages are:
PP00 Organization and planning (application)

PP09 Training and Event Management
PP0C Organization and Planning—Customizing
PP2C HR Development—Customizing
PP9C Training and Event Management—Customizing
PPAP_HR Appraisal Systems HR
PPDP Development Plans
PPEM PE Application Components
PPPE_HR Personnel Development—HR
Repository objects
Table TADIR contains the directory of repository objects, along with their development
class. Tables and structures are identified by object type TABL.
Objects
Objects are stored in OBJ series of tables.
ABAP programs
Table TRDIR contains list of ABAP programs. Table D010TAB contains the tables used by
ABAP programs.
Transaction codes
View TSTCV contains list of transaction codes and programs associated with them.
39.2.3 Users, Roles and Authorization
User data
User data is stored in USR series tables. Table USR01 stores the master list of users.
Table USR04 contains the profiles attached to a user. A user’s parameter IDs and their
values are stored in table USR05.
Role maintenance
You can create, delete, or modify roles using transaction PFCG. Role related data is stored
in tables starting with AGR.
Authorization objects
Authorization objects and their field names are in table TOBJ.
Authorization objects for roles

Table AGR_1250 contains authorization objects for a role which you see in transaction PFCG.
Master list of roles

Table AGR_DEFINE contains master list of roles.
Transaction codes for a role

Table AGR_TCODES contains transaction codes for roles.
Users having a role

Table AGR_USERS contains users for roles. Also see table AGR_USERT.
39.2.4 IMG Menu

Table CUS_IMGACH contains master list of IMG activities including documentation object
and transaction code.
39.2.5 SAP Scripts
SAP scripts
SAP scripts are stored in STX series of tables.
39.2.6 Others
Documentation
Documentation header is stored in table DOKHL and text in table DOKTL.
Reserved names
Reserved Names for Customizing Tables/Objects are stored in table TRESC.
39.2.7 Delivery Class of a Table
SAP stores data in tables. Each table is assigned a delivery class which determines whether
the data in the table is controlled by SAP or by the customer. Delivery class of a table can
be seen in the ‘Delivery and Maintenance’ tab in transaction SE11.
A Application table A Support Pack of SAP is not expected to

(master and transaction data) update these tables in any client.
L Table for storing temporary data, A Support Pack of SAP is not expected to
delivered empty update these tables in any client.
G Customizing table, protected A Support Pack of SAP is not expected to
against SAP Upd., only INS all. update these tables in any client.
C Customizing table, maintenance A Support Pack of SAP updates these tables
only by cust., not SAP import in client 000 only. In other clients, these tables
have to be adjusted from 000 to get these
entries.
E Control table, SAP and customer A Support Pack of SAP updates these tables
have separate key areas in all clients.
S System table, maint. only by SAP, A Support Pack of SAP updates these tables
change = modification in all clients.
W System table, contents transportable A Support Pack of SAP updates these tables
via separate TR objects in all clients.
39.2.8 Search Help

When SAP designs tables, for each column it tries to provide search help. If search
help is provided, you can choose a value from it. By assigning search help to table
columns, the help becomes standardized. There are different types of search help. In
transaction SE11, if you go to tab ‘Entry help/check’, you can see which columns have
got entry help and of which type in the column ‘Origin of the Input Help’. Different types
of search help are listed below.
T Input help based on data type For example, Date (Calendar), Time.
D Explicit search help attachment Attachment of a search help to the data
to data element element assigned to the field.
X Explicit search help attachment Data integrity is checked against search help.
to field There is no check table.
P Input help implemented with Data integrity is checked using a check table.
check table
F Input help with fixed values The field can take values only from a fixed
list, which is defined in the Domain.
Blank No input help There is no input help.
39.3 IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE

A B B B
When a consultant implements SAP HR Organizational Management, Personnel

Development or Training and Event Management for a client, how does the consultant
determine the client requirement and do configuration, and how does the client know
that the right configuration is done for him? The answers to these twin questions lie in
the methodology you follow.
The consultant can use the structure of this book to guide the implementation. He can ask
specific questions to the users, record their answers and use the answers to do the
configuration. Having done the configuration, he can explain it to the users and get it
approved. If the users do not have enough SAP knowledge to confirm the configuration,
the consultant should record the user input and get it signed off. An auditor should then
confirm that the configuration reflects the user input. The source of all configuration
should be user input.
Whereas many factual inputs can come from a knowledgeable power user, policy inputs
should come from senior management. In large companies, senior management is often
surprised at the diversity of practices followed in different parts of the company.
Implementation of SAP provides an opportunity to senior management to either commonize
the practice, or approve diversity. Even when there is no diversity, decisions on policy
should be approved by management.
Both user inputs and the corresponding configuration should be recorded in a configuration
manual. The configuration manual should explain what has been configured and, if
necessary, why. If you use the following table as the Table of Content of your configuration
manual, your configuration manual will be easy to understand. Apart from what you
configure, you should also indicate what is not implemented (NR) and what is SAP
standard (SS). You should also add all Z developments done by you in respective chapters.
Feel free to add chapters in the table of contents, but don’t delete any line which has
configuration in it. The support team needs to know if something is not implemented. If
some configuration is not implemented, you can keep the chapter number blank, instead
of creating empty chapters in the configuration manual. The Reference column contains
the chapter number in the book.
In the ‘Approved by’ column, you should record the name of the person who has approved
that particular configuration. The entries in the table below show the suggested approving
level: SM – Senior Management/Steering Committee, PO – Business Process Owner,
US – Power User, FC – Functional Consultant. If users are not knowledgeable enough to
sign off the configuration, the users should sign off their input, and the auditor should
sign off the configuration.
Chapter Description Configuration NR/SS/ Reference Approved

Done by
1 Actions
1.1 Maintain Personnel Transaction 2.6.2– US
Actions OOMT 2.6.3
1.2 Transactions for Actions Transaction 2.6.4 FC
OOMT
2 Number Ranges
2.1 Number Ranges Transaction 10.2.4, US
OONR 10.2.5
2.2 Customer Logic for Number Transaction 10.2.6 SM
Assignment CMOD
3 Structures
3.1 Structures Required SM
3.2 Evaluation Path Transaction 12.2 FC
OOAW
3.3 Using Evaluation Paths in V_T77S0AW 12.3 FC
SAP Programs
3.4 Matrix Structure Definition T779M 12.6.2 FC
4 Infotypes 14
4.1 Description 14.1 US
4.1.1 Types of Description V_778U 14.1.2 US
4.1.2 Formatting of Description T772S 14.1.3 US

Done by
4.2 Department/Staff 14.2 PO

4.2.1 Department Switch V_T77S0SC 14.2.2 PO
4.3 Character 14.3 US
4.4 Planned Compensation 14.4 PO
4.5 Restrictions 14.5 PO
4.5.1 Types of Restrictions T778C 14.5.3 US
4.5.2 Reasons for Restrictions T778X 14.5.4 US
4.6 Vacancy 14.6 PO
4.6.1 Activation of Vacancy Infotype V_T77S0SC 14.6.5 PO
4.7 Account Assignment 14.7 PO
4.7.1 Enterprise Organization V_TKA06_CC 14.7.1 SM
Activation
4.7.2 Enterprise Organization Transaction 14.7.1 SM
Creation KEO1
4.7.3 Inheritance of Account V_T77S0SC 14.7.2 PO
Assignment by Positions
4.7.4 Default Value for Controlling V_T77S0SC 14.7.3 PO
Area
4.8 Health Examinations 14.8 PO
4.8.1 Health Examinations Type T778G 14.8.3 PO
4.9 Authorities/Resources 14.9 PO
4.9.1 Authorities/Resources Type T778W 14.9.3 PO
4.10 Work Schedule 14.10 PO
4.10.1 Work Schedule Groups T77WT 14.10.2 PO
4.10.2 Work Schedule Rule Values V_T77S0SC 14.10.3 PO
4.11 Employee Group/Subgroup 14.11 PO
4.12 Obsolete 14.12 PO
4.13 Cost Distribution 14.13.1 PO
4.13.1 Cost Distribution Integration V_T77S0SC 14.13.2 PO
4.14 Quota Planning 14.14 PO
4.14.1 Quota Planning Type V_778U 14.14.3 PO
4.14.2 Planning Type and Periods T77POSBUD 14.14.4 PO
4.14.3 Calculation in Full-Time V_T77S0SC 14.14.5 PO
Equivalents (FTE)
4.15 Address 14.15 PO
4.15.1 Buildings T777A 14.15.2 US
4.16 Mail Address 14.16 PO

Done by
5 Plan Version 15
5.1 Maintaining Plan Version T778P 15.2 US
5.2 Active Plan Version V_T77S0SC 15.4 US
5.3 Number Assignment for V_T77S0SC 15.5 PO
All Plan Versions
6 Authorizations 17
6.1 Roles and Profiles Transaction 17.1.4 PO
PFCG
6.2 Authorization for User Transaction 17.1.5 PO
SU01
6.3 Change Log T77CDOC_CUST 17.1.7 PO
6.4 Replace standard SAP BAdI 17.1.8 FC
authorization checks HRPAD00AUTH_
CHECK
6.5 Replace structural BAdI HRBAS00_ 17.1.8 FC
authorization checks STRUAUTH
6.6 No maintenance of BAdI HRBAS00_ 17.1.8 FC
structural profiles GET_PROFL
6.7 Authorization Main Switches V_T77S0SC 17.2 US
6.8 Authorization Objects for Transaction 17.3 FC
Transactions SU24
6.9 Authorization Profiles T77PQ 17.4 PO
6.10 Authorization Profile Definition T77PR 17.5 PO
6.11 Authorization Profiles to User T77UA 17.6 PO
Assignment
6.12 Prefix for Batch Input Sessions Feature BIMAP 17.7 PO
6.13 User Data in SAP Memory T77UU 17.8 PO
7 Organizational Management 18
Integration
7.1 Integration with Personnel 18.1
Administration
7.1.1 Transfer Organizational Transaction 18.1.1 US
Assignment from PA to PD OOPH
(Report RHINTE00)
7.1.2 Transfer Objects from PD to Transaction 18.1.1 US
PA (Report RHINTE10) OOHP
7.1.3 Create Missing Objects in OM Transaction 18.1.1 US
or PA (Report RHINTE20) OOPP

Done by
7.1.4 Transfer Organizational Assign- Transaction 18.1.1 US
ment in Batch Input Folder for OOHQ
Infotype 0001 (Report RHINTE30)
7.1.5 Consistency Check Program 18.1.1 US
RHINTECHECK
7.1.6 OM PA Integration Switches V_T77S0SC 18.1.2 US
7.1.7 Cost Distribution Integration V_T77S0SC 18.1.2 US
Switches
7.1.8 Department Switch V_T77S0SC 18.1.2 US
7.1.9 Default Personnel Area, Subarea V_T77S0SC 18.1.2 US
and Cost Center
7.1.10 Enhanced Integration V_T77S0SC 18.1.2 US
7.1.11 Extent of OM–PA Integration Feature PLOGI 18.1.3 US
7.1.12 Validity Period of Persons to BAdI 18.1.5 FC
Organizational Management HREIC_RETIREES
7.2 Integration with Workflow
7.2.1 Workflow for Organizational Transaction 18.3 FC
Change EXEORGCHEARM
7.2.2 Workflow Message about Transaction 18.3 FC
New Employees WF_NEW_MAN
7.3 Integration with SAP Business 18.4
Partners
7.3.1 Business Partner Integration
7.3.1.1 Business Partner HR Integration V_T77S0SC 18.4.2 US
7.3.2 Business Partners in Employee
Role
7.3.2.1 Creating Business Partners V_T77S0SC 18.4.3 US
Automatically
7.3.2.2 Replication of Time Recording V_T77S0SC 18.4.3 US
(CATS) in the Business Partner
7.3.2.3 ALE Distribution of Inactive V_T77S0SC 18.4.3 US
Employees
7.3.2.4 Import Qualifications V_T77S0SC 18.4.3 US
7.3.2.5 Number Assignment of V_T77S0SC 18.4.3 US
Business Partner
7.3.2.6 Subgroup of the Number V_T77S0SC 18.4.3 US
Range Interval
7.3.3 Business Partners in Organiza-
tional Unit Role

Done by
7.3.3.1 Creating Business Partners V_T77S0SC 18.4.4 US

Automatically
7.3.3.2 Address Necessary for Business V_T77S0SC 18.4.4 US
Partner?
7.3.3.3 Standard Address of Business V_T77S0SC 18.4.4 US
Partners
7.3.3.4 Business Partner Warnings V_T77S0SC 18.4.4 US
7.3.3.5 Number Assignment of Business V_T77S0SC 18.4.4 US
Partner
7.3.3.6 Subgroup of the Number Range V_T77S0SC 18.4.4 US
Interval
7.3.4 Data Synchronization
7.3.4.1 Synchronizing HR and Business Report 18.4.5 US
Partners Data HRALXSYNC
7.3.4.2 Integration Error in IDOC V_T77S0SC 18.4.5 US
7.3.4.3 Recipient of Error Message V_T77S0SC 18.4.5 US
7.3.5 Business Partner Integration 18.4.6 FC
in Separate Logical Systems
7.3.6 Mapping of Marital Status Keys V_TB027HR_NEW 18.4.7 US
7.3.7 Mapping of Form of Address V_TSAD3HR_NEW 18.4.8 US
Keys
8 Database Utilities and Dialog 19
Control
8.1 Checking Consistency Transaction 19.1.6 US
RE_RHCHECK1
8.2 Checking Relationships Transaction 19.1.7 US
RE_RHCHECKV
8.3 Installation Consistency Check Transaction 19.1.11 US
OOCH
8.4 Sequence of Languages Available T778L 19.2 US
8.5 Search Function Settings V_T77S0SC 19.3 FC
8.6 Parameters for Staffing Schedule V_T77S0SC 19.4 FC
8.7 Customer Enhancements Transaction 19.5 FC
(User Exits) CMOD
8.7.1 Additional Info On/Off SAPLRHGB+CUS 19.5 FC
8.7.2 Additional Info On/Off SAPLRHGC+CUS 19.5 FC
8.7.3 Further Info On/Off EXIT_SAPLRHG 19.5 FC
B_001

Done by
8.7.4 Fill Text for Customer-Specific EXIT_SAPLRHG 19.5 FC
Field B_002
8.7.5 Additional Info On/Off SAPLRHGP+CUS 19.5 FC
8.7.6 Further Info On/Off EXIT_SAPLRHG 19.5 FC
P_001
8.7.7 Fill Text for Customer-Specific EXIT_SAPLRHG 19.5 FC
Field P_002
8.7.8 Fill Header for Customer-Specific EXIT_SAPLRHG 19.5 FC
Field P_003
8.7.9 Additional Info On/Off SAPLRHSI+CUS 19.5 FC
8.7.10 Additional Info On/Off SAPLRHSI+CUS 19.5 FC
8.8 Settings for Simple Maintenance V_T77S0SC 19.6 FC
9 Data Transfer 20
9.1 Transport Connection V_T77S0SC 20.1 US
9.2 Locking Infotypes for Import T77TR 20.2 US
9.3 Manual Transport Transaction 20.3 US
RE_RHMOVE30
9.4 Data Transfer through Transaction 20.4 US
Sequential Files SXDA
9.5 Data Distribution using ALE Transaction 20.5 FC
SALE
9.6 Data Extraction
9.6.1 Scenarios T77SCEN_AW 20.6.1 FC
9.6.2 Assignment of Queries to T77SCENQY 20.6.2 FC
Scenarios
10 Organization and Staffing 21
Interface Customizing
10.1 Tab Pages 21.1
10.1.1 Tab Pages (Cross-Client) T77OMTABS SS 21.1.3 FC
10.1.2 Tab Page Texts (Client-Specific) T77OCTABST SS 21.1.3 FC
10.1.3 Scenario Definition (Cross-Client) T77OMFRAS SS 21.1.4 FC
10.1.4 Scenario Attributes (Cross-Client) T77OMFRAM SS 21.1.4 FC
10.1.5 Scenario Groups (Cross-Client) T77OMSCENF SS 21.1.4 FC
10.1.6 Scenario Icons (Cross-Client) T77OMICON SS 21.1.4 FC
10.1.7 Tab Pages for Each Object Type T77OMTABUS SS 21.1.5 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.1.8 Tab Pages for Each Object Type T77OCTABUS SS 21.1.5 FC
(Client-Specific)

Done by
10.1.9 Services (Cross-Client) T77OBJSER SS 21.1.6 FC
10.1.10 Attributes of Services T77OMATGT SS 21.1.6 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.1.11 Requests (Cross-Client) T77OMREGIS SS 21.1.7 FC
10.1.12 Requests for Object Types T77OMIA SS 21.1.7 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.1.13 Requests for Object Types T77OMIA_C SS 21.1.7 FC
(Client-Specific)
10.2 Columns 21.2
10.2.1 Columns (Cross-Client) T77COL SS 21.2.3 FC
10.2.2 Column groups (Cross-Client) T77ARRAYTP SS 21.2.4 FC
10.2.3 Columns in Column Group T77ACOL SS 21.2.4 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.2.4 Visibility of a Column T77ACOLINI SS 21.2.4 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.2.5 Columns in Column Group T77ACOLC SS 21.2.4 FC
and Visibility of a Column
(Client-Specific)
10.2.6 Column/Object Type T77COLOTYP SS 21.2.5 FC
Assignment (Cross-Client)
10.2.7 Hierarchical Column Groups T77HIERATP SS 21.2.6 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.2.8 Hierarchical Column Groups T77HIERATC SS 21.2.6 FC
(Client-Specific)
10.2.9 Column Header Types T77COLHTYP SS 21.2.7 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.2.10 Column Headers (Cross-Client) T77COLHEAD SS 21.2.7 FC
10.2.11 Column Headers (Client-Specific) T77COLH_C SS 21.2.7 FC
10.3 Search Nodes 21.3
10.3.1 Search Nodes (Cross-Client) T77FSEAN SS 21.3.3 FC
10.3.2 Search Tools (Cross-Client) T77FSEAS SS 21.3.4 FC
10.3.3 Coherence Relationships T77FRIEND SS 21.3.5 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.3.4 Object Manager Scenarios T77FOBJMAN SS 21.3.6 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.3.5 Search Nodes in a Scenario T77FNODORD SS 21.3.6 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.3.6 Search Nodes in a Scenario T77CNODORD SS 21.3.6 FC
(Client-Specific)

Done by
10.3.7 Excluding Nodes from Search T77CNOD_EX SS 21.3.6 FC
Range (Client-Specific)
10.3.8 Search Tools in a Scenario T77FSEAT SS 21.3.6 FC
(Cross-Client)
10.3.9 Column Group for a Search T77FSEATGB SS 21.3.6 FC
Tool (Cross-Client)
10.3.10 Column Group for a Search Tool V77CSEAT SS 21.3.6 FC
in a Scenario (Client-Specific)
10.3.11 Exclude Search Tools from T77CSEAT_E SS 21.3.6 FC
Search Range (Client-Specific)
10.4 Excluding Infotypes when T77ITEX_C 21.4 US
Copying Internal Objects
10.5 Backup Prompt T77OMFRAMC 21.5 US
10.6 Assignment of InfoSets to T77OMAHQ_FU SS 21.6 FC
Object Types NCARS
10.7 Assignment of InfoSets to T77OMAHQ_FU 21.6 FC
Object Types NCAR
11 Data Model 22
11.1 Object Types T778O SS 22.1 FC
11.2 Essential Relationships T77SO SS 22.2 FC
11.3 External Object Types T77EO SS 22.3 FC
11.4 Structure Search T77OS SS 22.4 FC
11.5 Object Type Key V_T77S0OT SS 22.5 FC
11.6 Transactions for Main- V_T77S0OT SS 22.6 FC
taining Object Types
11.7 Infotypes Master List T778T SS 22.7 FC
11.8 Infotype Time Constraints T777Z SS 22.8 FC
11.9 Object Types Allowed for T777I SS 22.9 FC
an Infotype
11.10 Subtypes of an Infotype V_778U SS 22.10 FC
11.11 Customer-Specific Settings T77CD SS 22.11 FC
for Infotypes
11.12 Country-Specific Infotypes T77NI SS 22.12 FC
11.13 Relationships T778V SS 22.13 FC
11.14 Relationship Characteristics T77VA SS 22.14 FC
11.15 Additional Data on Relationships T77AR SS 22.15 FC
11.16 Allowed Relationships T777E SS 22.16 FC
11.17 External Relationships T77EV SS 22.17 FC

Done by
11.18 Relationship Time Constraints V_T777ZVK SS 22.18 FC
11.19 Relationship Abbreviation V_T77S0VK SS 22.19 FC
11.20 Relationships Time Constraint T77ZR SS 22.20 FC
Depending on Target Object Type
11.21 Relationships Until Birthday T777BIRTH SS 22.21 FC
12 Qualifications Catalog 23
12.1 Qualifications Catalog Transaction 23.2 US
OOQA
12.2 BAdI: Selection Options for BAdI 23.4.1 FC
“Find Objects for Qualifications” HRPDV00QSEA
Search RCH0001
12.3 Scales VC_T77SK 23.6 US
12.4 Qualification Control Parameters V_T77S0SC 23.7 US
13 Profiles 24
13.1 Creating Qualifications Sub- Transaction 24.2.1 FC
Profile of Several Objects OOQM
13.2 Copying Requirements Profiles Transaction 24.2.5 PO
to Position Holders OOQ5
13.3 Subprofiles for each Object Type 24.3 SM
13.4 Personnel Development View T77PP_VIEW SS 24.6 FC
13.5 Headers T77PP_HEAD SS 24.7 FC
13.6 Headers for PD View V_T77PR_V_H SS 24.8 FC
13.7 Subprofiles Master T77PP_PART SS 24.9 FC
13.8 Subprofile for an Object Type V_T77PR_V_H_P SS 24.10 FC
13.9 Authorization Check for BAdI 24.11 FC
Accessing Subprofiles HRPDV00
PROFILE0001
14 Career Planning
14.1 Careers Transaction 25.2 PO
OOQ4
14.2 Suitability in Case of Over- V_T77S0SC 25.3 PO
Qualification
14.3 Suitability Range T77CS 25.3 PO
14.4 Policy on User-Specific Settings 25.4.5 PO
15 Development Plan 26
15.1 Development Plan Catalog Transaction 26.3 PO
OOEC
15.2 Development Plan States T77BZ 26.4 PO
15.3 Permissible Further Processing T77FUNC 26.5 PO

Done by
15.4 Further Processing of Develop- T77BX 26.6 PO

ment Plan Items
15.5 Confirmation of Further V_T77S0SC 26.6.5 PO
Processing Step
15.6 Automatic State Management T77BW 26.7 PO
15.7 Display of Business Events in V_T77S0SC 26.8 PO
Individual Development Plans
16 Appraisals 27
16.1 Replace Old Appraisal System V_T77S0SC 27.1 FC
with New
16.2 Appraisal Catalog Transaction 27.2 PO
OOAM
16.3 Activate Extended Authorization V_T77S0 27.2 PO
Check
16.4 Appraisal Category Group Transaction 27.3 PO
OOAM
16.5 Appraisal Category Transaction 27.4 PO
OOAM
16.6 Appraisal Template Transaction 27.5 PO
OOAM
16.7 Appraisal Criteria Group Transaction 27.6 PO
OOAM
16.8 Appraisal Criteria Transaction 27.7 PO
OOAM
17 Personnel Development Integration 28
17.1 Integration with Personnel 28.2
Administration
17.1.1 Integration of Qualification V_T77S0SC 28.2.1 PO
17.1.2 Transfer of Qualification Data Transaction 28.2.2 FC
from PA to PD OOQI
17.1.3 Integration of Appraisal V_T77S0SC 28.2.3 PO
17.1.4 Transfer of Appraisal Data Transaction 28.2.4 FC
from PA to PD OOAI
17.2 Integration with Recruitment 28.3
17.2.1 Integration of Qualification V_T77S0SC 28.2.1 PO
17.2.2 Transfer of Qualification Data Transaction 28.3.2 FC
from Recruitment to PD OOQB
17.3 Integration with Strategic PO
Enterprise Management
17.3.1 RFC Destination in SEM System V_T77S0SC 28.6.1 PO

Done by
18 Business Event Catalog 29
18.1 Business Event Catalog Transaction 29.2 PO
OOC3
18.2 Business Event Group Transaction 30 PO
OOEG
18.3 Business Event Type Transaction 31 PO
OOET
18.4 Day Segment Transaction 31.5.4 PO
OOTM
18.5 Time Schedule Transaction 31.5.5 PO
OOTM
18.6 Standard Capacity V_T77S0SC 31.6 PO
18.7 Maximum Waiting List Capacity V_T77S0SC 31.6 PO
18.8 Message Type when Waiting List V_T77S0SC 31.6 PO
Capacity Exceeded
18.9 Cost Items Transaction 31.14.1 PO
OOKB
19 Dynamic Menus 32
19.1 Planning Period V_T77S0SC 32.1.5 PO
19.2 Virtual Business Event Group V_T77S0SC 32.1.6 FC
19.3 Additional Line in Dynamic V_T77S0SC 32.1.7 PO
Menus
19.4 Integration of Customer-Specific Transaction 32.2.8 PO
Reports PVDM
20 Resources 33
20.1 Resource Type Transaction 33.1 PO
OORT
20.2 Room Transaction 33.2 PO
OORA
20.3 Other Resource Transaction 33.3 PO
OORE
20.4 Defining Service to Lock Transaction 33.4.1 FC
Resources PVV0
20.5 Assigning Service to Lock V_T77S0SC 33.4.2 FC
Resources
20.6 Resource Reservation V_T77S0SC 33.5 FC
20.7 Location Transaction 33.8 PO
OOLC

Done by
20.8 Switch for Business Event V_T77S0SC 33.8.1 PO
Locations
20.9 Default Factory Calendar V_T77S0SC 33.8.5 PO
20.10 Factory Calendar Transaction 33.8.5 PO
OY05
21 Business Events 34
21.1 Conversion of Unplaced V_T77S0SC 34.9.6 PO
Candidates to Prebookings
21.2 Cancellation Reasons T77CR 34.9.8 US
21.3 Appraising Business Event Appraisal template 34.12.1 PO
21.4 Global Follow-up Actions V_T77KV_2 34.13.6 PO
22 Attendee 35
22.1 External Person/External Transaction 35.5 US
Instructor OOER
22.2 Company Transaction 35.6 US
PVU0
22.3 Attendee Type Control Options V_T77R3_1 35.11 PO
23 Attendance 36
23.1 Booking Priority V_T77S0SC 36.1 PO
23.2 Attendance/Attendance Conflict V_T77S0SC 36.2.3 PO
23.3 Attendance/Instructor Conflict V_T77S0SC 36.2.4 PO
23.4 Attendee Checks V_T77KV_1 36.2.5 PO
23.5 Incompatible Attendance and T77KA 36.2.6 PO
Absence Types
23.6 Additional Checks BAdI RHPV0001 36.2.7 PO
23.7 Checking Business Events V_T77S0SC 36.4.2 PO
when Prebooking
23.8 Business Event Preview Period V_T77S0SC 36.7.2 PO
23.9 Charging Fee by Default V_T77S0SC 36.7.4 PO
23.10 Cost Maintenance V_T77S0SC 36.7.4 FC
23.11 Reasons for Attendance T77CAR 36.12.6 US
Cancellation
23.12 Default Value for Cancellation V_T77S0SC 36.12.6 PO
Fees
23.13 Moving-up on Cancellation V_T77S0SC 36.12.7 PO
23.14 Attendee Appraisals Appraisal template 36.13.1 PO

Done by
24 Correspondence 37
24.1 Correspondence Requirements PO
24.2 Activities T77VI SS 37.4 FC
24.3 Recipients of Notification T77VE SS 37.5 FC
24.4 Recipient Groups T77VG SS 37.6 FC
24.5 Form for a Notification T77VD 37.7 FC
24.6 Assignment of Users to T77KU 37.8 PO
User Groups
24.7 Default Output Medium V_T77KV_3 37.9 PO
24.8 Default Language V_T77S0SC 37.10 PO
24.9 Priority for Workflow V_T77S0SC 37.11 PO
Correspondence
24.10 Forms 37.12
24.10.1 Forms Transaction 37.12.1– FC
OOFO 37.12.4
24.10.2 Sequence of Text Elements T77VB 37.12.5 FC
24.10.3 Text Variables T77VC 37.12.6 FC
24.10.4 Name Format for Recipients T777N 37.12.7 FC
24.11 Mail Connection 37.14
24.11.1 RFC Destination Transaction 37.14.1 FC
SM59
24.11.2 RFC Destination for Connection V_T77S0SC 37.14.2 FC
to Mail System
24.11.3 Subtype for Mail Connection V_T77S0SC 37.14.3 FC
25 Training Integration 38
25.1 Time Management 38.3
25.1.1 Integration Switch of Training V_T77S0SC 38.3.1 PO
with Time Management
25.1.2 Attendance Type for Attendee V_T77S0SC 38.3.2 PO
25.1.3 Attendance Type for Instructor V_T77S0SC 38.3.3 PO
25.1.4 Minimum Attendance Percentage V_T77S0SC 38.3.4 PO
25.2 Activity Allocation 38.5
25.2.1 Activity Allocation Switch V_T77S0SC 38.5.3 PO
25.2.2 Number Range Transaction 38.5.4 PO
OORB
25.2.3 Controlling Area Selection V_T77S0SC 38.5.5 PO
25.2.4 Cost Center of Business Event V_T77S0SC 38.5.6 PO
Cost Object

Done by
25.2.5 Sender Cost Center for Internal V_T77S0SC 38.5.6 PO
Activity Allocation
25.2.6 Cost Element V_T77S0SC 38.5.7 PO
25.2.7 Activity Type Determination V_T77S0SC 38.5.8 PO
25.2.8 Number Ranges for Controlling Transaction 38.5.10 PO
Documents KANK
25.2.9 Activity Type Transaction 38.5.11 PO
KL01
25.2.10 Activity Price Transaction 38.5.12 PO
KP26
25.3 Cost Transfer Posting 38.6
25.3.1 Cost Transfer Switch V_T77S0SC 38.6.3 PO
25.3.2 Number Range Transaction 38.6.4 PO
OORB
25.3.3 Controlling Area Selection V_T77S0SC 38.6.5 PO
Cost Object
25.3.5 Sender Cost Center for Internal V_T77S0SC 38.6.6 PO
Activity Allocation
25.3.6 Cost Items T77KB 38.6.7 PO
25.3.7 Number Ranges for Controlling Transaction 38.6.9 PO
Documents KANK
25.4 Billing 38.7
with Billing
25.4.2 Organizational Elements V_T77S0SC 38.7.3 PO
25.4.3 Invoice Creation Settings V_T77S0SC 38.7.4 FC
25.4.4 Credit Memo Creation Settings V_T77S0SC 38.7.5 FC
25.4.5 Prices, Taxes and Account V_T77S0SC 38.7.6 FC
Assignment
25.5 Materials Management 38.8
with Materials Management
25.5.2 Number Ranges Transaction 38.8.3 PO
OORB
25.5.3 Plant and Storage Location V_T77S0SC 38.8.4 PO
25.5.4 Default Value for Controlling Area V_T77S0SC 38.8.5 PO
Cost Object

Done by
25.5.6 Document Type and Movement V_T77S0SC 38.8.7 FC
Type
25.6 SAP Appointment Calendar 38.10
25.6.1 Appointment Types SCAPPTTYPE 38.10.2 PO
25.6.2 Specifying Appointment Types V_T77S0SC 38.10.3 PO
25.6.3 Activating Integration V_T77S0SC 38.10.4 PO
25.7 Budget Management 38.11
25.7.1 Generating Budget Structure Transaction 38.11.1 PO
from Organizational Structure PVB0
25.7.2 Budget Currency V_T7PM2 38.11.3 PO
25.7.3 Budget Types V_T7PM3_B 38.11.4 PO
25.7.4 Budget Period V_T7PM9_B 38.11.5 PO
25.8 Integration with Workflow 38.12
25.8.1 Activating Event Linkage V_T77S0SC 38.12.1 FC
25.8.2 Allowed Business Object Types T777IBO 38.12.2 FC
for HR Objects, Infotypes and
Subtypes
25.8.3 Event Linkage T779X 38.12.3 FC
25.9 Employee Self-Service 38.13
25.9.1 Set up External Search Transaction 38.13.1 PO
Engine PVSEARCH_ADM
25.9.2 Booking Priority for Internet V_T77S0SC 38.13.2 PO
25.9.3 Event Generation in V_T77S0SC 38.13.3 PO
Web Transactions
25.9.4 Cancellation Reason for Employee V_T77S0SC 38.13.4 PO
25.9.5 Customer-Specific Attendance BAdI 38.13.5 FC
Cancellation Reason HRTEM00NET_
WEBST
25.9.6 Customer-Specific Setup of BAdI 38.13.6 FC
‘My Bookings’ HRTEM00NET_
ACTIVITY
25.10 Training General Settings 38.14
25.10.1 Changes to Historical V_T77S0SC 38.14.1 PO
Attendances
25.10.2 Specifying Data Screen Display V_T77S0SC 38.14.2 PO
25.10.3 Customer Enhancement for V_T77S0SC 38.14.3 FC
Master Data
25.10.4 Notes for Infotypes T77NT 38.14.4 FC
25.10.5 Procedure for Entering Notes V_T77S0SC 38.14.5 PO

Done by
25.10.6 List Entry for Attendee V_T77S0SC 38.14.6 PO
Activities
25.10.7 Pushbutton Settings for V_T77S0SC 38.14.7 FC
Batch Input
26 Transactions
26.1 Organizational Management 39.4.1 PO
26.2 Personnel Development 39.4.2 PO
26.3 Training and Event Management 39.4.3 PO
26.4 Utility 39.4.4 PO
39.4 TRANSACTIONS

A X X X
Transactions given in this chapter can be used for authorization design.
39.4.1 Organizational Management
Category Transaction Description

User OODT Legacy Data Transfer
Customizing OOHP Set Up PD – PA Integration
Both OOHQ Batch Input Sessions
Customizing OOMT Actions
User OOMV Create Sequential File for PD
Customizing OONR Number Ranges
Customizing OOPH Set Up PA – PD Integration
Customizing OOPP Consistency Check for Integration
User PFAL ALE Distribution of HR Master Data
User PFCT Task Catalog
User PO01 Maintain Work Center
User PO03 Maintain Job
User PO10 Maintain Organizational Unit
User PO13 Maintain Position
Category Transaction code Description
User PP01 Maintain Plan Data

User PP03 Actions
User PPME Change Matrix Organization
User PPMS Display Matrix Organization
User PPOC_OLD Create Organizational Plan
User PPOCE Create Organization and Staffing
User PPOM_MODE Set Maintenance Interface
Both PPOM_OLD, OOOE Maintain Organizational Plan
User PPOME Change Organization and Staffing
User PPOS_OLD Display Organizational Plan
User PPOSE Display Organization and Staffing
User PPSC Create Structure
User PPSM Change Structure
User PPSS Display Structure
User PSO0 Set Plan Version
User PSO3 Object Description
User PSO4 Individual Infotype Maintenance
User RE_RHAKTI00 Change Object Status
User RE_RHALECPS Display ALE Change Pointers
User RE_RHALESMD Evaluate ALE Change Pointers
User RE_RHAUTH00 Authorized Objects
User RE_RHBEGDA0 Change Start Date
User RE_RHCHECK1 Check Database Consistency
User RE_RHCHECKV Check Relationships
User RE_RHCOPL00 Copy Plan Version w/o Comparison
User RE_RHCOPLPT Reconcile Plan Versions (Partly)
User RE_RHCOPY00 Copy Object
User RE_RHCOPY10 Copy Objects Using Selection List
User RE_RHCOPYSTRUCT Copy Structures
User RE_RHDBST00 PD Database Statistics
User RE_RHDESC10 Display Infotypes
User RE_RHGRENZ4 Set New End Date for Infotypes
Both RE_RHMOVE30 Manual Transport Link
User RE_RHREPL20 Replace User with Person
User RE_RHRHAZ00 Display PD Database Records
User RE_RHRHDC00 Delete HR Database Records via List
User RE_RHRHDL00 Delete PD Database Records
User RE_RHTRANS0 Translate Language-Dependent Records
User S_AHR_61003129 Check Integration Consistency

User S_AHR_61003170 Create Justifications
User S_AHR_61003172 Create Building Addresses
User S_AHR_61003187 Create Working Time Groups
User S_AHR_61003603 Create Health Promotion Measures
User S_AHR_61007150 Create Authorities/Resources
User S_AHR_61007156 Create Restrictions
User S_AHR_61016491 Existing Organizational Units
User S_AHR_61016492 Staff Functions for Organizational Units
User S_AHR_61016493 Organizational Structure
User S_AHR_61016494 Organizational Structure with Positions
User S_AHR_61016495 Organizational Structure with Persons
User S_AHR_61016496 Organizational Structure with Work Centers
User S_AHR_61016497 Existing Jobs
User S_AHR_61016498 Job Index
User S_AHR_61016499 Job Description
User S_AHR_61016500 Task Description for Jobs
User S_AHR_61016501 Complete Job Description
User S_AHR_61016502 Existing Positions
User S_AHR_61016503 Staff Assignments
User S_AHR_61016504 Position Description
User S_AHR_61016505 Task Description for Positions
User S_AHR_61016506 Staff Functions for Positions
User S_AHR_61016507 Authorities and Resources
User S_AHR_61016508 Planned Labor Costs
User S_AHR_61016509 Vacant Positions
User S_AHR_61016510 Correct Vacancies
User S_AHR_61016511 Complete Position Description
User S_AHR_61016512 Report Structure without Persons
User S_AHR_61016513 Report Structure with Persons
User S_AHR_61016514 Existing Work Centers
User S_AHR_61016515 Work Centers per Organizational Unit
User S_AHR_61016516 Authorities and Resources
User S_AHR_61016517 Planned Labor Costs
User S_AHR_61016518 Work Centers with Restrictions along
Organizational Structure
User S_AHR_61016519 Single Work Centers with Restrictions

User S_AHR_61016520 Work Centers Requiring Health
Examinations along Organizational Structure
User S_AHR_61016521 Single Work Centers Requiring Health
Examinations
User S_AHR_61016522 Existing Tasks
User S_AHR_61016523 Activity Profile for Positions along
Organizational Structure
User S_AHR_61016524 Activity Profile of Positions with Persons
along Organizational Structure
User S_AHR_61016525 Character of Tasks in Organizational Structure
User S_AHR_61016526 Character of Individual Tasks
User S_AHR_61016527 Existing Objects
User S_AHR_61016528 Structure Display/Maintenance
User S_AHR_61016529 Structure Navigation Instrument
User S_AHR_61016530 PD Graphics Interface
User S_AHR_61016531 Display and Maintain Infotypes
User S_AHR_61016532 Infotype Reporting
User S_AHR_61016533 HR Reporting via Personnel Planning
Structures
User S_AHR_61018831 Obsolete Positions
User S_AHR_61018869 Periods of Unoccupied Positions
User S_PH0_48000084 Generation of Positions for Quota Planning
User S_PH0_48000085 Freeze Planned Quota
User S_PH0_48000086 Copying the Current Required Positions into
a Planning Type
User S_PH0_48000087 Copying Quota Planning into another
Planning Type
User S_PH0_48000088 Delete Unoccupied Positions on Key Date
39.4.2 Personnel Development
User APPCHANGE Edit Appraisal

User APPCREATE Create Appraisal
User APPSEARCH Search Appraisals
User HRPDV00REPORT0001 Maintained Qualifications
Customizing OOAI Appraisal Transfer Persons

Customizing OOQ5 Copy Requirements Profile to Holder
Customizing OOQB Qualification Transfer: Applicants
Customizing OOQI Transfer Qualifications: Employee
User PEPM Profile Matchup
User PEPP Profiles
User PPAD Display Appraisals Catalog
User PPCP Career Planning
User PPDPCS Display Development Plan Catalog
User PPDPIM Change Individual Development Plan
User PPDPSPFP Find Objects which Have Completed a Plan
User PPDPSPFS Find Persons for Development Item
User PPEM Planning for Organizational Unit
User PPPD Display Profile
User PPPE_SEARCH_FOR_Q Find Objects for Qualifications
User PPPM Change Profile
User PPQD Display Qualifications Catalog
User PPSP Succession Planning
User PPUP Settings: User Parameters
Both S_AHR_61003917, OOQM Qualifications Profile: Mass Data Maintenance
Both S_AHR_61003929, OOQA Edit Qualifications Catalog
Both S_AHR_61003969, Edit Appraisals Catalog
PHAP_CATALOG_PA
Both S_AHR_61007168, OOEC Edit Development Plan Catalog
Both S_AHR_61007208, OOQ4 Edit Careers
Both S_AHR_61007222, OOSP Define Authorization Profiles
User S_AHR_61015524 Evaluate Careers
User S_AHR_61015532 Profile Matchup: Positions/Holders
User S_AHR_61015533 Profiles
User S_AHR_61015536 Expired Qualifications
User S_PH9_46000016 Qualifications Overview
User S_PH9_46000017 Succession Overview
User S_PH9_46000018 Objects with Unevaluated Qualifications or
Requirements
User S_PH9_46000019 Objects without Qualifications or Requirements
User S_PH9_46000022 List of Alternative Qualifications
39.4.3 Training and Event Management

User PO07 Maintain Other Resource
User PO18 Maintain Resource ‘Room’
User PO19 Maintain External Instructor
User PP40 Manual Correspondence
User PSV1 Attendance Menu
User PSV2 Business Event Menu
User PSV3 Information Menu
User PSV4 Set Plan Version
User PSV8 Create Attendee
User PSV9 Change/Display Attendee
User PSVI User-Specific Settings
User PSVO Change/Display Organizer
User PSVP Planning Menu
User PSVQ Create Organizer
User PSVR Resource Menu
User PSVT Tool Menu
User PV00 Book: Attendee for Business Event
User PV01 Rebook Attendance
User PV02 Prebook: Attendee for Business Event Type
User PV03 Replace Attendance
User PV04 Cancel Attendance
User PV06 Prebook: Attendee List for Business Event Type
User PV07 Book: Attendee List for Business Event
User PV08 Book: Attendee for Business Event List
User PV10 Create Business Event with Resources
User PV11 Create Business Event without Resources
User PV12 Firmly Book/Cancel Business Event
User PV14 Lock/Unlock Business Event
User PV15 Follow-up Business Event
User PV16 Prebook: Attendee for Business Event Type List
User PV17 Billing
User PV18 Activity Allocation: Attendance
User PV19 Activity Allocation: Instructor Function
User PV1A Change Business Event
User PV1B Display Business Event
User PV1C Cost Transfer Posting

User PV1D Price Proposal
User PV1M Materials Procurement
User PV33 Business Event Appraisal
User PV34 Attendee Appraisal
User PVB0 Business Event Budget
User PVBA Training and Events: Budget Comparison
User PVG2 Lock/Unlock Resource
User PVK0 Correspondence History
Customizing PVV0 Create/Change Service
User RE_RHAUTH00 Authorized Objects
User RE_RHCHECK1 Check Database Consistency
User RE_RHCHECKV Check Relationships
User RE_RHDBST00 PD Database Statistics
Customizing RE_RHMOVE30 Manual Transport Link
User RE_RHREFDOC0 Reference Document Reporting
User RE_RHRHAZ00 Display PD Database Records
User RE_RHRHDC00 Delete HR Database Records via List
User RE_RHRHDL00 Delete PD Database Records
User RE_RHVSTA00 Database Statistics – Number of Objects
User RE_RHVSTA10 Database Statistics – Number of Notes
User RE_RHVSTA20 Database Statistics – Number of Object
Types per Infotype
User RE_RHVSTA30 Database Statistics – Number of Infotypes
per Object Type
User S_AHR_61011841 Location
User S_AHR_61011843 Building Address
User S_AHR_61011844 Time Schedule
User S_AHR_61011845 Cost Items
Both S_AHR_61011885, OORA Room
Both S_AHR_61011886, OORT Resource Type
Both S_AHR_61011887, OOC3 Master Data Catalog
Both S_AHR_61011888, OOET Business Event Type
Both S_AHR_61011889, OOEG Business Event Group
Both S_AHR_61011893, OOER External Instructor
Both S_AHR_61011901, OORE Other Resource
User S_AHR_61011911 Assign Authorization Profiles
User S_AHR_61011912 Maintain Authorization Profiles

User S_AHR_61016214 Prebookings per Attendee
User S_AHR_61016215 Bookings per Attendee
User S_AHR_61016216 Cancellations per Attendee
User S_AHR_61016217 Business Event Hierarchy
User S_AHR_61016218 Business Event Brochure
User S_AHR_61016219 Business Event Dates
User S_AHR_61016220 Business Event Demand
User S_AHR_61016221 Business Event Prices
User S_AHR_61016224 Resource Equipment
User S_AHR_61016225 Available/Reserved Resources
Both S_ALR_87014085 Attendance Statistics
User S_ALR_87014087 Resource Reservation
User S_PH0_48000096 Instructor Information
User S_PH0_48000476 Business Event Information
User S_PH0_48000535 Ad Hoc Query
User S_PH9_46000423 Budget Comparison
User S_PH9_46000424 Cancellations per Business Event
User S_PH9_46000425 Attendance and Sales Statistics
User S_PH9_46000426 Attendees for Rebooking
User S_PH9_46000427 Prebookings per Business Event Type
User S_PH9_46000428 Prerequisites Matchup
User S_PH9_46000429 Attendee’s Qualifications
User S_PH9_46000430 Attendance Prerequisites
User S_PH9_46000431 Attendee’s Training History
User S_PH9_46000432 Employee List
User S_PH9_46000433 Attendance List
User S_PH9_46000434 Attendee List
User S_PH9_46000435 Material Requirements per Business Event
User S_PH9_46000436 Resources Not Yet Assigned per Business Event
User S_PH9_46000437 Resource List per Business Event
User S_PH9_46000438 Business Event Schedule
User S_PH9_46000439 Resources Not Yet Assigned per Resource Type
User S_PH9_46000440 Resource Reservation Statistics
User S_PH9_46000441 Graphical Resource Reservation
User S_PH9_46000451 Business Event Appraisals
User S_PH9_46000452 Attendee Appraisals
39.4.4 Utility
ABAP BAPI Bapi explorer

Basis BD87 Status monitor for ALE messages
User CG3Y Download file
User CG3Z Upload file
ABAP CMOD Enhancements
ABAP HRFORMS HR forms workplace
Consultant LSMW Legacy system migration workbench
User OAAD Archivelink administration documents
Consultant OSS1 Logon to SAPNet
Consultant OY19 Customizing cross-system viewer
ABAP PE51 HR form editor
Basis PFCG Role maintenance
Basis RSSCD100_PFCG Change documents for role admin.
Basis RSSCD100_PFCG_USER For role assignment
Basis RSUSR200 List of users per login date
Basis S_BCE_68001403 With critical authorizations
Basis S002 Menu administration
User SA38 ABAP reporting
Basis SALE Display ALE customizing
User SBWP SAP business workplace
Consultant SCAT Computer aided test tool
Consultant SCMP View/table comparison
Basis SCOT SAPconnect – administration
Consultant SCU0 Customizing cross-system viewer
Basis SE01 Transport organizer (extended)
Basis SE03 Transport organizer tools
Consultant, Basis SE09 Transport organizer
Consultant, Basis SE10 Transport organizer
Consultant, ABAP SE11 ABAP dictionary maintenance
ABAP SE13 Maintain technical settings (tables)
ABAP SE15 ABAP/4 repository information system
Consultant, ABAP SE16 Data browser
Consultant, ABAP SE16N General table display
Consultant, ABAP SE17 General table display
ABAP SE18 Business add-ins: definitions
ABAP SE19 Business add-ins: implementations

ABAP SE24 Class builder
ABAP SE35 ABAP/4 dialog modules
ABAP SE36 Logical database builder
ABAP SE37 ABAP function modules
ABAP SE38 ABAP editor
ABAP SE39 Splitscreen editor: (new)
ABAP SE41 Menu painter
ABAP SE43 Maintain area menu
ABAP SE51 Screen painter
ABAP SE61 SAP documentation
Consultant SE63 Translation: initial screen
ABAP SE71 SAPscript form
ABAP SE72 SAPscript styles
ABAP SE73 SAPscript font maintenance
ABAP SE74 SAPscript format conversion
ABAP SE75 SAPscript settings
ABAP SE75TTDTGC SAPscript: change standard symbols
ABAP SE75TTDTGD SAPscript: display standard symbols
ABAP SE76 SAPscript: form translation
ABAP SE77 SAPscript styles translation
ABAP SE80 Object navigator
ABAP SE84 Repository information system
ABAP SE85 ABAP/4 repository information system
ABAP SE91 Message maintenance
ABAP SE93 Maintain transactions
Consultant SEARCH_SAP_MENU Find in SAP menu
Consultant SEARCH_USER_MENU Find in user menu
User, Consultant SECATT Extended computer aided test tool
User, Consultant SHDB Batch input transaction recorder
Consultant SLG1 Application log: display logs
Basis SM01 Lock transactions
Basis SM04 User list
Basis SM12 Display and delete locks
Consultant SM30 Call view maintenance
Consultant SM31 Call view maintenance like SM30
Consultant SM34 Viewcluster maintenance call
User SM35 Batch input monitoring
User SM35P Batch input: log monitoring
User SM36 Schedule background job

User SM37 Job overview
User SM38 Queue maintenance transaction
ABAP SMARTFORMS SAP smart forms
ABAP SMOD SAP enhancement management
User SMX Display own jobs
User SO00 SAPoffice: short message
ABAP SO10 SAPscript: standard texts
User SP01 Output controller
User SP02 Display spool requests
Consultant SP11 TemSe directory
Consultant SPRO Customizing - edit project
User, Consultant SQ00 SAP query: start queries
Consultant SQ01 SAP query: maintain queries
Consultant SQ02 SAP query: maintain infoset
Consultant SQ03 SAP query: maintain user groups
User SQVI Quickviewer
ABAP ST22 ABAP dump analysis
Basis SU01 User maintenance
Basis SU21 Maintain the Authorization Objects
Basis SU22 Auth. object usage in transactions
Basis SU24 Auth. object check under transactions
User SU3 Maintain users own data
User SU53 Display authorization check
Basis SUIM User information system
Consultant SWDD Workflow builder
INDEX
(709–721)
Index
Account assignment, 189 description, 412

default value for controlling area, 191 element access, 414
inheritance by positions, 191 value descriptions, 414
Actions, 49 Appraisal template, 402
infotypes in, 50 column access, 405
master list, 50 columns, 404
running, 49 description, 402
transaction codes for, 50 layout, 403
Ad hoc query, 475 processing, 407
Address, 206 roles, 406
Appraisal, 383 status flow, 410
Appraisal catalog, 390 value descriptions, 406
Appraisal category, 396 Attendance, 565
columns, 398 booking, 575
enhancements, 400 cancellation, 586
participants, 397 menu, 570
roles, 398 prebooking, 571
status flow, 400 rebooking, 583
use, 396 replacing, 582
value lists, 399 reports, 591
Appraisal category group, 393 Attendee checks, 567
allowed object types, 393 additional checks, 569
event, 395 attendance/attendance conflict, 567
person authorized, 394 attendance/instructor conflict, 567
status, 394 incompatible attendance and absence types,
Appraisal criteria, 415 568
columns, 416 individual and group attendee checks, 566
description, 415 individual attendee checks, 566
element access, 417 Attendees, 553
value descriptions, 417 appraisals, 589
Appraisal criteria group, 412 group, 554
columns, 413 individual, 554
709
710 Index
sequence of tabs, 562 description, 436

types of, 553 display, 433
Authorities/ resources, 194 info business event group, 438
reports, 195 object, 435
type, 195 relationships, 437
Authorizations, 220 Business event type, 439
check for accessing subprofiles, 343 billing/allocation info, 463
concepts, 220 business event demand, 458
for organizational units and positions, 223 business event type info, 450
for user, 223 capacity, 447
for user’s own data, 223 collaboration room, 468
main switches, 225 cost items, 461
objects, 220 costs, 461
objects for transactions, 227 day segment, 445
prefix for batch input sessions, 233 delivery method, 441
profile definition, 230 description, 442
profiles, 223 follow-up control options, 468
profiles to user assignment, 232 further information, 457
reports, 234 knowledge link, 466
roles, 223 main schedule model, 443
structural, 222 object, 440
switches, 226 prices, 449
troubleshooting, 225 procedure, 459
user data in SAP memory, 234 relationships, 452
time schedule, 446
validity period, 456
Buildings, 207 web link, 464
Business event, 513 with pattern, 445
appraisal, 540 with user-defined schedule, 444
appraisal reports, 541 without pattern, 443
cancellation, 535 workflow settings, 468
cancellation reasons, 537
cancellation rebooking proposals, 536
cancellation saving with rebooking, 536 Career planning, 344
cancellation waitlist procedure, 536 Careers, 352
changing, 528 Change log, 224
conducting, 539 Character, 181
displaying, 528 reports, 181
firmly booking, 529 Columns, 274
following up, 542 column groups, 275
locking/unlocking, 538 column headers, 276
menu, 513 column/object type assignment, 276
reports, 545 dialog structure, 274
through planning, 523 external training provider, 559
with resources, 519 functionality, 273
without resources, 516 hierarchical column group, 276
Business event catalog, 426 Company, 558
Business event group, 432 Configuration views
change, 434 SCAPPTTYPE, 650
collaboration room, 438 T772S, 179
creation, 433 T777A, 207
Index 711
T777BIRTH, 301 T77ITEX_C, 281

T777E, 298 T77KA, 568
T777F, 219 T77KB, 461
T777I, 291 T77KU, 608
T777IBO, 661 T77NI, 294
T777N, 613 T77NT, 664
T777Z, 290 T77OBJSER, 272
T778C, 186 T77OCTABST, 268
T778G, 193 T77OCTABUS, 271
T778L, 255 T77OMAHQ_FUNCAR, 283
T778O, 284 T77OMAHQ_FUNCARS, 283
T778P, 210 T77OMATGT, 272
T778T, 289 T77OMFRAM, 269
T778V, 295 T77OMFRAMC, 282
T778W, 195 T77OMFRAS, 269
T778X, 187 T77OMIA, 272
T779M, 162 T77OMIA_C, 273
T779X, 662 T77OMICON, 270
T77ACOL, 275 T77OMREGIS, 272
T77ACOLC, 275 T77OMSCENF, 270
T77ACOLINI, 275 T77OMTABS, 268
T77AR, 297 T77OMTABUS, 271
T77ARRAYTP, 275 T77OS, 286
T77BW, 381 T77POSBUD, 203
T77BX, 379 T77PP_HEAD, 340
T77BZ, 377 T77PP_PART, 342
T77CAR, 588 T77PP_VIEW, 339
T77CD, 292 T77PQ, 229
T77CDOC_CUST, 224 T77PR, 230
T77CNOD_EX, 279 T77SCEN_AW, 265
T77CNODORD, 279 T77SCENQY, 265
T77COL, 274 T77SO, 285
T77COLH_C, 277 T77TR, 261
T77COLHEAD, 276 T77UA, 232
T77COLHTYP, 276 T77UU, 234
T77COLOTYP, 276 T77VA, 296
T77CR, 537 T77VB, 612
T77CS, 355 T77VC, 613
T77CSEAT_E, 281 T77VD, 606
T77EO, 286 T77VE, 604
T77EV, 298 T77VG, 605
T77FNODORD, 279 T77VI, 603
T77FOBJMAN, 279 T77WT, 197
T77FRIEND, 279 T77ZR, 300
T77FSEAN, 278 V_778U, 177
T77FSEAS, 278 V_T777ZVK, 299
T77FSEAT, 280 V_T77KV_1, 567
T77FSEATGB, 280 V_T77KV_2, 545
T77FUNC, 378 V_T77KV_3, 608
T77HIERATC, 276 V_T77PR_V_H, 341
T77HIERATP, 276 V_T77PR_V_H_P, 343
712 Index
V_T77R3_1, 562 general development plan, 370

V_T77S0, 225 individual development plan, 366
V_T77S0AW, 151 individual development subprofile, 367
V_T77S0OT, 287 permissible further processing, 378
V_T77S0SC, 257 states, 377
V_T77S0VK, 300 Dynamic menus, 469
V_T7PM2, 659 additional line in, 471
V_T7PM3_B, 659 extended search, 470
V_T7PM9_B, 660 navigation, 470
V_TB027HR_NEW, 249 overview, 469
V_TKA06_CC, 191 planning period, 471
V_TSAD3HR_NEW, 249 substructure access, 470
V77CSEAT, 280 virtual business event group, 471
VC_T77SK, 319
Contact person, 559
Correspondence, 596 Employee group/subgroup, 199
automatic, 596 Expert mode, 35
history, 601 External instructor, 555
manual, 596 External person, 555
Cost distribution, 201
Customer, 561
Forms, 610
for notifications, 606
Data dictionary, 677
Data distribution, 264
Data extraction, 265 Headers, 340
Data model, 284 for personnel development view, 341
Data transfer, 260 Health examinations, 192
locking infotypes for import, 261 reports, 193
through sequential files, 263 type, 193
Database statistics, 250
Database utilities, 250
checking consistency, 252 Information menu, 472
checking relationships, 253 Infotype, 175
deleting database records, 254 1002 Description, 175
deleting database records with list, 254 1003 Department/Staff, 179
displaying database records, 253 1004 Character, 181
installation consistency check, 255 1005 Planned Compensation, 182
Delivery class of a table, 680 1006 Restrictions, 185
Department/staff, 179 1007 Vacancy, 187
department switch, 180 1008 Account Assignment Features, 189
reports, 180 1009 Health Examinations, 192
Description, 175 1010 Authorities/Resources, 194
formatting of, 177 1011 Work Schedule, 196
types of, 177 1013 Employee Group/Subgroup, 199
Development plan, 375 1014 Obsolete, 200
automatic state management of item, 380 1018 Cost Distribution, 201
development plan catalog, 376 1019 Quota Planning, 202
development plan group, 374 1028 Address, 206
development plan items, 367 1032 Mail Address, 208
further processing of items, 379 allowed for an object type, 169
Index 713
common structure, 167 Location, 509

country-specific, 294 address, 511
customer-specific settings for, 292 further information, 512
features, 166 object, 510
master list, 289 site-dependent info, 510
reports, 170
subtypes of, 291
time constraints, 289 Mail address, 208
tools, 170 Mail connection, 614
Integration of organizational management with, Maintenance interface setting, 51
235
business partners, 244
personnel administration, 235 Name format, 557
recruitment, 242 Number assignment
workflow, 242 customer logic for, 140
Integration of personnel development with, 418 external, 138
compensation management, 421 for all plan versions, 139
organizational management, 418 internal, 138
personnel administration, 419 Number ranges, 139
recruitment, 420
strategic enterprise management, 421
training, 420 Object types, 284
Integration of training with, 615 allowed for an infotype, 291
activity allocation, 618 assignment of infosets to, 283
budget management, 653 external, 286
cost transfer posting, 632 key, 287
employee self-service, 662 transaction codes for maintaining, 288
materials management, 644 Objects, 134
organizational management, 615 Obsolete, 200
personnel administration, 615 Organization and staffing, 11
personnel development, 618 backup prompt, 282
SAP appointment calendar, 650 detail area, 20
SAP knowledge warehouse, 649 interface customizing, 266
time management, 616 overview area, 17
workflow, 661 preview period area, 15
search area, 13
selection area, 14
Job, 101 Organizational management interfaces, 11
creation, 102 Organizational plan, 3
definition, 101 maintaining, 23
reports, 106 validity period, 9
Job details, 105 Organizational unit, 55
basic data, 105 creation, 55
tasks, 106 definition, 55
Job structures, 103 reports, 71
job usage, 104 root, 5
task assignment, 103 Organizational unit details, 66
account assignment, 67
address, 68
Language, 609 basic data, 66
default, 609 cost distribution, 69
sequence, 255 quota planning, 70
714 Index
tasks, 71 Position, 77
work schedule, 69 assigning other holders to, 7
Organizational unit structures, 56 assigning persons to, 7
account assignment, 58 chief, 79
candidate management, 59 creation, 77
enhanced checks, 59 definition, 77
managerial assignment, 60 reports, 91
organizational structure, 61 staffing status of, 78
project assignments, 62 Position details, 86
scheduler assignment (MRS), 62 account assignment, 88
staff assignments (list), 63 address, 88
staff assignments (structure), 57 basic data, 86
staffing analysis, 63 cost distribution, 89
staffing management, 64 qualification, 90
task assignment, 65 tasks, 91
Other resource, 497 work schedule, 89
capacity, 500 Position structures, 79
costs, 501 candidate management, 81
further information, 501 managerial assignment, 81
object, 498 organizational assignment, 82
relationships, 499 PBC: notes, 83
reporting structure, 83
staffing analysis, 84
Person, 109 staffing management, 85
creation, 109 task assignment, 80
definition, 109 Potentials subprofile, 328
reports, 114 Preferences subprofile, 328
Person details, 113 Proficiency, 320
basic data, 113 description, 321
qualification, 113 Profile matchup, 332
tasks, 114 Profiles, 325
Person structures, 110 reports, 336
organizational assignment, 110 Profiles for object types, 330
task assignment, 111 job, 331
Plan version, 209 person, 331
active, 211 position, 331
comparing, 213 task, 331
concept, 209 user, 331
copying, 212 work center, 331
copying structures, 213
maintaining, 210
number assignment for all plan versions, 211
Qualifications, 309
setting, 211
catalog, 306
Planned compensation, 182
catalog menu items, 312
reports, 183
control parameters, 323
Planning cycle, 216
finding objects for, 315
Planning menu, 524
Planning status, 215 group, 307
changing, 218 reports, 318
functions permitted in, 219 subprofile, 326
in organizational management interfaces, 217 transfer, 314
Index 715
Quota planning, 202 Restrictions, 185

calculation in full-time equivalents (FTE), 204 reasons for, 186
generation of positions for, 203 reports, 185
planning type and periods, 203 types of, 186
tools, 205 Room, 492
type, 203 address, 495
capacity, 494
costs, 497
Recipient groups, 605 further information, 496
Recipients of notification, 604 object, 493
Relationships, 141 relationships, 493
abbreviation, 300
additional data on, 297
allowed, 298 SAP scripts, 679
characteristics, 296 Scale, 319
definition, 141 Search function settings, 256
essential, 285 Search help, 680
external, 298 Search nodes, 277
hierarchical, 148 Simple maintenance, 22
important relationships, 143 settings for, 259
infotype 1001, 145 Staffing schedule parameters, 257
inheritance, 147 Structural graphics, 41
inverse, 148 Structures, 150
lateral, 148 activity profile of positions along organiza-
partial, 10 tional structure, 157
priority, 10 activity profile of positions with persons
properties, 147 along organizational structure, 159
time constraint depending on target object definition, 150
type, 300 evaluation path, 150
time constraints, 299 evaluation paths in SAP programs, 151
types, 142 general, 21
unilateral, 149 important structures, 152
until birthday, 301 matrix, 162
Reports organizational structure, 152
standard selection screen for, 51 organizational structure with persons, 154
Requirements subprofile, 329 organizational structure with positions,
Resource locking, 503 153
assigning service to lock resources, 503 organizational structure with positions and
defining service to lock resources, 502 persons, 154
Resource menu, 504 organizational structure with work centers,
Resource type, 486 155
availability indicators, 487 reporting structure with persons, 157
capacity, 491 reporting structure without persons, 156
costs, 491 reports, 160
further information, 490 search, 286
object, 487 Subprofiles, 326
relationships, 489 dislikes, 329
Resources, 486 for an object type, 342
reports, 505 master, 342
reservation, 521 potentials, 328
716 Index
preferences, 328 Task, 120

qualifications, 326 creation, 122
requirements, 329 definition, 120
Succession, 359 reports, 126
plan, 361 Task catalog, 120
planning, 359 Task details, 125
simulation, 364 description, 125
Suitability, 354 name, 125
Task structures, 123
agents, 124
Tab pages, 268 task hierarchy, 123
dialog structure, 267 Tool menu, 475
for each object type, 271 Transactions
functionality, 266 APPCHANGE-Edit Appraisal, 387
requests, 272 APPCREATE-Create Appraisal, 384
scenario, 269 APPSEARCH-Search Appraisals, 389
services, 272 BAPI-BAPI explorer, 675
Tables and views, 677 BD87-Status monitor for ALE messages, 677
AGR_1250, 679 CG3Y-Download file, 672
AGR_DEFINE, 679 CG3Z-Upload file, 672
AGR_TCODES, 679 CMOD-Enhancements, 674
AGR_USERS, 679 HRFORMS-HR forms workplace, 705
AGR_USERT, 679 HRPDV00REPORT0001-Maintained Qualifi-
CUS_IMGACH, 679 cations, 319
D010TAB, 678 LSMW-Legacy system migration workbench,
DD01V, 677 673
DD02V, 677 OAAD-Archive link administration documents,
DD03L, 677 672
DD03M, 677 OOAI-Appraisal Transfer Persons, 419
DD03T, 677 OOC3-Master Data Catalog, 426
DD04V, 677 OODT-Legacy Data Transfer, 264
DD06V, 677 OOEC-Edit Development Plan Catalog, 374
DD07V, 677 OOEG-Business Event Group, 433
DD08V, 677 OOER-External Instructor, 555
DD09L, 678 OOET-Business Event Type, 440
DD20V, 678 OOHP-Set Up PD - PA Integration, 236
DD24S, 678 OOHQ-Batch Input Sessions, 236
DD25T, 678 OOMT-Actions, 50
DD27S, 678 OOMV-Create Sequential File for PD, 263
DDVAL, 677 OOMW-Edit Sequential File for PD, 263
DOKHL, 680 OONR-Number Ranges, 139
DOKTL, 680 OOOE-Maintain Organizational Plan, 698
TADIR, 678 OOPH-Set Up PA–PD Integration, 236
TDEVC, 678 OOPP-Consistency Check for Integration, 236
TOBJ, 679 OOQ4-Edit Careers, 353
TRDIR, 678 OOQ5-Copy Requirements Profile to Holder,
TRESC, 680 330
TSTCV, 678 OOQA-Edit Qualifications Catalog, 306
TVDIR, 678 OOQB-Qualification Transfer: Applicants, 420
USR01, 679 OOQI-Transfer Qualifications–Employee, 419
USR04, 679 OOQM-Qualifications Profile: Mass Data
USR05, 679 Maintenance, 327
Index 717
OORA-Room, 492 PPSC-Create Structure, 21

OORE-Other Resource, 498 PPSM-Change Structure, 21
OORT-Resource Type, 486 PPSP-Succession Planning, 359
OOSP-Define Authorization Profiles, 229 PPSS-Display Structure, 21
OSS1-Logon to SAP Net, 673 PPUP-Settings: User Parameters, 344
OY19-Customizing cross-system viewer, 673 PSO0-Set Plan Version, 211
PE51-HR form editor, 705 PSO3-Object Description, 170
PEPM-Profile Matchup, 332 PSO4-Individual Infotype Maintenance, 173
PEPP-Profiles, 336 PSV1-Attendance Menu, 570
PFAL-ALE Distribution of HR Master Data, PSV2-Business Event Menu, 514
264 PSV3-Information Menu, 472
PFCG-Role maintenance, 223 PSV4-Set Plan Version, 211
PFCT-Task Catalog, 120 PSV8-Create Attendee, 553
PHAP_CATALOG_PA-Edit Appraisals PSV9-Change/Display Attendee, 553
Catalog, 390 PSVI-User–Specific Settings, 476
PO01-Maintain Work Center, 129 PSVO-Change/Display Organizer, 426
PO03-Maintain Job, 102 PSVP-Planning Menu, 523
PO07-Maintain Other Resource, 498 PSVQ-Create Organizer, 426
PO10-Maintain Organizational Unit, 55 PSVR-Resource Menu, 504
PO13-Maintain Position, 78 PSVT-Tool Menu, 475
PO18-Maintain Resource ‘Room’, 492 PV00-Book: Attendee for Business Event, 575
PO19-Maintain External Instructor, 555 PV01-Rebook Attendance, 583
PP01_DISP-Maintain Plan Data, 36 PV02-Prebook: Attendee for Business Event
PP01-Maintain Plan Data, 36 Type, 572
PP03-Actions, 49 PV03-Replace Attendance, 582
PP40-Manual Correspondence, 597 PV04-Cancel Attendance, 586
PPAD-Display Appraisals Catalog, 390 PV06-Prebook: Attendee List for Business
PPCP-Career Planning, 344 Event Type, 573
PPDPCS-Display Development Plan Catalog, PV07-Book: Attendee List for Business Event,
374 579
PPDPIM-Change Individual Development PV08-Book: Attendee for Business Event List,
Plan, 370 581
PPDPSPFP-Find Objects which Have Comp- PV10-Create Business Event with Resources,
leted a Plan, 373 519
PPDPSPFS-Find Persons for Development PV11-Create Business Event without
Item, 369 Resources, 515
PPEM-Planning for Organizational Unit, 75 PV12-Firmly Book/Cancel Business Event,
PPME-Change Matrix Organization, 163 529
PPMS-Display Matrix Organization, 163 PV14-Lock/Unlock Business Event, 538
PPOC_OLD-Create Organizational Plan, 22 PV15-Follow Up Business Event, 542
PPOCE-Create Organization and Staffing, 5 PV16-Prebook: Attendee for Business Event
PPOM_MODE-Set Maintenance Interface, 51 Type List, 574
PPOM_OLD-Maintain Organizational Plan, 22 PV17-Billing, 640
PPOME-Change Organization and Staffing, 11 PV18-Activity Allocation: Attendance, 619
PPOS_OLD-Display Organizational Plan, 22 PV19-Activity Allocation: Instructor Function,
PPOSE-Display Organization and Staffing, 11 624
PPPD-Display Profile, 325 PV1A-Change Business Event, 528
PPPE_SEARCH_FOR_Q-Find Objects for PV1B-Display Business Event, 528
Qualifications, 315 PV1C-Cost Transfer Posting, 633
PPPM-Change Profile, 325 PV1D-Price Proposal, 546
PPQD-Display Qualifications Catalog, 306 PV1M-Materials Procurement, 644
718 Index
PV33-Business Event Appraisal, 540 RSSCD100_PFCG_USER-For role assignment,

PV34-Attendee Appraisal, 589 676
PVB0-Business Event Budget, 653 RSSCD100_PFCG-Change documents for role
PVBA-Training & Events: Budget Comparison, admin., 676
658 RSUSR200-List of users per login date, 676
PVG2-Lock/Unlock Resource, 503 S_AHR_61003129-Check Integration Consis-
PVK0-Correspondence History, 601 tency, 236
PVV0-Create/Change Service, 502 S_AHR_61003170-Create Justifications, 187
RE_RHAKTI00-Change Object Status, 218 S_AHR_61003172-Create Building Addresses,
RE_RHALECPS-Display ALE Change 207
Pointers, 264 S_AHR_61003187-Create Working Time
RE_RHALESMD-Evaluate ALE Change Groups, 197
Pointers, 265 S_AHR_61003603-Create Health Promotion
RE_RHAUTH00-Authorized Objects, 234 Measures, 193
RE_RHBEGDA0-Change Start Date, 173 S_AHR_61003917-Qualifications Profile:
RE_RHCHECK1-Check Database Consis- Mass Data Maintenance, 327
tency, 252 S_AHR_61003929-Edit Qualifications Catalog,
RE_RHCHECKV-Check Relationships, 253 306
RE_RHCOPL00-Copy Plan Version w/o S_AHR_61003969-Edit Appraisals Catalog,
Comparison, 212 390
RE_RHCOPLPT-Reconcile Plan Versions S_AHR_61007150-Create Authorities/Resources,
(Partly), 213 196
RE_RHCOPY00-Copy Object, 138 S_AHR_61007156-Create Restrictions, 186
RE_RHCOPY10-Copy Objects Using Selection S_AHR_61007168-Edit Development Plan
List, 138 Catalog, 374
RE_RHCOPYSTRUCT-Copy Structures, 213 S_AHR_61007208-Edit Careers, 353
RE_RHDBST00-PD Database Statistics, 250 S_AHR_61007222-Define Authorization
RE_RHDESC10-Display Infotypes, 173 Profiles, 229
RE_RHGRENZ4-Set New End Date for S_AHR_61011841-Location, 509
Infotypes, 173 S_AHR_61011843-Building Address, 207
RE_RHMOVE30-Manual Transport Link, 262 S_AHR_61011844-Time Schedule, 446
RE_RHREFDOC0-Reference Document S_AHR_61011845-Cost Items, 461
Reporting, 623 S_AHR_61011885-Room, 492
RE_RHREPL20-Replace User With Person, S_AHR_61011886-Resource Type, 486
241 S_AHR_61011887-Master Data Catalog, 426
RE_RHRHAZ00-Display PD Database S_AHR_61011888-Business Event Type, 440
Records, 253 S_AHR_61011889-Business Event Group, 433
RE_RHRHDC00-Delete HR Database Records S_AHR_61011893-External Instructor, 555
via List, 254 S_AHR_61011901-Other Resource, 498
RE_RHRHDL00-Delete PD Database Records, S_AHR_61011911-Assign Authorization
254 Profiles, 232
RE_RHTRANS0-Translate Language-Depen- S_AHR_61011912-Maintain Authorization
dent Records, 174 Profiles, 229
RE_RHVSTA00-Database Statistics–Number S_AHR_61015524-Evaluate Careers, 353
of Objects, 251 S_AHR_61015532-Profile Matchup: Positions/
RE_RHVSTA10-Database Statistics–Number Holders, 338
of Notes, 251 S_AHR_61015533-Profiles, 338
RE_RHVSTA20-Database Statistics–Number S_AHR_61015536-Expired Qualifications,
of Object Types per Infotype, 252 318
RE_RHVSTA30-Database Statistics–Number S_AHR_61016214-Prebookings per Attendee,
of Infotypes per Object Type, 252 594
Index 719
S_AHR_61016215-Bookings per Attendee, S_AHR_61016513-Report Structure with

592 Persons, 100
S_AHR_61016216-Cancellations per Attendee, S_AHR_61016514-Existing Work Centers,
595 130
S_AHR_61016217-Business Event Hierarchy, S_AHR_61016515-Work Centers per Organi-
548 zational Unit, 131
S_AHR_61016218-Business Event Brochure, S_AHR_61016516-Authorities and Resources,
549 195
S_AHR_61016219-Business Event Dates, 551 S_AHR_61016517-Planned Labor Costs, 183
S_AHR_61016220-Business Event Demand, S_AHR_61016518-Work Centers with
547 Restrictions along Organizational
S_AHR_61016221-Business Event Prices, 552 Structure, 185
S_AHR_61016224-Resource Equipment, 505 S_AHR_61016519-Single Work Centers with
S_AHR_61016225-Available/Reserved Restrictions, 186
Resources, 507 S_AHR_61016520-Work Centers Requiring
S_AHR_61016491-Existing Organizational Health Examinations along Organiza-
Units, 71 tional Structure, 193
S_AHR_61016492-Staff Functions for Organi- S_AHR_61016521-Single Work Centers Req-
zational Units, 71 uiring Health Examinations, 193
S_AHR_61016493-Organizational Structure, S_AHR_61016522-Existing Tasks, 126
72 S_AHR_61016523-Activity Profile for
S_AHR_61016494-Organizational Structure Positions along Organizational Structure,
with Positions, 72 126
S_AHR_61016495-Organizational Structure S_AHR_61016524-Activity Profile of Positions
with Persons, 73 with Persons along Organizational
S_AHR_61016496-Organizational Structure Structure, 127
with Work Centers, 131 S_AHR_61016525-Character of Tasks in
S_AHR_61016497-Existing Jobs, 106 Organizational Structure, 181
S_AHR_61016498-Job Index, 106 S_AHR_61016526-Character of Individual
S_AHR_61016499-Job Description, 107 Tasks, 182
S_AHR_61016500-Task Description for Jobs, S_AHR_61016527-Existing Objects, 138
108 S_AHR_61016528-Structure Display/Main-
S_AHR_61016501-Complete Job Description, tenance, 160
108 S_AHR_61016529-Structure Navigation
S_AHR_61016502-Existing Positions, 92 Instrument, 160
S_AHR_61016503-Staff Assignments, 92 S_AHR_61016530-PD Graphics Interface, 41
S_AHR_61016504-Position Description, 94 S_AHR_61016531-Display and Maintain
S_AHR_61016505-Task Description for Infotypes, 170
Positions, 95 S_AHR_61016532-Infotype Reporting, 172
S_AHR_61016506-Staff Functions for Positions, S_AHR_61016533-HR Reporting via Personnel
95 Planning Structures, 161
S_AHR_61016507-Authorities and Resources, S_AHR_61018831-Obsolete Positions, 98
195 S_AHR_61018869-Periods of Unoccupied
S_AHR_61016508-Planned Labor Costs, 96 Positions, 91
S_AHR_61016509-Vacant Positions, 97 S_ALR_87014085-Attendance Statistics, 549
S_AHR_61016510-Correct Vacancies, 98 S_ALR_87014087-Resource Reservation, 506
S_AHR_61016511-Complete Position S_BCE_68001403-With critical authoriza-
Description, 98 tions, 676
S_AHR_61016512-Report Structure without S_PH0_48000084-Generation of Positions for
Persons, 99 Quota Planning, 203
720 Index
S_PH0_48000085-Freeze Planned Quota, 206 S_PH9_46000451-Business Event Appraisals,

S_PH0_48000086-Copying the Current 541
Required Positions into a Planning Type, S_PH9_46000452-Attendee Appraisals, 590
205 S002-Menu administration, 676
S_PH0_48000087-Copying Quota Planning SA38-ABAP reporting, 671
into Another Planning Type, 205 SALE-Display ALE customizing, 677
S_PH0_48000088-Delete Unoccupied Positions SBWP-SAP business workplace, 670
on Key Date, 206 SCAT-Computer aided test tool, 673
S_PH0_48000096-Instructor Information, 506 SCMP-View/table comparison, 673
S_PH0_48000476-Business Event Infor- SCOT-SAP connect–administration, 676
mation, 550 SCU0-Customizing cross-system viewer, 673
S_PH0_48000535-Ad Hoc Query, 475 SE01-Transport organizer (extended), 676
S_PH9_46000016-Qualifications Overview, 318 SE03-Transport organizer tools, 676
S_PH9_46000017-Succession Overview, 365 SE09-Transport organizer, 673
S_PH9_46000018-Objects With Unevaluated SE10-Transport organizer, 673
Qualifications or Requirements, 338 SE11-ABAP dictionary maintenance, 673
S_PH9_46000019-Objects Without Qualifi- SE13-Maintain technical settings (tables), 675
cations or Requirements, 338 SE15-ABAP/4 repository information system,
S_PH9_46000022-List of Alternative Quali- 675
fications, 319 SE16-Data browser, 673
S_PH9_46000423-Budget Comparison, 658 SE16N-General table display, 673
S_PH9_46000424-Cancellations per Business SE17-General table display, 673
Event, 595 SE18-Business add-ins: definitions, 675
S_PH9_46000425-Attendance and Sales SE19-Business add-ins: implementations, 675
Statistics, 594 SE24-Class builder, 674
S_PH9_46000426-Attendees for Rebooking, SE35-ABAP/4 dialog modules, 674
594 SE36-Logical database builder, 674
S_PH9_46000427-Prebookings per Business SE37-ABAP function modules, 674
Event Type, 593 SE38-ABAP editor, 674
S_PH9_46000428-Prerequisites Matchup, 593 SE39-Splitscreen editor: (new), 674
S_PH9_46000429-Attendee’s Qualifications, SE41-Menu painter, 674
593 SE43-Maintain area menu, 675
S_PH9_46000430-Attendance Prerequisites, SE51-Screen painter, 674
593 SE61-SAP documentation, 675
S_PH9_46000431-Attendee’s Training SE63-Translation: initial screen, 674
History, 592 SE71-SAPscript form, 675
S_PH9_46000432-Employee List, 592 SE72-SAPscript styles, 675
S_PH9_46000433-Attendance List, 591 SE73-SAPscript font maintenance, 675
S_PH9_46000434-Attendee List, 591 SE74-SAPscript format conversion, 675
S_PH9_46000435-Material Requirements per SE75-SAPscript settings, 675
Business Event, 552 SE75TTDTGC-SAPscript: change standard
S_PH9_46000436-Resources Not Yet Assigned symbols, 675
per Business Event, 551 SE75TTDTGD-SAPscript: display standard
S_PH9_46000437-Resource List per Business symbols, 675
Event, 551 SE76-SAPscript: form translation, 675
S_PH9_46000438-Business Event Schedule, 548 SE77-SAPscript styles translation, 675
S_PH9_46000439-Resources Not Yet Assigned SE80-Object navigator, 676
per Resource Type, 508 SE84-Repository information system, 675
S_PH9_46000440-Resource Reservation SE85-ABAP/4 repository information system,
Statistics, 508 675
S_PH9_46000441-Graphical Resource Reser- SE91-Message maintenance, 675
vation, 506 SE93-Maintain transaction codes, 675
Index 721
SEARCH_SAP_MENU-Find in SAP menu, Transport, 260

673 connection, 260
SEARCH_USER_MENU-Find in user menu, manual, 262
673
SECATT-Extended computer aided test tool,
671 User, 115
SHDB-Batch input transaction recorder, 671 creation, 115
SLG1-Application log: display logs, 706 definition, 115
SM01-Lock transactions, 677 reports, 119
SM04-User list, 676 User details, 118
SM12-Display and delete locks, 677 basic data, 118
SM30-Call view maintenance, 672 tasks, 119
SM31-Call view maintenance like SM30, 672 User structures, 116
SM34-Viewcluster maintenance call, 672 organizational assignment, 116
SM35-Batch input monitoring, 671 task assignment, 117
SM35P-Batch input: log monitoring, 671 User-specific settings, 476
SM36-Schedule background job, 671 business event menu, 480
SM37-Job overview, 671 filter, 478
SM38-Queue maintenance transaction, 672 for personnel development, 356
SMARTFORMS-SAP smart forms, 707 master data, 484
SMOD-SAP enhancement management, 674 planning menu, 481
SMX-Display own jobs, 672 reporting, 477
SO00-SAPoffice: short message, 671 resource menu, 482
SO10-SAPscript: standard texts, 675 sort order, 479
SP01-Output controller, 671 storage, 358
SP02-Display spool requests, 671 tool menu, 483
SP11-TemSe directory, 707 view, 485
SPRO-Customizing–edit project, 672 Utilities, 667
SQ00-SAP query: start queries, 672
SQ01-SAP query: maintain queries, 673
Vacancy, 187
SQ02-SAP query: maintain infoset, 673
activation of vacancy infotype, 188
SQ03-SAP query: maintain user groups, 673
distinction between unoccupied and vacant
SQVI-Quick viewer, 671
positions, 187
ST22-ABAP dump analysis, 676
use of vacancy flag, 188
SU01-User maintenance, 676
vacant and obsolete positions, 188
SU21-Maintain the Authorization Objects,
676
SU22-Auth. object usage in transactions, 676 Work center, 129
SU24-Auth. object check under transactions, creation, 129
228 definition, 129
SU3-Maintain users own data, 671 reports, 130
SU53-Display authorization check, 672 Work schedule, 196
SUIM-User information system, 676 groups, 197
SWDD-Workflow builder, 674 rule values, 198
World Government
For a World Free from War, Terrorism and Poverty
Facts Will all countries agree?
l The world spends trillions of dollars l Yes! When people of the countries want
every year on military and war equip- it.
ment, while its people go hungry. l We have to awaken the people of the
l Today the world is incapable of resol- whole world.
ving any dispute through military
actions. How will it work?
l Terrorism thrives because of covert l The world parliament will be formed
support of country governments. through direct election of members of
l Enormous expenditure on militaries all parliament all over the world. These
over the world is not only a waste, but members of parliament will form the
also extremely dangerous as it increases world government.
the destructive power of country l The world government will have limited
governments. but sufficient power to provide security
to all countries, manage global environ-
We want ment and combat terrorism all over the
world.
l A world free from war, terrorism and l The world government will secure the
poverty. borders of all countries to ensure that
there is no unauthorized entry or exit.
l The country governments will continue
How can it be done?
to manage their affairs.
l Disputes between countries will be
l Establish a world parliament, a world
resolved with the help of the world
government and a world court.
parliament and the world court.
l Disband militaries of all countries
l No country will disband its military first.
simultaneously.
All countries will disband their militaries
l Use the savings to alleviate poverty.
simultaneously in a phased manner,
723
724 World Government
under the supervision of the world l Level 3: Convince five persons that each
government, which will verify that the one of them would enroll five more
militaries are actually disbanded. persons.
l Countries will retain their police to l Level 4: Become an active volunteer.
maintain law and order.
l Countries may have special forces to Act now
deal with terrorism and to provide relief
in the event of natural disasters. l Act now. Don’t give up because of
enormity of the task.
Is it possible?
l Many people say that this is an impos- You have nothing to lose
sible task because other people will not l There is no membership fee.
agree. l You are not required to work unless you
l This task is possible if we talk only about want to. But if you want, there is a lot
ourselves, and not about others. This of work to do.
task is big but not impossible. l You are not required to follow any
l We have only one world, we can’t give person or any belief.
up on it.
l We can succeed only if we try.
Contact
What should I do?
World Integration and Improvement
l Level 1: Register with WIII and become Initiative (WIII)
a world citizen. Even children can join. L/A-4/303, Ajmera Housing Complex,
l Level 2: Spread the message to your Pune 411018 India.
family, friends and neighbours. Convince E-mail: agrawal.prem@gmail.com
five persons to join. Phone: 91(20)27462635
World Language
Need for a World Language that accepting any language, other than their
own, as world language will put them at a
Perhaps the most important gift of nature disadvantage. Also, people are strongly
to mankind is the ability to communicate attached to their mother tongue, often
using a language. However, this gift is not considering it as revered as their mother,
unmitigated, because we have got too much and feel a sense of guilt in accepting another
of it. We do not have a single language, but language.
a large number of them, which sometimes
is as bad as not having any language. While there are some, who do not want to
discuss this issue fearing that they may have
Lack of a common world language can to accept another language, there are others
greatly handicap a person, as more and more who do the same hoping that their language
people travelling around the world discover may become world language by default. This
to their dismay. With the world becoming may well happen, but is it desirable even
smaller and smaller, as a result of advances for them?
in transportation and communication, the
need for a common world language is felt
Importance of a good world language
more and more acutely. One option to
overcome this hadicap is for a person to A language is a tool for communication, and
learn multiple languages, which is not only we must evaluate it as we would evaluate
wasteful, but can be done only to a limited any other tool. How effective is it in meeting
extent. Another way to overcome this its objective; and how much resources does
handicap is through translation and inter- it consume in doing so? People who hope
pretation, for which we pay a heavy price that their language may become world
in terms of cost, time, and timeliness, and language, should think again. Do we just
achieve at best partial communication. want a common language, or do we want a
Scientific and technical literature available really good world language—a language
in one language cannot be used by people which provides effective, unambiguous
who do not know that language. communication with minimum effort.
There is probably no one, who does not agree This article shows that existing languages
with the need for a world language. Only, score quite badly in a rational evaluation.
people do not want to discuss it, fearing Let us remember that many of us use almost
725
726 World Language
our entire non-sleeping time in reading, to learn both the pronunciation as well as
writing, and thinking—activities which the spelling. Many languages of the world
depend on the efficiency of language. If we have this problem, while many are free from
can design a language, which is more it.
efficient than our existing language, we will
The length of the words in a language
gain that much extra time, which can be
determines the effort in communication to
used for productive or recreational purposes.
a large extent. If the words are long, the
It has also been well accepted that languages
communication time and effort is more.
influence our thinking, making the role of
Natural languages being product of
language even more important.
evolution, have not paid much attention to
We must, therefore, consider ourselves lucky length of words. Consequently, the words
that we do not have a single language in tend to be long. The best proof of this defect
the world. This gives us a choice. It is in a language is the existence of short forms
possible for us to have a well designed world for long words. ‘Info’ for information, and
language. If we had only one language, we ‘ad’ for advertisement, amply demonstrate
would not have this choice, as we have no that words can be shorter.
choice today in numbering system, computer
All languages use prefixes and suffixes to
keyboard, etc. We must not squander this
add additional meaning to the meaning of
choice away, by letting an existing language
a word. By doing so, they avoid the need to
become the world language. It will be like
define and learn a word. This practice is
losing a fortune, just because we refused to
very good, but often there are exceptions,
decide. It is also important that we decide
which are not desirable. Also, usually this
to develop a world language as early as
concept is not utilized fully. We do not need
possible. The more time we lose, the more
separate words for boy and girl. We need
will be the backlog of translation, which
only one word with a prefix or a suffix for
must necessarily be done.
gender.
Should an existing natural language The meanings of words is another area of

be world language? concern. Many times the words have
contextual meanings. This increases the
Some of the existing natural languages, learning effort, as all the meanings of the
particularly English, aspire to become world words have to be learnt. Also, the words
language. Their claim is based primarily on often suffer from overprecision, and under-
their widespread use in dominant segments precision. There are many words which
of society all over the world, e.g. science, mean exactly, or nearly, the same. On the
law, business, industry, government, etc. other hand there are some words, whose
However, if we objectively examine their meaning is not precise enough.
effectiveness and efficiency, they do not
Grammars of natural languages are usually
perform too well. Let us take a look at
quite complex. Agreement of number and
‘English’.
gender between noun and verb is a case in
Let us start from the alphabet. English does point. Really speaking, there is no need to
not have a phonetic alphabet. The same letter alter the verb for number and gender; they
is associated with different sounds in should be attributes of noun alone. If that
different words. This puts tremendous load was done, the language will become simpler.
on people learning the language. They have By unnecessarily modifying the verb for
World Language 727
number and gender, we make the language How to develop a world language?
complex, and introduce the possibility of
making mistakes. Needless complexity of Designing a language is not a very difficult
grammar is best understood by learners of job, but designing a good language is.
a foreign language, who constantly compare Designing a language involves making a
the grammar of the new language with that large number of decisions. How much effort
of their mother tongues. is put in arriving at these decisions will
determine the quality of language. Also, the
Ambiguity or lack of clarity in the meaning process should involve wide ranging
of a sentence also exists. cosultations with experts in various fields.
It might be argued that the defects of English After an initial decision is made based on
may be removed to prepare it for the role expert opinion, it should be widely
of world language. However, the changes publicized, and feedback and comments of
may be so many, that we may not recognise all the people should be considered, before
it as English at all. Also, however much we finalizing the decision. Even then, if there
improve it, it can never be as good as a is a good reason to alter a decision previously
language designed from scratch. We are made, it should be done. In no case should
going to build the world language only once, we compromise on the quality of the world
and it must be the best. Evaluation of other language. Some ideas are discussed here to
natural languages is likely to bring us to illustrate the kind of improvements possible.
the same conclusion. Obviously, they are at best the tip of the
iceberg.
Also, we must remember that adopting an
existing language as world language will Objectives of the world language
be more repugnant to the rest of the world,
than adopting a newly designed language. Some of the objectives of the world language
would be as under. These need to be debated
and enlarged. They also need to be
Should Esperanto be world language?
interpreted for each sub-activity.
If natural languages do not qualify to be 1. Achieve effective and unambiguous
the world language, what about Esperanto? communication
After all it was created precisely for this 1.1 Between humans
purpose. There is no doubt that Esperanto 1.2 Between humans and machines
is better suited to be the world language, 2. Minimize effort in communication
than any other natural language. However, 2.1 Minimize effort in speaking and
the question remains: is it possible to design hearing
a language better than Esperanto? The 2.2 Minimize effort in writing and
answer would be in affirmative, primarily reading
because even Esperanto is based on some 3. Minimize effort in learning the language
natural languages, and has not exercised 3.1 Minimize the length and number
freedom of choice in design to the fullest. of words
However, Esperanto has definitely proved 3.2 Maximize the use of rules to form
a major point—that it is possible to design words and sentences. Have no
a language. exceptions.
728 World Language
Designing alphabet and script to conserve space. Characters should be as

uniform in size as possible. Each character
One of the most fundamental components should be written in only one way. There
of a language is its alphabet. The alphabet should be no concept of upper and lower
is in two forms—written and spoken. While case, wherein the same character is written
designing the alphabet, the spoken alphabet in two ways.
should be designed first. The sounds
produced by human beings are not discrete. The effort in writing can be greatly reduced,
From a continous spectrum, we have to select if natural movements of body are used in
a set of sounds. If we select too few sounds, the design of characters. Research should
the alphabet will be small and words will be conducted to determine which move-
be longer. On the other hand, too many ments are easy for human hands, and which
sounds may cause problems in distinguishing are not. For example, it is common experi-
between them. Fortunately, this science, ence that people find it easier to write ‘u’
called phonetics, is well developed, and can than to write ‘n’. So much so, that often ‘n’
be used for selecting a set of sounds. The looks like ‘u’. This is not accidental, because
sounds should be selected in such a way its opposit never happens. This is an interes-
that we get the maximum distinction ting example, because the two characters
between sounds, and the effort required in are mirror images of one another. It can
production of sound is minimum. In perhaps be said that human hand can turn
addition, pleasant-ness of sound in hearing in quickly, but cannot turn out as quickly.
may also be considered. The ability of Perhaps it has a natural tendency to move
machines to produce these sounds, and towards the chest as observed in case of an
distinguish between them on hearing may electric shock. Similarly, research should be
also be considered. conducted to determine if the human eye
has any preferences in pattern recognition.
In order to minimize learning effort, each We should also consider, whether the
sound should be assigned a character. writing will be from left to right, right to
Frequently occurring sound combinations left, top to bottom, or bottom to top. The
may also be assigned an additional character, suitability of the script for machine
as in shorthand. The language should be production and recognition should also be
phonetic. We already have natural languages considered.
which are phonetic, and they demonstrate the
advantages offered by a phonetic language.
Designing words
The script for the world language should
be designed keeping in mind the ability of Words, even in natural languages, consist
human hand for writing, and human eye of parts which have independent meaning.
for reading. In writing, the script should For example, both ‘un’ and ‘well’ in unwell
provide continuity. There should be no have independent meanings, which
dotting the ‘i’, or cutting the ‘t’. This will determine the meaning of unwell. These
minimize the movement of hand, and save parts are called morphemes by linguists; we
effort. Each character should be independent, may call them roots. All languages use the
and combined sequentially. In some scripts, concepts of roots, prefixes, suffixes, etc. But
a part of the character is outside the main they do not use it to the fullest. For example,
writing area, e.g. a part of ‘g’ is below the the word ‘bad’ is not needed; ‘ungood’ could
main line of writing. This should be avoided be used in its place.
World Language 729
We should design word roots in such a way can have a prefix each for first half, second
that their meanings are, as far as possible, half, first quarter, second quarter etc. of age,
independent of each other. For the same and so on. Thus, the communicator can
meaning there should not be more than one choose the precision with which he wants
word root. If word roots are well defined, to convey the age.
the learning effort will greatly reduce. Let
Word roots will be formed by assigning a
me illustrate.
sequence of characters to each concept. This
We need word roots to indicate the number should be done, using principles of classi-
and the gender. We may decide that there fication and codification. In many branches
will be three genders—masculine, feminine, of science, e.g. zoology and botany, such
and unknown or unspecified. Similarly, we classification already exists. These should
may decide that there will be three be used, so that there is no need to have a
numbers—singular, plural, and unknown or separate scientific name. Also, the frequency
unspecified. We may combine both these of their use should be considered. Highly
attributes, and assign a vowel to each of used roots should be identified by few
the nine combinations. We then use these characters, so that the words are short.
vowels to suffix nouns and pronouns. Let
Rules should be defined to combine roots
us see the power of this simple design. We
into words. Where classification and
now need only one word for father, mother,
codification gives a large word, but the
and parent. Similarly, only one word will
frequency of use requires a small word, a
be needed for brother, sister, and sibling.
synonym may be defined. Thus, synonyms
Not only that the number of words will be
will exist only for the purpose of making
reduced, some new words will become
the language more efficient.
available, e.g. a word for either son or
daughter. Speakers of Hindi, will find new
words like parent and sibling, which they Designing grammar
never had before. Also, we do not often
know the sex of a bird, and use masculine, Grammar defines how to combine words
feminine, or neuter gender, depending on into sentences. These rules should be as
convention. In the new scheme, we can use simple as possible, and there should be no
the unspecified gender most of the time, exceptions. The sequence of words in a
and can specify it if we know the gender. sentence should not affect its meaning. Also,
Also, legal documents often use words like preferably the sequence of words should not
person(s). This is because there is no concept change, as it happens in English, where
of unknown, or unspecified, number. We changing a sentence from affirmative to
can, thus, see the power of a simple well- inquisitive requires a change in the sequence
defined word root. of words.
The above example is not an isolated one. In many existing languages, attributes which
By defining just three morphemes, for should affect only words, are defined at the
parent, child, and spouse, hundreds of level of sentence. Number and gender are
existing and non-existing words for family attributes of noun, and they have nothing
relations can be eliminated. A large number to do with verb. Similarly, tense is an
of words describing young members of a attribute of verb, and should not affect the
species can be eliminated by using a single noun. We think that a sentence is affirmative,
prefix with the word for species. Also, we or inquisitive (asks a question). Let us
730 World Language
consider a simple sentence, “Are you to existing languages. The development of

going?”. This may be interpreted as, “Are such a language will be an iterative process.
you going? (or not going)”, or as “Are you? It will go through several cycles of improve-
(or someone else) going”. Here we can see ment, before it becomes reasonably good. If
that the question is an attribute of word, we can assign even 1% of resources being
and not of sentence. Research will be needed spent in linguistic research, we can easily
to determine whether enquiry is always at build such a language. Then it can be
word level, or sometimes at word level, and improved, and compared with existing
sometimes at sentence level. languages. Only after its superiority is clearly
demonstrated, do we have to think of
What do we do next? adopting it. This project is definitely worthy
There is no doubt that it is possible to of research, and I call upon the world
develop a language, which is far superior community to take it up.
Good Governance
Many countries of the world face a number Taxation

of problems. Are there any solutions? I
believe that there are. Here are some ideas l There should be a single authority in
that could be helpful in solving some of our each country which can levy taxes. No
problems. There could be a structured public one else should be allowed to collect
debate on these, and those which meet public tax from any one. However, govern-
approval could be implemented. ments should be allowed to sell specific
goods and services, which the citizens
should be free to buy, or not to buy.
Minimize government functions
l The taxes collected by the taxation
l Often governments try to do too many authority should be distributed among
things. country, state and local governments as
l It is not government’s job to provide per a pre-defined agreed formula.
goods and services. It should facilitate l The distribution of revenue from taxes
their production and distribution and should consider both the needs of
ensure competitiveness, efficiency and governments and their contribution to
non-exploitation of customers. revenue.
l Government should not be looked upon l The needs should be determined by
to provide direct employment. It should estimating the cost of functions the
ensure a vibrant economy in which governments are expected to provide.
people are gainfully engaged. l It will be citizens’ right to get the services
for which money is provided by the tax
Minimize government expenditure authority.
l The tax structure should be simplified.
l Whatever functions the government There should be only two forms of taxes.
must perform, must be performed in the Excise for all goods and services
most efficient way, thereby reducing the produced in the country, and Custom
cost of governance to a minimum. for all goods and services brought in a
l Methods of governance should be country from outside.
regularly reviewed, debated in public, l Sales tax, octroi, income tax, etc. should
and benchmarked with other countries be abolished.
and states to ensure that they are most l Collection of excise and custom should
effective and efficient. be made effective by allocating more
731
732 Good Governance
resources which would become available Government as service provider

because of abolition of other taxes. In
addition, the penalty for tax evasion l Where the government provides service,
should be very heavy, and corruption e.g. water, health care, education, roads,
should be severely dealt with. etc. it should be paid by the government
l It may be argued that income tax is treasury to the concerned government
applicable to only affluent sections of department for quantity and quality of
population. But, the same effect can be service provided. This mechanism
achieved by levying more excise on items should replace the current mechanism
which are consumed by these sections. of budgetary allocation.
l Government departments should be run
as business. Their units should earn
Norm-based governance revenue, pay bills, and make profit or
loss. The employees of each individual
l People have started thinking that what unit should be rewarded based on the
the government does for them is charity.
financial performance of the unit.
As a result, while some people get too
l Citizens should be treated as customers
much, others don’t get even the basic
and given bills for the service provided,
minimum.
showing the amount payable by them
l This tendency is clearly visible. Consti-
and the subsidies.
tuencies of VIPs, e.g. prime minister,
l Where possible, the quantity and quality
railway minister, etc. get generous
of service should be certified by the
allocation, which suddenly dries up if
individual customers. Where it is not
the concerned minister no longer holds
possible, it should be certified by
office.
customer bodies.
l This tendency is often justified by saying
l If private parties offer to provide service
that at least somewhere something is
at a cheaper rate, the job should be given
getting done. This argument shows how
to them.
little we have come to expect from our
governments.
Accountability
l In order to ensure that justice is done
to all, we must define the functions of l Government functionaries seem to have
government, the levels in each function, all power but no accountability.
and the entitlement criteria. l For example, the encroachment depart-
l For example we may say that all villages ment of a municipal corporation has
with population between 100 and 1000 powers to demolish an illegal building.
will be linked with brick road, while But such powers are often exercised
those with a population of more than selectively to demolish some and leave
1000, will be linked with tar road. others. The municipal corporation is
l Such norms will ensure fairness to all. not accountable to people as to why rules
l Along with norms, the mechanism to are being applied selectively.
redress grievances arising from not l Lack of accountability breeds corruption.
following the norms should be specified. l Whenever someone is given power, he
In case of deliberate victimization, those should also be made accountable,
responsible should be punished. preferably to the public.
Good Governance 733
l For example, if an illegal construction keeps their area clean. There can be
is found in the jurisdiction of an anti- many ways in which citizens can help.
encroachment department, its officers
should be punished. Innovation
Citizens role in governance l Innovation can greatly help in good

governance. Chronic problems faced by
l Governance can be much better and government can be solved by innovative
easier if citizens are involved in it. methods.
l Schemes to involve citizens in gover- l For example, a municipal corporation
nance should clearly specify how the should never award a contract merely
citizens are going to contribute. for building roads. It should always be
l Citizens can contribute by providing a contract to build and maintain roads.
information, monitoring situations and Then the contractor will do a good job
taking action. in building the road, as he will have to
l The schemes involving citizens’ role spend less on its maintenance. This will
should be planned keeping their benefit everyone.
convenience in mind and should utilize
their contribution in a most effective Political system
way.
l For example, ‘Each one teach one’ is not l In many countries, political system is
a viable and effective method; but asking corrupt because politics is not an
a citizen to teach for two hours in a week economically viable profession.
is both convenient to the citizen and also l Every profession, except politics, offers
effective in spreading education. a regular income.
l Citizens should be able to see the effect l It is futile to argue that MLAs and MPs
of their contribution. are paid a salary. These are the highest
l One way of involving citizens would levels to which people reach in politics.
be to have a well publicised telephone The corruptionalisation is completed
number, which citizens can use to report much before such levels are reached.
situations such as street lights being kept l We cannot expect to have politicians for
on in daytime, engine of a parked bus free. If we do, we pay through our nose.
running, leakage in a water pipe, etc. l Unless politics can attract young men
The person manning such a telephone and women and provide them a descent
should contact the concerned officer, secure career, it is futile to expect polit-
who in turn should remedy the situation. icians to be honest.
Only when citizens see their involve- l Many countries have administrative or
ment resulting in action, they would civil services. They should also create a
participate more and more. political service in which young men
l Another way to involve citizens would and women should be recruited in an
be to assign them a small neighbour- open competition. This service should
hood, which they will look after to conduct competitive examinations on
ensure its cleanliness and orderliness. the lines of the administrative or civil
If someone digs up a road in their area, services.
they will ensure that it is mended. They l Those qualifying in the competitive
will also ensure that conservancy staff examination should be trained and given
734 Good Governance
pay and perks at par with the adminis- l Education should not be fashionable; it
trative or civil services. should be need based and add value. It
l Those selected for political service, should also be easy to obtain, preferably
should be barred from taking up any without sacrificing the earning capacity
other job, or doing any business. of students.
l They should not be given any regular
work. They should do political or social Judiciary
work of their choice.
l Their work should be monitored by l The effectiveness of judiciary determines
Judiciary to ensure that they do adequate how civilized a society is.
amount of work. If the quantum of their l The objective of judiciary is not merely
work is found inadequate, they must to hear cases and pronounce judgement,
be withdrawn from political service and but also to create confidence in people
assigned administrative work. If they are that if they are wronged, judiciary will
found to be corrupt, their services should help remedy the problem. It should also
be terminated. create the impression that no one can
l They will contest election like any other do wrong and get away with it.
person, and if they get elected, they will l From the above point of view, judiciary
be entitled to only one salary, either of in many countries has failed miserably.
the service or of the elected office. l Failure of judiciary is the primary reason
l Only if we can attract young students, of corruption in society.
and allow them to make an honest l Judiciary must work out and implement
career in politics, can we hope to end a strategy to achieve the above objec-
corruption some day. tives. Judicial management should be a
part of judiciary.
Education l Judiciary must get its workload studied
to see what part of it can be eliminated
l The objective of the education system by improving the rules governing those
is not clearly defined. situations. For example, Judiciary
l People claim that education system has handles a large number of cases related
failed without even defining what to motor vehicle accident compensation.
education is expected to achieve. If rules are framed to determine this
l The objective of primary and secondary compensation based on relevant factors
education should be to impart skills in like age, earning capacity, number of
languages and mathematics, and to dependants, etc. insurance companies
create general awareness and scientific will be able to settle most of the cases,
temperament. and the number of such cases going to
l The objective of higher level education court will drastically reduce.
should be to impart skills and l Judiciary should work on cases in a time
knowledge which a person will need in bound manner. It should fix time norms
his career. for different types of cases and endeavour
l The availability of different courses to finish a case in the allotted time.
should be based on the manpower needs l Judiciary can work in a time bound
of a country. Consequently, in a country manner only if it has a reasonable
like India a large number of students number of cases in hearing. Therefore,
should be educated in agriculture, horti- new cases should go in a queue from
culture, fishery, cattle rearing, etc. which they should be taken for hearing.
Good Governance 735
The cases may not be taken for hearing Develop soft IT infrastructure
on a first-come first-served basis, but
based on some guidelines which take l We are aware of the importance of IT
into account the importance and urgency infrastructure in the development of IT.
of a case. However, we usually think only of
l Judiciary must augment its capacity to hardware infrastructure. It is high time
meet the workload. The major resource we start thinking of soft IT infrastruc-
that the judiciary requires is manpower. ture as well, and understand its impor-
It is ironic that even in countries with tance in the development of IT. Let me
excess manpower, this function is poorly explain.
performed due to lack of resources. l Any computerization project requires
l Judiciary may take help of retired creation of master data, e.g. citizens,
citizens to augment its capacity. business entities, real estate properties,
l Judiciary should review its policies to etc. At present each system creates its
ensure that they are concomitant with own master data. In India, a citizen has
speedy and effective justice. one id for income tax department,
another for his driving licence, and yet
another for his bank. He also has an id
E-Governance
in each of the hospitals he visits, and so
l Information Technology (IT) is having on. Obviously, these systems cannot talk
a major impact on governance. Many to each other. If each person in the world
country and state governments are were to be given a unique person id,
changing their business processes to take that id would get used by all these
advantage of the benefits that IT offers. systems, instead of trying to create
However, if we have to get the most their own. This not only would save
efficient e-governance at minimum cost, development effort but also would
we need to do two things: commonize enable diverse systems to talk to each
business processes and develop soft IT other.
infrastructure. l It is not only the persons we need to
identify uniquely but also every legal
Commonize business processes entity such as businesses, each piece of
land and real estate, etc. The list is
l At present, the same business process endless and so are the benefits of
gets computerized by different agencies creating such unique identities.
in different ways. This creates islands l Wherever possible, we should look for
of information which cannot talk to each natural attributes in giving id to an
other. entity. For example, we can give a
l A case in point is the computerization number to land and real estate based
of RTO (Regional Transport Office) on its longitude, latitude and altitude.
operations in India. Initially, different Similarly, we can codify the primary
RTOs created their systems independ- relation between two persons as Father
ently, and now it is proposed to scrap (F), Mother (M), Brother (B), Sister (C),
all those systems and replace them with Husband (H), Wife (W), Son (S) and
a common central system. Needless to Daughter (D). All other relations can be
say the expenditure in independent derived by combining these primary
systems could have been avoided. relations.
736 Good Governance
l It is important that standards for master and what not to do, if we are not to
data creation and codification are waste our precious time and resources.
discussed and agreed in international
bodies such as International Standards Pledge your time (samay daan)
Organization. If this is not done, the
world will have to incur additional cost l We citizens only criticize. We do nothing
later either in changing the systems, or concrete.
in building interfaces. l Things are not going to change if we
l The benefits of unique identification are expect others to change them. They will
enormous. If each person is given a change if we act to change them.
unique numeric id, we can store a l Those who want to change the world
telephone number and an e-mail id for better should pledge 1% of their time
against him. For calling a person, you for society. This works out to less than
would make the call on his person id 15 minutes a day and less than two
with a prefix, say 1. The prefix will hours a week.
indicate to the telephone system that the l They can spend this time to pursue the
following number is a person id which cause of their choice. They can join an
has to be converted into telephone NGO, or form local groups to discuss
number. If the person’s telephone and debate what can be done.
number changes, only the link needs to l Even if they just meet once a week to
be changed. The callers will still call discuss what can be done, ideas will
the same number. Similarly, a person emerge and things will begin to happen.
can be contacted on the same e-mail l Their own efforts will shape their actions
id, even if he changes his service and organizations.
provider. l The key thing is commitment and doing;
l E-governance should not be creating not idle criticism.
islands of computer systems. We must l Register your time pledge (samay daan)
have a clear vision, strategy and master with World Integration and Improve-
plan. We must understand what to do ment Initiative (agrawal.prem@gmail.com)
City without Traffic Lights
Are you fed up with traffic lights? Traffic lights at every junction. Stop, start. Stop, start.
Stop, start. Do you sometimes wish that the roads of your city were like expressway.
Where your car would compete with the wind and you would reach your destination in
minutes.
Fortunately, this is possible. In order to use this plan, the main roads of the city need to
be like a grid, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1
All roads will be one-way. When one road meets another at an intersection, there are two
possibilities; you may either continue on your road, or you may turn on the other road
in the direction of the traffic on that road. This is shown in Figure 2.
If you turn on the other road, there is no problem. But if you continue on your road, you
will run into the traffic going straight on the other road. This is solved by a flyover or
grade separator. Traffic on one road will go above the flyover, and the traffic on the other
737
738 City without Traffic Lights
Figure 2
road will go under the flyover. This will ensure smooth flow of traffic without traffic
light. This will be done on all intersections. Figure 1 shows this arrangement.
Sounds like a good idea. But how will the pedestrians cross the road? If the traffic moves
at a fast speed, it will become impossible for the pedestrians to cross the road. The
solution to this is in Figure 3.
Figure 3
City without Traffic Lights 739
There will be a ring road for pedestrians and cyclists in each sector (the area bounded by
main roads on all four sides). This pedestrian ring road will be connected to the pedestrian
ring roads of adjoining sectors through subways. Thus, no pedestrian or cyclist will ever
come on the main roads, allowing the vehicles to move freely on the main roads. Pedestrian
roads will not be one-way. Pedestrians and cyclists will move on the pedestrian roads in
both directions.
But how will a person take public transport, e.g. bus or taxi? This is explained in Figure 4.
Figure 4
At each intersection, there are two triangular areas. Buses and taxis will go inside these
triangular areas. There they will drop and pickup the passengers and come out of the
triangle on the road they wish to take. These triangular areas will be connected to the
pedestrian roads through subways.
Figure 5 shows the vehicle ring roads inside the sectors. This ring road will be connected
to all the four main roads as well as to the internal roads of the sector. These roads will
be two-way.
Figure 5
740 City without Traffic Lights
Figure 6 shows how the vehicles will move from one sector to another sector. Draw a
horizontal and a vertical line from the source sector to the destination sector. You can do
this in two ways. You can take either of these two ways to travel to your destination. You
come out of the source sector taking the exit according to your travel path, move to the
destination sector and enter it.
Figure 6
The main roads will be fenced on both sides so that no one can enter or exit them except
through designated entry and exit roads. No pedestrian or cyclist will enter these roads.
The vehicles will enter these roads, move to their destination and exit. Vehicles will
neither stop on the main roads, nor be parked on it. Public transport will not stop on the
main roads. There will be no shops or vendors on the main roads. Main roads will be like
expressways. Enter, Move, Exit. No stoppage.
For further information, contact
P K Agrawal
L/A-4/303, Ajmera Housing Complex,
Pimpri, Pune 411018
E-mail: agrawal.prem@gmail.com
Phone: +91(20)27462635
Mobile: +919822847682

SAP HR OM, PD and Training

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAP HR OM, PD and Training

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAP HR OM, PD and Training

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAP HR

OM, PD and Training

Warning and Disclaimer

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Chapter Chapter Description Page FC US PO SM MR UL

Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not

Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not

Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not

Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not

Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not

Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not

Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not

Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not

Sequence SAP Menu (ECC 6.0) Where Why not

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide

Reasons for ‘why not covered’

If you are a consultant or user of Organizational Management, Personnel Development,

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

Other holders of position

1.2 CREATING THE ROOT ORGANIZATIONAL UNIT

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

1.3 CREATING OTHER ORGANIZATIONAL UNITS

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

1.4 CREATING POSITIONS

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

1.5 ASSIGNING PERSONS TO POSITIONS

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

1.6 ASSIGNING OTHER HOLDERS TO POSITIONS

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

1.7 ORGANIZATIONAL PLAN IN SAP

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

1.8 OBJECTS, RELATIONSHIPS, AND INFOTYPES

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

Organizational Management is based on the concept of objects and relationships.

1.9 VALIDITY PERIOD

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

An enterprise’s organizational plan is constantly undergoing change. For this reason,

1.10 PARTIAL ASSIGNMENT

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

2.1 ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING

Functional User Business Senior My Understanding

Area Quadrant Purpose

2.1.1 Search Area

Deleting all search variants

2.1.2 Selection Area

Columns in selection area

Hiding the search area

Transferring the object to overview area

2.1.3 Preview Period Area

Setting the key date and the preview period

Deleting the key date and the preview period